Acura TL 2014 Sedan Owner's Manual PDF
en
Summary of Content for Acura TL 2014 Sedan Owner's Manual PDF
2014 TL Owners Manual
(Unlinked)
This document may not contain hyperlinks and may be formatted for printing instead of web use. This is due to changes
in content and specifications of the vehicle that happen throughout the model year. This manual will be replaced with a
hyperlinked version at the end of the model year.
2013 American Honda Motor Co., Inc. - All Rights Reserved P/N 00X31-TK4-6500
This owners manual should be considered a permanent part of the vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
This Owners Manual covers all models of the Acura TL. You may find descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your particular model.
Images throughout this owners manual (including the front cover) represent features and equipment that are available on some, but not all, models. Your particular model may not have some of these features.
The information and specifications included in this publication were in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications or design at any time without notice and without incurring any obligation whatsoever.
Please contact a dealer to order any manuals that you may require.
Owners Identif ication
For Canadian Owners:
OWNER
ADDRESS
V. I. N.
DELIVERY DATE
DEALER NAME DEALER NO.
ADDRESS
OWNERS SIGNATURE
DEALERS SIGNATURE
STREET
CITY STATE/PROVINCE/TERRITORY ZIP CODE/ POSTAL CODE
(Date sold to original retail purchaser)
STREET
CITY STATE/PROVINCE/TERRITORY ZIP CODE/ POSTAL CODE
13/04/02 19:10:57 31TK4640_001
Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights and responsibilities.
As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded by a symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment.
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owners manual in your vehicle so you can refer to it at any time.
Maintaining your vehicle according to the Maintenance Minder shown in the instrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your dealers staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answer any questions and concerns.
Congratulations! Your selection of a 2014 Acura TL was a wise investment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.
Introduction
i
TM
13/08/08 16:42:02 31TK4650_002
Event Data Recorders This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicles systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were operating; Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened; How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.
Introduction
ii
12/07/20 10:29:42 31TK4640_003
California Proposition 65 Warning
This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Service Diagnostic Recorders This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential.
California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this vehicle may contain perchlorate materials special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/
WARNING:
Introduction
iii
12/07/20 10:29:46 31TK4640_004
Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility.
Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You must use your own good judgement.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms, including:
on the vehicle. preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of
three signal words: , , or . These signal words mean:
such as Important Safety Reminders or Important Safety Precautions.
such as Driver and Passenger Safety. how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information please read it carefully.
To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have provided operating procedures and other information on labels and in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that could hurt you or others.
Safety Labels Safety Messages
Safety Headings
Safety Section Instructions
A Few Words About Safety
DANGER WARNING CAUTION
iv
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you dont follow instructions.
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you dont follow instructions.
You CAN be HURT if you dont follow instructions.
12/07/20 10:29:55 31TK4640_005
(fluid capacities and tire pressures)
(main controls)
(seat belts, SRS, and child protection)
(indicators, gauges, multi-information display, dashboard, and steering column)
( )
(fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loading)
(engine and transmission operation)
(minder, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage)
(flat tire, jump starting, overheating, and fuses)
(vehicle specifications, tires, and emissions controls)
(warranty and contact information)
(how to order)
climate control, audio, steering wheel, security, cruise control, HomeLink , and other convenience items
Contents
................................................................................................................................................Index . I
..................................................Service Information Summary . last page
...............................................................................................Your Vehicle at a Glance . 3
............................................................Driver and Passenger Safety . 5
.......Instruments and Controls . 61
..............Features . 225
.......................................................................Before Driving . 467
.........................................................................................Driving . 485
.................................................Maintenance . 529
........................................Taking Care of the Unexpected . 581
..............................................Technical Information . 611
.......................Warranty and Client Relations (U.S. and Canada only) . 629
..................................................................................Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) . 633
IN D
E X
1
12/07/20 10:30:04 31TK4640_006
A convenient reference to the sections in this manual.
A quick reference to the main controls in your vehicle.
ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information.
Important information about the proper use and care of your vehicles seat belts, an overview of the supplemental restraint system, and valuable information on how to protect children with child restraints.
A summary of the warranties covering your new vehicle, and how to contact us for any reason. Refer to your warranty manual for detailed information.
How to order manuals and other technical literature.
A summary of the information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.
Explains the purpose of each instrument panel indicator and gauge, the multi-information display, and how to use the controls on the dashboard and steering column.
This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and details how to handle them.
The Maintenance Minder shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer for maintenance service. There is also a list of things to check and instructions on how to check them.
The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park.
What gasoline to use, how to break- in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo.
How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features.
Contents
Your Vehicle at a Glance
Driver and Passenger Safety
Instruments and Controls
Technical Information
Warranty and Client Relations (U.S. and Canada only)
Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)
Index
Service Information Summary
Features
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Maintenance
Driving
Before Driving
Overview of Contents
2
TM
12/07/20 10:30:19 31TK4640_007
: If equipped
Your Vehicle at a Glance Y
our V
ehicle ata
G lance
3
MIRROR CONTROLS
DRIVING POSITION MEMORY SYSTEM BUTTONS
POWER DOOR LOCK MASTER SWITCH
POWER WINDOW SWITCHES
TRUNK RELEASE BUTTON
INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS
MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY
(P. 63)
(P. 9, 26)
A/T model with navigation system is shown.
PASSENGERS FRONT AIRBAG
CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
CLOCK AUDIO
COMPASS
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK
GAUGES (P. 76) (P. 78)
(P. 170)
(P. 206)
(P. 154)
(P. 389) (P. 215)
(P. 491)
(P. 397) (P. 391) (P. 235)
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM (BSI) ALERT INDICATOR
(P. 145)
(P. 522)
HOMELINK BUTTONS (P. 404)
MOONROOF SWITCH (P. 210)
BSI ALERT INDICATOR
HAZARD WARNING BUTTON
(P. 522)
(P. 470)
(P. 494)
(P. 226)
(P. 168)
FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE BUTTON
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION MANUAL TRANSMISSION
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET (P. 215)
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
USB ADAPTER CABLE (P. 266, 275, 356, 367)
DRIVERS FRONT AIRBAG(P. 9, 26)
(P. 472)
(P. 151)
13/08/08 16:42:12 31TK4650_008
To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
Refer to the navigation system owners manual. If equipped
1 : 2 : 3 : 4 : Switch location varies on models.
Your Vehicle at a Glance
4
WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS
CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONS
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/ HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM OFF SWITCH
INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS
INTERFACE DIAL
KEYLESS ACCESS REMOTE SLOT
ENGINE START/ STOP BUTTON
IGNITION SWITCH
(P. 139, 143)
(P. 143)
MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY BUTTONS
(P. 401)
(P. 197)
(P. 184)
(P. 499)
(P. 525) PHONE BUTTON (P. 424)
(P. 138)
BLUETOOTH HANDSFREELINK SYSTEM VOICE CONTROL BUTTONS
(P. 34)
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR
(P. 511)
(P. 407)
(P. 79)
SELECTOR KNOB (P. 236) (P. 285)
(P. 425)
(P. 137)
(P. 145/169)
SEAT HEATER SWITCHES SEAT HEATER/VENTILATION BUTTONS
(P. 202) (P. 204)
VOICE CONTROL BUTTONS for NAVIGATION SYSTEM / BLUETOOTH HANDSFREELINK SYSTEM
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM (BSI) OFF BUTTON HEADLIGHT WASHER BUTTON
STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENTS(P. 146)
HORN
HAZARD WARNING BUTTON (P. 145)
PADDLE SHIFTERS
REMOTE AUDIO CONTROL BUTTONS (P. 387)
A/T model is shown. : Models with keyless access
system
(P. 150)
HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS/ FOG LIGHTS
3
2
4
2
2
3
2
2
1
2
13/08/08 16:42:21 31TK4650_009
This section gives you important information about how to protect yourself and your passengers. It shows you how to use seat belts. It explains how your airbags work. And it tells you how to properly restrain infants and children in your vehicle.
.........Important Safety Precautions . 6 .......Your Vehicles Safety Features . 7
.......................................Seat Belts . 8 ...........................................Airbags . 9
.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11 .....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 11
...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 13 ............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 14
...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 15 5. Fasten and Position the
.............................Seat Belts . 16 6. Maintain a Proper Sitting
................................Position . 18 .....Advice for Pregnant Women . 18 ...Additional Safety Precautions . 19
Additional Information About .......................Your Seat Belts . 20
..Seat Belt System Components . 20 ......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 21
Automatic Seat Belt ...............................Tensioners . 22
...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 23 Additional Information About
...........................Your Airbags . 24 ......Airbag System Components . 24
How Your Front Airbags .........................................Work . 26
...How Your Side Airbags Work . 30 How Your Side Curtain Airbags
.........................................Work . 32 ..How the SRS Indicator Works . 32
How the Side Airbag Off ......................Indicator Works . 33
How the Passenger Airbag Off ......................Indicator Works . 34
.............................Airbag Service . 35 ...Additional Safety Precautions . 36
Protecting Children General ................................Guidelines . 37
All Children Must Be ...............................Restrained . 37
All Children Should Sit in a .................................Back Seat . 38
The Passengers Front Airbag .........Can Pose Serious Risks . 38
If You Must Drive with Several ...................................Children . 40
If a Child Requires Close ..................................Attention . 40
...Additional Safety Precautions . 40 Protecting Infants and Small
...................................Children . 42 .......................Protecting Infants . 42
.........Protecting Small Children . 43 .....................Selecting a Child Seat . 45 ....................Installing a Child Seat . 46
...............................With LATCH . 47 .........With a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 49
..............................With a Tether . 51 ...........Protecting Larger Children . 53
...............Checking Seat Belt Fit . 53 ..................Using a Booster Seat . 54
When Can a Larger Child Sit in .........................................Front . 55
...Additional Safety Precautions . 56 .............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 57
...................................Safety Labels . 58
Driver and Passenger Safety D
river and
P assenger
Safety
5
12/07/20 10:30:43 31TK4640_010
Youll find many safety recommendations throughout this section, and throughout this manual. The recommendations on this page are the ones we consider to be the most important.
A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and wear them properly (see page ).
Children age 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger children should use a booster seat and a lap/ shoulder belt until they can use the belt properly without a booster seat
(see pages ).
While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children, and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and warnings in this manual.
Alcohol and driving dont mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with every additional drink. So dont drink and drive, and dont let your friends drink and drive, either.
Engaging in mobile phone conversation or other activities that keep you from paying close attention
to the road, other vehicles and pedestrians could lead to a crash. Remember, situations can change quickly, and only you can decide when it is safe to divert attention away from driving.
Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous. To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance (see page ).
Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds. Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum speed posted.16
37 56
531
Important Safety Precautions
Always Wear Your Seat Belt
Restrain All Children
Be Aware of Airbag Hazards
Dont Drink and Drive
Pay Appropriate Attention to the Task of Driving Safely
Keep Your Vehicle in Safe Condition
Control Your Speed
6
12/07/20 10:30:53 31TK4640_011
Your vehicle is equipped with many features that work together to protect you and your passengers during a crash.
The following pages explain how you can take an active role in protecting yourself and your passengers.
However, you and your passengers cant take full advantage of these features unless you remain sitting in the correct position and
. In fact, some safety features can contribute to injuries if they are not used properly.
Some features do not require any action on your part. These include a strong steel framework that forms a safety cage around the passenger compartment, front and rear crush zones, a collapsible steering column, and tensioners that tighten the front seat belts in a crash.
Your Vehicles Safety Features
always wear your seat belts
D river
and P
assenger Safety
7
(11)
(10)
(1)
(12) (3)
(7)
(5)
(8) (9)(6) (9) (4)
(7)
(8)
(10)
(2) (2)
(1) Safety Cage (2) Crush Zones (3) Seats and Seat-Backs (4) Head Restraints (5) Collapsible Steering Column (6) Seat Belts (7) Front Airbags (8) Side Airbags (9) Side Curtain Airbags (10) Door Locks (11) Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners (12) Occupant Position Detection
System (OPDS) Sensors
12/07/20 10:30:59 31TK4640_012
Your vehicle is equipped with seat belts in all seating positions.
Your seat belt system also includes an indicator on the instrument panel and a beeper to remind you and your passengers to fasten your seat belts.
Seat belts are the single most effective safety device for adults and larger children. (Infants and smaller children must be properly restrained in child seats.)
Not wearing a seat belt properly increases the chance of serious injury or death in a crash, even though your vehicle has airbags.
In addition, most states and all Canadian provinces and territories require you to wear seat belts.
When properly worn, seat belts:
Keep you connected to the vehicle so you can take advantage of the vehicles built-in safety features.
Help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the vehicle and against other occupants.
Keep you from being thrown out of the vehicle.
Help keep you in a good position should the airbags ever deploy. A good position reduces the risk of injury from an inflating airbag and allows you to get the best advantage from the airbag.
Of course, seat belts cannot completely protect you in every crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your risk of serious injury.
Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly.
Help protect you in almost every type of crash, including:
frontal impacts side impacts rear impacts rollovers
Your Vehicles Safety Features
Seat Belts
Why Wear Seat Belts
What You Should Do:
8
Not wearing a seat belt properly increases the chance of serious injury or death in a crash, even though your vehicle has airbags.
Be sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts and wear them properly.
12/07/20 10:31:10 31TK4640_013
CONTINUED
Your vehicle has a supplemental restraint system (SRS) with front airbags to help protect the heads and chests of the driver and a front seat passenger during a moderate to severe frontal collision (see page
for more information on how your front airbags work).
Your vehicle also has side airbags to help protect the upper torso of the driver or a front seat passenger during a moderate to severe side impact (see page for more information on how your side airbags work).
In addition, your vehicle has side curtain airbags to help protect the heads of the driver, front passenger, and passengers in the outer rear seating positions during a moderate to severe side impact (see page
for more information on how your side curtain airbags work).
26
30
32
Your Vehicles Safety Features
Airbags
D river
and P
assenger Safety
9
12/07/20 10:31:16 31TK4640_014
The most important things you need to know about your airbags are:
They are designed to supplement the seat belts.
To do their job, airbags must inflate with tremendous force. So, while airbags help save lives, they can cause burns, bruises, and other minor injuries, and sometimes even fatal ones if occupants are not wearing their seat belts properly and sitting correctly.
Always wear your seat belt properly, and sit upright and as far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard as possible.
The rest of this section gives more detailed information about how you can maximize your safety.
Remember however, that no safety system can prevent all injures or deaths that can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags deploy.
Your Vehicles Safety Features
Airbags do not replace seat belts.
Airbags offer no protection in rear collisions, or minor frontal or side collisions.
Airbags can pose serious hazards.
What you should do:
10
12/07/20 10:31:22 31TK4640_015
The following pages provide instructions on how to properly protect the driver, adult passengers and teenage children who are large enough and mature enough to drive or ride in the front seat.
See pages for important guidelines on how to properly protect infants, small children, and larger children who ride in your vehicle.
Your vehicle has a door/ trunk open indicator (red)
on the instrument panel to indicate when any door or the trunk lid is not tightly closed.
Your vehicle also has a door and trunk open indicator on the multi- information display to indicate when a specific door or the trunk is not tightly closed. You will see the appropriate indicator(s) for each condition.
See page for how to lock the doors, and page for how the door/ trunk open indicator works.
You will also hear a beep when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, and each time you open any door or the trunk with the key in the ON (II) position.
Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages
and .
After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure the doors are closed and locked.
37 56
:
71 184 187 151
CONTINUED
Protecting Adults and Teens
Close and Lock the DoorsIntroduction 1.
D river
and P
assenger Safety
11
13/08/08 16:42:31 31TK4650_016
When one or more doors or the trunk lid are not tightly closed, the corresponding indicator for each condition will come on.
The above example shows the front right and rear left doors, and the trunk open.
When the trunk is not tightly closed, the TRUNK OPEN indicator will come on.
If any door or the trunk is not closed tightly, the multi-information display reminds you to close the open door(s) or the trunk before you start driving.
The above illustration shows that all doors and the trunk are open.
Protecting Adults and Teens
12
12/07/20 10:31:37 31TK4640_017
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that drivers allow at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the steering wheel and the chest. In addition to adjusting the seat, you can adjust the steering wheel up and down, and in and out (see page ).
If you cannot get far enough away from the steering wheel and still reach the controls, we recommend that you investigate whether some type of adaptive equipment may help.
If you sit too close to the steering wheel or dashboard, you can be seriously injured by an inflating front airbag, or by striking the steering wheel or dashboard.
Adjust the drivers seat as far to the rear as possible while allowing you to maintain full control of the vehicle. Have a front passenger adjust their seat as far to the rear as possible.
Locking the doors reduces the chance of someone being thrown out of the vehicle during a crash, and it helps prevent passengers from accidentally opening a door and falling out.
Locking the doors also helps prevent an outsider from unexpectedly opening a door when you come to a stop.
Your vehicle has the auto door locking/unlocking feature. For more information, see page .125
146
CONTINUED
Protecting Adults and Teens
Adjust the Front Seats2.
D river
and P
assenger Safety
13
12/07/20 10:31:44 31TK4640_018
Adjust the drivers seat-back to a comfortable, upright position, leaving ample space between your chest and the airbag cover in the center of the steering wheel.
Passengers with adjustable seat- backs should also adjust their seat- back to a comfortable, upright position.
See page for how to adjust the front seats.
161
Protecting Adults and Teens
Adjust the Seat-Backs3.
14
Reclining the seat-back too far can result in serious injury or death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an upright position, and sit well back in the seat.
Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious injury or death if the front airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the front airbags as possible.
12/07/20 10:31:50 31TK4640_019
CONTINUED
Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the occupants chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury.
See page for how to adjust the seat-backs.
Adjust the drivers head restraint so the center of the back of your head rests against the center of the restraint.
Have passengers adjust their head restraints properly as well. Taller persons should adjust their restraint as high as possible.
161
Protecting Adults and Teens
Adjust the Head Restraints4.
D river
and P
assenger Safety
15
Improperly positioning head restraints reduces their effectiveness and you can be seriously injured in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are in place and positioned properly before driving.
12/07/20 10:31:56 31TK4640_020
Properly adjusted head restraints will help protect occupants from whiplash and other crash injuries.
See page for how to adjust the head restraints and how the drivers and front passengers active head restraints work.
Position the lap part of the belt as low as possible across your hips, then pull up on the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part fits snugly. This lets your strong pelvic bones take the force of a crash and reduces the chance of internal injuries.
Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then tug on the belt to make sure the belt is securely latched. Check that the belt is not twisted, because a twisted belt can cause serious injuries in a crash.
163
Fasten and Position the Seat Belts
5.
Protecting Adults and Teens
16
12/07/20 10:32:01 31TK4640_021
If necessary, pull up on the belt again to remove any slack, then check that the belt rests across the center of your chest and over your shoulder. This spreads the forces of a crash over the strongest bones in your upper body.
This could cause very serious injuries in a crash.
If a seat belt does not seem to work properly, it may not protect the occupant in a crash.
See page for additional information about your seat belts and how to take care of them.
If the seat belt touches or crosses your neck, or if it crosses your arm instead of your shoulder, you need to adjust the seat belt anchor height.
The front seats have adjustable seat belt anchors. To adjust the height of an anchor, press and hold the release button and slide the anchor up or down as needed (it has four positions).
Using a seat belt that is not working properly can result in serious injury or death. Have your dealer check the belt as soon as possible.
20
Never place the shoulder portion of a lap/shoulder belt under your arm or behind your back.
No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat belt.
Protecting Adults and Teens D
river and
P assenger
Safety
17
RELEASE BUTTON
Improperly positioning the seat belts can cause serious injury or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are properly positioned before driving.
12/07/20 10:32:08 31TK4640_022
If you are pregnant, the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt, and keep the lap part of the belt as low as possible across the hips.
In addition, an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an inflating front airbag.
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and head restraints, and put on their seat belts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, well back in their seats, with their feet on the floor, until the vehicle is safely parked and the engine is off.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased.
Advice for Pregnant WomenMaintain a Proper Sitting Position
6.
Protecting Adults and Teens
18
Sitting improperly or out of position can result in serious injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in the seat, with your feet on the floor.
12/07/20 10:32:14 31TK4640_023
If they do, they could be very seriously injured in a crash.
When driving, remember to sit upright and adjust the seat as far back as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle. When riding as a front passenger, adjust the seat as far back as possible.
Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if its okay for you to drive.
Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your airbags inflate.
This will reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your unborn child that can be caused by a crash or an inflating front airbag.
Devices intended to improve occupant comfort or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability of the belt and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
Objects on the covers marked SRS AIRBAG could interfere with the proper
operation of the airbags or be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
If your hands or arms are close to an airbag cover, they could be injured if the airbags inflate.
If a side airbag or a side curtain airbag inflates, a cup holder or other hard object attached on or near the door could be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone.
Improperly replacing or covering front seat-back covers can prevent your side airbags from inflating during a side impact.
Additional Safety Precautions Two people should never use the same seat belt.
Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag.
Do not put any accessories on seat belts.
Do not attach or place objects on the front airbag covers.
Keep your hands and arms away from the airbag covers.
Do not attach hard objects on or near a door.
Do not cover or replace front seat- back covers without consulting your dealer.
Protecting Adults and Teens D
river and
P assenger
Safety
19
12/07/20 10:32:22 31TK4640_024
Your seat belt system includes lap/ shoulder belts in all seating positions. The front seat belts are also equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners.
The seat belt system includes an indicator on the
instrument panel and a beeper to remind you and your passengers to fasten your seat belts.
If either the driver or a front passenger does not fasten their seat belt while driving, the beeper will sound and the indicator will flash again at regular intervals.
When no one is sitting in the front passengers seat, or an infant or small child is riding there, the indicator may not come on and the beeper may not sound.You will also see a FASTEN SEAT
BELT message on the multi- information display.
This system monitors the front seat belts. If you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position before your seat belt is fastened, the beeper will sound and the indicator will flash. If your seat belt is not fastened before the beeper stops, the indicator will stop flashing but remain on.
Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages
and .
If a front passenger does not fasten their seat belt, the indicator will come on about 6 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the ON (II) position.
You will also see a FASTEN SEAT BELT or FASTEN PASSENGER SEAT BELT message on the multi- information display.
:
184 187
Seat Belt System Components
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
20
12/07/20 10:32:29 31TK4640_025
If the indicator comes on or the beeper sounds when the drivers seat belt is latched and there is no front seat passenger and no items on the front seat, something may be interfering with the monitoring system. Look for and remove:
Any items under the front passengers seat.
Any object(s) hanging on the seat or in the seat-back pocket.
Any object(s) touching the rear of the seat-back.
The lap/shoulder belt goes over your shoulder, across your chest, and across your hips.
To fasten the belt, insert the latch plate into the buckle, then tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is latched (see page for how to properly position the belt).
To unlock the belt, press the red PRESS button on the buckle. Guide the belt across your body so that it retracts completely. After exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the way and will not get closed in the door.
All seat belts have an emergency locking retractor. In normal driving, the retractor lets you move freely in your seat while it keeps some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop, the retractor automatically locks the belt to help restrain your body.
The seat belts in all positions except the drivers have a lockable retractor that must be activated to secure a child seat (see page ).
If the shoulder part of the belt is pulled all the way out, the lockable retractor will activate. The belt will retract, but it will not allow the passenger to move freely.
If no obstructions are found, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
16
49
CONTINUED
Lap/Shoulder Belt
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts D
river and
P assenger
Safety
21
12/07/20 10:32:37 31TK4640_026
To deactivate the lockable retractor, unlatch the buckle and let the seat belt fully retract. To refasten the seat belt, pull it out only as far as needed.
For added protection, the front seat belts are equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners. When activated, the tensioners immediately tighten the belts to help hold the driver and a front passenger in position.
The tensioners can be activated during a collision in which the front airbags . In this case, the airbags would not be needed, but the additional restraint could be helpful.
If the tensioner is activated, the SRS indicator comes on and the tensioner must be replaced.
do not deploy
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
22
Allowing a child to play with a seat belt or wrap one around their neck can result in serious injury or death.
Instruct children not to play with any seat belt and make sure any unused seat belt a child can reach is buckled, fully retracted, and locked.
12/07/20 10:32:44 31TK4640_027
For safety, you should check the condition of your seat belts regularly.
If a seat belt is worn during a crash, you should have your dealer inspect the belt, and replace it if necessary. A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of protection in a subsequent crash.
Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check that the latches work smoothly and the belts retract easily. If a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem (see page
). Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide good protection and should be replaced as soon as possible.
Acura provides a limited warranty on seat belts. See your
booklet for details.
The dealer should also inspect the anchors for damage and replace them if needed. If the automatic seat belt tensioners activate during a crash, they must be replaced.
564
Acura Warranty Information
Seat Belt Maintenance
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts D
river and
P assenger
Safety
23
Not checking or maintaining seat belts can result in serious injury or death if the seat belts do not work properly when needed.
Check your seat belts regularly and have any problem corrected as soon as possible.
12/07/20 10:32:50 31TK4640_028
Airbag System Components
Additional Information About Your Airbags
24
(1)
(3) (8)
(4)
(5) (15)
(2) (11)
(14)
(13)
(14) (16)(13)
(4)
(10)
(5)
(8)
(6)
(9) (7) (12)
(1) Drivers Front Airbag (2) Passengers Front Airbag (3) Control Unit (4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners (5) Side Airbags
(15) Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator (16) Safing Sensor
(6) Drivers Seat Position Sensor (7) Front Passengers Weight Sensors (8) Front Impact Sensors (9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator (10) Side Impact Sensors (First) (11) Occupant Detection System (ODS) Sensors (12) Front Passengers Weight Sensors Control Unit/
ODS Sensors Control Unit (13) Side Impact Sensors (Second) (14) Side Curtain Airbags
12/07/20 10:32:56 31TK4640_029
Automatic front seat belt tensioners (see page ).
Sensors that can detect a moderate to severe front impact or side impact.
Sensors that can detect whether a child is in the passengers side airbag path and signal the control unit to turn the airbag off (see page ).
Your airbag system includes:
Two side airbags, one for the driver and one for a front passenger. The airbags are stored in the outer edges of the seat- backs. Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG (see page ).
Two SRS (supplemental restraint system) front airbags. The drivers airbag is stored in the center of the steering wheel; the front passengers airbag is stored in the dashboard. Both are marked SRS AIRBAG (see page ).
Two side curtain airbags, one for each side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored in the ceiling, above the side windows. The front and rear pillars are marked SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG (see page
).
Sensors that can detect whether the drivers seat belt and the front passengers seat belt are latched or unlatched (see page ).
A drivers seat position sensor that monitors the distance of the seat from the front airbag. If the seat is too far forward, the airbag will inflate with less force (see page
).
Weight sensors that monitor the weight on the front passengers seat. If the weight is about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less (the weight of an infant or small child), the passengers front airbag will be turned off (see page ).
26
30
32
22
20
31
29
29
CONTINUED
Additional Information About Your Airbags D
river and
P assenger
Safety
25
12/07/20 10:33:04 31TK4640_030
If you ever have a moderate to severe frontal collision, sensors will detect the vehicles rapid deceleration.
If the rate of deceleration is high enough, the control unit will inflate the drivers and front passengers airbags, at the time and with the force needed.
A sophisticated electronic system that continually monitors and records information about the sensors, the control unit, the airbag activators, the seat belt tensioners, and driver and front passenger seat belt use when the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position.
Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages
and .
An indicator on the instrument panel that alerts you to a possible problem with your airbag system components (see page ).
An indicator on the instrument panel that alerts you that the passengers side airbag has been turned off (see page ).
An indicator on the dashboard that alerts you that the passengers front airbag has been turned off (see page ).
Emergency backup power in case your vehicles electrical system is disconnected in a crash.
:
33
34
32
184 187
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How Your Front Airbags Work
26
12/07/20 10:33:12 31TK4640_031
CONTINUED
The total time for inflation and deflation is less than a second, so fast that most occupants are not aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in their laps.
After inflating, the front airbags immediately deflate, so they wont interfere with the drivers visibility, or the ability to steer or operate other controls.
During a frontal crash, your seat belt restrains your lower body and torso, and the front airbag helps protect your head and chest.
Although both airbags normally inflate within a split second of each other, it is possible for only one airbag to deploy.
This can happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin, or threshold, that determines whether or not the airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental protection offered by the airbag would be minimal.
Only the drivers airbag can deploy if there is no passenger in the front seat, or if the advanced airbag system has turned the passengers airbag off (see page ).
After an airbag inflates in a crash, you may see a small amount of smoke. This is from the combustion process of the inflator material and is not harmful. People with respiratory problems may experience some temporary discomfort. If this occurs, get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
34
Additional Information About Your Airbags D
river and
P assenger
Safety
27
13/04/02 19:11:13 31TK4640_032
Your vehicle is equipped with dual- stage, multiple-threshold front airbags (SRS). During a frontal crash severe enough to cause one or both front airbags to deploy, the airbags can inflate at different rates, depending on the severity of the crash, whether or not the seat belts are latched, and/or other factors. Front airbags are designed to supplement the seat belts to help reduce the likelihood of head and chest injuries in frontal crashes.
Objects placed or pushed under the front passengers seat may cause the sensor to malfunction, increasing the risk of injury in a crash.
Your front airbags are also advanced airbags. The main purpose of this feature is to help prevent airbag- caused injuries to short drivers and children or small-statured adults who ride in front.
For both advanced airbags to work properly:
Occupants must sit upright and wear their seat belts properly.
Failure to follow these instructions could damage the sensors or prevent them from working properly.
Do not spill any liquids on or under the seats, cover the sensors, or put any objects or metal items under the front seats.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Dual-Stage, Multiple-Threshold Front Airbags (SRS)
Advanced Airbags
28
12/07/20 10:33:25 31TK4640_033
The passengers advanced front airbag system has weight sensors under the seat. Although Acura does not encourage carrying an infant or small child in front, if the sensors detect the weight of an infant or small child (up to about 65 lbs or 29 kg), the system will automatically turn the passengers front airbag off.
Be aware that objects placed on the passengers seat can also cause the airbag to be turned off.
When the passenger airbag gets turned off by the weight sensors, a passenger airbag off indicator in the center of the dashboard comes on (see page ).
If the weight sensors detect there is no passenger in the front seat, the airbag is automatically turned off. However, the passenger airbag off indicator in this situation will not come on.
The drivers advanced front airbag system includes a seat position sensor under the seat. If the seat is too far forward, the airbag will inflate with less force, regardless of the severity of the impact.
If there is a problem with the sensor, the SRS indicator will come on, and the airbag will inflate in the normal manner regardless of the drivers seating position.
34
CONTINUED
Additional Information About Your Airbags D
river and
P assenger
Safety
29
DRIVERS SEAT POSITION SENSOR
PASSENGERS SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR
12/07/20 10:33:32 31TK4640_034
To ensure that the passengers advanced front airbag system will work properly,
This includes:
A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of the front passengers seat.
Moving the front seat or seat-back forcibly back against cargo on the seat or floor behind it.
Hanging heavy items on the front passenger seat, or placing heavy items in the seat-back pocket.
If you ever have a moderate to severe side impact, sensors will detect rapid acceleration and signal the control unit to instantly inflate either the drivers or the passengers side airbag.
Also, make sure the floor mat behind the front passengers seat is hooked to the floor mat anchor (see page ). If it is not, the mat may interfere with the proper operation of the sensors and operation of the seat.
Back seat passengers should not wedge objects or intentionally force their feet under the front passenger seat.
565
How Your Side Airbags Work
Additional Information About Your Airbags
do not do anything that would increase or decrease the weight on the front passengers seat.
30
12/07/20 10:33:40 31TK4640_035
There will be some delay between the moment the passenger moves into or out of the airbag deployment path and when the indicator comes on or goes off.
A front seat passenger should not use a cushion or another object as a backrest. It may prevent the cutoff system from working properly.
Only one airbag will deploy during a side impact. If the impact is on the passengers side, the passengers side airbag may not deploy if there is no passenger.
To get the best protection from the side airbags, front seat occupants should wear their seat belts and sit upright and well back in their seats.
The side airbag may also shut off if a short adult leans sideways, or a larger adult slouches and leans sideways into the airbags deployment path.
Objects placed on the front passenger seat can also cause the side airbag to be shut off.
Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoff system designed primarily to protect a child riding in the front passengers seat.
If the side airbag off indicator comes on (see page ), have the passenger sit upright. Once the passenger is out of the airbags deployment path, the system will turn the airbag back on, and the indicator will go out.Although Acura does not encourage
children to ride in front, if the position sensors detect a child has leaned into the side airbags deployment path, the airbag will shut off.
33 Side Airbag Cutoff System
Additional Information About Your Airbags D
river and
P assenger
Safety
31
12/07/20 10:33:47 31TK4640_036
If the impact is on the passengers side, the passengers side curtain airbag will inflate even if there are no occupants on that side of the vehicle.
One or both side curtain airbags may inflate in a moderate to severe frontal collision which causes the front airbags to deploy.
To get the best protection from the side curtain airbags, occupants should wear their seat belts and sit upright and well back in their seats.
When you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, this indicator comes on briefly then goes off. This tells you the system is working properly.
Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages
and .
In a moderate to severe side impact, sensors will detect rapid acceleration and signal the control unit to instantly inflate the side curtain airbag.
The SRS indicator alerts you to a potential problem with your airbag system components.
:
184 187
How Your Side Curtain Airbags Work
How the SRS Indicator Works
Additional Information About Your Airbags
32
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG
12/07/20 10:33:56 31TK4640_037
If the indicator comes on at any other time, or does not come on at all, you should have the system checked by your dealer. For example:
If the SRS indicator does not come on after you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position or on models with keyless access system, press the engine start/ stop button to set ON mode (see page ).
If the indicator stays on after the engine starts.
If the indicator comes on or flashes on and off while you drive.
You will also see a CHECK AIRBAG SYSTEM message on the multi-information display.
If you see any of these indications, the airbag system components may not work properly when you need them. This indicator alerts you that the
passengers side airbag has been automatically shut off. It does mean there is a problem with your side airbags.
When you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, the indicator should come on briefly and then go out (see page ). If it doesnt come on, stays on, or comes on while driving without a passenger in the front seat, have the system checked.
You will also see a PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAG OFF message on the multi-information display.
67 187
CONTINUED
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How the Side Airbag Off Indicator Works
not
D river
and P
assenger Safety
33
CanadaU.S.
Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in serious injury or death if the airbag systems or tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts you to a possible problem.
12/07/20 10:34:05 31TK4640_038
Be aware that objects placed on the front seat can cause the indicator to come on.
If no weight is detected on the front seat, the airbag will be automatically shut off. However, the indicator will not come on.
The passenger airbag off indicator may come on and off repeatedly if the total weight on the seat is near the airbag cutoff threshold.
If an adult or teenage passenger is riding in front, move the seat as far to the rear as possible, and have the passenger sit upright and wear the seat belt properly.
This indicator alerts you that the passengers front airbag has been shut off because weight sensors detect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less (the weight of an infant or small child) on the front passengers seat. It does there is a problem with the airbag.
Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages
and .
:
184 187
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How the Passenger Airbag Off Indicator Works
not mean
34
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR
CanadaU.S.
12/07/20 10:34:12 31TK4640_039
If the indicator comes on with no front seat passenger and no objects on the seat, or with an adult riding there, something may be interfering with the weight sensors. Look for and remove:
Any items under the front passengers seat.
Your airbag systems are virtually maintenance free, and there are no parts you can safely service. However, you must have your vehicle serviced if:
If no obstructions are found, have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
Any object hanging on the seat or in the seat-back pocket.
Any object(s) touching the rear of the seat-back.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible. If you ignore this indication, your airbags may not operate properly.
Even if your airbags do not inflate, your dealer should inspect the drivers seat position sensor, the front passengers weight sensors, the front seat belt tensioners, and all seat belts and their anchors worn during a crash to make sure they are operating properly.
Any airbag that has deployed must be replaced along with the control unit and other related parts. Any seat belt tensioner that activates must also be replaced.
We recommend against the use of salvaged airbag system components, including the airbag, tensioners, sensors, and control unit.
Do not try to remove or replace any airbag by yourself. This must be done by an authorized dealer or a knowledgeable body shop.
Airbag Service
Additional Information About Your Airbags
The SRS indicator alerts you to a problem.
If your vehicle has a moderate to severe impact.
An airbag ever inflates.
D river
and P
assenger Safety
35
12/07/20 10:34:21 31TK4640_040
Together, airbags and seat belts provide the best protection.
Tampering could cause the airbags to deploy, possibly causing very serious injury.
If water or another liquid soaks into a seat- back, it can prevent the side airbag cutoff system from working properly.
This could make the drivers seat position sensor or the front passengers weight sensors ineffective. If it is necessary to remove or modify a front seat to accommodate a person with disabilities, first contact Acura Client Relations. In the US, call 800-382-2238, and in Canada, call 888-9-ACURA-9.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Additional Safety Precautions Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags.
Do not tamper with airbag components or wiring for any reason.
Do not expose the front passengers seat-back to liquid.
Do not remove or modify a front seat without consulting your dealer.
36
12/07/20 10:34:25 31TK4640_041
Children depend on adults to protect them. However, despite their best intentions, many adults do not know how to protect child passengers.
If you have children, or ever need to drive with a child in your vehicle, be sure to read this section. It begins with important general guidelines, then presents special information for infants, small children, and larger children.
Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, traffic collisions are the number one cause of death of children age 12 and under.
To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state, Canadian province and territory requires that infants and children be properly restrained when they ride in a vehicle.
(see pages ). (see pages ).
42 52 53 56
properly
All Children Must Be Restrained
Infants and small children must be restrained in an approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle
Larger children must be restrained with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on a booster seat until the seat belt f its them properly
Protecting Children General Guidelines D
river and
P assenger
Safety
37
Children who are unrestrained or improperly restrained can be seriously injured or killed in a crash.
Any child too small for a seat belt should be properly restrained in a child seat. A larger child should be properly restrained with a seat belt and use a booster seat if necessary.
12/07/20 10:34:32 31TK4640_042
Whenever possible, larger children should sit in the back seat, on a booster seat if needed, and be properly restrained with a seat belt (see page for important information about protecting larger children).
Front airbags have been designed to help protect adults in a moderate to severe frontal collision. To do this, the passengers front airbag is quite large, and it can inflate with enough force to cause very serious injuries.
If the vehicle seat is too far forward, or the childs head is thrown forward during a collision, an inflating front airbag can strike the child with enough force to kill or very seriously injure a small child.Even though your vehicle has an
advanced front airbag system that automatically turns the passengers front airbag off under certain circumstances (see page ), please follow these guidelines:
According to crash statistics, children of all ages and sizes are safer when they are restrained in a back seat.
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that all children age 12 and under be properly restrained in a back seat. Some states have laws restricting where children may ride.
Children who ride in the back are less likely to be injured by striking interior vehicle parts during a collision or hard braking. Also, children cannot be injured by an inflating front airbag when they ride in the back.
If the airbag inflates, it can hit the back of the child seat with enough force to kill or very seriously injure an infant.
53
34 Children who have outgrown child seats are also at risk of being injured or killed by an inflating passengers front airbag.
Small Children
Larger Children
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat of a vehicle equipped with a passengers front airbag can be hazardous.
Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front seat of a vehicle equipped with a passengers front airbag.
Infants
All Children Should Sit in a Back Seat
The Passengers Front Airbag Can Pose Serious Risks
Protecting Children General Guidelines
38
12/07/20 10:34:41 31TK4640_043
To remind you of the passengers front airbag hazards, and that children must be properly restrained in a back seat, your vehicle has warning labels on the dashboard (U.S. models) and on the front visors. Please read and follow the instructions on these labels.
U.S. Models
Canadian Models
Protecting Children General Guidelines D
river and
P assenger
Safety
39
SUN VISOR
SUN VISOR
DASHBOARD
13/08/08 16:42:43 31TK4650_044
Many parents say they prefer to put an infant or a small child in the front passenger seat so they can watch the child, or because the child requires attention.
Placing a child in the front seat exposes the child to hazards in a frontal collision, and paying close attention to a child distracts the driver from the important tasks of driving, placing both of you at risk.
Your vehicle has a back seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front:
Place the largest child in the front seat, provided the child is large enough to wear the lap/shoulder belt properly (see page ).
Move the vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible (see page ).
Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat (see page ).
Make sure the seat belt is properly positioned and secured (see page
).
If a child requires close physical attention or frequent visual contact, we strongly recommend that another adult ride with the child in the back seat. The back seat is far safer for a child than the front.
If you are not wearing a seat belt in a crash, you could be thrown forward and crush the child against the dashboard or a seat-back. If you are wearing a seat belt, the child can be torn from your arms and be seriously hurt or killed.
During a crash, the belt could press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries.
If they do, they could be very seriously injured in a crash.
This can prevent children from accidentally falling out (see page ).
53
18
16
161
153
If You Must Drive with Several Children
If a Child Requires Close Attention
Additional Safety Precautions
Protecting Children General Guidelines
Never hold an infant or child on your lap.
Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child.
Never let two children use the same seat belt.
Use the childproof door locks to prevent children from opening the rear doors.
40
12/07/20 10:35:02 31TK4640_045
If a child wraps a loose seat belt around their neck, they can be seriously or fatally injured. (See pages and for how to activate and deactivate the lockable retractor.)
Leaving children without adult supervision is illegal in most states, Canadian provinces and territories, and can be very hazardous.
Your vehicle has the engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. For more information on how to select the power mode, see page .
For example, infants and small children left in a vehicle on a hot day can die from heatstroke. A child left alone with the key in the ignition switch or with the keyless access remote in the vehicle can accidentally set the vehicle in motion, possibly injuring
themselves or others.
Children who play in vehicles can accidentally get trapped inside. Teach your children not to play in or around vehicles. Know how to operate the emergency trunk opener and decide if your children should be shown how to use this feature (see page ).
Even very young children learn how to unlock vehicle doors, turn on the ignition switch , and open the trunk, which can lead to accidental injury or death.
50 51
:
156
184
On models with keyless access system
Protecting Children General Guidelines
Make sure any unused seat belt that a child can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor is activated, and the belt is fully retracted and locked.
Do not leave children alone in a vehicle.
Lock all doors and the trunk when your vehicle is not in use.
Keep vehicle keys/remote transmitters or keyless access remotes out of the reach of children.
D river
and P
assenger Safety
41
12/07/20 10:35:09 31TK4640_046
An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing, reclining child seat until the child reaches the seat makers weight or height limit for the seat, and the child is at least one year old.
Only a rear-facing child seat provides proper support for a babys head, neck, and back.
Two types of seats may be used: a seat designed exclusively for infants, or a convertible seat used in the rear- facing, reclining mode.
If placed facing forward, an infant could be very seriously injured during a frontal collision.
A rear-facing child seat can be placed in any seating position in the back seat, but not in the front.
If the passengers front airbag inflates, it can hit the back of the child seat with enough force to kill or seriously injure an infant.
When properly installed, a rear- facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front passenger from moving their seat as far back as recommended, or from locking their seat-back in the desired position.
It can also interfere with proper operation of the passengers advanced front airbag system.
Protecting Infants
Child Seat Type
Do not put a rear-facing child seat in a forward-facing position.
Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front seat.
Rear-facing Child Seat Placement
Protecting Infants and Small Children
42
12/07/20 10:35:16 31TK4640_047
In any of these situations, we strongly recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front passengers seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat.
Many states, Canadian provinces and territories allow a child one year of age or older who also meets the minimum size and weight requirements to transition from a rear-facing child seat to a forward facing seat. Know the requirements where you are driving and follow the child seat instructions. Many experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat up to age two, if the childs height
and weight are appropriate for a rear-facing seat.
Of the different seats available, we recommend those that have a five- point harness system as shown.
We also recommend that a small child use the child seat until the child reaches the weight or height limit for the seat.
CONTINUED
Protecting Small Children
Child Seat Type
Protecting Infants and Small Children D
river and
P assenger
Safety
43
Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death during a crash.
Always place a rear-facing child seat in the back seat, not the front.
12/07/20 10:35:23 31TK4640_048
Even with advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passengers front airbag off (see page ), a back seat is the safest place for a small child.
If it is necessary to put a forward- facing child seat in the front, move the vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible, and be sure the child seat is firmly secured to the vehicle and the child is properly strapped in the seat.
We strongly recommend placing a forward-facing child seat in a back seat, not the front.
If the vehicle seat is too far forward, or the childs head is thrown forward during a collision, an inflating airbag can strike the child with enough force to cause very serious or fatal injuries.
34
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Child Seat Placement
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat of a vehicle equipped with a passengers airbag can be hazardous.
44
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death if the front airbag inflates.
If you must place a forward- facing child seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far back as possible, and properly restrain the child.
12/07/20 10:35:28 31TK4640_049
Most child seats are LATCH- compatible (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren). Some have a rigid-type connector, while others have a flexible-type connector. Both are equally easy to use. Some existing and previously owned child seats can only be installed using the seat belt. Whichever type you choose, follow the child seat manufacturers use and care instructions as well as the instructions in this manual. Proper installation is key to maximizing your childs safety.
In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCH- compatible child seat can be installed using the seat belt and a top tether for added security. This is because all child seats are required to be designed so that they can be secured with a lap belt or the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.
In addition, the child seat manufacturer may advise that a seat belt be used to attach a LATCH- compatible seat once a child reaches a specified weight. Please read the child seat owners manual for proper installation instructions.
The child seat is the correct type and size for the child.
The child seat is the correct type for the seating position.
The child seat is compliant with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
Make sure the child seat meets the following three requirements:
Selecting a Child Seat
Important considerations when selecting a child seat
D river
and P
assenger Safety
45
12/07/20 10:35:34 31TK4640_050
After selecting a proper child seat and a good place to install the seat, there are three main steps in installing the seat:
All child seats must be secured to the vehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt or with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system. A child whose seat is not properly secured to the vehicle can be endangered in a crash.
After installing a child seat, push and pull the seat forward and from side-to-side to verify that it is secure.
A child seat secured with a seat belt should be installed as firmly as possible. However, it does not need to be rock solid. Some side-to-side movement can be expected and should not reduce the child seats effectiveness.
If the child seat is not secure, try installing it in a different seating position, or use a different style of child seat that can be firmly secured.
Make sure the child is properly strapped in the child seat according to the child seat makers instructions. A child who is not properly secured in a child seat can be seriously injured in a crash.
The following pages provide guidelines on how to properly install a child seat. A forward-facing child seat is used in all examples, but the instructions are the same for rear- facing child seats.Properly secure the child seat to
the vehicle.
Make sure the child seat is firmly secured.
Secure the child in the child seat.
1.
2.
3.
Installing a Child Seat
46
12/07/20 10:35:40 31TK4640_051
Your vehicle is equipped with LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) at the outer rear seats.
To install a LATCH-compatible child seat:
Move the seat belt buckle or tongue away from the lower anchors. Make sure there are no objects
near the anchors that could prevent a secure connection between the child seat and the anchors.
Use the pull strap to lower the anchor cover on the lower seat cushion that covers the LATCH anchor holes in the seat.
The location of each lower anchor is indicated by a small button above the anchor point.
The lower anchors are located between the seat-back and seat bottom, and are to be used only with a child seat designed for use with LATCH.
1.
3.
2.
CONTINUED
Installing a Child Seat with LATCH
Installing a Child Seat D
river and
P assenger
Safety
47
LOWER ANCHORS Outer seating position
COVERS
STRAPS
BUTTON
12/07/20 10:35:49 31TK4640_052
Push the button located next to each rear head restraint to pivot the head restraint down.
Place the child seat on the vehicle seat, then attach the seat to the lower anchors according to the child seat makers instructions.
Some LATCH-compatible seats have a rigid-type connector as shown above.
Other LATCH-compatible seats have a flexible-type connector as shown above.
Whatever type you have, follow the child seat makers instructions for adjusting or tightening the fit.
4. 5.
6.
Installing a Child Seat
48
BUTTON
HEAD RESTRAINT
Outer seating position Rigid type Flexible type
12/07/20 10:35:56 31TK4640_053
Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the child seat maker.
Push and pull the child seat forward and from side-to-side to verify that it is secure.
When not using the LATCH system, all child seats must be secured to the vehicle with the lap part of a lap/ shoulder belt.
In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in all seating positions except the drivers have a lockable retractor that must be activated to secure a child seat.
Route the tether strap over the head restraint, then attach the tether strap hook to the anchor, making sure the strap is not twisted.
With the child seat in the desired seating position, route the belt through the child seat according to the seat makers instructions, then insert the latch plate into the buckle and remove any slack from the lap portion of the belt.
7.
8.
9.
1.
CONTINUED
Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/ Shoulder Belt
D river
and P
assenger Safety
49
TETHER STRAP HOOK
ANCHOR
COVER
12/07/20 10:36:04 31TK4640_054
After the belt has retracted, tug on it. If the belt is locked, you will not be able to pull it out. If you can pull the belt out, it is not locked, and you will need to repeat these steps.
To activate the lockable retractor, slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all the way out until it stops, then let the belt feed back into the retractor.
To remove slack, it may help to put weight on the child seat, or push on the back of the seat while pulling up on the belt.
After confirming that the belt is locked, grab the shoulder part of the belt near the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack from the lap part of the belt. Remember, if the lap part of the belt is not tight, the child seat will not be secure.
Push and pull the child seat forward and from side-to-side to verify that it is secure enough to stay upright during normal driving maneuvers. If the child seat is not secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to retract fully, then repeat these steps.
2.
3.
4. 5.
Installing a Child Seat
50
12/07/20 10:36:11 31TK4640_055
To deactivate the lockable retractor and remove a child seat, unlatch the buckle, unroute the seat belt, and let the belt fully retract.
A child seat with a tether can be installed in any seating position in the back seat, using one of the anchorage points shown above.
Since a tether can provide additional security to the lap/shoulder belt installation, we recommend using a tether whenever one is required or available.
After properly securing the child seat with the lap/shoulder belt (see page ), pivot the head restraint down (see page ) and route the tether strap over the head restraint.
1.
49 163
CONTINUED
Installing a Child Seat with a Tether
Installing a Child Seat
Using an Outer Anchor
D river
and P
assenger Safety
51
TETHER ANCHORAGE POINTS
TETHER STRAP HOOK
ANCHOR
COVER
COVERANCHOR
12/07/20 10:36:19 31TK4640_056
Lift the anchor cover, then attach the tether strap hook to the anchor, making sure the strap is not twisted.
Tighten the strap according to the seat makers instructions.
Follow steps 2 and 3 in the previous column.
After properly securing the child seat (see page ), adjust the head restraint to its lowest position, then route the tether strap over the head restraint.
1.
2.
3.
2.
49
Using the Center Anchor
Installing a Child Seat
52
TETHER STRAP HOOK
COVER
ANCHOR
12/07/20 10:36:26 31TK4640_057
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt properly fits a child, have the child put on the seat belt, then ask yourself:
Does the child sit all the way back against the seat?
Do the childs knees bend comfortably over the edge of the seat?
When a child reaches the recommended weight or height limit for a forward-facing child seat, the child should sit in a back seat on a booster seat and wear the lap/ shoulder belt.
The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who must sit in front.
1.
2.
CONTINUED
Checking Seat Belt Fit
Protecting Larger Children D
river and
P assenger
Safety
53
Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in front can result in injury or death if the passengers front airbag inflates.
If a child must ride in front, move the vehicle seat as far back as possible, use a booster seat if needed, have the child sit up properly and wear the seat belt properly.
12/07/20 10:36:33 31TK4640_058
Does the shoulder belt cross between the childs neck and arm?
Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the childs thighs?
Will the child be able to stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a forward-
facing child seat should ride in a back seat and use a booster seat until the lap/shoulder belt fits them properly without the booster.
Booster seats can be high-back or low-back. Whichever style you select, make sure the booster seat meets federal safety standards (see page
) and that you follow the booster seat makers instructions.
If a child who uses a booster seat must ride in front, move the vehicle seat as far back as possible and be sure the child is wearing the seat belt properly.
Some states, Canadian provinces and territories also require children to use a booster seat until they reach a given age or weight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the states, provinces or territories where you intend to drive.
3.
4.
5.
45
Using a Booster Seat
Protecting Larger Children
54
12/07/20 10:36:40 31TK4640_059
A child may continue using a booster seat until the tops of their ears are even with the top of the vehicles or boosters seat-back. A child of this height should be tall enough to use the lap/shoulder belt without a booster seat.
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that all children age 12 and under be properly restrained in the back seat.
If the passengers front airbag inflates in a moderate to severe frontal collision, the airbag can cause serious injuries to a child who is unrestrained, improperly restrained, sitting too close to the airbag, or out of position.
A side airbag also poses risks. If any part of a larger childs body is in the path of a deploying side airbag, the child could receive possibly serious injuries.
Of course, children vary widely. And while age may be one indicator of when a child can safely ride in front, there are other important factors you should consider.
Physically, a child must be large enough for the lap/shoulder belt to properly fit (see pages and ). If the seat belt does not fit properly, with or without the child sitting on a booster seat, the child should not sit in front.
To safely ride in front, a child must be able to follow the rules, including sitting properly, and wearing the seat belt properly throughout the ride.
16 53
CONTINUED
When Can a Larger Child Sit in Front
Physical Size
Maturity
Protecting Larger Children D
river and
P assenger
Safety
55
12/07/20 10:36:48 31TK4640_060
If you decide that a child can safely ride up front, be sure to:
Carefully read the owners manual, and make sure you understand all seat belt instructions and all safety information.
Move the vehicle seat to the rear- most position.
Have the child sit up straight, back against the seat, and feet on or near the floor.
Check that the childs seat belt is properly and securely positioned.
Supervise the child. Even mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten the seat belts or sit properly.
This could result in serious neck injuries during a crash.
This could cause very serious injuries during a crash. It also increases the chance that the child will slide under the belt in a crash and be injured.
If they do, they could be very seriously injured in a crash.
Devices intended to improve a childs comfort or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can make the belt less effective and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
Additional Safety Precautions Do not let a child wear a seat belt across the neck.
Do not let a child put the shoulder part of a seat belt behind the back or under the arm.
Two children should never use the same seat belt.
Do not put any accessories on a seat belt.
Protecting Larger Children
56
12/07/20 10:36:55 31TK4640_061
Your vehicles exhaust contains carbon monoxide gas. Carbon monoxide should not enter the vehicle in normal driving if you maintain your vehicle properly and follow the information on this page.
High levels of carbon monoxide can collect rapidly in enclosed areas, such as a garage. Do not run the engine with the garage door closed. Even with the door open, run the engine only long enough to move the vehicle out of the garage.
Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever:
With the trunk lid open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into your vehicles interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the trunk open, open all the windows, and set the climate control system as shown below.
Select the fresh air mode. Select the mode. Set the fan speed to high. Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting.
If you must sit in your parked vehicle with the engine running, even in an unconfined area, adjust the climate control system as follows:
The vehicle is raised for an oil change.
You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust.
The vehicle was in a collision that may have damaged the underside.
1. 2. 3. 4.
Carbon Monoxide Hazard D
river and
P assenger
Safety
57
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic. Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and even kill you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that expose you to carbon monoxide.
12/07/20 10:37:02 31TK4640_062
These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that could cause serious injury or death. Read these labels carefully.
If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed by the owner), contact your dealer for a replacement.
U.S. models only
Safety Labels
58
DASHBOARDRADIATOR CAP
12/07/20 10:37:10 31TK4640_063
U.S. models
Canadian models
U.S. models Canadian models
Safety Labels D
river and
P assenger
Safety
59
SUN VISOR
DOORJAMB
12/07/20 10:37:24 31TK4640_064
60
12/07/20 10:37:25 31TK4640_065
This section gives information about the controls and displays that contribute to the daily operation of your vehicle. All the essential controls are within easy reach.
...........................Control Locations . 62
............................Instrument Panel . 63 ..........Instrument Panel Indicators . 64
.............................................Gauges . 76 ..................................Fuel Gauge . 76
...................Temperature Gauge . 77 .............Multi-Information Display . 78
Controls Near the Steering .........................................Wheel . 136
Windshield Wipers and .....................................Washers . 137
.......Turn Signals and Headlights . 139 Automatic Lighting Off
...................................Feature . 141 .........Daytime Running Lights . 142
.....................................Fog Lights . 143 ......Instrument Panel Brightness . 143
...............Hazard Warning Button . 145
...............Rear Window Defogger . 145 ......Steering Wheel Adjustments . 146
.............................Keys and Locks . 147 ......................Immobilizer System . 149
..............................Ignition Switch . 150 ....................................Door Locks . 151
............Childproof Door Locks . 153 ..............................................Trunk . 154
......Emergency Trunk Opener . 156
.....................Remote Transmitter . 157 ...............................................Seats . 161
......Trunk Pass-through Cover . 166 ...........................................Mirrors . 167
Driving Position Memory ........................................System . 170
................Keyless Access System . 173 ...........Keyless Access Remote . 179
........Engine Start/Stop Button . 183 ..................................Seat Heaters . 202
.....Seat Heaters and Ventilations . 204 ............................Power Windows . 206
.......................................Moonroof . 210 ...............................Parking Brake . 212
.........Interior Convenience Items . 213 .....................Beverage Holders . 214
........Accessory Power Sockets . 215 ..................................Glove Box . 216
.............Console Compartment . 216 ............................Vanity Mirror . 217
...................................Sun Visor . 217 ...........................Center Pocket . 218
....................Sunglasses Holder . 218 ..................................Coat Hook . 219
...............................Interior Lights . 220
Instruments and Controls Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
61
13/08/08 16:42:49 31TK4650_066
: If equipped
Control Locations
62
MIRROR CONTROLS
DRIVING POSITION MEMORY SYSTEM BUTTONS
POWER DOOR LOCK MASTER SWITCH
POWER WINDOW SWITCHES
FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE BUTTON
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
HAZARD WARNING BUTTON
AUDIO
CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
A/T model with navigation system is shown.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
CLOCK COMPASS
USB ADAPTER CABLE AUXILIARY INPUT JACK
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
SEAT HEATER SWITCHES SEAT HEATER/VENTILATION BUTTONS (P. 204)
BSI ALERT INDICATOR (P. 522)
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM (BSI) ALERT INDICATOR (P. 522)
HOMELINK BUTTONS
MOONROOF SWITCH
INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS(P. 63) GAUGES MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY
(P. 76) (P. 78)
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
(P. 168)
(P. 170)
(P. 206)
TRUNK RELEASE BUTTON (P. 154)
(P. 472)
(P. 202)
(P. 266, 275, 356, 367) (P. 215)
(P. 389)
(P. 491)
(P. 494)
(P. 226)
(P. 397) (P. 391) (P. 235)
(P. 145)
(P. 210)(P. 404)
(P. 470)
(P. 215)
(P. 151)
13/08/08 16:42:58 31TK4650_067
The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.
Instrument Panel Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
63
CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR
CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR
PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR
LOW FUEL INDICATOR
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM INDICATOR
SIDE AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR
SH-AWD INDICATOR
LIGHTS ON INDICATOR LOW TIRE PRESSURE/TPMS INDICATORIf equipped:
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM INDICATOR
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) INDICATOR
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS) INDICATOR
FOG LIGHT INDICATOR
(P. 73)
(P. 68)
(P. 69)
(P. 72)
(P. 72)
(P. 67)
(P. 73)
(P. 65)
(P. 70)
(P. 71)
(P. 67)
(P. 66)
SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR (P. 72)
MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAYSEAT BELT REMINDER INDICATOR (P. 64)
CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
(P. 72)
(P. 71)
A/T model is shown.
(P. 71)
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA) OFF INDICATOR
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM INDICATOR
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM (BSI) INDICATOR
DOOR/TRUNK OPEN INDICATOR
(P. 68)
(P. 71)
KEYLESS ACCESS SYSTEM INDICATOR (P. 74)
(P. 75)
(P. 65, 596)
(P. 64, 595)
(P. 64, 597)
(P. 65, 598)
(P. 78)
12/07/20 10:37:48 31TK4640_068
The instrument panel has many indicators to give you important information about your vehicle.
You will also see a FASTEN SEAT BELT message on the multi- information display.
You will also see a CHECK EMISSION SYSTEM message on the multi-information display. For more information, see page .
The engine can be severely damaged if this indicator flashes or stays on when the engine is running, and you will see a CHECK ENGINE OIL LEVEL message on the multi- information display. For more information, see page .
If either of you do not fasten your seat belt while driving, the beeper will sound and the indicator will flash again at regular intervals, and you will see a FASTEN SEAT BELT or FASTEN PASSENGER SEAT BELT message on the multi- information display. For more information, see page .
This indicator comes on when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. It reminds you and your passengers to fasten your seat belts. A beeper also sounds if you have not fastened your seat belt.
Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages
and .
If you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position before fastening your seat belt, the beeper sounds and the indicator flashes. If you do not fasten your seat belt before the beeper stops, the indicator stops flashing but remains on.
If your front passenger does not fasten their seat belt, the indicator comes on about 6 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the ON (II) position.
20
:
184 187
597
595
Instrument Panel Indicators
Seat Belt Reminder Indicator
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Low Oil Pressure Indicator
64
12/07/20 10:37:57 31TK4640_069
CONTINUED
This indicator has two functions:
It comes on when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. It is a reminder to check the parking brake. Driving with the parking brake not fully released can damage the brakes and tires.
If you drive without releasing the parking brake, a beeper will sound, and you will also see a RELEASE PARKING BRAKE message on the multi-information display (see page ).
This indicator comes on briefly when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. It will then go off if you have inserted a properly coded ignition key, on models with keyless access system, if an appropriate keyless access remote is used. If it is not a properly coded key or keyless access remote, the indicator will blink, and the engines fuel system will be disabled (see page ).
Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages
and .
If this indicator comes on when the engine is running, the battery is not being charged, and you will also see a CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM message on the multi-information display. For more information, see page .
1.
:
212
149
184 187
596
Instrument Panel Indicators
Charging System Indicator
Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator
Immobilizer System Indicator
Instrum ents
and C
ontrols
65
U.S. Canada
12/08/08 20:02:27 31TK4640_070
If it stays on after you have fully released the parking brake while the engine is running, or if it comes on while driving, it can indicate a problem in the brake system. You will also see a LOW BRAKE FLUID or CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM message on the multi-information display. For more information, see page .
Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II), and START Mode is the equivalent of START (III). For more information, see pages and
.
This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.
If this indicator comes on at any other time, there is a problem in the ABS. If this happens, take the vehicle to your dealer to have it checked. With this indicator on, your vehicle still has normal braking ability but no anti-lock function. You will also see a CHECK ABS SYSTEM message on the multi- information display. For more information, see page .
2. :
598 187
184
508
Instrument Panel Indicators
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Indicator
66
12/07/20 10:38:13 31TK4640_071
This indicator comes on briefly when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. If it comes on at any other time, it indicates that the passengers side airbag has automatically shut off. For more information, see page .
You will also see a PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAG OFF message on the multi-information display.
Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages
and .
This indicator comes on briefly when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. If it comes on at any other time, it indicates a potential problem with your front airbags. This indicator will also alert you to a potential problem with your airbag system components. You will also see a CHECK AIRBAG SYSTEM message on the multi- information display. For more information, see page .
:
33
32
187184
Supplemental Restraint System Indicator Side Airbag Off
Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
67
U.S. Canada
12/07/20 10:38:21 31TK4640_072
This indicator comes on as a reminder that you have turned off the vehicle stability assist (VSA) system.
This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.
This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. For more information, see page .
This indicator has two functions:
It flashes when VSA is active (see page ).
If it comes on and stays on at any other time, there is a problem with the VSA or Hill Start Assist (on SH-AWD models only) system. You will also see a CHECK VSA SYSTEM or CHECK HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM message on the multi-information display. Take your vehicle to a dealer to have it checked. Without VSA, your vehicle still has normal driving ability, but will not have VSA traction and stability enhancement. For more
information, see page .
If the VSA indicator illuminates, hill start assist will not be working. Without hill start assist, the vehicle will roll downhill immediately when you release the brake on an incline.
Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II), and START Mode is the equivalent of START (III). For more information, see pages and
.
1.
2.
:
184 187
510 510
510Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System Indicator
VSA OFF Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
68
12/07/20 10:38:30 31TK4640_073
This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.
Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages
and .
This indicator has two functions:
If it comes on while driving, it indicates that one or more of your vehicles tires are significantly low on pressure.
You will also see a CHECK TIRE PRESSURE message on the multi- information display (see page ).
Check the tire pressure monitor on the multi-information display and determine the cause (see page ).
If this indicator begins to flash, there is a problem with the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS). You will also see a CHECK TPMS SYSTEM message on the multi-information display. The indicator continues to flash for a while (approximately 1 minute), then stays on. If this happens, have your dealer check the system as soon as possible. For more information, see page
.
If this happens, pull to the side of the road when it is safe, check which tire has lost pressure on the multi- information display, and determine the cause. If it is because of a flat tire, replace the flat tire with the compact spare (see page ), and have the flat tire repaired as soon as possible. If two or more tires are underinflated, call a professional towing service. For more information, see page .
1.
:
2.
187
516
515
514 184
583
607
Instrument Panel Indicators
Low Tire Pressure/ TPMS Indicator
Instrum ents
and C
ontrols
69
12/07/20 10:38:38 31TK4640_074
The left or right turn signal indicator blinks when you signal a lane change or turn. If an indicator does not blink or blinks rapidly, it usually means one of the turn signal bulbs is burned out (see pages and ). Replace the bulb as soon as possible, since other drivers cannot see that you are signaling.
When you press the hazard warning button, both turn signal indicators and all turn signals on the outside of the vehicle flash.
This indicator normally comes on when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position and goes off after the engine starts. If it comes on at any other time, there is a problem in the electric power steering system.
Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages
and .
If this happens, stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the engine. Reset the system by restarting the engine. The indicator will stay on, but should go off after driving a short distance. If it does not go off, or comes back on again while driving, take the vehicle to your dealer to have it checked. With the indicator on, the EPS may be turned off, making the vehicle harder to steer.
If you turn the steering wheel to the full left or right position repeatedly while stopping or driving at very low speed, you may feel slightly harder steering in order to prevent damage to the steering system caused by overheating. This may also happen if you hold the steering wheel on the full left or right position for a while.
You will also see a CHECK POWER STEERING SYSTEM message on the multi-information display.
: 558 562
184 187
Instrument Panel Indicators
Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Indicators
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Indicator
70
12/07/20 10:38:46 31TK4640_075
This indicator comes on with the high beam headlights. For more information, see page .
This indicator also comes on with reduced brightness when the daytime running lights (DRL) are on (see page ).
This indicator comes on when you turn on the fog lights. For more information, see page .
This indicator reminds you that the exterior lights are on. It comes on when the light switch is in either the
or position. This indicator will also come on when the light switch is in AUTO and the lights turn on automatically. If you turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0) position, without turning off the light switch, this indicator will remain on. Reminder beeps will also sound when you open the drivers door.
Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) Mode is the equivalent of LOCK (0) and ACCESSORY Mode is the equivalent of ACCESSORY (I). For more information, see pages
and .
This indicator comes on red if any door or the trunk lid is not closed tightly.
You will also see a corresponding indicator(s) on the multi-information display to indicate which door and/ or the trunk is not closed tightly (see page ).
:
12
184 187
140
142
143
Instrument Panel Indicators
High Beam Indicator
Fog Light Indicator
Lights On Indicator Door/Trunk Open Indicator
Instrum ents
and C
ontrols
71
12/07/20 10:38:56 31TK4640_076
This indicator comes on when you turn on the cruise control system by pressing the CRUISE button on the steering wheel (see page ).
This indicator comes on when you set the cruise control. See page
for information on operating the cruise control.
This indicator comes on when there is a system message on the multi- information display. Press the INFO button on the steering wheel (see page ) to see the message (see page ).
Most of the time, this indicator comes on along with other indicators in the instrument panel such as the seat belt reminder indicator, SRS indicator, VSA system indicator, etc.
This indicator comes on when the security system is set. For more information, see page .
401 79
401
395
90
Instrument Panel Indicators
Cruise Main Indicator
Cruise Control Indicator
System Message Indicator
Security System Indicator
72
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
12/07/20 10:39:04 31TK4640_077
This indicator is in the fuel gauge. It comes on as a reminder that you must refuel soon. You will also see a LOW FUEL message on the multi- information display.
This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. If this indicator comes on at any other time, there is a problem in the SH-AWD system. You will also see a CHECK SH-AWD SYSTEM message on the multi-information display (see page ). Take your vehicle to a dealer to have it checked. For more information, see page .
Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages
and .
When the indicator comes on, there are about 2.5 U.S. gal (9.6 ) on SH-AWD models, and 2.8 U.S. gal (10.5 ) on 2WD models of fuel remaining in the tank.
When the needle reaches E, there is a very small amount of fuel in the tank.
:
505
504
184 187
CONTINUED
On SH-AWD models
Low Fuel Indicator Super Handling-All Wheel Drive (SH-AWD) Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
73
LOW FUEL INDICATOR
U.S. model is shown.
12/07/20 10:39:12 31TK4640_078
If the indicator blinks while driving, the differential temperature is too high. You will also see an SH-AWD DIFF TEMP. HIGH message on the multi-information display (see page
).
Pull to the side of the road when it is safe, shift to Park, and let the engine idle until the indicator goes out.
This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you select the ON mode with the engine start/stop button (see page ). If it comes on at any other time, it indicates that there is a problem with the system.
If this indicator comes on along with a CHECK KEYLESS STARTING SYSTEM message on the multi-information display, there is a problem with the keyless starting system. In this case, your vehicle may not restart. If you can continue to drive safely, take the vehicle to your dealer and have it checked as soon as possible. For more information, see page .This indicator has two functions:
If this indicator comes on along with a CHECK KEYLESS ACCESS SYSTEM message on the multi-information display, there is a problem with the keyless access system. Have the vehicle checked by your dealer as soon as possible. For more information, see page .
1.
2.
505 195
196
196
On models with keyless access system
Instrument Panel Indicators
Keyless Access System Indicator
74
Continuing to drive with the SH-AWD indicator blinking may cause serious damage to the system.
12/07/20 10:39:20 31TK4640_079
If the indicator comes on at any other time, there is a problem with BSI. You will also see a CHECK BLIND SPOT SYSTEM message on the multi-information display. If this happens, take your vehicle to a dealer, and have it checked. For more information, see page . When this indicator is on, BSI is not working.
This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you select the ON mode by operating the engine start/stop button (see page ).
This indicator comes on as a reminder that you have turned off the blind spot information system (BSI).
When you turn the system on, the indicator will turn off.
The BSI indicator also comes on if the rear bumper becomes dirty while driving. You will see a BLIND SPOT NOT AVAILABLE message on the multi-information display. When you clean the rear bumper, the indicator should go off after you begin driving again.
519185
On models with blind spot information system (BSI)
Blind Spot Information System (BSI) Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
75
12/07/20 10:39:25 31TK4640_080
This shows how much fuel you have. It may show slightly more or less than the actual amount. The needle returns to the bottom after you turn off the ignition/power mode.
Fuel Gauge
Gauges
76
SPEEDOMETER
TEMPERATURE GAUGE
TACHOMETER
FUEL GAUGE
U.S. model with automatic transmission is shown.
MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY
Avoid driving with an extremely low f uel level. Running out of f uel could cause the engine to misf ire, damaging the catalytic converter.
12/07/20 10:39:30 31TK4640_081
This shows the temperature of the engines coolant. During normal operation, the pointer should rise from the bottom mark to about the middle of the gauge. In severe driving conditions, such as very hot weather or a long period of uphill driving, the pointer may rise to the upper zone. If it reaches the red (hot) mark, pull safely to the side of the road. Turn to page for instructions and precautions on checking the engine cooling system. If the pointer of the temperature
gauge reaches to or above the red mark, you will also see the WATER TEMP HOT message on the multi- information display. This will alert you that the engine should be cooled down.
593
Temperature Gauge
Gauges Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
77
12/07/20 10:39:34 31TK4640_082
You can select the displayed language and also customize some vehicle control settings to your liking with the multi-information display and the three buttons on the steering wheel (see page ).
When you unlock and open the drivers door, the display shows DRIVER 1 or DRIVER 2 depending on which remote transmitter/keyless access remote
you use, and the drivers seat and the outside mirrors move to the position stored in that remote transmitter/ keyless access remote (see page
).
The drivers ID (1 or 2) is displayed when the power mode is set to ON.
The multi-information display in the instrument panel displays various information and messages when the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position. Some of the messages help you operate your vehicle more comfortably. Others help to keep you aware of the periodic maintenance your vehicle needs for continued trouble-free driving.
Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages
and .
There are three types of messages: normal display messages, engine oil life and maintenance messages, and system messages.
:
184 187
79 170
On models with keyless access system Normal Display Messages
Multi-Information Display
78
Remote transmitter/keyless access remote 1 is used.
Remote transmitter/keyless access remote 2 is used.
12/07/20 10:39:41 31TK4640_083
These messages go off after several seconds.
With the ignition switch in the ON (II) position, the multi-information display changes as shown on page
each time you press the INFO ( / ) button or the SEL/RESET button.
When you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, your last selection is displayed.
Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages
and .
If you do not fasten your seat belt, you will also see a FASTEN SEAT BELT message on the multi- information display when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.
These messages go off several seconds after the key is inserted into the ignition switch.
:
184 187
81
CONTINUED
On models with keyless access system
Multi-Information Display Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
79
SEL/RESET BUTTON
INFO BUTTONS ( / )
A/T model is shown.
12/07/20 10:39:49 31TK4640_084
In the multi-information display, the system message is also displayed (see page ) and you can customize your vehicle control settings (see page ).
In the normal display mode, the upper segment displays trip computer information, such as fuel economy or average speed. The lower segment displays the odometer/trip meter (A/B), outside temperature, and engine oil life and maintenance item code(s).
The multi-information display consists of an upper segment and a lower segment.
You will see some keyless access system messages until you select the ON mode by operating the engine start/stop button. These messages can be customized (see page ).
Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages
and .
:
184 187
89
94
110
On models with keyless access system
Multi-Information Display
80
LOWER SEGMENT
U.S. model is shown.
UPPER SEGMENT
12/07/20 10:39:55 31TK4640_085
CONTINUED
Multi-Information Display Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
81
U.S. model is shown.
: Press the INFO button ( / ).
1 :
2 : SH-AWD models only
On models without navigation system only This display will be shown when the Bluetooth HandsFreeLink is activated.
HFL (See page 88)
Customized Settings (See page 94)
Trip Computer (See page 84)
Tire Pressure for Each Tire (See page 87)
SH-AWD Torque Distribution Monitor (See page 87)
1
2
12/08/03 20:54:54 31TK4640_086
The odometer shows the total distance your vehicle has been driven. It measures miles in U.S. models and kilometers in Canadian models. It is illegal under U.S. federal law and Canadian provincial/ territorial regulations to disconnect, reset, or alter the odometer with the intent to change the number of miles or kilometers indicated.
With the ignition switch in the ON (II) position, the lower part of the multi-information display changes as shown in the illustration, each time you press the SEL/RESET button.
Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages
and .
:
184 187
Multi-Information Display
Odometer
82
CanadaU.S.
ODOMETER
U.S. model is shown.
: Press the SEL/RESET button.
12/07/20 10:40:07 31TK4640_087
This meter shows the number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) driven since you last reset it. There are two trip meters: Trip A and Trip B. Each trip meter works independently, so you can keep track of two different distances.
In the customizing mode, you can set Trip A and average fuel economy A to reset when you refuel your vehicle (see page ).
To reset a trip meter, display it, and then press and hold the SEL/RESET button until the number resets to 0.0.
When you reset Trip A, average fuel economy A is reset at the same time. When you reset Trip B, average fuel economy B is reset.
105
Multi-Information Display
Trip Meter
Instrum ents
and C
ontrols
83
TRIP METER A
U.S. Canada
TRIP METER B
12/08/03 20:55:00 31TK4640_088
This shows your instant fuel economy.
This shows your vehicles average fuel economy in mpg (U.S. models) or liter/100 km (Canadian models) since you last reset Trip A or Trip B.
You can customize the Trip A and Average Fuel Economy A reset condition on the multi-information display (see page ).
Along with the trip meter, the trip computer calculates these values:
Average Fuel Economy Instant Fuel Economy Range Elapsed Time Average Vehicle Speed
105
Multi-Information Display
INSTANT FUEL MPG (U.S. models)/INSTANT FUEL L/100 km (Canadian models)
Average Fuel Economy A/B
Trip Computer
84
U.S. model is shown.
INSTANT FUEL
AVERAGE FUEL ECONOMY A
12/08/03 20:55:10 31TK4640_089
This shows the estimated distance you can travel on the fuel remaining in the fuel tank. This distance is estimated from the fuel economy you received over the last several miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada), so it will vary with changes in speed, traffic, etc.
This shows the accumulated traveling time since you last reset it. When you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, ELAPSED TIME is reset.
Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages
and .
You can customize the ELAPSED TIME reset conditions on the multi- information display (see page ).
This shows the average speed you are traveling in miles per hour (mph) for U.S. models or kilometers per hour (km/h) for Canadian models.
:
187184
106
Multi-Information Display
RANGE ELAPSED TIME AVG. SPEED
Instrum ents
and C
ontrols
85
12/08/03 20:55:17 31TK4640_090
This shows the outside Fahrenheit temperature in U.S. models, and Celsius temperature in Canadian models.
In certain weather conditions, temperature readings near freezing (32F, 0C) could mean that ice is forming on the road surface.
You can adjust the outside temperature display (see page ).
The temperature sensor is in the front bumper. The temperature reading can be affected by heat reflection from the road surface, engine heat, and the exhaust from surrounding traffic. This can cause an incorrect temperature reading when your vehicle speed is under 19 mph (30 km/h). When you start your trip, the sensor is not fully acclimatized, therefore it may take several minutes until the proper temperature is displayed.
This shows the remaining engine oil life. It shows 100% after the engine oil is replaced and the display is reset. The engine oil life is calculated based on engine operating conditions. For more information, see page .
104 531
Outside Temperature Engine Oil Life
Multi-Information Display
86
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE
ENGINE OIL LIFE U.S.
U.S. model is shown.
Canada
12/08/03 20:55:25 31TK4640_091
You can see the pressure of each tire in this monitor. If one or more tires are low, inflate them to the correct pressure. For more information, see page .
This monitor shows how much torque is being delivered to each wheel. For more information, see page .
515 504
SH-AWD models only
Tire Pressure Monitor SH-AWD Torque Distribution Monitor
Multi-Information Display Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
87
U.S. Canada
U.S. model is shown.
Example: Example:Technology Package is shown.
Technology Package is shown.
12/08/03 20:55:32 31TK4640_092
You can receive or make phone calls from your cell phone through your vehicles HandsFreeLink (HFL) system without touching your cell phone.
To use the system, your cell phone and the HFL system must be linked. Not all cell phones are compatible with this system. Refer to page
for instructions on how to link your cell phone to HFL and how to receive or make phone calls, or visit the acura.com/handsfreelink website. In Canada, visit
, or call (888) 528- 7876.
You can see HFL information on the navigation screen (see page ).
412
427
Bluetooth
On models without navigation system
www. handsfreelink.ca
On models with navigation system
Multi-Information Display
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
88
U.S. model is shown.
12/08/03 20:55:38 31TK4640_093
If there is a problem with your vehicle, for example the engine oil level is low or a door is not fully closed, the multi-information display will show you the problem. It does this by interrupting the current display with one or more messages.
The system message(s) triggers the appropriate indicator(s) on the instrument panel, including the system message indicator, to come on. The system message indicator does not go off until the problem(s) is corrected.
You will also hear a beep when the system message comes on for the first time.
Most of the messages are displayed for about 5 seconds, and then the normal display returns. If there are several system messages to be shown, the display switches these messages every 5 seconds.
To switch the message(s) before 5 seconds have elapsed, press the INFO ( / ) button on the steering wheel.
Even if you press the INFO ( / ) button, some messages stay on or come on again at regular intervals until the problem is corrected.
If the system message indicator remains lit on the instrument panel, you can see the corresponding message(s) again by pressing the INFO ( / ) button repeatedly.
On the next page is a list of all messages:
CONTINUED
System Messages
Multi-Information Display Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
89
A/T model is shown.
SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR
12/07/20 10:41:04 31TK4640_094
See page 33
See page 20
See page 20
See page 33
See page 12
See page 212
See page 553
See page 598
See page 596
See page 597
See page 595
See page 508
See page 510
See page 510
Multi-Information Display
90
U.S.
Canada
U.S.
Canada
Canada
U.S.
Canada
U.S.
SH-AWD model only
12/07/20 10:41:16 31TK4640_095
CONTINUED
See page 70
See page 488
See page 490
See pages 75 and 526
See pages 75 and 526
See page 77
See page 142
See page 516
See page 517
See page 516
See page 517
See page 515
See page 494
See page 577
See page 73
See page 505
See page 505
On models without
keyless access
system
On models with
keyless access
system
A/T model
Multi-Information Display Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
91
U.S. model shown
U.S. model shown
U.S.
Canada
SH-AWD model only
SH-AWD model only
12/08/03 20:55:52 31TK4640_096
See page 196
See page 196
See page 193
See page 194
See page 198
See page 471
See page 548
See page 151
See page 532
See page 533
See page 534
Multi-Information Display
On models with keyless access system
92
On models without keyless access system
Canadian models only
12/08/03 20:56:01 31TK4640_097
See page 189
See page 188
See page 191
See page 200
See page 199
See page 188
See page 190
See page 191
See page 188
Multi-Information Display Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
93
A/T model only
A/T model only
A/T model only
M/T model only
12/07/20 10:41:51 31TK4640_098
You can customize some vehicle control settings. To change the settings, the ignition switch must be in the ON (II) position, and the vehicle must be stopped with the transmission in Park (automatic) or with the parking brake set (manual).
If you try to enter the customizing mode while the vehicle is moving, you will see a MUST STOP AND SHIFT TO PARK TO CHANGE SETTINGS (automatic) or MUST STOP AND SET PARK BRAKE TO CHANGE SETTINGS (manual) message and you cannot change the settings.
You can customize some vehicle control settings for DRIVER 1 and DRIVER 2 separately.
To have the drivers ID detected, make sure the drivers door is unlocked with a corresponding remote transmitter/keyless access remote.
Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) Mode is the equivalent of LOCK (0), ACCESSORY Mode is the equivalent of ACCESSORY (I), and ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages and
.
If you turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0) position, move the shift lever out of Park (automatic) or release the parking brake (manual), the display will change to the normal screen.
:
187 184
Multi-Information Display
Customized Settings
94
12/07/20 10:41:58 31TK4640_099
Refer to the table on the following pages about the settings you want to customize.
If you use the key to unlock the drivers door, the system cannot recognize either DRIVER 1 or DRIVER 2.
To enter the customizing mode, press either INFO button ( / ) repeatedly until CUSTOMIZE SETTINGS is displayed, then press the SEL/RESET button.
CONTINUED
On models without keyless access system
Multi-Information Display Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
95
DRIVERS ID
Press the SEL/RESET button.
U.S. model is shown.
12/07/20 10:42:03 31TK4640_100
LOW MIN OFF
METER SETUP (P.101)
POSITION SETUP (P.112)
LANGUAGE SELECTION
ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP. DISPLAY
TRIP A RESET WITH REFUEL ELAPSED TIME RESET
ADJUST ALARM VOLUME
AUTO INTERIOR ILLUMINATION
KEYLESS START GUIDANCE SCREENS MEMORY POSITION LINK
Changes the language used in the display.
Changes the outside temperature reading above or below its current reading.
Causes trip meter A and the average fuel economy to reset when you refuel. Resets the elapsed time of your current trip.
Changes the indicator alarm volumes into three levels.
Changes the interior light sensitivity to your liking.
Changes the display of the keyless start guidance screens. Changes the drivers seat and the outside mirror positions to a stored setting.
103
104
105
106
108
109
110
113
ENGLISH FRENCH SPANISH
5F 0F 5F (U.S.)
3C 0C 3C (Canada) ON OFF IGN OFF TRIP A TRIP B HIGH MID LOW MAX HIGH MID ON OFF ON OFF
1 : 2 :
Default setting Only on models with keyless access system
Group Setup Menu Item Description PageSetting Option
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Multi-Information Display
96
12/07/20 10:42:13 31TK4640_101
DescriptionMenu Item
CONTINUED
Group Setup PageSetting Option Changes which doors unlock when you use the remote or grab the drivers door handle. Causes some exterior lights to blink when you unlock/lock the doors by grabbing or touching the sensor/pushing the button on the drivers door handle. Causes the beeper to sound when you unlock/lock the doors by grabbing or touching the sensor/ pushing the button on the drivers door handle. Changes how long (in seconds) the interior lights stay on after you close the doors. Changes how long (in seconds) the exterior lights stay on after you close the drivers door.
Changes the timing of when the headlights come on. The headlight switch needs to be in the AUTO position.
DOOR UNLOCK MODE
KEYLESS ACCESS LIGHT FLASH
KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP
INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING TIME HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER
AUTO LIGHT SENSITIVITY
KEYLESS ACCESS SETUP (P.115)
LIGHTING SETUP (P.120)
116
117
118
121
122
123
60 sec
0 sec
LOW MIN
DRIVER DOOR ALL DOORS ON OFF
ON OFF
15 sec 30 sec 60 sec 30 sec 15 sec MAX HIGH MID
1 : 2 :
Default setting Only on models with keyless access system
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
Multi-Information Display Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
97
12/07/20 10:42:19 31TK4640_102
DescriptionMenu Item PageGroup Setup Setting Option Changes when the doors automatically lock.
Changes when the doors automatically unlock.
Changes which doors unlock with the remote transmitter/keyless access remote on the first push. The exterior lights flash each time you press the LOCK or UNLOCK button. A beeper will also sound when you press the LOCK button twice. Changes how long it takes (in seconds) for the doors to relock and the security system to set after you unlock but do not open the door. Set/Cancel all the customized settings as default.
AUTO DOOR LOCK
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
KEY AND REMOTE UNLOCK MODE
KEYLESS LOCK ACKNOWLEDGMENT
SECURITY RELOCK TIMER
127
128
130
131
133
134
DOOR SETUP (P.125)
DEFAULT ALL (P.134)
OFF WITH VEH SPD SHIFT FROM P (A/T only) OFF DRIVER DOOR With SHIFT to P (A/T only) ALL DOORS With SHIFT to P (A/T only) DRIVER DOOR With IGN OFF ALL DOORS With IGN OFF DRIVER DOOR ALL DOORS
ON OFF
30 sec 60 sec 90 sec CANCEL SET
Default setting1 : 2 : 3 :
Default setting for automatic transmission Default setting for manual transmission
1
2
1
1
1
Multi-Information Display
98
12/07/20 10:42:25 31TK4640_103
You can customize some of the vehicle control settings to your preference. Here are the settings you can customize:
METER SETUP
Each time you press the INFO ( / ) button, the screen changes as
shown on the next page. Press the INFO ( / ) button until you see the setup you want to customize, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.
If you do not make any changes, select EXIT. The display returns to the normal display.
LIGHTING SETUP
If you want the settings as they were when the vehicle left the factory, select DEFAULT ALL, as described on page .
POSITION SETUP KEYLESS ACCESS SETUP
DOOR SETUP
When you want to change the vehicle control settings, press the INFO ( / ) button to select CHANGE SETTINGS, then press the SEL/RESET button.
: Only on models with keyless access system
134
CONTINUED
Customize Settings
Multi-Information Display Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
99
12/07/20 10:42:34 31TK4640_104
Multi-Information Display
100
METER SETUP See page 101.
POSITION SETUP See page 112.
KEYLESS ACCESS SETUP See page 115.
LIGHTING SETUP See page 120.
DOOR SETUP See page 125.
DEFAULT ALL See page 134.
: On models with keyless access system only
: Press the SEL/RESET button.
: Press the INFO button ( / ).
12/07/20 10:42:39 31TK4640_105
LANGUAGE SELECTION ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP. DISPLAY
ADJUST ALARM VOLUME AUTO INTERIOR ILLUMINATION
KEYLESS START GUIDANCE SCREENS
Here are the selectable custom settings for the meter setup:
TRIP A RESET WITH REFUEL ELAPSED TIME RESET
While METER SETUP is shown, press the SEL/RESET button to enter the customize mode.
Each time you press the INFO ( / ) button, the screen changes as
shown in the illustration. Press the INFO ( / ) button until you see the setting you want to customize, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.
CONTINUED
On models with keyless access system
Meter Setup
Multi-Information Display Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
101
12/07/20 10:42:47 31TK4640_106
Multi-Information Display
102
See page 109.See page 103. See page 104. See page 105. See page 106. See page 108.
See page 110.
: Press the SEL/RESET button.
: Press the INFO button ( / ).
On models with keyless access system only
12/07/20 10:42:51 31TK4640_107
Language Selection
There are three language selections you can make: English, French, and Spanish. To choose the language you want, follow these instructions:
You can choose this item to customize from METER SETUP by pressing the INFO ( / ) button repeatedly.
Press the SEL/RESET button to see the selections.
Select the desired language by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.
When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customizable item screen.
If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to LANGUAGE SELECTION and repeat the procedure again.
CONTINUED
Multi-Information Display Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
103
12/07/20 10:42:59 31TK4640_108
Adjust Outside Temp. Display
If you sometimes find that the temperature reading is a few degrees above or below the actual temperature, you can adjust it by following these instructions:
You can choose this item to customize from METER SETUP by pressing the INFO ( / ) button repeatedly. Press the SEL/RESET button to enter the setting.
The displayed number is the current adjustment above or below the outside temperature.
Adjust the outside temperature value by pressing the INFO ( / ) button repeatedly. Press the SEL/RESET button to set the desired value.
When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customizable item screen.
If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP. DISPLAY and repeat the procedure again.
Multi-Information Display
104
U.S. models Canadian models Canadian modelsU.S. models
12/07/20 10:43:08 31TK4640_109
Press the SEL/RESET button to see the selections.
Select ON or OFF by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/ RESET button.
When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customizable item screen.
To cause Trip A and average fuel for trip A to reset every time you refuel your vehicle, follow these instructions:
You can choose this item to customize from METER SETUP by pressing the INFO ( / ) button repeatedly.
If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to TRIP A RESET WITH REFUEL and repeat the procedure again.
CONTINUED
Trip A Reset With Refuel
Multi-Information Display Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
105
12/07/20 10:43:16 31TK4640_110
Elapsed Time Reset
You can choose this item to customize from METER SETUP by pressing the INFO ( / ) button repeatedly.
Press the SEL/RESET button to see the selections.
Select the desired setting by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.
There are three elapsed time reset choices you can make:
TRIP A The elapsed time is reset when Trip A is reset.
TRIP B The elapsed time is reset when Trip B is reset.
IGN OFF The elapsed time is reset when you turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position.
Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) Mode is the equivalent of LOCK (0). For more information, see pages
and .
:
184 187
Multi-Information Display
106
12/07/20 10:43:24 31TK4640_111
When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customizable item screen.
If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to ELAPSED TIME RESET and repeat the procedure again.
Multi-Information Display Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
107
12/07/20 10:43:28 31TK4640_112
Adjust Alarm Volume
Select the warning alarm volume from three levels.
You can choose this item to customize from METER SETUP by pressing the INFO ( / ) button repeatedly.
Press the SEL/RESET button to see the selections.
Select the desired level by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/ RESET button.
When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customizable item screen.
If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to ADJUST ALARM VOLUME and repeat the procedure again.
Multi-Information Display
108
12/07/20 10:43:35 31TK4640_113
Auto Interior Illumination While the headlight switch is turned on, the interior lights gradually dim, as the outside light level gets low. You can customize at which outside light level the lights start to dim.
There are MAX, HIGH, MID, LOW and MIN levels and OFF for the auto interior illumination settings.
If you want the illuminations to start dimming as early as possible, select MAX. For illuminations to start dimming as late as possible, select MIN. Choose HIGH, MID, or LOW for levels in between.
To disable the auto interior illumination function, select OFF.
You can choose this item to customize from METER SETUP by pressing the INFO ( / ) button repeatedly.
Press the SEL/RESET button to see the selections.
Select the desired setting by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.
CONTINUED
Multi-Information Display Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
109
12/07/20 10:43:44 31TK4640_114
When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customizable item screen.
If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to AUTO INTERIOR ILLUMINATION and repeat the procedure again.
When this item is set to ON, you will see some guidance messages on the multi-information display. You can change this setting between on and off. For more information on start guidance messages, see page .
You can choose this item to customize from METER SETUP by pressing the INFO ( / ) button repeatedly.
188
Keyless Start Guidance Screens On models with keyless access system
Multi-Information Display
110
12/07/20 10:43:50 31TK4640_115
Select ON or OFF by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/ RESET button.
Press the SEL/RESET button to see the selections.
When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customizable item screen.
If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to KEYLESS START GUIDANCE SCREENS and repeat the procedure again.
Multi-Information Display Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
111
12/07/20 10:43:56 31TK4640_116
You can customize the MEMORY POSITION LINK setting in position setup.
While POSITION SETUP is shown, press the SEL/RESET button to enter the customize mode.
Each time you press the INFO ( / ) button, the screen changes as
shown in the illustration. Press the INFO ( / ) button until you see the custom setting then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.
Position Setup
Multi-Information Display
112
See page 113.
: Press the SEL/RESET button.
: Press the INFO button ( / ).
12/07/20 10:44:02 31TK4640_117
Memory Position Link
On models with keyless access system
When Memory Position Link is set to ON, the drivers seat and the outside mirrors move to the positions stored in memory. To cause the memory to activate, open the drivers door with the remote transmitter. On models with keyless access system, open the drivers door with the remote, or grab the door handle while carrying the remote.
To set the memory positions, see page .
For information on using the remote, see page .
You can choose this item to customize from POSITION SETUP by pressing the INFO ( /
) button repeatedly.
Press the SEL/RESET button to see the selections.
Select ON or OFF by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/ RESET button.
170
173
CONTINUED
Multi-Information Display Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
113
12/07/20 10:44:10 31TK4640_118
When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customizable item screen.
If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to MEMORY POSITION LINK and repeat the procedure again.
Multi-Information Display
114
12/07/20 10:44:13 31TK4640_119
Each time you press the INFO ( / ) button, the screen changes as
shown in the illustration. Press the INFO ( / ) button, until you see the setting you want to customize, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.
While KEYLESS ACCESS SETUP is shown, press the SEL/RESET button to enter the customize mode.
KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP
KEYLESS ACCESS LIGHT FLASH
DOOR UNLOCK MODE
There are three custom settings for the keyless access setup:
CONTINUED
On models with keyless access system Keyless Access Setup
Multi-Information Display Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
115
See page 116.
See page 117.
See page 118.
: Press the SEL/RESET button.
: Press the INFO button ( / ).
12/07/20 10:44:21 31TK4640_120
Press the SEL/RESET button to see the selections.
When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customizable item screen.
To select whether the drivers door or all doors unlock when you open the drivers door with the remote or by grabbing the door handle (while carrying the remote), follow these instructions:
You can choose this item to customize from KEYLESS ACCESS SETUP by pressing the INFO ( /
) button repeatedly.
Select DRIVER DOOR or ALL DOORS by pressing the INFO ( /
) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.
If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to DOOR UNLOCK MODE and repeat the procedure again.
Door Unlock Mode
Multi-Information Display
116
12/07/20 10:44:28 31TK4640_121
Press the SEL/RESET button to see the selections.
Select ON or OFF by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/ RESET button.
When KEYLESS ACCESS LIGHT FLASH is set to ON, some exterior lights blink twice when you unlock the doors by grabbing the drivers door handle while carrying the remote.
You can choose this item to customize from KEYLESS ACCESS SETUP by pressing the INFO ( /
) button repeatedly.
The same exterior lights blink once when you lock the doors by pushing the door lock button while carrying the remote.
Keyless Access Light Flash
CONTINUED
Multi-Information Display Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
117
12/07/20 10:44:35 31TK4640_122
When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customizable item screen.
When KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP is set to ON, the beeper sounds twice when you unlock the doors by grabbing the drivers door handle while carrying the remote.
If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to KEYLESS ACCESS LIGHT FLASH and repeat the procedure again.
You can choose this item to customize from KEYLESS ACCESS SETUP by pressing the INFO ( /
) button repeatedly.
When you lock the doors by pushing the door lock button while carrying the remote, the beeper sounds once.
Keyless Access Beep
Multi-Information Display
118
12/07/20 10:44:42 31TK4640_123
Press the SEL/RESET button to see the selections.
When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customizable item screen.Select ON or OFF by pressing the
INFO ( / ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/ RESET button.
If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP and repeat the procedure again.
Multi-Information Display Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
119
12/07/20 10:44:47 31TK4640_124
INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING TIME HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER
While LIGHTING SETUP is shown, press the SEL/RESET button to enter the customize mode.
Each time you press the INFO ( / ) button, the screen changes as
shown in the illustration. Press the INFO ( / ) button until you see the setting you want to customize, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.
Here are the three custom settings for the lighting setup:
AUTO LIGHT SENSITIVITY
Lighting Setup
Multi-Information Display
120
: Press the SEL/RESET button.
: Press the INFO button ( / ).
See page 121.
See page 122.
See page 123.
12/07/20 10:44:54 31TK4640_125
Interior Light Dimming Time
Press the SEL/RESET button to see the selections.
When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customizable item screen.
If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING TIME and repeat the procedure again.
The interior lights fade out when you close all doors. To change how long the lights stay on before they fade out, follow these instructions:
You can choose this item to customize from LIGHTING SETUP by pressing the INFO ( /
) button repeatedly.
Select the desired setting (15sec, 30sec, or 60sec) by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/ RESET button.
CONTINUED
Multi-Information Display Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
121
12/07/20 10:45:02 31TK4640_126
Headlight Auto Off Timer
You can choose this item to customize from LIGHTING SETUP by pressing the INFO ( /
) button repeatedly.
Press the SEL/RESET button to see the selections.
The headlights, parking lights, side marker lights, taillights, and license plate lights go off after the selected time when you remove the key from the ignition switch and close the drivers door. On models with keyless access system, the lights go off after the selected time when you close the drivers door and take the remote with you. To change how long the lights stay on before they go off, follow these instructions:
Select the desired setting (60 sec, 30 sec, 15 sec or 0 sec) by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/ RESET button.
Multi-Information Display
122
12/07/20 10:45:09 31TK4640_127
Auto Light Sensitivity
When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customizable item screen.
If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER and repeat the procedure again.
The headlights automatically come on when the headlight switch is in the AUTO position and the ambient light reaches a changeable level. You can select the auto light sensitivity from the following five levels: MAX The headlights come on when it is bright.
HIGH The headlights come on when it is somewhat bright.
MID The headlights come on when it is as bright as sunset or sunrise.
LOW The headlights come on when it is somewhat dark.
MIN The headlights come on when it is dark.
You can choose this item to customize from LIGHTING SETUP by pressing the INFO ( /
) button repeatedly.
CONTINUED
Multi-Information Display Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
123
12/07/20 10:45:18 31TK4640_128
When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customizable item screen.
If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to AUTO LIGHT SENSITIVITY and repeat the procedure again.
Press the SEL/RESET button to see the selections.
Select the desired setting (MAX, HIGH, MID, LOW or MIN) by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.
Multi-Information Display
124
12/07/20 10:45:23 31TK4640_129
AUTO DOOR LOCK
Here are the five custom settings for the door setup:
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
SECURITY RELOCK TIMER
KEYLESS LOCK ACKNOWLEDGMENT
KEY AND REMOTE UNLOCK MODE
While DOOR SETUP is shown, press the SEL/RESET button to enter the customize mode.
Each time you press the INFO ( / ) button, the screen changes as
shown in the illustration. Press the INFO ( / ) button until you see the setting you want to customize, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.
CONTINUED
Multi-Information Display
Door Setup
Instrum ents
and C
ontrols
125
12/07/20 10:45:31 31TK4640_130
Multi-Information Display
126
: Press the INFO button ( / ).
: Press the SEL/RESET button.
See page 127. See page 128. See page 130. See page 131. See page 133.
12/07/20 10:45:34 31TK4640_131
Auto Door Lock
(Automatic transmission model only)
There are three settings you can choose from:
SHIFT FROM P The doors lock whenever you move the shift lever out of Park.
Select the desired setting by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.
Press the SEL/RESET button to enter the selecting mode.OFF
The auto door lock is deactivated all the time.
WITH VEH SPD The doors lock when the vehicle speed reaches about 10 mph (about 15 km/h).
You can choose this item to customize from DOOR SETUP by pressing the INFO ( / ) button repeatedly.
CONTINUED
Multi-Information Display Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
127
A/T model is shown.
12/07/20 10:45:42 31TK4640_132
When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customizable item screen.
If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to AUTO DOOR LOCK and repeat the procedure again.
There are five possible settings for automatic transmission models and three possible settings for manual transmission models.
Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) Mode is the equivalent of LOCK (0). For more information, see pages
and .
OFF The auto door unlock is deactivated all the time.
DRIVER DOOR With SHIFT to P The drivers door unlocks when you move the shift lever to Park with the brake pedal depressed.
ALL DOORS With SHIFT to P All the doors unlock when you move the shift lever to Park with the brake pedal depressed.
DRIVER DOOR With IGN OFF The drivers door unlocks when you turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position.
ALL DOORS With IGN OFF All the doors unlock when you turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position.
:
184 187
Auto Door Unlock
Automatic transmission model only
Automatic transmission model only
Multi-Information Display
128
A/T model is shown.
12/07/20 10:45:51 31TK4640_133
Press the SEL/RESET button to see the selections.
Select the desired setting by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.
You can choose this item to customize from DOOR SETUP by pressing the INFO ( / ) button repeatedly.
When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customizable item screen.
CONTINUED
Multi-Information Display Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
129
A/T model is shown.
12/07/20 10:45:58 31TK4640_134
Select the desired setting by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.
Press the SEL/RESET button to enter the selecting mode.
You can select whether the drivers door or all the doors unlock the first time you press the unlock button on the remote transmitter/keyless access remote.
If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to AUTO DOOR UNLOCK and repeat the procedure again.
You can choose this item to customize from DOOR SETUP by pressing the INFO ( / ) button repeatedly.
Key and Remote Unlock Mode
Multi-Information Display
130
12/07/20 10:46:04 31TK4640_135
Keyless Lock Acknowledgment When you press the LOCK button on the remote transmitter or the keyless access remote, some exterior lights flash, and a beeper sounds when you push the LOCK button again within 5 seconds to verify that the doors and the trunk are locked and the security system has set (see page ). You can customize the exterior lights not to flash and the beeper not to sound.
When you press the UNLOCK button on the remote transmitter or the keyless access remote to unlock the drivers door/all the doors (depending on the customize setting), the exterior lights blink twice to verify that the door(s) is unlocked and the security system is turned off.
To turn this feature on or off, follow these instructions.
If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to KEY AND REMOTE UNLOCK MODE and repeat the procedure again.
When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customizable item screen.
You can choose this item to customize from DOOR SETUP by pressing the INFO ( / ) button repeatedly.
395
CONTINUED
Multi-Information Display Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
131
12/07/20 10:46:12 31TK4640_136
When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customizable item screen.
Press the SEL/RESET button to enter the selecting mode.
Select ON or OFF by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/ RESET button.
If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to KEYLESS LOCK ACKNOWLEDGMENT and repeat the procedure again.
Multi-Information Display
132
12/07/20 10:46:18 31TK4640_137
Press the SEL/RESET button to enter the selecting mode.
Select the desired setting by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.
You can choose this item to customize from DOOR SETUP by pressing the INFO ( / ) button repeatedly.
If you unlock the doors with the remote transmitter or the keyless access remote, but do not open any of the doors within 30 seconds, the doors automatically relock, and the security system sets.
You can change this relock time from 30 seconds to 60 or 90 seconds.
When you unlock the doors by touching either front door handle while carrying the keyless access remote, the relock time is fixed in 30 seconds.
Security Relock Timer
On models with keyless access system
CONTINUED
Multi-Information Display Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
133
12/07/20 10:46:26 31TK4640_138
To set the default settings, press the INFO ( / ) button to select SET then press the SEL/RESET button.
If you want to cancel DEFAULT ALL, select CANCEL, then press the SEL/RESET button. The screen goes back to the previous display.
If you want to set the default settings, press the INFO ( / ) button to select DEFAULT ALL, then press the SEL/RESET button.
When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customizable item screen.
If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to SECURITY RELOCK TIMER and repeat the procedure again.
DEFAULT ALL
Multi-Information Display
134
12/07/20 10:46:33 31TK4640_139
When DEFAULT ALL is set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen returns to the default all setting display.
If the setting is not successfully completed, FAILED is shown for several seconds, and then the screen goes back to the normal message mode. Repeat the same procedure to select DEFAULT ALL.
Multi-Information Display Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
135
12/07/20 10:46:37 31TK4640_140
To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel. If equipped Refer to the navigation system owners manual.
1 : 2 : 3 : 4 : Switch location varies on models.
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
136
SEAT HEATER SWITCHES
PADDLE SHIFTERS
CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONS
WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS
STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENTS
MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY BUTTONS
HORN
KEYLESS ACCESS REMOTE SLOT
ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON
A/T model with navigation system is shown.
VOICE CONTROL BUTTONS for NAVIGATION SYSTEM / BLUETOOTH HANDSFREELINK SYSTEM
SEAT HEATER/VENTILATION BUTTONS
(P. 387)
(P. 407, 425)
(P. 146) (P. 79)
(P. 401)
(P. 197)
(P. 204) (P. 202)
(P. 184)
REMOTE AUDIO CONTROL BUTTONS
HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS/ FOG LIGHTS (P. 139, 143)
INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS (P. 143)
(P. 525)
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM (BSI) OFF BUTTON
HEADLIGHT WASHER BUTTON
(P. 511)
(P. 138)
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF INDICATOR (P. 34)
HAZARD WARNING BUTTON
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/ HEATED MIRROR BUTTON (P. 145, 169)
PHONE BUTTON (P. 424)
INTERFACE DIAL (P. 285) SELECTOR KNOB (P. 236)
(P. 145)
(P. 499) (P. 137)
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM OFF SWITCH
13
2
2
2
2
3
2
4
12/07/20 10:46:46 31TK4640_141
MIST OFF INT Intermittent LO Low speed HI High speed Windshield washers
Push the right lever up or down to select a position.
The wipers run at high speed until you release the lever.
The wipers are not activated.
The wipers run at low speed.
The wipers run at high speed.
Vary the delay by turning the adjustment ring. If you turn it to the shortest delay ( position), the wipers change to low speed operation when the vehicle speed exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).
The length of the wipe interval is varied automatically according to vehicles speed.
Pull the wiper control lever toward you, and hold it. The washers spray until you release the lever. The wipers run at low speed, then complete a few more sweeps after you release the lever.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
CONTINUED
MIST
OFF
LO
HI
INT
Windshield Washer
Windshield Wipers and Washers Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
137
ADJUSTMENT RING
12/07/20 10:46:55 31TK4640_142
When you activate the windshield washer with the headlights turned on, the headlight washer will be activated under certain conditions. For more information, see
section in the next column.
The headlight washers use the same fluid reservoir as the windshield washers.
The headlight washers can be operated at any time by pressing the headlight washer button located next to the steering wheel column. The headlights must be turned on to use this button. In addition, the headlight washer will automatically turn on the first time you turn on the windshield washers while the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position.
Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages
and .
:
184 187
Canadian SH-AWD models only Headlight Washers
Windshield Wipers and Washers
Headlight Washers
Canadian SH-AWD models only
138
HEADLIGHT WASHER BUTTON
12/07/20 10:47:00 31TK4640_143
Push down on the left lever to signal a left turn and up to signal a right turn. To signal a lane change, push lightly on the lever and hold it. The lever will return to the center when you release it or complete a turn.
Turning the switch to the position turns on the parking lights, taillights, instrument panel lights, side-marker lights, and rear license plate lights.
Turning the switch to the position turns on the headlights.
When the light switch is in either of these positions, the lights on indicator comes on as a reminder.
This indicator stays on if you leave the light switch on and turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0) position.
Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) Mode is the equivalent of LOCK (0) and ACCESSORY Mode is the equivalent of ACCESSORY (I). For more information, see pages
and .
If you leave the lights on with the key removed from the ignition switch, or with the power mode in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), you will hear reminder beeps when you open the drivers door.
Turn signal Off Parking and instrument panel lights AUTO Headlights on High beams Flash high beams Fog lights off Fog lights on
:
184 187 1. 2. 3.
4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
CONTINUED
Turn Signals and Headlights
Turn Signal
Headlights
Instrum ents
and C
ontrols
139
12/07/20 10:47:08 31TK4640_144
The automatic lighting feature turns on the headlights and all other exterior lights when it senses low ambient light.
To turn on automatic lighting, turn the light switch to AUTO. The lights will come on automatically when the outside light level becomes low (at dusk, for example). The lights on indicator comes on as a reminder. The lights and indicator will turn off automatically when the system senses high ambient light.
Push the left lever forward until you hear a click. The blue high beam indicator will come on (see page ). Pull the lever back to return to the low beams.
To flash the high beams, pull the lever back lightly, then release it. The high beams will stay on as long as you hold the lever back.
The lights will remain on when you turn off the ignition switch. They will turn off automatically when you remove the key and open the drivers door. To turn them on again, either turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position or turn the light switch to the position.
Even with the automatic lighting feature turned on, we recommend that you turn on the lights manually when driving at night or in a dense fog, or when you enter dark areas such as long tunnels or parking facilities.
The lights will remain on when you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). They will turn off automatically when you open the drivers door and take the remote with you. To turn them on again, either set the power mode to ON or turn the light switch to the
position.
To change the AUTO LIGHT SENSITIVITY setting, see page
.
Do not leave the light switch in AUTO if you will not be driving the vehicle for an extended period (a week or more). You should also turn off the lights if you plan to leave the engine idling or off for a long time.
71
123
On all modelsOn models without keyless access system
On models with keyless access systemAUTO
High Beams
Headlights
140
12/07/20 10:47:15 31TK4640_145
The automatic lighting feature is controlled by a sensor located on top of the dashboard. Do not cover this sensor or spill liquids on it.
The automatic lighting off feature turns off the headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights within 15 seconds after you remove the key and close the drivers door, or on models with keyless access system, set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), take the remote with you, and close the drivers door.
If you remove the key (or the vehicle is in VEHICLE OFF mode on models with keyless access system), and the drivers door is opened and closed, the automatic lighting off feature activates with the headlight switch in the or position, or the lights turned on by setting the switch in the AUTO position.
To change the HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER setting, see page .
If you turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position with the headlight switch on, but do not open the door and get out, the lights turn off after 10 minutes (3 minutes, if the switch is in the AUTO position).
Your vehicle has the engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. For more information on how to select the power mode, see page .
On models with keyless access system
:
184
122
CONTINUED
Automatic Lighting Off Feature
Headlights Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
141
LIGHT SENSOR
12/07/20 10:47:22 31TK4640_146
If you see a CHECK DRL SYSTEM message on the multi- information display, there is a problem with the daytime running light system. Take your vehicle to a dealer to have it checked.
The headlights revert to normal operation when you turn them on with the switch.
Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) Mode is the equivalent of LOCK (0). For more information, see pages
and .
With the headlight switch off or in the position, the high beam headlights and the high beam indicator come on with reduced brightness when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position and release the parking brake. They remain on until you turn the ignition switch off, even if you set the parking brake.
Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages
and .
The lights will turn on again when you unlock or open the drivers door. If you unlock the door, but do not open it within 15 seconds, the lights will go off. With the drivers door open, you will hear a lights on reminder beeper.
:
: 184 187
184 187
Headlights
Daytime Running Lights
142
12/07/20 10:47:29 31TK4640_147
Turn the fog lights on and off by turning the switch next to the headlight switch.
You can use the fog lights only when the headlights are on low beam.
With the light switch in the AUTO position, you can also use the fog lights when the headlights turn on automatically. They will go off when the headlights turn off.
Adjust the brightness of the instrument panel by pressing the or button with the ignition switch in the ON (II) position. Press the button to increase the brightness and the button to decrease it.
Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages
and .
:
184 187
CONTINUED
Fog Lights Instrument Panel Brightness
Fog Lights, Instrument Panel Brightness Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
143
FOG LIGHT SWITCH ADJUSTMENT BUTTONS
12/07/20 10:47:37 31TK4640_148
To reduce glare at night, the instrument panel illumination dims when you turn the light switch to
or . To cancel the glare reduction function, set the brightness to the highest level, then press the button. You will hear a beep when it is canceled.
When the brightness reaches the maximum level, BRIGHTNESS MAXIMUM LEVEL appears on the display.
The level of brightness is shown on the multi-information display while you adjust it. It goes out 5 seconds after you finish adjusting.
If your vehicle is equipped with the navigation system, the navigation system screen will also go to full brightness. This can be helpful when using the headlights during daylight hours.
Instrument Panel Brightness
144
U.S. model is shown.
12/07/20 10:47:42 31TK4640_149
Push the button between the center vents to turn on the hazard warning lights (four-way flashers). This causes all four outside turn signals and both indicators in the instrument panel to flash. Use the hazard warning lights if you need to park in a dangerous area near heavy traffic, or if your vehicle is disabled.
The rear window defogger clears fog, frost, and thin ice from the window. Push the defogger button to turn it on and off. The indicator in the button comes on to show the defogger is on. If you do not turn it off, the defogger will shut itself off within about 10 to 30 minutes according to the outside temperature. It also shuts off when you turn off the ignition switch, or set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) on
models with keyless access system. You have to turn it on again when you restart the vehicle.
Make sure the rear window is clear and you have good visibility before starting to drive.
The defogger wires on the inside of the rear window can be accidentally damaged. When cleaning the glass, always wipe side-to-side.
Pushing this button also turns the mirror heaters on or off. For more information, see page .169
Hazard Warning Button Rear Window Defogger
Hazard Warning Button, Rear Window Defogger Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
145
HAZARD WARNING BUTTON
U.S. model is shown.
12/07/20 10:47:50 31TK4640_150
Push the lever up to lock the steering wheel in that position.
Make any steering wheel adjustments before you start driving.
Push the lever under the steering column all the way down.
Move the steering wheel up or down, and in or out, so it points toward your chest, not toward your face. Make sure you can see the instrument panel gauges and indicators.
Make sure you have securely locked the steering wheel in place by trying to move it up, down, in, and out.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Steering Wheel Adjustments
146
LEVER
Adjusting the steering wheel position while driving may cause you to lose control of the vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only when the vehicle is stopped.
12/07/20 10:47:56 31TK4640_151
You should have received a key number tag with your key. You will need this key number if you ever have to get a lost key replaced. Use only an Acura-approved key blank.
Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them.
Protect the key from direct sunlight, high temperature, and high humidity.
Keep the keys away from liquids. If they get wet, dry them immediately with a soft cloth.
These keys contain electronic circuits that are activated by the immobilizer system. They will not work to start the engine if the circuits are damaged.
The valet key does not contain a battery. Do not try to take it apart.The valet key works only in the
ignition and the drivers door lock. You can keep the trunk pass-through cover and the glove box locked when you leave your vehicle and the valet key at a parking facility.
The master key fits all the locks on your vehicle.
CONTINUED
On models without keyless access system
Keys and Locks Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
147
VALET KEY (GRAY)
KEY NUMBER TAG
MASTER KEY WITH REMOTE TRANSMITTER
12/07/20 10:48:05 31TK4640_152
Always make sure the key is fully extended when you insert it to the ignition switch. If the key is not fully extended, the immobilizer system may not operate properly and prevent the engine from starting.
The master key can be retracted into the remote transmitter. To use the key, push the release button to release the key from the transmitter. The key should be fully extended. To retract the key, push the release button and at the same time push the key into the remote transmitter until it is securely latched.
The key may come in contact with your finger while being retracted or extended. Make sure your fingers do not touch the pivot of the key when retracting or extending it.
Each keyless access remote has a built-in key. This key is used to lock/ unlock the doors when the remote battery becomes weak and the power door lock/unlock operation is disabled. You cannot start the engine with this key.
The built-in key (see page ) fits all the locks on your vehicle.
201
On models with keyless access systemRetractable Master Key
Keys and Locks
148
Push
RELEASE BUTTON
KEY NUMBER TAGBUILT-IN KEYS
12/07/20 10:48:12 31TK4640_153
CONTINUED
You should have received a key number tag with your keys. You will need this key number if you ever have to get a lost key replaced. Use only Acura-approved key blanks.
The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from theft. If an improperly coded key or keyless access remote (or other device) is used, the engines fuel system is disabled.
When you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, or select the ON mode with the engine start/ stop button, the immobilizer system indicator should come on briefly, then go off. If the indicator starts to blink, it means the system does not recognize the coding of the key or keyless access remote.
On models without keyless access system, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position, remove the key, reinsert it, and turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position again.
On models with keyless access system, set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), then select the ON mode again.
The system may not recognize your keys or remotes coding if another immobilizer key or other metal object (i.e. key chain) is near the ignition switch or the keyless access remote when you insert the key or set the power mode to ON.
Your vehicle has the engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. See page for a comparison between conventional power switches and your engine start/stop button. For more information on selecting the power mode, see page .
: On models with keyless access system
184
187
Keys and Locks, Immobilizer System
Immobilizer System
Instrum ents
and C
ontrols
149
12/07/20 10:48:19 31TK4640_154
If the system repeatedly does not recognize the coding of your key or keyless access remote, contact your dealer.
Do not attempt to alter this system or add other devices to it. Electrical problems could result that may make your vehicle inoperable.
If you have lost your key or keyless access remote and you cannot start the engine, contact your dealer.
This device complies with the appropriate requirements or the required standards. See page for more information.
The ignition switch has four positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY (I), ON (II), and START (III).
You can insert or remove the key only in this position. To turn the key, you must push the key in slightly. The shift lever must also be in Park.
If the front wheels are turned, the anti-theft lock may make it difficult to turn the key. Firmly turn the steering wheel to the left or right as you turn the key.
You can operate the audio system and the accessory power sockets in this position.
This is the normal key position when driving. Several of the indicators on the instrument panel come on as a test when you turn the ignition switch from the ACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II) position.
Use this position only to start the engine. The switch returns to the ON (II) position when you let go of the key.
628
On models without keyless access system
Immobilizer System, Ignition Switch
Ignition Switch
LOCK (0)
ACCESSORY (I)
ON (II)
START (III)
150
Always take the ignition key or the keyless access remote with the built-in key with you whenever you leave the vehicle alone.
13/08/08 16:43:07 31TK4650_155
You will hear a reminder beeper if you leave the key in the ignition switch in the LOCK (0) or the ACCESSORY (I) position and open the drivers door. Remove the key to turn off the beeper.
You will also see a REMOVE KEY message on the multi-information display.
The shift lever must be in Park before you can remove the key from the ignition switch.
Go to page for information on the engine start/stop button.
To lock all doors, push the front of the master door lock switch on either front door, pull the lock tab rearward on the drivers door, or turn the key counterclockwise in the outside lock on the drivers door.
The built-in key can be used to lock/ unlock the doors when the remote
battery becomes weak and the power door lock/unlock operation is disabled. For more information, see page .
Pushing the rear of either master door lock switch will unlock all doors. Pushing forward the lock tab on the drivers door unlocks only that door.
The lock tab on any passengers door locks and unlocks that door.
184
201
CONTINUED
On models with keyless access system
On models with keyless access system
Ignition Switch, Door Locks
Door Locks
Instrum ents
and C
ontrols
151
MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH
Lock
Unlock
Lock
Unlock RED INDICATOR
LOCK TAB
13/08/08 16:43:18 31TK4650_156
When the door is unlocked, you can see the red indicator on the lock tab above the inner door handle.
All doors can be locked from the outside by using the key in the drivers door. To unlock only the drivers door, insert the key, turn it clockwise, and release it. The remaining doors unlock when you turn the key a second time within a few seconds.
You can customize the door lock/ unlock settings (see page ).
You can open or close the windows and the moonroof by using the key in the drivers door (see page ).
Pull the front door inner handle. The door unlocks and opens in one motion.
The front door inner handles are designed to allow front seat occupants to open the door in one motion. However this feature requires that front seat occupants never pull a front door inner handle while the vehicle is in motion.
Children should always ride in a rear seat where childproof door locks are provided (see page ).
125
208
153
Door Locks
152
INNER HANDLE
13/08/08 16:43:27 31TK4650_157
If you forget and leave the key in the ignition switch, lockout prevention will not allow you to lock the drivers door. With any door open and the key in the ignition switch, locking with the master door lock switch is disabled. If the drivers door is closed, the lock tab on the drivers door is not disabled. Pulling the drivers lock tab rearward will lock all doors. If you try to lock an open drivers door by pulling the lock tab rearward, the drivers door lock tab pops out and unlocks the drivers door.
The childproof door locks are designed to prevent children seated in the rear from accidentally opening the rear doors. Each rear door has a lock lever near the edge. With the lever in the LOCK position (lever is down), the door cannot be opened from the inside regardless of the position of the lock tab. To open the door, push the lock tab forward and use the outside door handle.
To lock any passengers door when getting out of the vehicle, pull the lock tab rearward and close the door.
To lock the drivers door, remove the key from the ignition switch, pull the lock tab rearward or push the front of the master switch, then close the door.
When the vehicle speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h) or more, all the doors lock automatically.
When you shift to P after driving, the drivers door unlocks.
When you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) after driving, the drivers door unlocks.
Default setting
Automatic transmission:
Manual transmission:
On models without keyless access system
On models without keyless access system
Door Locks
Lockout Prevention Childproof Door Locks
Instrum ents
and C
ontrols
153
LEVER
Unlock
Lock
12/07/20 10:48:51 31TK4640_158
If the doors are unlocked, press the trunk release switch on the trunk lid.
If the doors are locked, press the trunk release switch on the trunk lid with the remote in keyless access operating range.
To open the trunk from the outside, push the release switch, then lift up.
The built-in key can be used to lock/unlock the doors and trunk when the remote battery becomes weak and the power door lock/unlock operation is disabled. For more information, see page .
To unlock the trunk, turn the key twice to unlock the doors, push the rear of either master door lock switch, or push UNLOCK twice on the keyless access remote.
The trunk will lock when you lock the drivers door with the key , the keyless access remote, either master door lock switch, or the lock tab on the drivers door.
You can open the trunk in any of the following ways:
Press the trunk release button on the drivers door.
Press and hold the trunk release button on the remote transmitter or the keyless access remote.
:
201
On models with keyless access system
On models with keyless access system
Trunk
154
TRUNK RELEASE SWITCH
TRUNK RELEASE BUTTON
On models with keyless access system
12/07/20 10:49:00 31TK4640_159
If your vehicles battery goes dead or is disconnected, you can open the trunk from the rear seat by pulling the trunk release tab through the trunk pass-through.
To close the trunk, use the inner handle to lower the lid, then press down on the back edge.
Pull down the rear seat armrest, then press on the button to fully release the cover. Reach in and locate the trunk release tab, and pull it out.
Keep the trunk lid closed at all times while driving to avoid damaging it, and to prevent exhaust gas from getting into the interior. See
, page .57
CONTINUED
On all models
Trunk
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Instrum ents
and C
ontrols
155
INNER HANDLE
BUTTON
COVER
TRUNK RELEASE TAB
12/07/20 10:49:08 31TK4640_160
To protect items in the trunk, you can disable the trunk release button on the drivers door by turning off the trunk main switch in the glove box, locking the glove box, and locking the trunk pass-through cover with the master key or the built-in key.
If you need to give the key to someone else, give them the valet key.
As a safety feature, your vehicle has a release lever on the trunk latch so the trunk can be opened from the inside. To open the trunk, push the release lever in the direction indicated by the arrow.
Parents should decide if their children should be shown how to use this feature. For more information about child safety, see page .
To use the valet function, remove the built-in key from the remote by pressing the button, then give that remote to someone else as a valet key (see page ).
Your vehicle is equipped with the emergency fuel lid release in the trunk. Refer to page for how to access it.
40
201
599
On models without keyless access system
On models with keyless access system
Trunk
Emergency Trunk Opener
Emergency Fuel Lid Release
156
TRUNK RELEASE LEVER
TRUNK MAIN SWITCH
OFF
Vehicle with keyless access system is shown.
12/07/20 10:49:17 31TK4640_161
CONTINUED
Press this button once to unlock the drivers door or all the doors (depending on the keyless memory setting). Press it twice to unlock the other doors. Some exterior lights will flash twice each time you press the button.
Press this button once to lock all doors. Some exterior lights will flash. When you push LOCK twice within 5 seconds, you will hear a beep to verify that the doors are locked and the security system has set. You cannot lock the doors if any door is not fully closed or if the key is in the ignition switch.
If you do not open any door within 30 seconds, the doors automatically relock and the security system sets.
The keyless lock acknowledgment beep and flashing of the lights can be deactivated (see page ).
The door activated map lights come on when you press the UNLOCK button if the door activated position is selected. If you do not open any door within 30 seconds (or whatever setting of the interior light dimming time is set to), the light(s) will fade out. If you relock the doors with the remote transmitter before 30 seconds have elapsed, the light(s) will go off immediately.
To change the lock/unlock setting and the relock timer setting, refer to the customized settings on page .
You can also open all power windows and the moonroof from outside the vehicle with the remote transmitter (see page ).
125
131
207
On models without keyless access system
Remote Transmitter
UNLOCK
LOCK
Instrum ents
and C
ontrols
157
LOCK BUTTON
PANIC BUTTON
TRUNK BUTTON
LED
UNLOCK BUTTON
12/07/20 10:49:25 31TK4640_162
Be careful when removing this screw as the head of the screw can strip out.
Separate the keypad from the transmitter by pushing any button from outside.
If it takes several pushes on the button to lock or unlock the doors, replace the battery as soon as possible.
Battery type: CR1616
On models with keyless access system, see page for how to replace the battery on the keyless access remote.
To replace the battery:
Remove the screw at the base of the transmitter with a small Phillips-head screwdriver.
Press and hold this button for about 1 second to open the trunk. You cannot open the trunk if the key is in the ignition switch.
If you lose a transmitter, the replacement needs to be reprogrammed by your dealer.
Do not immerse the transmitter in any liquid.
Protect the transmitter from extreme temperatures.
Avoid dropping or throwing the transmitter.
Press this button for about 2 seconds to attract attention: the horn will sound, and the exterior lights will flash for about 30 seconds. To cancel panic mode, press any other button on the remote transmitter, or turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.
1. 2.
181
Remote Transmitter
Replacing the Transmitter Battery
TRUNK
PANIC
Remote Transmitter Care
158
NOTE:
KEYPADSCREW
12/07/20 10:49:36 31TK4640_163
Remove the old battery and note the polarity. Make sure the polarity of the new battery is the same ( side facing up), then insert it in the keypad.
Place a cloth on the edge of the keypad to prevent scratches, and remove the upper half by carefully prying on the edge with a small flat-tip screwdriver or coin.
An improperly disposed of battery can hurt the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal.
Snap the two halves of the keypad, then install the parts in reverse order.
This device complies with the appropriate requirements or the required standards. See page for more information.
4.
5.
3.
628
Remote Transmitter Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
159
BATTERY
12/07/20 10:49:43 31TK4640_164
When you unlock the drivers door with your remote transmitter, each remote transmitter activates the customized settings related to that remote.
When you unlock and open the drivers door with the remote, the drivers seat (except power lumbar) and outside mirrors move to the positions stored in memory. An indicator on one of the driving position memory buttons on the drivers door also comes on.
You will also see the DRIVER 1 or DRIVER 2 message on the multi- information display, depending on which linked remote transmitter is used.
Driving position memory (see page ).
Customized settings (see page ).
Here are the settings activated with the remote:
The driving position memory activated (Driver 1, Driver 2) is shown on the back of each transmitter. Make sure you store your desired driving position in the memory that is activated by the transmitter you normally carry.
Audio system settings (see page ).
Climate control settings (see page ).
170
236
94
228
Remote Transmitter
Recalling a Memorized Driving Position
160
Driver 1 Driver 2
12/08/03 20:56:10 31TK4640_165
CONTINUED
See pages for important safety information and warnings about how to properly position the seats and seat- backs.
Drivers seat only:
1513
The passenger seat has the same adjustments as the drivers seat but without any lumbar adjustment.
Raises or lowers the seat.
Moves the whole seat up and forward, or down and backward. The front of the seat also tilts up or down at the same time.
Adjusts the seat-back angle forward or backward.
The controls for the power adjustable front seats are on the outside edge of each seat bottom. You can adjust the seats with the ignition switch in any position. Make all seat adjustments before you start driving.
Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) Mode is the equivalent of LOCK (0), ACCESSORY Mode is the equivalent of ACCESSORY (I),
and ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages and
.
Moves the seat forward and backward.
Moves the front of the seat up or down.
Increases or decreases the lumbar support.
:
187 184
Seats
Front Seat Power Adjustments
Instrum ents
and C
ontrols
161
Drivers seat
12/07/20 10:50:05 31TK4640_166
They are most effective when you adjust them so the center of the back of the occupants head rests against the center of the restraint.
Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints in all seating positions to help protect you and your passengers from the likelihood of whiplash and other injuries.
The drivers seat includes a memory feature. Two seat positions can be stored in separate memories. You can then select a memorized position by pushing the appropriate memory button. Refer to page for how to memorize and select the seat positions.
170
See page for important safety information and a warning about improperly positioning head restraints.
15
Seats
Head Restraints
162
Passengers seat
12/07/20 10:50:11 31TK4640_167
CONTINUED
The head restraints adjust for height. You need both hands to adjust the restraint. Do not attempt to adjust it while driving. To raise a front or rear center head restraint, pull upward. To lower the restraint, push the release button sideways, and push the restraint down.
To lower either rear outer head restraint for better visibility, press the tilt button on the side of the head restraint. It folds down backward. To raise the rear outer head restraint, pull it up from behind by hand. Make sure the head restraint locks in position when you lower or raise it.
Seats
Adjusting the Head Restraint
Instrum ents
and C
ontrols
163
Front
LEGS
SEAT- BACK
CUSHION
RELEASE BUTTON
Rear Center
SEAT-BACK
RELEASE BUTTON
LEGS
TILT BUTTON
Rear OuterCUSHION
12/07/20 10:50:18 31TK4640_168
To remove a front or rear center head restraint for cleaning or repair, pull it up as far as it will go. Push the release button, then pull the restraint out of the seat-back.
To remove either rear outer head restraint, push the tilt button, then fold the head restraint backward. Push the release button, then pull the restraint out of the seat-back.
Make sure the head restraint locks in position when you reinstall it.
When reinstalling a head restraint, put the legs back in place. Then adjust it to the appropriate height while pressing the release button.
Seats
Removing the Head Restraint
164
Rear Outer TILT BUTTON
RELEASE BUTTON
Failure to reinstall, or correctly reinstall, the head restraints can result in severe injury during a crash.
Always replace the head restraints before driving.
12/07/20 10:50:25 31TK4640_169
The drivers and front passengers seats have active head restraints. If the vehicle is struck severely from the rear, the occupant properly secured with the seat belt will be pushed against the seat-back and the head restraint will automatically move forward.
For a head restraint system to work properly:
Do not hang any items on the head restraints, or from the restraint legs.
Do not place any object between an occupant and the seat-back.
Install each restraint in its proper location.
Only use genuine Acura replacement head restraints.
This reduces the distance between the restraint and the occupants head. It also helps protect the occupants against the likelihood of whiplash and injuries to the neck and upper spine.
After a collision, the activated restraint should return to its normal position.
If the restraints do not return to their normal position, or in the event of a severe collision, have the vehicle inspected by an Acura dealer.
Active Head Restraints
Seats Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
165
12/07/20 10:50:33 31TK4640_170
The lid of the console compartment can be used as an armrest.
The rear seat armrest is in the center of the rear seat. Pivot it down to use it.
A beverage holder is located in the armrest.
To open the cover, pull down the rear seat armrest, then press on the button to fully release the cover. To close the cover, swing it up, and push firmly on the top. Make sure it latches properly.
Trunk Pass-through CoverArmrest
Seats
166
Front Rear
COVER
BUTTON To lock
12/07/20 10:50:40 31TK4640_171
Make sure all items in the trunk and those extending through the pass- through are secured.
Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and adjusted for best visibility. Be sure to adjust the mirrors before you start driving.
For security, this cover can be locked and unlocked only with the master key(the built-in key on models with keyless access system). To lock the cover, insert the key, and turn it clockwise.
Never drive with this cover open and the trunk lid open. See on page .
When driving after dark, the automatic dimming rearview mirror reduces the glare from headlights behind you.
57
CONTINUED
Mirrors
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Seats, Mirrors Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
167
SENSORINDICATOR
There is also a sensor on the back of the mirror. Items hung on the mirror may block this sensor and af f ect its perf ormance.
13/04/02 19:11:30 31TK4640_172
Both outside door mirrors have a reverse tilt feature. When in reverse, the selected mirror will tilt down slightly to improve your view as you parallel park. Shifting out of reverse will return the mirror to its original position.
To tilt the drivers mirror, place the selector switch in the left position.
To tilt the passengers mirror, place the switch in the right position.
To turn the feature off, place the switch in the center position.
When you finish, move the selector switch to the center (off) position. This turns the adjustment switch off to keep your settings.
Push the appropriate edge of the adjustment switch to move the mirror right, left, up, or down.
With the ignition switch in the ON (II) position, move the selector switch to the L (drivers side), or R (passengers side).
Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages
and .
Outside mirror positions can be stored in the driving position memory system (see page ).
3.
1.
2.
:
184 187
170
Adjusting the Power Mirrors Reverse Tilt Door Mirror
Mirrors
168
ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
SELECTOR SWITCH
12/07/20 10:50:56 31TK4640_173
This heated mirror function has a timer (see page ).
The outside mirrors are heated to remove fog and frost. With the ignition switch in the ON (II) position, or the power mode ON, turn on the heaters by pressing the button. The indicator in the button comes on as a reminder. Press the button again to turn the heaters off. Pressing this button also turns the rear window defogger on and off.
Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages
and .
If the outside temperature is below 41F (5C), the heated mirror function will come on automatically for 10 minutes when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.
:
145
184 187
Mirrors
Power Mirror Heaters
Instrum ents
and C
ontrols
169
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
12/07/20 10:51:02 31TK4640_174
Store a driving position only when the vehicle is parked.
Your vehicle has a memory feature for the drivers seat and outside mirror positions.
Seat, except for power lumbar, and outside mirror positions can be stored in separate memories. You select a memorized position by pushing the appropriate button or using the appropriate remote transmitter or the keyless access remote (Driver 1 or Driver 2).
Adjust the seat to a comfortable position (see page ).
Adjust the outside mirrors for best visibility (see page ).
Press and release the SET button on the control panel. You will hear a beep. Immediately press and hold one of the memory buttons (1 or 2) until you hear two beeps. The indicator in the memory button will come on. The current positions of the drivers seat and outside mirrors are now stored.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. You cannot add a new driving position to the memory unless the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position. You can recall a memorized position with the ignition switch in any position.
Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages
and .
3.
1.
2.
:
184
168
187
161
Storing a Driving Position in Memory
Driving Position Memory System
170
MEMORY BUTTONS
SET BUTTON
12/07/20 10:51:10 31TK4640_175
Fail to press a memory button within 5 seconds.
To cancel the storing procedure after pressing the SET button, do any of the following:
To select a memorized position, do this:
Each memory button stores only one driving position. Storing a new position erases the previous setting stored in that buttons memory. If you want to add a new position while retaining the current one, use the other memory button.
Make sure the parking brake is set and the shift lever is in Park (automatic).
Press the desired memory button (1 or 2) until you hear a beep, then release the button.
Change the power mode out from ON.
Turn the ignition switch out from the ON (II) position.
Readjust the outside mirror position.
Readjust the seat position.
Press the SET button again within 5 seconds.
1.
2.
CONTINUED
On models with keyless access system
On models without keyless access system
Driving Position Memory System
Selecting a Memorized Position
Instrum ents
and C
ontrols
171
MEMORY BUTTONS
12/07/20 10:51:20 31TK4640_176
If desired, you can use the adjustment switches to change the positions of the seat or outside mirrors after they are in their memorized positions. If you change the memorized position, the indicator in the memory button will go out. To keep this driving position for later use, you must store it in the driving position memory.
To stop the systems automatic adjustment, do any of these actions:
Push any of the adjustment switches for the seat.
The system will move the seat and outside mirrors to the memorized positions. The indicator in the selected memory button will flash during movement. When the adjustments are complete, you will hear two beeps, and the indicator will remain on.
To change the MEMORY POSITION LINK setting, see page
.
Press any button on the drivers door: SET, memory button 1 or 2.
If the parking brake is not set, you must press and hold the memory button until the adjustment is complete.
Adjust the outside mirrors.
Shift out of Park (automatic).
Release the parking brake (manual).
113
On vehicles with manual transmission
Driving Position Memory System
172
12/07/20 10:51:28 31TK4640_177
Always keep the remote and the built-in key away from any magnetic material.
You should have received a key number tag with your built-in key. You will need this key number if you ever have to get a lost key replaced. Use only Acura-approved key blanks.
Your vehicle has a keyless access system. This system allows you to operate the vehicle without an ignition key. When you carry the remote with you, you can lock/ unlock the door(s), unlock the trunk, and start the engine.
When the vehicle battery is dead. When the remote battery is dead.
A vehicle is being operated with a transmitter nearby.
The remote is covered by metal.
You carry a cell phone, a laptop computer, or other electrical device near the remote.
There is strong electrical current nearby.
The battery of the remote is weak. The system may not work if:
Each keyless access remote has a built-in key. This key is used to lock/ unlock the doors when the remote battery becomes weak and the power door lock/unlock operation is disabled. You cannot start the engine with this key.
Make sure the driver always carries the remote/built-in key set.
Protect the remote and the built-in key from direct sunlight, high temperature, and high humidity.
Do not drop the remote or the built-in key, and do not set heavy objects on them.
Keep the remote and the built-in key away from liquids. If they get wet, dry them immediately with a soft cloth.
The built-in keys do not contain batteries.
On models with navigation system
Keyless Access System Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
173
12/07/20 10:51:40 31TK4640_178
The following keys come with your vehicle. Refer to page for how to separate the keys.
This key is used to lock/unlock the doors, glove box, and trunk pass- through cover.
This remote is used to lock/unlock the doors and unlock the trunk. When you carry the remote, you can lock/unlock the doors, unlock the trunk, and start the engine.
Anyone can lock/unlock a door or open the trunk if the remote is within the operating range of the door or the trunk.
You can lock/unlock the doors within about a 32 inch (about 80 cm) radius from the outside door handle. You can open the trunk within about a 32 inch (about 80 cm) radius from the trunk release switch.
201
Keys
Keyless Access System
Built-in Key
Keyless Access Remote
174
BUILT-IN KEYS
OPERATING RANGE
KEYLESS ACCESS REMOTES
KEY NUMBER TAG
12/07/20 10:51:48 31TK4640_179
The remote may not work if: It is too close to the vehicle. It is above or below the vehicle, even when it is within its operating range.
The handle of each front door has a sensor. That sensor works with the remote so you can automatically unlock the door(s).
By default, only the drivers door unlocks when you grab its handle.
Each front door has a LOCK/ UNLOCK feature.
To change the KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP setting, see page .
To unlock the remaining doors and the trunk, press the UNLOCK button on the remote or the rear of the master door lock switch on the drivers door.
To change the DOOR UNLOCK MODE setting, see page .
All the doors unlock when you grab the handle of the front passengers door.
When you unlock the door(s), some exterior lights blink twice and the system beeps twice.
To change the KEYLESS ACCESS LIGHT FLASH setting, see page
.
118
117
116
CONTINUED
Keyless Access System
Unlocking the Door(s)
Instrum ents
and C
ontrols
175
12/07/20 10:51:59 31TK4640_180
Before locking the doors, make sure the remote is not inside the vehicle.
When you press the door lock button on the front door, all the doors and the trunk will lock.
The remote is not within the operating range.
The remote is too close to the vehicle.
When the doors are unlocked.
The vehicle battery is dead.
The remote battery is dead.
Each unlock sensor does not operate when:
If you wear a glove while grabbing a front door handle, the door sensor may be slow to respond or may not respond by unlocking the doors.
If you do not open any of the doors within 30 seconds, they will automatically relock.
If a remote is within operating range while you wash your vehicle or when it is raining heavily, the door sensors may respond by unlocking the doors.
Keyless Access System
Locking the Doors
176
DOOR LOCK BUTTON
12/07/20 10:52:07 31TK4640_181
When you lock the doors, some exterior lights blink and the system beeps once. If no exterior lights blink and/or no beeper sounds, check to see if the trunk or hood is open.
To change the KEYLESS ACCESS LIGHT FLASH setting, see page
.
To change the KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP setting, see page .
Within 2 seconds of pressing the door lock button or locking the doors with the remote, pull the handle to make sure the doors are actually locked. The door unlock sensors will not operate for about 2 seconds after the doors are locked.
The door lock button does not work if:
The remote is not within the operating range.
If you open the drivers door, pull its lock tab rearward on the door, and shut it when the remote is inside the vehicle, the drivers door will unlock. Make sure you carry the remote with you when you lock the doors.Any door is open.
The power mode is not set to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
The remote is in the keyless access slot.
The remote is too close to the vehicle.
The remote battery is dead.
The vehicle battery is dead.
This function is also activated on the front passengers door. If you open the front passengers door, and shut it after pulling its lock tab rearward when the remote is inside the vehicle, all doors will unlock.
The door lock prevention will also activate if you try to lock the doors with the master door lock switch when the remote is inside the vehicle.
117
118
Keyless Access System
Door Lock Prevention
Instrum ents
and C
ontrols
177
12/07/20 10:52:18 31TK4640_182
When you close the trunk with all doors locked, the trunk will lock.
When you unlock all the doors with the remote, built-in key or power door lock master switch, the trunk will unlock.
The remote is too close to the trunk lid.
The trunk cannot be locked if:
The remote is on the interior rear panel.
The remote is too close to the seat-back of the rear seat or the seat cushion.
You can open the trunk in any of these ways:
Push the trunk release switch when carrying the remote (if the doors are locked).
Press the trunk release button inside the vehicle.
Press the trunk button on the remote.
To close the trunk, use the inner handle to lower the lid, then press down on the back edge.
Push the trunk release switch when the doors are unlocked.
Locking and Unlocking the Trunk Opening and Closing the Trunk
Keyless Access System
178
TRUNK RELEASE SWITCH
INNER HANDLE
12/07/20 10:52:29 31TK4640_183
CONTINUED
Before closing the trunk, make sure the remote is not in the trunk.
If you close the trunk when the remote is in it, the system beeps, and the trunk reopens.
Keep the trunk lid closed at all times while driving to avoid damaging the lid, and to prevent exhaust gas from getting into the interior. See
on page .
Press this button once to lock all doors. Some exterior lights will flash. When you push the LOCK button twice within 5 seconds, you will hear a beep to verify that the doors are locked and the security system is set.
You cannot lock the doors if any door is not fully closed, if the remote is in the keyless access remote slot, or if the power mode is in any position except VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
When you cannot set the security system because the trunk or hood is open, no exterior light blinks and/or no beeper sounds.
57
Keyless Access System
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Keyless Access Remote
LOCK
Instrum ents
and C
ontrols
179
LED
PANIC BUTTON
TRUNK RELEASE BUTTON
LOCK BUTTON
UNLOCK BUTTON
12/07/20 10:52:37 31TK4640_184
Press this button once to unlock the drivers door. Press it twice to unlock the other doors. Some exterior lights will flash twice each time you press the button. The door activated map lights (if the door activated light switch is set) will come on when you press the UNLOCK button. If you do not open any door within 30 seconds, the map lights fade out. If you relock the doors with the remote before 30 seconds have elapsed, the lights will go off immediately.
Press this button for about 1 second to open the trunk. You cannot open the trunk with the exterior trunk release switch if the remote is in the keyless access remote slot, or the power mode is in any position except VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). You cannot open the trunk with the remote if the trunk main switch in the glove box is turned off.
Press this button for about 2 seconds to attract attention: the horn will sound and the exterior lights will flash for about 30 seconds. To cancel panic mode, press any other button on the remote.
To change the KEY AND REMOTE UNLOCK MODE setting, see page
.
To change the KEYLESS LOCK ACKNOWLEDGMENT setting, see page .
To change the SECURITY RELOCK TIMER setting, see page
.
If you unlock the doors with the remote, but do not open any door within 30 seconds, the doors automatically relock and the security system sets.
To change the INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING TIME, see page .
133
131
130
121
UNLOCK TRUNK
PANIC
Keyless Access System
180
12/07/20 10:52:44 31TK4640_185
An improperly disposed of battery can hurt the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal.
Battery type: CR2032 Replace the battery if necessary.
To replace the battery:
Replace the old battery with a new battery. Place the battery so the side is facing up. Snap the two halves of the remote case back together.Remove the built-in key (see page
).
Place a cloth on the edge to prevent scratches, then remove the upper half by carefully prying on the edge with a coin.
This device complies with the appropriate requirements or the required standards. See page for more information.
1.
2.
3.
201
628
Replacing the Remote Battery
Keyless Access System Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
181
12/07/20 10:52:52 31TK4640_186
Here are the settings activated with the remote:
Driving position memory (see page ).
Audio system settings (see page ).
Climate control settings (see page ).
Navigation system preferences (see the navigation system manual).
When you unlock the door with your remote, each remote activates the customized settings related to that remote. The drivers ID (Driver 1 or Driver 2) is shown on the back of each remote.
Customized settings (see page ).
Avoid dropping or throwing the remote.
Protect the remote from extreme temperatures.
Do not immerse the remote in any liquid.
If you lose a remote, the replacement needs to be reprogrammed by your dealer.
285
170
94
228
Keyless Access System
Remote CareRecalling a Memorized Driving Position
182
DRIVERS ID
12/08/03 20:58:11 31TK4640_187
The engine may not run, and some malfunctions may occur, if the remote is outside the vehicle.
The engine may not start if the remote is subjected to strong radio waves.
Also, the engine may not start if the remote is too close to the windows.
Keyless Access System
Engine Start/Stop Button Operating Range
Instrum ents
and C
ontrols
183
Make sure you know where the remote is when you are inside the vehicle.
Remember that you can start the engine when the remote is inside the vehicle.
Make sure you always carry the remote with you.
12/07/20 10:53:08 31TK4640_188
The keyless access system has four power modes: VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), ACCESSORY, ON, and START.
This system uses the engine start/ stop button instead of an ignition switch to start and stop the engine. If you are carrying the keyless access remote, you can start the engine by pressing the engine start/stop button with the brake pedal (automatic transmission) or the clutch pedal (manual transmission) depressed. You can also stop the engine by pushing this button when the vehicle is stopped.
Each time you press the engine start/stop button without pressing the brake pedal (automatic transmission) or the clutch pedal (manual transmission) while carrying the keyless access remote, the power mode switches between VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), ACCESSORY, and ON.
You can start the engine at any time by pressing the engine start/stop button, while pressing the brake pedal, with the shift lever in Park or neutral position.
You can start the engine at any time by pressing the engine start/stop
button, while pressing the clutch pedal fully, with the shift lever in any gear position.
To change the power mode without turning on the engine, press the engine start/stop button without pressing the brake pedal (automatic transmission) or the clutch pedal (manual transmission). The power mode will be changed as shown on the next page.
Automatic transmission:
Manual transmission:
Keyless Access System
Engine Start/Stop Button Operation
Switching the Power Modes
Changing the Power Mode without Starting the Engine
184
12/07/20 10:53:16 31TK4640_189
CONTINUED
Keyless Access System Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
Automatic Transmission Manual Transmission
185
: Press the engine start/stop button.
: Press the engine start/stop button without the shift lever in P.
: Shift to Park, then press the engine start/stop button.
Do the following without pressing the brake pedal.
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) Indicator in the button is off.
ACCESSORY
ON
: Press the engine start/stop button without pressing the clutch pedal.
Indicator in the button is on. Indicator in the button blinks (from ON to ACCESSORY) Some electrical components such as the audio system and accessory power sockets can be operated.
Indicator in the button is on when the engine is not running. (If the engine is running, this indicator is off.) All electrical components can be used.
12/07/20 10:53:24 31TK4640_190
Automatic Transmission Manual Transmission How the mode is switched depends on if the shift lever is in Park or not.
Each time you press the engine start/stop button without pressing the clutch pedal, the power mode switches between VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), ACCESSORY, and ON modes. To change the mode from ON to ACCESSORY, or ACCESSORY to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), press the engine start/stop button twice.
If the keyless access system main switch in the glove box is off, make sure to insert the keyless access remote into the keyless access slot to turn on your vehicles power mode. For more information, refer to page .
To remove the keyless access remote from the slot, make sure the power mode is VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
With the shift lever in Park, the power mode changes from ON to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) when you push the engine start/stop button.
To change the mode from ON to ACCESSORY with the shift lever position in Park, take your foot off the brake and press the engine start/stop button twice.
To change the mode from ACCESSORY to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), shift to Park, then press the engine start/stop button twice.
195
Keyless Access System
186
NOTE:
12/07/20 10:53:31 31TK4640_191
Engine is turned off and power is shut down. The steering wheel is locked. No electrical components can be used.
Indicator-Off Engine is turned off and power is shut down. The steering wheel is locked. No electrical components can be used.
Use this position to start the engine. The ignition switch returns to the ON (II) position when you release the key.
Engine is turned off. Some electrical components such as the audio system and accessory power sockets can be operated.
Normal key position while driving. All electrical components can be used.
Indicator-Off The mode automatically returns to ON after the engine starts.
Indicator-On or blinking Engine is turned off. Some electrical components such as the audio system and accessory power sockets can be operated.
Indicator- On (engine is turned off) Off (engine is running)
All electrical components can be used.
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)
ACCESSORY START
Ignition Switch Position
Power Mode
LOCK (0) ON (II)ACCESSORY (I)
Without Keyless Access System
With Keyless Access System and Engine Start/Stop Button
START (III)
OffIndicator is:
ON
On
Ignition Switch and Power Mode Comparison
Keyless Access System Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
187
12/07/20 10:53:42 31TK4640_192
You can start the engine in any power mode.
To start the engine:
Depress the brake pedal and press the engine start/stop button.
Move the shift lever to Park (P).
After you unlock and open the drivers door, you will see the TO START ENGINE: message on the multi-information display. The TO TURN ACCESSORY ON: message will be shown after three seconds. The display switches between the TO START ENGINE: and TO TURN ACCESSORY ON: messages every three seconds.
Apply the parking brake.
Press the clutch pedal down all the way. The engine does not start unless the clutch pedal is pressed.
Press the engine start/stop button.
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
Automatic Transmission
Manual Transmission
Keyless Access System
Starting the Engine Starting Guidance
188
ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON
BRAKE PEDAL
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
CLUTCH PEDAL M/T
TO TURN ACCESSORY ON:
A/T
TO START ENGINE:
12/07/20 10:53:55 31TK4640_193
After entering the vehicle, insert the keyless access remote into the slot to start the engine (see page ).
If the keyless access remote battery dies, you may have to use the built-in key to unlock/lock the vehicle. The built-in key is stored inside the keyless access remote (see page
).
If the steering wheel is locked, the engine cannot start. The multi- information display shows you the above message and the indicator in the engine start/stop button blinks. To unlock the steering wheel, apply force by turning it left and right while pressing the engine start/stop button at the same time.
the multi- information display shows the INSERT KEYLESS REMOTE INTO SLOT message, then the TO START ENGINE: message will be shown after you insert the remote into the slot. Each time you press the engine start/stop button, the INSERT KEYLESS REMOTE INTO SLOT message is shown on the multi-information display if the remote is not in the slot.
201
197
When the keyless access system main switch in the glove box is off,
To unlock the steering wheel
Keyless Access System Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
189
NOTE:
TO UNLOCK WHEEL
12/07/20 10:54:02 31TK4640_194
To turn the vehicle off, make sure the vehicle is completely stopped and do the following.
If the shift lever is in any gear other than neutral, depress the clutch pedal, then press the engine start/stop button.
The engine stops and the power mode switches from ON to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure it is off. You can verify if the power is off by checking the engine start/stop button LED indicator.
You can only place the vehicle in the VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) mode if the transmission is in Park. You will see the SHIFT TO PARK message on the multi-information display if you press the engine start/stop button to turn the vehicle off with the shift lever in any other position except for P (Park).
If the shift lever is in neutral, press the engine start/stop button.
Press the engine start/stop button with your foot on the brake pedal.
Shift to park (P).
Make sure to press the brake pedal or set the parking brake before turning off the engine. If your foot is OFF the clutch pedal in any gear position, pressing the engine start/ stop button turns off the engine, and the vehicle may move forward or backward.
1. 2.
Manual Transmission
Automatic Transmission
On automatic transmission modelsOn manual transmission models
Stopping the Engine
Keyless Access System
Operation Guidance
190
SHIFT TO PARK
A/T model onlyA/T model
12/07/20 10:54:13 31TK4640_195
CONTINUED
If the power mode is in ACCESSORY, you may see the ACCESSORY MODE message on the multi- information display.
After the drivers door is opened, you will see the TO TURN VEHICLE OFF: message on the multi- information display. Press the engine start/stop button twice with your foot off the brake pedal to change the power mode from ACCESSORY to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
Press the engine start/stop button twice with your foot off the brake pedal (automatic transmission) or the clutch pedal (manual transmission) to change the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
If you open the drivers door in the ACCESSORY mode, a beeper will sound. You will also see a ACCESSORY MODE or TO TURN VEHICLE OFF: message on the multi-information display.
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure it is in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
All models
Keyless Access System Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
191
TO TURN VEHICLE OFFACCESSORY MODE
12/07/20 10:54:21 31TK4640_196
The engine start/stop button may be used to stop the engine due to an emergency situation even while driving. If you must stop the engine, do either of the following operations:
Press and hold the engine start/ stop button for three seconds. Firmly press the engine start/stop button three times.
Do not press the button while driving unless it is absolutely necessary for the engine to be switched off.
If you are driving, the power mode switches from ON to ACCESSORY or VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) whenever you perform either procedure. However, the steering wheel will NOT lock.
If you cannot stop the engine by pressing the engine start/stop button once when the vehicle is stopped and the shift lever is in Park (automatic transmission), do either emergency engine stop procedure. In this case, the power mode will change to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), however, the steering wheel may NOT lock.
Keyless Access System
Emergency Engine Stop
192
12/07/20 10:54:27 31TK4640_197
CONTINUED
If you take the keyless access remote out of the vehicle and close the door with the power mode ON or ACCESSORY, the inside and outside beepers sound and a KEYLESS REMOTE NOT DETECTED message will be displayed on the multi-information display, and the doors will not lock.
The displayed message goes away when you bring the remote back inside the vehicle.
If the engine is running and you take the remote out of the vehicle, it will continue to run, and the inside and outside beepers will sound. Once the power mode is changed to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), the engine will not restart until you bring back a remote into the vehicle.
Even when the remote is inside the vehicle, the beeper may sound when the location of the remote is not detected due to surrounding conditions. It is not a failure. Make sure that you carry the remote with you.
The engine does not start if you push the engine start/stop button when the remote is outside the vehicle. Check where the remote is. Make sure that the remote is in the vehicle with you when you operate the engine start/stop button.
The outside beeper sounds when the power mode is in ACCESSORY, and a door is opened, then closed.
Keyless Access System
Keyless Remote Not Detected Beeper and Message
Instrum ents
and C
ontrols
193
12/07/20 10:54:35 31TK4640_198
The battery in the remote normally lasts about 2 years. To ensure maximum battery life, do not store the remote close to electrical devices such as computers or TVs. When the multi-information display shows CHANGE KEYLESS REMOTE BATTERY, replace the battery as soon as possible (see page ).
If the remote battery becomes weak and the power door lock/unlock operation is disabled, you should insert the remote into the keyless access remote slot to set the power mode and start the engine. After inserting the remote into the slot, operate the engine start/stop button as previously described (see pages
and ). For more information on the keyless access slot, see page
.
Inserting the remote does not charge the remote battery. You should replace the battery as soon as possible.
181
184 187
197
Keyless Access System
Keyless Remote Low Battery
194
12/07/20 10:54:40 31TK4640_199
This switch is in the glove box. You can cancel the keyless access system features, which are locking/ unlocking the doors, unlocking the trunk, and starting the engine while carrying the keyless access remote. To cancel the system, turn the keyless access system main switch off by pushing it down.
Turning off the keyless access system will disable lockout prevention.
With the keyless access remote system main switch off, you should insert the keyless access remote into the keyless remote slot to start the engine. For more information, see page .
According to the message on the multi-information display, this indicator has two indications. A CHECK KEYLESS ACCESS SYSTEM message indicates a problem with the keyless access system. A CHECK KEYLESS STARTING SYSTEM message indicates a problem with the keyless starting system.
This indicator normally comes on for several seconds when you change the power mode to ON.
197
CONTINUED
Keyless Access System
Keyless Access Remote System Main Switch
Keyless Access System Indicator
Instrum ents
and C
ontrols
195
NOTE:
MAIN SWITCH
OFF
12/07/20 10:54:49 31TK4640_200
Have your vehicle checked by your dealer if:
The keyless access system indicator comes on and stays on while you are driving.
The indicator comes on after the engine has started.
In this case, use the built-in key to lock/unlock the doors and insert the keyless access remote into the slot to start the engine (see page ).
Have your vehicle checked by your dealer if:
The multi-information display shows CHECK KEYLESS ACCESS SYSTEM.
The keyless access system indicator comes on and stays on while you are driving.
The indicator comes on and stays on in any power mode.
197
Check Keyless Access System Check Keyless Starting System
Keyless Access System
196
KEYLESS ACCESS SYSTEM INDICATOR
KEYLESS ACCESS SYSTEM INDICATOR
12/07/20 10:54:58 31TK4640_201
In this case, you should not shut off your engine until you are in a safe location or at your dealer, as your vehicle may not restart.
The multi-information display shows CHECK KEYLESS STARTING SYSTEM.
If the remote battery becomes weak and the power door lock/ unlock operation is disabled.
When the keyless access remote system main switch in the glove box is set to off.
In the following two cases, you have to insert the keyless access remote into the keyless access remote slot to set the power mode and start the engine:
To remove the keyless access remote, place the vehicle in the VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) mode, then pull out the keyless access remote.
If the keyless access remote has been inserted into the slot with the keyless access remote system main switch in the glove box turned off, it will lock into place when the power is on. The slot will unlock when the power is turned off.
If the keyless access remote does not come out of the slot easily, try to push it in before pulling it out. Make sure the vehicle is in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) mode.
CONTINUED
Keyless Access System
Keyless Access Remote Slot
Instrum ents
and C
ontrols
197
NOTE: KEYLESS ACCESS REMOTE
SLOT
12/07/20 10:55:06 31TK4640_202
To insert the keyless access remote:
On all models
On automatic transmission models
On manual transmission models
When you open the drivers door, and each time you press the engine start/stop button, you will see the INSERT KEYLESS REMOTE INTO SLOT message on the multi- information display in the following situations:
When the keyless access system main switch (see page ) is off.
The multi-information display shows the ACCESSORY MODE or TO UNLOCK KEYLESS REMOTE TURN OFF POWER message to remind you to change the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
The multi-information display shows the ACCESSORY MODE message to remind you that the power mode is in ACCESSORY.
To avoid damaging the slot, do not insert any other objects into the slot or put a sticker on the keyless access remote.
Inserting the remote does not charge the remote battery. If necessary, you should replace the battery as soon as possible.
When the keyless access remote system main switch in the glove box is set to ON, the remote remains unlocked when you insert it into the keyless access remote slot and the power mode is turned on.
195
Keyless Access System
Operation GuidanceUnlocked Keyless Access Remote
198
12/07/20 10:55:16 31TK4640_203
CONTINUED
The message reminds you that the keyless access remote is locked in the keyless access remote slot, and that the power mode is in the ACCESSORY or ON position. To remove the keyless access remote, turn the power mode off by pressing the engine start/stop button twice (in ACCESSORY mode) or once (in ON mode) without pressing the brake pedal.
When the keyless access remote system main switch in the glove box is set to OFF, the multi-information display will show the TO UNLOCK KEYLESS REMOTE TURN OFF POWER message after you shift to Park.
When the keyless access remote is not in the vehicle.
To unlock the keyless access remote: On automatic transmission models
Keyless Access System Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
199
12/07/20 10:55:21 31TK4640_204
To remove the keyless access remote:
On automatic transmission models
If the vehicle is left in the ACCESSORY mode, the TO TURN VEHICLE OFF message is shown on the multi-information display when you open the drivers door. If the vehicle is left in the VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) mode with the keyless access remote in the slot, the REMOVE KEYLESS REMOTE FROM SLOT message is shown on the multi-information display.
In ACCESSORY mode, the ACCESSORY MODE message will be displayed a few seconds after the TO UNLOCK KEYLESS REMOTE TURN OFF POWER message is displayed.
If you turn off the vehicle and leave the remote in the keyless access remote slot, you will also hear a reminder beeper.
The shift lever must be in Park before you can press the engine start/stop button twice without pressing the brake pedal to set the vehicle into the VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) mode.
Keyless Access System
200
12/07/20 10:55:27 31TK4640_205
The trunk and glove box cannot be opened when you turn the trunk main switch off and lock the glove box and trunk pass-through cover with the built-in key. Then, the trunk cannot be opened by using the remote or the exterior trunk release switch.
Remove the built-in key from the remote by pressing the button, then give that remote to someone else as a valet key.
To avoid damaging the remote and the built-in key, never pull on the built-in key unless you are pressing the release button.
The keyless access system uses an electric field to identify the remote.
If you use medical equipment such as a cardiac pacemaker, ask your doctor if the electric field used by the remote will affect it.
The built-in key can be used to lock/ unlock the doors and the trunk when the remote battery becomes weak and the power door lock/unlock operation is disabled.
To remove the built-in key, pull it out while pressing the release button. To reinstall the built-in key, push the key into the remote until it clicks.
Valet FunctionBuilt-in key and Remote
Keyless Access System Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
201
RELEASE BUTTON
BUILT-IN KEY
12/07/20 10:55:35 31TK4640_206
Push the right side of the switch, HI, to rapidly heat up the seat. After the seat reaches a comfortable temperature, select LO by pushing the left side of the switch. This will keep the seat warm.
Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages
and .
The ignition switch must be in the ON (II) position to use the heaters.
Both front seats are equipped with seat heaters. Because of the sensors for the side airbag cutoff system, there is no heater in the passengers seat-back.
:
184 187
TL and TL with Technology Package models SH-AWD and SH-AWD with Technology Package models
Seat Heaters
202
SEAT HEATER SWITCHES HEATERS
Passengers Seat
Drivers Seat
12/07/20 10:55:41 31TK4640_207
Follow these precautions whenever you use the seat heaters:
Do not use the seat heater in the HI setting for an extended period, because it draws large amounts of current from the battery.
If the engine is left idling for an extended period, do not use the seat heaters even on the LO setting. It can weaken the battery, causing hard starting.
In the HI setting, the heater turns off when the seat gets warm, and turns back on after the seats temperature drops.
In the LO setting, the heater runs continuously. It does not cycle with temperature changes.
Seat Heaters Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
203
Heat induced burns are possible when using seat heaters.
Persons with a diminished ability to sense temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes, lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or with sensitive skin should not use seat heaters.
12/08/03 20:58:17 31TK4640_208
You must select the ON mode by operating the engine start/stop button (see page ) to use the heaters and the air ventilation system.
To use the heaters, press the seat heater button. The indicator (red) above the button will come on. There are four settings in the heaters: HI Three indicators on. MID Two indicators on. LO One indicator on. OFF All indicators off.
When you press the seat heater button once, the heater is set to HI. After the seat reaches a comfortable temperature, select MID or LOW by pressing the seat heater button. This will keep the seat warm. To shut down the heater, press the seat heater button until the indicators go off.
Both front seats are equipped with seat heaters and an air ventilation system. The passenger seat only has heaters in the seat bottom because of the side airbag system.
185
TL with Advance Package and Canadian Elite Package models SH-AWD with Advance Package and Canadian SH-AWD Elite Package models
Seat Heaters and Ventilations
204
INDICATORS
Drivers seatHEATERS
Passengers seat
SEAT VENTILATION BUTTON
SEAT HEATER BUTTON
12/07/20 10:55:53 31TK4640_209
Follow these precautions whenever you use the seat heaters and the seat ventilation:
Do not use the seat heater or the seat ventilation in the HI setting for an extended period, because it draws large amounts of current from the battery.
To ventilate the seat, press the seat ventilation button. The indicator (blue) above the button will come on. The air ventilation system has four settings:
HI Three indicators on. MID Two indicators on. LO One indicator on. OFF All indicators off.
When you press the seat ventilation button once, the system is set to HI. To change to the lower mode, press the seat ventilation button. To turn the air ventilation off, press the seat ventilation button until the indicators go off. The heater runs continuously and
does not automatically turn off after a period of time.
If the engine is left idling for an extended period, do not use the seat heaters or the seat ventilation, even on the LO setting. It can weaken the battery, causing hard starting.
Seat Heaters and Ventilations Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
205
Heat induced burns are possible when using seat heaters.
Persons with a diminished ability to sense temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes, lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or with sensitive skin should not use seat heaters.
12/08/03 20:58:23 31TK4640_210
To open either front window fully, push the window switch firmly down to the second detent, then release it. The window automatically goes down all the way. To stop the window from going all the way down, pull back on the window switch briefly.
To close either front window fully, pull back the window switch firmly to the second detent, then release it. The window automatically goes all the way up. To stop the window from going all the way up, push down on the window switch briefly.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position to raise or lower any window. To open a window, push the switch down and hold it. Release the switch when you want the window to stop. Pull back on the switch and hold it to close the window.
Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages
and .
:
184 187
AUTO
Power Windows
206
DRIVERS WINDOW SWITCH
MAIN SWITCH FRONT PASSENGERS WINDOW SWITCH
INDICATOR
Closing a power window on someones hands or fingers can cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are away from the windows before closing them.
12/07/20 10:56:06 31TK4640_211
If either front window runs into any obstacle while it is closing automatically, it will reverse direction, and then stop. To close the window, remove the obstacle, then use the window switch again.
Auto reverse stops sensing when the window is almost closed. You should always check that all passengers and objects are away from the window before closing it.
The drivers window auto reverse function is disabled when you continuously pull up the switch.
When you push the main switch in, the indicator comes on and the passengers windows cannot be raised or lowered. Use the main switch when you have children in the vehicle so they do not injure themselves by operating the windows unintentionally. To cancel this feature, push on the switch again. The switch will pop out and the indicator will go off.
The windows and the main switch will operate for up to 10 minutes after you turn off the ignition switch (set VEHICLE OFF mode on models with keyless access system). Opening either front door cancels this function.
You can open all of the windows and the moonroof from outside with the remote transmitter (the keyless access remote on models with keyless access system).
CONTINUED
Auto Reverse Opening the Windows and Moonroof with the Remote Transmitter/Keyless Access Remote
Power Windows Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
207
NOTE:
Vehicle without keyless access system
Vehicle with keyless access system
UNLOCK BUTTON UNLOCK BUTTON
12/07/20 10:56:15 31TK4640_212
Press the UNLOCK button once to unlock the drivers door.
Press the UNLOCK button a second time, and hold it. The remaining doors unlock, and all four windows and the moonroof start to open. To stop the windows and moonroof, release the button.
To open the windows and moonroof further, press the button again (within 10 seconds of step 1) and hold it. If the windows and the moonroof stop before the desired position, repeat steps 1 and 2.
You cannot close the windows or the moonroof with the remote transmitter.
You can open and close the windows and moonroof with the key in the drivers door lock.
To open: Insert the key in the drivers door lock.
Turn the key clockwise, then release it.
Turn the key clockwise again, and hold it. All four windows and the moonroof start to open. To stop the windows and the moonroof, release the key.
To open the windows and the moonroof further, turn and hold the key again (within 10 seconds of step 2).
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Power Windows
Opening/Closing the Windows and Moonroof with the Key or the Built-in key
208
Close
Close
Open
Open
Vehicle without keyless access system
Vehicle with keyless access system
BUILT-IN KEY
12/07/20 10:56:25 31TK4640_213
To close: Insert the key in the drivers door lock.
Turn the key counterclockwise, then release it.
Turn the key counterclockwise again, and hold it. All four windows and the moonroof start to close. To stop the windows and the moonroof, release the key.
To close the windows and the moonroof further, turn and hold the key again (within 10 seconds of step 2).
If the windows and the moonroof stop before the desired position, repeat steps 2 and 3.
1.
2.
4.
3.
Power Windows Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
209
NOTE:
12/07/20 10:56:30 31TK4640_214
To close the moonroof fully, firmly push the moonroof switch forward, then release it. The moonroof automatically closes all the way. To stop the moonroof from closing, push the switch briefly.
To open the moonroof fully, pull back the moonroof switch firmly, then release it. The moonroof automatically opens all the way. To stop the moonroof from opening, push the switch briefly.
The moonroof can be tilted up in the back for ventilation, or it can be slid back into the roof. Use the switch on the front ceiling to operate the moonroof. You must turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position to operate the moonroof.
Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages
and .
To open the moonroof, pull back on the switch and hold it. Release the switch when the moonroof reaches the desired position. To close the moonroof, push the switch forward and hold it. Release the switch to stop the operation.
To tilt up the moonroof, push on the center of the moonroof switch. To stop the moonroof from tilting up fully, push the switch briefly.
:
184 187
AUTO
Moonroof
210
Open
Tilt
Close
MOONROOF SWITCH
Opening or closing the moonroof on someones hands or fingers can cause serious injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of the moonroof before opening or closing it.
12/07/20 10:56:38 31TK4640_215
To open or close the moonroof partially, lightly pull the switch back or push it forward and hold it. The moonroof will stop when you release the switch.
If the moonroof runs into any obstacle while it is closing automatically, it will reverse direction, and then stop. To close the moonroof, remove the obstacle, then use the moonroof switch again.
Auto reverse stops sensing when the moonroof is almost closed. You should always check that all passengers and objects are away from the moonroof before closing it.
You can open and close the moonroof for up to 10 minutes after you turn off the ignition switch, on models with keyless access system, set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). Opening either front door cancels this function.
You can use the remote transmitter/ keyless access remote or the key/ built-in key to operate the moonroof from the outside. Refer to page
for details.207
Auto Reverse
Moonroof Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
211
If you try to open the moonroof in below-f reezing temperatures, or when it is covered with snow or ice, you can damage the moonroof panel or its motor.
12/07/20 10:56:45 31TK4640_216
To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up fully. To release it, pull up slightly, push the button, and lower the lever. The parking brake indicator on the instrument panel should go out when the parking brake is fully released (see page ).
If you drive without releasing the parking brake, a beeper will sound, and you will also see a RELEASE PARKING BRAKE message on the multi-information display (see page
).
65
65
Parking Brake
212
PARKING BRAKE LEVER
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake applied can damage the rear brakes and hubs. A beeper will sound if the vehicle is driven with the parking brake on.
12/07/20 10:56:50 31TK4640_217
Interior Convenience Items Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
213
SIDE POCKET
CARGO HOOKS
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK
BEVERAGE HOLDER in REAR SEAT ARMREST
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
USB ADAPTER CABLE
SUN VISOR
CENTER POCKET
GLOVE BOX
VANITY MIRROR
SUNGLASSES HOLDER
BEVERAGE HOLDER
REAR DOOR POCKET
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
COAT HOOK
FRONT DOOR POCKET
12/07/20 10:56:55 31TK4640_218
Open the front beverage holder by sliding its cover backward.
Be careful when you are using the beverage holders. A spilled liquid that is very hot can scald you or your passengers. Spilled liquids can damage the upholstery, carpeting, and electrical components in the interior.
The rear seat also has a beverage holder in the center armrest. To use it, pivot the armrest down.
To open the rear beverage holder, pull out the lid by the tab. To close it, push it down.
Beverage Holders
Interior Convenience Items
214
FRONT REAR
12/07/20 10:57:01 31TK4640_219
Your vehicle has two accessory power sockets. One is next to the shift lever. The other is in the console compartment.
To access the front accessory socket, slide the lid forward until it latches. To close it, push in on the lid to slide it backward.
To use an accessory power socket, the ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ACCESSORY Mode is the equivalent of ACCESSORY (I), and ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more
information, see pages and .
Each socket is intended to supply power for 12 volt DC accessories that are rated 120 watts or less (10 amps).
None of the sockets will power an automotive type cigarette lighter element.
Make sure to put the socket cover back in place to prevent any small foreign objects from getting into the socket.
:
187 184Accessory Power Sockets
Interior Convenience Items Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
215
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
Slide the lid forward.
Pull up the lid.
FRONT
12/07/20 10:57:10 31TK4640_220
To open the console compartment, push in on the lever and lift the armrest. To close, lower the armrest, and push it down until it latches.
Make sure to slide back the tray before opening the console compartment.
Open the glove box by pulling out the handle. Close it with a firm push. Lock or unlock the glove box with the master key or the built-in key on models with keyless access system.
The glove box light comes on only when the parking lights are on.
Console CompartmentGlove Box
Interior Convenience Items
216
GLOVE BOX
To lock
An open glove box can cause serious injury to your passenger in a crash, even if the passenger is wearing the seat belt.
Always keep the glove box closed while driving.
12/07/20 10:57:17 31TK4640_221
To use a sun visor, pull it down. You can also use a sun visor at the side window. Remove the support rod from the clip, and swing the sun visor toward the side window. You can extend the sun visor further by pulling it back.
To use the vanity mirror on the back of the sun visor, pull up the cover.
The vanity mirror lights come on when you pull up the cover.
You can put small items in the sliding tray located in the console compartment lid. To use the tray, push it in to open it, then slide out fully. Make sure to slide back the tray firmly until you hear a click when not in use.
CONTINUED
Sun VisorVanity Mirror
Interior Convenience Items Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
217
SUN VISOR
Slide
12/07/20 10:57:26 31TK4640_222
Do not use the sun visor extension feature over the rearview mirror.
Make sure to slide the sun visor back to its original position before flipping it back in place.
Make sure you put the sun visor back in place when you are getting into or out of the vehicle.
To open the sunglasses holder, push on the lid. It will unlatch and swing down. To close it, push it until it latches. Make sure the holder is closed while you are driving.
To open the center pocket, push on the lid. It will unlatch and swing up. To close it, push the lid down until it latches.
Center Pocket Sunglasses Holder
Interior Convenience Items
218
Push
Push
12/07/20 10:57:33 31TK4640_223
Some larger styles of sunglasses may not fit in the holder.
You may also store small items in this holder. Make sure they are small enough to let the holder close and latch, and that they are not heavy enough to cause the holder to pop open while driving.
To use a coat hook, slide it out slightly, then pull it down.
Make sure the coat hook is pulled up when you are not using it. This hook is not designed for large or heavy items.
Coat Hook
Interior Convenience Items Instrum
ents and
C ontrols
219
COAT HOOK
12/07/20 10:57:39 31TK4640_224
Door (Door activated position):
OFF position:
After all doors are closed tightly, the lights dim slightly, then fade out in about 30 seconds.
To change the INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING TIME setting, see page
.
With any door left open, the lights stay on about 15 minutes, then go out.
The individual map lights in the front and rear come on when any door is opened, when the remote transmitter (the keyless access remote on models with keyless access system) is used to unlock the doors. When the doors are closed, each light can be turned on and off by pushing the map light button ( / ).
The rear individual map lights cannot be turned on.
The front individual map lights can be turned on and off by pressing each map light button ( / ).
To turn off the setting, press the OFF button.
Your vehicle has the light control buttons on the front ceiling. With these buttons, you can select three positions: OFF, Door (door activated position), and ON. To select a position, press the appropriate button.
When you press the DOOR button, the green indicator in the button comes on as a reminder.
121
Interior Lights
Light Control Buttons
220
MAP LIGHT BUTTON FRONT
REAR
FRONT
ONDOOR ACTIVATED
OFF
12/07/20 10:57:52 31TK4640_225
Turn on the front individual map lights by pushing each map light button ( / ). Push the button again to turn it off. When the door activated position is selected with the light control button, the rear map lights can be turned on by pushing each map light button ( / ). Push the button again to turn it off.
The lights also come on when the key is removed from the ignition switch.
The lights also come on when the power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
All the individual map lights come on and stay on.
If any map light is left on when the ignition switch is turned off or the VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) mode is set, and all doors are closed, it will turn off when the vehicle is locked with the remote transmitter (the keyless access remote on models with keyless access system), or after 30 minutes.
ON position:
On models without keyless access system
On models with keyless access system
Interior Lights
Individual Map Lights
Instrum ents
and C
ontrols
221
FRONT
REAR
12/07/20 10:58:02 31TK4640_226
The courtesy light in each front door comes on when the door is opened, and goes out when the door is closed.
In addition to the courtesy lights on the ceiling, the drivers ambient foot light comes on.
Your vehicle also has a courtesy light in the ignition switch. This light comes on when you open the drivers door. It fades out in about 30 seconds after the door is closed.
Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages
and .
The courtesy lights come on when the parking lights are turned on. To adjust its brightness, press either of the instrument panel brightness control buttons ( or ) with the ignition switch in the ON (II) position.
:
187184
On models without keyless access system
Interior Lights
Courtesy Lights
222
COURTESY LIGHTS
12/07/20 10:58:09 31TK4640_227
Your vehicle has a keyless access remote slot light. The light comes on when you:
Open any door.
Set the vehicle mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
Remove the keyless access remote from the keyless access remote slot.
After all doors are closed tightly, the light dims slightly, then fades out in about 30 seconds (depending on the interior light dimming timer setting). The light turns off before 30 seconds have elapsed if you lock the drivers door.
Interior Lights
On models with Keyless Access System
Keyless Access Remote Slot Light
Instrum ents
and C
ontrols
223
LIGHTS
12/07/20 10:58:16 31TK4640_228
224
12/07/20 10:58:17 31TK4640_229
The standard audio system has many features. This section describes those features and how to use them.
The climate control system in your vehicle provides a comfortable driving environment in all weather conditions.
Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio system that requires a code number to enable it.
The security system helps to dis- courage vandalism and theft of your vehicle.
...............Climate Control System . 226 Using Automatic Climate
...................................Control . 228
Dual Temperature and Mode ...................................Control . 232
..........Climate Control Sensors . 234 ................................Audio System . 235
................................Audio System . 236 ..........Playing the AM/FM Radio . 237
................Playing the XM Radio . 246 .................................Playing Discs . 253
...Disc Changer Error Messages . 263 ............................Playing an iPod . 264
.................iPod Error Messages . 271 Playing a USB Flash Memory
........................................Device . 272 USB Flash Memory Device
........................Error Messages . 280 .............Audio System . 281
................................Audio System . 285 ..........Playing the AM/FM Radio . 286
................Playing the XM Radio . 299 ................................Playing a Disc . 307
.......Disc Player Error Messages . 319 Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD)
..........................................Audio . 320 ............................Playing an iPod . 354
.................iPod Error Messages . 363 Playing a USB Flash Memory
........................................Device . 364 USB Flash Memory Device
........................Error Messages . 375 .............Audio System . 376
..................Protecting Your Discs . 381 ............AM/FM Radio Reception . 385
................Remote Audio Controls . 387 ......................Auxiliary Input Jack . 389
.................Radio Theft Protection . 390 ..........................Setting the Clock . 391
............................Security System . 395 .........................................Compass . 397
...............................Cruise Control . 401 HomeLink Universal
................................Transceiver . 404 HandsFreeLink
(Models without navigation ..................................system) . 407
HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation
..................................system) . 424 ..AcuraLink (U.S. models only) . 449 ...Rearview Camera and Monitor . 465
Models without navigation system
Bluetooth Models with navigation system
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
Features F
eatures
225
12/07/20 10:58:23 31TK4640_230
Climate Control System
226
AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON
RECIRCULATION BUTTON
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/ HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
PASSENGERS SIDE MODE CONTROL BUTTON
WINDSHIELD DEFROST BUTTON
ON/OFF BUTTON
SYNC BUTTON
DISPLAY PASSENGERS SIDE DISPLAYDRIVERS SIDE DISPLAY
FAN CONTROL BUTTONS
DRIVERS SIDE TEMPERATURE CONTROL SWITCH
PASSENGERS SIDE TEMPERATURE CONTROL SWITCH
Models without navigation system
DRIVERS SIDE AUTO BUTTON PASSENGERS SIDE AUTO BUTTON
U.S. model is shown.
DRIVERS SIDE MODE CONTROL BUTTON
12/07/20 10:58:28 31TK4640_231
Climate Control System F
eatures
227
AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON
RECIRCULATION BUTTON
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/ HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
PASSENGERS SIDE MODE CONTROL BUTTON
WINDSHIELD DEFROST BUTTON
ON/OFF BUTTON
SYNC BUTTON
PASSENGERS SIDE DISPLAY
FAN CONTROL BUTTONS
DRIVERS SIDE MODE CONTROL BUTTON
CENTER DISPLAY
DRIVERS SIDE DISPLAY
DRIVERS SIDE TEMPERATURE CONTROL SWITCH
PASSENGERS SIDE TEMPERATURE CONTROL SWITCH
DRIVERS SIDE AUTO BUTTON PASSENGERS SIDE AUTO BUTTON
Models with navigation system
U.S. model is shown.
12/07/20 10:58:34 31TK4640_232
On models with navigation system The automatic climate control system in your vehicle picks the proper combination of air conditioning, heating, and ventilation to maintain the interior temperature you select, and to remove moisture from the air and make the interior dry. The system also adjusts the fan speed and airflow levels.
The system automatically selects the proper mix of conditioned and/or heated air that will, as quickly as possible, raise or lower the interior temperature to your preference. The system also dehumidifies the interior.
The drivers side temperature and the passengers side temperature can be set separately. Push up the switch of the appropriate temperature control to increase the temperature of airflow. Push down the switch to decrease it. Each set temperature is shown in the display (in the center display on models with navigation system).Set the desired temperature with
the temperature control switch. You can set the drivers side temperature and the passengers side temperature separately.
Press the Drivers or Passengers AUTO button. You will see AUTO and the selected temperature on the appropriate side of the display (in the center display on models with navigation system).
The climate control system for your vehicle can also be operated using the voice control system. See the navigation system manual for complete details.
When you unlock the doors with your remote transmitter (keyless access remote on models with navigation system), the drivers ID (Driver 1 or Driver 2) is detected, and the climate control settings are turned to the respective mode automatically with the ignition switch in the ON (II) position, or the power mode ON.
1.
2.
Using Automatic Climate ControlVoice Control System
Personalization Setting
Climate Control System
Temperature Control
228
12/07/20 10:58:43 31TK4640_233
When you set the temperature to its lower limit ( ) or its upper limit ( ), the system runs at full cooling or heating only. It does not regulate the interior temperature.
When you adjust a fan control, the fan is taken out of AUTO mode.
To keep stale air and mustiness from collecting, you should have the fan running at all times.
Keep the system completely off for short periods only.
To turn the system completely off, press the ON/OFF button.
Each time you press this button, the climate control system switches between on and off. Turning on the system with this button selects your last climate control selection.
You can also select the appropriate mode on the drivers side and the passengers side separately. To change a mode, press and release the appropriate side mode control button. This will take the mode control out of AUTO mode.
In AUTO mode, the vehicles interior temperature is independently regulated for the driver and front passenger according to each adjusted temperature. The system also regulates each temperature based on the information of the sunlight sensor and the suns
position which is updated automatically by the navigations global positioning system (GPS). If one side of the vehicle is getting too much sun, the system lowers the temperature only on that side.
When you press this button, the indicator in the button comes on, and the passengers side temperature and mode control is synchronized to the drivers side set temperature and mode control. Changing the passengers side temperature or mode control makes the indicator go off and takes the system out of SYNC mode.On models with navigation system
Climate Control System
To Turn Everything Off
ON/OFF Button
SYNC Button F eatures
229
12/07/20 10:58:52 31TK4640_234
When the indicator in the button is on, air from the vehicles interior is sent through the system again. When the indicator is off, air is brought in from the outside of the vehicle (fresh air mode).
Switch to recirculation mode when driving through dusty or smoky conditions, then return to fresh air mode.
The system should be left in fresh air mode under almost all conditions. Keeping the system in recirculation mode, particularly with the A/C off, can cause the windows to fog up.
The outside air intakes for the climate control system are at the base of the windshield. Keep this area clear of leaves and other debris.
You can manually select various functions of the climate control system when it is in fully automatic mode. All other features remain automatically controlled. Making any manual selection causes the word AUTO in the display to go out. When you turn the A/C off, the
system cannot regulate the inside temperature if you set the temperature control below the outside temperature.
This button turns the air conditioning on and off. You will see A/C ON or A/C OFF in the display (in the center display on models with navigation system).
Press the button to increase the fan speed and airflow. Press the
button to decrease it.
Recirculation ButtonAir Conditioning (A/C) ButtonSemi-automatic Operation
Fan Control
Climate Control System
230
12/07/20 10:59:02 31TK4640_235
Pushing this button also turns the power mirror heaters on and off.
This button directs the main airflow to the windshield for faster defrosting. It also overrides any mode selection you may have made.
Air flows from the floor vents.This button turns the rear window
defogger on and off (see page ).
The drivers side mode and the passengers side mode can be selected separately. Use the appropriate mode control button to select the vents the air flows from. Some air will flow from the dashboard vents in all modes.
Airflow is divided between the floor and corner vents and the defroster vents at the base of the windshield.
This mode can only be selected from the drivers side, however the passengers side controls can still change the temperature.
When you select , the system automatically switches to fresh air mode and turns on the A/C. For faster defrosting, the fan speed automatically increases. You can also increase airflow to the windshield by closing the corner vents on the dashboard. To close the vents, rotate the wheel on the side of each corner vent.
When you turn off by pressing the button again, the system returns to its former settings.
Select to help clear the rear window.
Airflow is divided between the vents in the dashboard and the back of the center console, and the floor vents.
Air flows from the center and corner vents in the dashboard, and the vents on the back of the center console.
Each time you press the mode control button, the display shows the mode selected.
145
CONTINUED
Rear Window Defogger Button Windshield Defroster Button
Mode Controls
Climate Control System F
eatures
231
12/07/20 10:59:15 31TK4640_236
For your safety, make sure you have a clear view through all the windows before driving.
When the indicator in the button is on, the SYNC
indicator also comes on. The front passengers temperature cannot be set separately from the drivers.
Your vehicle has two temperature control switches and two mode control buttons, one for the driver, and one for the front passenger.
The drivers side and the passengers side temperature and mode can be controlled independently.
Climate Control System
Dual Temperature and Mode Control
232
DRIVERS SIDE TEMPERATURE CONTROL SWITCH
SYNC BUTTON
PASSENGERS SIDE TEMPERATURE CONTROL SWITCH
U.S. model with navigation system is shown.
DRIVERS SIDE MODE CONTROL BUTTON PASSENGERS
SIDE MODE CONTROL BUTTON
12/07/20 10:59:21 31TK4640_237
The selected temperatures and mode appear in the display (in the center display on models with navigation system). When the indicator in the SYNC button is on, you can adjust both sides to the same temperature and mode by pushing the drivers side temperature and mode controls.
When you set the temperature to its upper or lower limit, it is displayed as
or .
Synchronized Control
Climate Control System F
eatures
233
Drivers Side Passengers Side
REAR FLOOR AIR DUCTS
12/07/20 10:59:27 31TK4640_238
The climate control system has two sensors: a sunlight sensor on top of the dashboard, and a temperature and humidity sensor next to the steering column. Do not cover the sensors or spill any liquid on them.
The humidity sensor helps reduce window fogging and also monitors and adjusts cabin humidity by automatically changing the mode to Defrost.
The airflow from the rear vents can be adjusted when either AUTO mode (driver or passenger) is selected or the fan mode is in the
or position.
You can adjust the direction of the airflow by moving the tab on each vent up-and-down and side-to-side. You can also open or close the vents with the dial between them.
Climate Control System
Climate Control SensorsRear Ventilation
234
SUNLIGHT SENSOR
TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY SENSOR
12/07/20 10:59:35 31TK4640_239
An audio system is standard on all models. Read the appropriate pages (as shown below) to use your vehicles audio system.
For vehicles without navigation system, see pages through .
For vehicles with navigation system, see pages through .
236 284
285 380
Audio System F
eatures
235
Models Without navigation system Models With navigation system
12/07/20 10:59:41 31TK4640_240
Most audio system functions can be controlled by standard buttons, bars, and knobs. In addition, you can access some functions by using the selector knob on the audio system.
The knob turns left and right. Use it to scroll through lists, or to make selections or adjustments to a list or menu item on the display. When you make a selection, push the center of the selector (ENTER) to go to that selection.
When the audio system is in XM Radio mode or playing discs, pushing the selector (ENTER) knob switches the display between the normal display and the extended display. The extended display has three segments to display the detailed information.
To select any setting such as the clock or sound adjustment, press the SETUP button. To use any audio system function, the ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. You can select the item by turning the selector knob. To go back to the previous display, press the RETURN button.
Pressing the SETUP button again will also cancel the setup display mode.
When you unlock the doors with your remote transmitter and turn the audio system on with the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position, the drivers ID (Driver 1 or Driver 2) is detected, and the radio presets and sound level settings (see page ) are turned to the respective memorized mode automatically.
243
Selector Knob SETUP Display
Personalization Setting
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
236
RETURN BUTTON
SELECTOR KNOB
SETUP BUTTON
12/07/20 10:59:49 31TK4640_241
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models without navigation system) F
eatures
237
RETURN BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
SKIP BAR
A.SEL (AUTO SELECT) BUTTON
VOL/ (VOLUME/POWER) KNOB
SELECTOR KNOB
TITLE BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS AM/FM BUTTON
CATEGORY BAR
DISPLAY
(SOUND) BUTTON SETUP BUTTON
12/07/20 10:59:55 31TK4640_242
The ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. Turn the system on by pushing the VOL/ (power/volume) knob or the AM/FM button. Adjust the volume by turning the VOL/
knob.
The band and frequency that the radio was last tuned to are displayed. To change bands, press the AM/FM button. On the FM band, ST will be displayed if the station is broadcasting in stereo. Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.
On the AM band, AM noise reduction turns on automatically.
You can use any of five methods to find radio stations on the selected band: tune, skip, scan, the preset buttons, and auto select.
On the FM band, you can also use the features provided by the radio data system (RDS). For more information on the RDS, see page
.
Use the selector knob to tune the radio to a desired frequency. Turn the knob right to tune to a higher frequency, or left to tune to a lower frequency.
The skip function searches up and down from the current frequency to find a station with a strong signal. To activate it, press and hold the or side of the SKIP bar until you hear a beep, then release it.
The scan function samples all stations with strong signals on the selected band. To activate it, press the SCAN button, then release it. You will see SCAN in the display. When the system finds a strong signal, it will stop and play that station for about 10 seconds.
If you do nothing, the system will scan for the next strong station and play it for 10 seconds. When it plays a station that you want to listen to, press the SCAN button again.
240
To Play the Radio To Select a Station
TUNE
SKIP
SCAN
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models without navigation system)
238
12/07/20 11:00:04 31TK4640_243
Each preset button can store one frequency on AM and two frequencies on FM.
If you are traveling and can no longer receive your preset stations, you can use the auto select feature to find stations in the local area.
You will see a 0 displayed after pressing a preset button if auto select cannot find a strong station for that preset button.
If you do not like the stations auto select has stored, you can store other frequencies on the preset buttons as previously described.
, press the A. SEL (auto select) button. This restores the presets you originally set.
For information on AM/FM radio frequencies and reception, see page
.
Select the desired band, AM or FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store six stations each.
Use the tune, skip, scan, or RDS function to tune the radio to a desired station.
Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a total of six stations on AM and twelve stations on FM.
Press the A. SEL button. A-SEL flashes in the display, and the system goes into scan mode for several seconds. It stores the frequencies of six AM and twelve FM stations in the preset buttons.
Pick a preset button, then press and hold it until you hear a beep.
1.
2.
3.
4.
385
To turn off auto select
CONTINUED
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models without navigation system)
Preset AUTO SELECT
F eatures
239
12/07/20 11:00:13 31TK4640_244
You can also select the auto select mode by using the SETUP button and the selector knob. Push the SETUP button to display the menu items, then turn the selector knob to select AUTO SELECT. Press the selector knob (ENTER) to set the selection.
To start the auto select mode, press the selector knob (ENTER) to select PUSH TO START.
To cancel the auto select mode, press the A. SEL (auto select) button, or press the SETUP button to show AUTO SELECT, then press the selector knob (ENTER). When you see PUSH TO CANCEL, press ENTER again.
On the FM band, you can select a favorite station and display the program service name provided by the radio data system (RDS).
The RDS information display function shows the name of the RDS station you are listening to. With the audio system on and the FM band selected, you can turn this function on or off.
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models without navigation system)
Radio Data System (RDS)
RDS INFO Display
240
AUTO SELECT
12/07/20 11:00:21 31TK4640_245
To switch the function between on and off, press and release the TITLE button. With the system on, you will see the RDS INFO ON message on the display. If the station you are listening to is an RDS station, the display shows the station name.
If the station you are listening to is not an RDS station, the display continues to show the frequency with the RDS information display function on.
When you turn off this function by pressing the TITLE button, the display shows RDS NAME OFF.
On the FM band selected, you can select the program category provided by the RDS. Press either side ( or ) of the CATEGORY bar to display and select an RDS category. The principal RDS categories are shown as follows:
ROCK: Rock, classic rock and soft rock music
ALL: All RDS category stations
CONTINUED
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models without navigation system)
Radio Data System (RDS) Category
F eatures
241
RDS CATEGORY
RDS INFO DISPLAY ON
12/07/20 11:00:30 31TK4640_246
COUNTRY: Country music SOFT: Adult hits and soft music TOP 40: Top 40 hits OLDIES: Nostalgia music and oldies R & B: Rhythm and blues, and soft rhythm and blues RELIGION: Programs concerned with religion CLASSIC: Classical music JAZZ: Jazz INFO: News, information, sports, talk shows, foreign language, personality, public, college, and weather TRAFFIC: Traffic information
Press either side of the CATEGORY bar to select an RDS category. The display shows the selected RDS category name for about 10 seconds. You can use the search or scan function to find radio stations in the selected RDS category. If you do nothing while the RDS category name is displayed, the selected category is canceled.
This function searches up and down a frequency for the strongest signal from the frequencies that carry the selected RDS category information. This can help you to find a station in your favorite category. To activate it, press and release either side ( or ) of the SKIP bar. You will see the selected RDS category name blinking while searching it. When the system finds a station, the selected RDS category name will be displayed again for about 5 seconds.
If the system does not find a station, NOTHING blinks for about five seconds, then the system goes back to the last selected station.
The scan function samples all stations with strong signals on the selected RDS category. To activate it, press and release the SCAN button. You will see SCAN in the display. The system will scan for a station with a strong signal in the selected RDS category. You will also see the selected RDS category name blinking while searching it. When it finds a strong signal, it will stop and play that station for about 10 seconds.
If you do nothing, the system will scan for the next strong station and play it for 10 seconds. When it plays a station that you want to listen to, press the SCAN button again.
If the system does not find a station, NOTHING blinks for about five seconds, then the system goes back to the last selected station.
RDS Program Search RDS Program SCAN
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models without navigation system)
242
12/07/20 11:00:42 31TK4640_247
CONTINUED
Adjusts the bass.
Adjusts the treble.
Adjusts the front-to-back strength of the sound.
Adjusts the side-to- side strength of the sound.
Press the SETUP button to display the sound settings. Turn the selector knob to select an appropriate setting: BASS, TREBLE, FADER, BALANCE, CENTER, SUBW (subwoofer), Dolby PL (Prologic) II, and SVC (speed-sensitive volume compensation). Press the selector (ENTER) knob to enter the setting, then turn the selector knob to adjust the setting.
You can use the RDS program search or scan function even if the RDS information display function is off.
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models without navigation system)
BASS
TREBLE
FADER
BALANCE
Adjusting the Sound
F eatures
243
Selector knob adjustable direction is shown.
SUBWOOFER is selectable.FADER is selectable.
12/07/20 11:00:51 31TK4640_248
The SVC mode controls the volume based on vehicle speed. The faster you go, the louder the audio volume becomes. As you slow down, the audio volume decreases.
The SVC has four modes: SVC OFF, SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVC HIGH. Turn the selector knob to adjust the setting to your liking. If you feel the sound is too loud, choose low. If you feel the sound is too quiet, choose high.
Adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle speed.
Each mode is shown in the display as it changes. Turn the selector knob to adjust the setting to your liking.
When the level reaches the center, you will see C in the display.
Adjusts the strength of sound from the center speaker.
Adjusts the strength of sound from the subwoofer speaker.
If the fader adjustment is set to F9 (maximum front level), the subwoofer is turned off.
Dolby PL (ProLogic) II signal processing creates multi-channel surround sound from 2 channel stereo audio sources. Dolby ProLogic II can only be activated when listening to DISC (CD-DA, MP3/WMA), XM Radio, and AUX. When ProLogic II is active, PL II is shown in the audio display.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic, MLP Lossless and the double- D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
To return to normal play, push the RETURN or SETUP button.
Except SVC adjustment
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models without navigation system)
Speed-sensitive Volume Compensation (SVC)
SVCCENTER
SUBW
Dolby PL (ProLogic) II
244
12/07/20 11:01:00 31TK4640_249
You can use the instrument panel brightness control buttons ( or ) to adjust the illumination of the audio system (see page ). The audio system illuminates when the parking lights are on, even if the radio is turned off.
143
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models without navigation system)
Audio System Lighting
F eatures
245
12/07/20 11:01:04 31TK4640_250
Playing the XM Radio (Models without navigation system)
246
SCAN BUTTON
SKIP BAR
VOL/ (VOLUME/POWER) KNOB
TITLE BUTTON
CATEGORY BAR
DISPLAY
SELECTOR KNOB
XM RADIO BUTTON
SETUP BUTTONRETURN BUTTON
12/07/20 11:01:09 31TK4640_251
To listen to XM Radio, turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position, and press the
button. The last channel you listened to will show in the display. Adjust the volume by turning the VOL/ knob.
To switch between channel mode and category mode, press and hold the TITLE button until the mode changes.
In the channel mode, you can select all of the available channels. In the category mode, such as Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc., you can select all of the channels within that category.
Each time you press and release the TITLE button, the display changes in the following sequence: name, title, and category.
You can also change the mode from the menu items. Press the SETUP button to display the menu items, then turn the selector knob to select MODE/CATEGORY or MODE/ CHANNEL and press the selector knob (ENTER). Each time you press and release the selector knob (ENTER), the display changes between CHANNEL and CATEGORY. To enter the setting, press the TITLE button.
You may experience periods when XM Radio does not transmit the artists name and song title information. If this happens, there is nothing wrong with your system.
Your vehicle is capable of receiving XM Radio anywhere in the United States and Canada, except Hawaii, Alaska, and Puerto Rico. XM is a registered trademark of Sirius XM Radio , Inc. and XM CANADA is a registered business name of Canadian Satellite Radio Inc.
XM Radio receives signals from two satellites to produce clear, high- quality digital reception. It offers many channels in several categories. Along with a large selection of different types of music, XM Radio allows you to view channel and category selections in the display.
CONTINUED
Operating the XM Radio
MODE
Playing the XM Radio (Models without navigation system) F
eatures
247
12/07/20 11:01:18 31TK4640_252
The SCAN function gives you a sampling of all channels while in the channel mode. In the category mode, only the stations within that category are scanned. To activate scan, press the SCAN button. The system plays each channel in numerical order for a few seconds, then selects the next channel. When you hear a channel you want to continue listening to, press the button again.
You can also select a channel or category from the list by using the selector knob. Push the selector knob (ENTER) to switch the display to the list displayed with three segments, then turn the knob to select a channel or category. Press the selector knob (ENTER) to set your selection.
Press either side of the CATEGORY bar to select another category.
Turn the selector knob to change channel selections. Turn the knob right for higher numbered channels and left for lower numbered channels. In the category mode, you can only select channels within that category.
SCAN
CATEGORY ( or )TUNE
Playing the XM Radio (Models without navigation system)
248
Channel list is shown.
12/07/20 11:01:24 31TK4640_253
You can store up to 12 preset channels using the six preset buttons. Each button stores one channel from the XM1 band and one channel from the XM2 band.
To store a channel: Press the button. Either XM1 or XM2 will show in the display.
Use the selector knob, or the CATEGORY bar or SCAN button to tune to a desired channel.
In category mode, only channels within that category can be selected. In channel mode, all channels can be selected.
Pick the preset button you want for that channel. Press and hold the button until you hear a beep.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the first six channels.
Once a channel is stored, simply press and release the proper preset button to tune to it.
Press the button again. The other XM band will show. Store the next six channels using steps 2 and 3.
The signal is currently too weak. Move the vehicle to an area away from tall buildings, and with an unobstructed view of the southern horizon.
XM is loading the audio or program information.
The channel currently selected is no longer broadcasting.
The encryption code is being updated. Wait until the encryption code is fully updated. Channels 0 and 1 should still work normally.
3.
4.
5.
2.
1.
CONTINUED
Preset
NO SIGNAL
XM Radio Display Messages
LOADING
OFF AIR
UPDATING
Playing the XM Radio (Models without navigation system) F
eatures
249
12/07/20 11:01:35 31TK4640_254
The selected channel number does not exist, or is not part of your subscription, or this channel has no artist or title information at this time.
The selected channel has no artist or title information at this time.
There is a problem with the XM antenna. Please consult your dealer.
The XM satellites are in orbit over the equator; therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause satellite reception interruptions. To help compensate for this, ground-based repeaters are placed in major metropolitan areas.
Satellite signals are more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and mountains the farther north you travel from the equator. Carrying large items on a roof rack can also block the signal.
Depending on where you drive, you may experience reception problems. Interference can be caused by any of these conditions:
Driving on the north side of an east/west mountain road.
Driving in tunnels.
Driving on the north side of a large commercial truck on an east/west road.
Driving on a road beside a vertical wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south of you.
Driving on the lower level of a multi-tiered road.
Driving on a single lane road alongside dense trees taller than 50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.
Playing the XM Radio (Models without navigation system)
- - - -
NO INFO
ANTENNA
250
12/07/20 11:01:43 31TK4640_255
When DPLII is turned on (see page ), sound coming from the rear
speakers may be distorted due to the compression of the music being broadcast. Turn DPLII off if this happens.
There may be other geographic situations that could affect XM Radio reception.
This device complies with the appropriate requirements or the required standards. See page for more information.
244
628
Playing the XM Radio (Models without navigation system) F
eatures
251
Signal may be blocked by mountains or large obstacles to the south.
Signal weaker in these areas.
SATELLITE
GROUND REPEATER
12/07/20 11:01:47 31TK4640_256
If your XM Radio service has expired or you purchased your vehicle from a previous owner, you can listen to a sampling of the broadcasts available on XM Radio. With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II) position, press the
button. A variety of music types and styles will play.
If you decide to purchase XM radio service, contact XM Radio at
, or at 1-800-852-9696. In Canada, contact XM CANADA at , or at 1-877-209-0079. You will need to give them your radio I.D. number and your credit card number. To get your radio I.D. number, press the
button, then turn the selector knob until CH 000 appears in the display. Your I.D. will appear in the display.
After youve registered with XM Radio, keep your audio system in the XM Radio mode while you wait for activation. This should take about 30 minutes.
While waiting for activation, make sure your vehicle remains in an open area with good reception. Once your audio system is activated, CATEGORY or CHANNEL will appear in the display, and youll be able to listen to XM Radio broadcasts. XM Radio will continue to send an activation signal to your vehicle for at least 12 hours from the activation request. If the service has not been activated after 36 hours, contact XM Radio. In Canada, contact XM CANADA .
www.siriusxm.com
www.xmradio.ca
Playing the XM Radio (Models without navigation system)
Receiving XM Radio Service
252
12/07/20 11:01:53 31TK4640_257
Playing Discs (Models without navigation system) F
eatures
253
RETURN BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
SKIP BAR
VOL/ (VOLUME/POWER) KNOB
PRESET BUTTONS
CATEGORY BAR
TITLE BUTTON
AUX BUTTON
DISC EJECT BUTTON
DISC SLOT
DISC LOAD BUTTON
CD BUTTON
SETUP BUTTON
MP3/WMA INDICATOR
SELECTOR KNOB
12/07/20 11:01:58 31TK4640_258
You operate the disc changer with the same controls used for the radio. To select the disc changer, press the CD button. You will see CD in the display. The disc and track numbers, and the elapsed time are shown in the display. You can also select the displayed information with the TITLE button (see page ). The system will continuously play a disc until you change modes.
To load or play discs, the ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
A disc compressed in AAC format cannot be played in this audio system.
Video CDs and DVDs do not work in this unit.
Depending on the software the files were made with, it may not be possible to play some files, or display some text data.
This audio system can also play CD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed in MP3 or WMA format. When playing a disc in MP3, you will see MP3 in the display. In WMA format, WMA will appear in the display. The disc, folder and track numbers are displayed. You can select up to 255 folders or tracks.
256
To Play a Disc
Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)
254
Do not use discs with adhesive labels. The label can curl up and cause the disc to jam in the unit.
12/07/20 11:02:04 31TK4640_259
Your vehicles in-dash disc changer holds up to six discs.
To load more than one disc, press the LOAD button until you hear a beep and see LOAD in the display. To load only one disc, press and release the LOAD button.
The disc number for an empty position begins blinking.
When the disc load indicator turns green and LOAD appears in the display again, insert the next disc in the slot. Do not try to insert a disc until LOAD appears. You could damage the audio unit.
Repeat this until all six positions are loaded. If you are not loading all six positions, the system begins playing the last disc loaded.
You can also load a disc into an empty position while a disc is playing by pressing the appropriate preset button. The system stops playing the current disc and starts the loading sequence. It then plays the disc just loaded.
You cannot load and play 3-inch (8-cm) discs in this unit.
Insert the disc into the disc slot when the green disc load indicator comes on. Insert it only about halfway; the drive will pull it in the rest of the way. You will see DISC READ in the display while the disc load indicator turns red and blinks as the disc is loaded.
If a file on a WMA disc is protected by digital rights management (DRM), the audio unit displays UNSUPPORTED, and then skips to the next file.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
CONTINUED
Loading Discs
Playing Discs (Models without navigation system) F
eatures
255
NOTE:
12/07/20 11:02:12 31TK4640_260
Each time you press the TITLE button, the display shows you the text, if the disc was recorded with text data.
The display shows up to 16 characters of selected text data (the folder name, file name, etc.).
When a new folder, file, or track is selected.
When you change the audio mode to play a disc with text data or in MP3 or WMA.
When you insert a disc, and the system begins to play.
You will also see some text data under these conditions:
When playing a CD-DA with text data, the album and track name are shown in the display. With a disc in MP3 or WMA, the display shows the folder and file name.
When you turn on the audio system next time, the system keeps your selection with the TITLE button.
When you press and release the TITLE button while a disc without text data is playing, you will see NO INFO on the display.
With the folder name, you will see the FOLDER indicator in the display. The TRACK indicator is shown with the file or track name.
You can see the album, artist, and track name in the display. If a disc is recorded in MP3 or WMA, you can see the folder and file name, and the artist, album, and track tag.
If you select name off, the text display is turned off.
If the text data has more than 16 characters, you will see the first 16 characters and the indicator in the display. Press and hold the TITLE button until the next 16 characters are shown. You can see up to 32 characters of the text data.
If you press and hold the TITLE button again, the display shows the first 16 characters again.
If any letter is not available, it is replaced with . (dot) in the display. When the disc has no text data, you will see NO INFO on the display.
Text Data Display Function
Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)
256
12/07/20 11:02:23 31TK4640_261
Use the SKIP bar while a disc is playing to select passages and change tracks (files in MP3 or WMA mode).
In MP3 or WMA mode, use the CATEGORY bar to select folders on the disc and use either side of the SKIP bar to change files.
To select a different disc, use the appropriate preset buttons (1 through 6). If you select an empty position, the system will go into the loading sequence (see page ).
In MP3 or WMA mode, you can also select a folder or track/file from the list by using the selector knob. Push the selector knob (ENTER) to switch the display to the list displayed with three segments, then turn the knob to select a folder. Press the selector knob (ENTER) to change the display to the track/file list, then turn the same knob to select a track/file. Press the selector knob (ENTER) to set your selection.
Each time you press and release the side of the SKIP bar, the player skips forward to the beginning of the next track (file in MP3 or WMA mode). Press and release the side of the bar to skip backward to the beginning of the current track. Press it again to skip to the beginning of the previous track.
To move rapidly within a track or file, press and hold either side ( or
) of the SKIP bar.
255
CONTINUED
To Change or Select Tracks/Files SKIP
Playing Discs (Models without navigation system) F
eatures
257
Folder Selection
Track Selection Press ENTER.
12/07/20 11:02:32 31TK4640_262
In MP3 or WMA mode To
select a different folder, press either side ( or ) of the CATEGORY bar to move to the beginning of the next folder. Press the side to skip to the next folder, and press the side to skip to the beginning of the previous folder.
You can select any type of repeat, random and scan modes by using the SETUP button and the selector knob. Push the SETUP button to display the menu items, then turn the selector knob to select PLAY MODE. Press the selector knob (ENTER) to set the selection.
Turn the selector knob to select an appropriate repeat, random or scan mode, then press the selector knob (ENTER) to set your selection.
FOLDER SELECTION To Select Repeat, Random or Scan Mode:
Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)
258
MENU ITEMS
12/07/20 11:02:39 31TK4640_263
To cancel the selected repeat, random, or scan mode, press the SETUP button to show PLAY MODE, then press the selector knob (ENTER). When you see NORMAL PLAY, press ENTER again.
To continuously replay a track (file in MP3 or WMA mode), select REPEAT ONE TRK from the menu items. You will see REPEAT in the display. Select normal play to turn it off.
This feature continuously replays the current disc. To activate disc repeat, select REPEAT DISC from the menu items. You will see D-REPEAT in the display. Select normal play to turn it off.
This feature, when activated, plays the files within the current folder in random order, rather than in the order they are compressed in MP3 or WMA. To activate folder random play, select RANDOM IN FLD from the menu items. You will see F-RANDOM in the display. The system will then select and play files randomly. This continues until you deactivate folder random play by selecting normal play, or you select a different folder with the CATEGORY bar.
This feature, when activated, replays all the files on the selected folder in the order they are compressed in MP3 or WMA. To activate folder repeat mode, select REPEAT ONE FLD from the menu items. You will see F-REPEAT in the display. The system continuously replays the current folder. Select normal play to turn it off. Selecting a different folder with the CATEGORY bar also turns off the repeat feature.
Pressing either side of the SKIP bar also turns off the repeat feature.
CONTINUED
In MP3 or WMA mode
In MP3 or WMA mode
REPEAT ONE TRK REPEAT DISC
RANDOM IN FLD
REPEAT ONE FLD
Playing Discs (Models without navigation system) F
eatures
259
PLAY MODE ITEMS
12/07/20 11:02:47 31TK4640_264
You can also select the scan feature from the menu items with the selector knob (see page ).
This feature plays the tracks within a disc (the files in MP3 or WMA mode) in random order. To activate random play, select RANDOM IN DISC from the menu items. You will see RANDOM in the display. Select normal play to return to normal play.
The SCAN function samples all the tracks on the disc in the order they are recorded on the disc (all files in the selected folder in MP3 or WMA mode). To activate the scan feature, press and release the SCAN button. You will see SCAN in the display. You will get a 10 second sampling of each track/file in the disc/folder. Press and hold the SCAN button to get out of scan mode and play the last track sampled.
This function samples the first file in each folder on the disc in the order they are stored. To activate the folder scan feature, press and release the SCAN button repeatedly. You will see F-SCAN in the display. You will get a 10 second sampling of the first file in each folder. Press and hold the SCAN button to get out of the folder scan mode and play the last file sampled.
You can also select the folder scan feature from the menu items with the selector knob (see page ).258
258
In MP3 or WMA modeRANDOM IN DISC SCAN TRK SCAN FLD
Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)
260
12/07/20 11:02:52 31TK4640_265
Pressing either side of the SKIP bar, or selecting a different disc (using the preset buttons) or folder (using the CATEGORY bar) turns off the SCAN or F-SCAN feature.
This feature, when activated, samples the first track on each disc in order (the first file in the main folder on each disc in MP3 or WMA mode). To activate the disc scan feature, press and release the SCAN button repeatedly until D-SCAN shows in the display. The system will then play the first track/ file in the first main folder on the first disc for about 10 seconds. If you do nothing, the system will then play the following first track/file for 10 seconds each. When it plays a track/ file that you want to continue listening to, press and hold the SCAN button again.
When the first track on the last disc, or the first file in the last main folder on the last disc begins to play, the disc scan mode will be canceled. Pressing either side of the SKIP bar or selecting a different folder with the CATEGORY bar also turns off the scan feature.
Each time you press and release the SCAN button, the mode changes from scan, disc scan, then to normal play.
Each time you press and release the SCAN button, the mode changes from file scan, folder scan, disc scan, then to normal play.
You can also select the disc scan feature from the menu items with the selector knob (see page ).
Press the eject button ( ) to remove the disc. If you eject the disc, but do not remove it from the slot, the system will automatically reload the disc after 10 seconds and begin playing.
To eject all discs, press and hold the eject button until the first disc begins to eject.
You can also eject the disc when the ignition switch is off.
To play the radio when a disc is playing, press the AM/FM or
button. Press the AUX button to switch to an appropriate audio unit (if it is connected to the auxiliary input jack or the USB adapter cable). Press the CD button again to switch back to the disc changer.258
CONTINUED
In MP3 or WMA mode
Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)
SCAN DISC
To Stop Playing a Disc
F eatures
261
12/07/20 11:03:01 31TK4640_266
You can also press the MODE button on the steering wheel to change modes.
If you turn the system off while a disc is playing, either with the VOL/
knob or by turning off the ignition switch, the disc will stay in the drive. When you turn the system back on, the disc will begin playing where it left off.
To remove the disc currently in play, press the eject button. When a disc is removed from a slot, the system automatically begins the load sequence so you can load another disc in that position. If you do not remove the disc from the changer within 10 seconds, the disc will reload into the slot. Then the system returns to the previous mode (AM, FM, or XM Radio).
To remove a different disc from the changer, first select it with the appropriate preset button. When that disc begins playing, press the eject button. Continue pressing the eject button to remove all the discs from the changer.
You can also eject discs when the ignition switch is off. The disc that was last selected is ejected first.
For information on how to handle and protect compact discs, see page
.381
Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)
Removing Discs from the In-dash Disc Changer
Protecting Discs
262
12/07/20 11:03:08 31TK4640_267
The chart on the right explains the error messages you may see in the display while playing a disc.
If you see an error message in the display while playing a disc, press the eject button. After ejecting the disc, check it for damage or deformation. If there is no damage, insert the disc again. For additional information on damaged discs, see page .
The audio system will try to play the disc. If there is still a problem, the error message will reappear. Press the eject button, and pull out the disc. Insert a different disc. If the new disc plays, there is a problem with the first disc. If the error message cycle repeats and you cannot clear it, take your vehicle to a dealer.
CauseError Message Solution
382
High Temperature
Track/File format not supported
Mechanical Error
Servo Error
Disc Error
Will disappear when the temperature returns to normal. Current track will be skipped. The next supported track or file plays automatically. Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc(s). Check the disc for serious damage, signs of deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt (see page 382). Insert the disc again. If the code does not disappear, or the disc(s) cannot be removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to force the disc out of the player.
Check the disc for serious damage, signs of deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt (see page 382).
Disc Changer Error Messages (Models without navigation system) F
eatures
263
HEAT ERROR
UNSUPPORTED
BAD DISC PLEASE CHECK
OWNERS MANUAL PUSH
EJECT MECH ERROR
CHECK DISC LOAD BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK OWNERS MANUAL
CHECK DISC EJECT
12/07/20 11:03:15 31TK4640_268
Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system)
264
SKIP BAR
VOL/ (VOLUME/POWER) KNOB
SELECTOR KNOB
TITLE BUTTON
AUX BUTTON
iPod INDICATOR
SETUP BUTTONRETURN BUTTON
USB INDICATOR
12/07/20 11:03:19 31TK4640_269
This audio system can select and play the audio files on the iPod with the same controls used for the disc player. To play an iPod, connect it to the USB adapter cable in the console compartment by using your dock connector, then press the AUX button. The ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. The iPod will also be charged with the ignition switch in these positions.
The audio system reads and plays playable sound files on the iPod. The system cannot operate an iPod as a mass storage device. The system will only play songs stored on the iPod with iTunes.
iPod and iTunes are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc.
iPod models confirmed to be compatible with your audio system using the USB adapter cable are:
Do not connect your iPod using a hub.
Do not keep the iPod in the vehicle. Direct sunlight and high heat will damage it.
Do not use an extension cable between the USB adapter cable equipped with your vehicle and your dock connector.
We recommend backing up your data before playing it.
Some devices cannot be powered or charged via the USB adapter. If this is the case, use the accessory adapter to supply power to your device.
This system may not work with all software versions of these devices.
CONTINUED
Model iPod (5th generation) iPod classic 80 GB/160 GB iPod classic 120 GB iPod classic 160 GB (launch in 2009) iPod nano (1st to 5th generation) iPod touch (1st to 4th generation)
Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system)
To Play an iPod
F eatures
265
NOTE:
12/07/20 11:03:28 31TK4640_270
Pull out the USB connector from the holder.
Connect your dock connector to the iPod correctly and securely.
Install the dock connector to the USB adapter cable securely.
If the iPod indicator does not appear in the audio display, check the connections, and try to reconnect the iPod a few times.
1. 2.
3.
Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system)
Connecting an iPod
266
DOCK CONNECTOR
USB ADAPTER CABLE
USB CONNECTOR
USB ADAPTER CABLE
12/07/20 11:03:34 31TK4640_271
You can also select a file from any list on the iPod menu: playlists, artists, albums and songs, by using the selector knob. Push the selector knob (ENTER) to switch the display to an iPod menu, then turn the selector knob to select a desired list. Press ENTER to set your selection.
Use the SKIP bar while an iPod is playing to select passages and change files.
Each time you press and release the side of the SKIP bar, the system skips forward to the beginning of the next file. Press and release the side of the bar to skip backward to the beginning of the current file. Press it again to skip to the beginning of the previous file.
To move rapidly within a file, press and hold either side ( or ) of the SKIP bar.
Turning the selector knob to the right or the left also changes the file.
If the audio system still does not recognize the iPod, the iPod may need to be reset. Follow the instructions that came with your iPod, or you can find reset instructions online at
Each time you press the TITLE button the display mode switches between the album name, the song name, the artist name, or name off (which turns off the text display).
The display shows up to 16 characters (including spaces) of the selected data. If the text data has more than 16 characters, you will see the first 16 characters and the
indicator in the display. Press and hold the TITLE button until the next 16 characters are shown.
CONTINUED
www.apple.com/
To Select a File from iPod MenuTo Change or Select Files
Text Data Display Function
Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system)
SKIP
F eatures
267
Push ENTER.
12/07/20 11:03:44 31TK4640_272
You can select any type of repeat and shuffle mode by using the SETUP button and the selector knob. Press the SETUP button to display the menu items, then turn the selector knob to select PLAY MODE. Press ENTER to set the selection.
Turn the selector knob to select a play mode: normal play, shuffle off, shuffle all, shuffle album, repeat off, or repeat one track, then press ENTER to set your selection.
To cancel the selected mode, press the SETUP button and turn the selector knob to show PLAY MODE, then press ENTER. When you see NORMAL PLAY, press ENTER again.
Pressing the RETURN button goes back to the previous display and pressing the SETUP button cancels this setting mode.
If you select ALL, all available files on the selected list are played.
The display shows items on the selected list. Turn the selector knob to select an item, then press ENTER to set your selection.
To Select Repeat or Shuffle Mode:
Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system)
268
PLAY MODE ITEMS
MENU ITEMS
12/07/20 11:03:54 31TK4640_273
This feature plays all available files in a selected list (playlists, artists, albums or songs) in random order. You will see SHUFFLE in the display. Select the normal play mode or SHUFFLE OFF to turn off this feature.
This feature plays all available albums in a selected list (playlists, artists, albums or songs) in random order. The files in each album are played in the recorded order. You will see ALB SHUF in the display. Select the normal play mode or SHUFFLE OFF to turn off this feature.
Pressing either side of the SKIP bar or turning the selector knob changes a file while keeping the shuffle function.
Available operating functions vary on models or versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicles audio system.
Pressing either side of the SKIP bar or turning the selector knob changes the file while keeping the repeat feature.
This feature continuously plays a file. You will see REPEAT in the display. Select normal play or REPEAT OFF to turn it off.
This feature turns off the repeat mode.
This feature turns off either of the shuffle modes (SHUFFLE ALL and SHUFFLE ALBUM).
SHUFFLE ALL
SHUFFLE ALBUM
REPEAT ONE TRK
REPEAT OFF
SHUFFLE OFF
Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system) F
eatures
269
NOTE:
12/07/20 11:04:03 31TK4640_274
If you see an error message in the display, see page .
The displayed message may vary on models or versions. On some models, there is no message to disconnect.
If you reconnect the same iPod, the system may begin playing where it left off, depending on what mode the iPod is in when it is reconnected.
To play the radio, press the AM/FM, or button. Press the CD button to switch to the disc mode (if a disc is loaded). Press the AUX button to switch the audio mode between the
audio and iPod.
You can also press the MODE button on the steering wheel to change modes.
You can disconnect the iPod at any time when you see the OK to disconnect message in the iPod display. Always make sure you see the OK to disconnect message in the iPod display before you disconnect it. Make sure to follow the iPods instructions on how to disconnect the dock connector from the USB adapter cable.
:
271
Bluetooth
Disconnecting an iPodTo Stop Playing Your iPod iPod Error Messages
Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system)
270
12/07/20 11:04:11 31TK4640_275
If you see an error message on the audio display while playing an iPod, find the solution in the chart to the right. If you cannot clear the error message, take your vehicle to your dealer.
Error Message Cause Solution
USB ROM Error
Appears when an incompatible device is connected.
No files in iPod
Use of unsupported iPod
Recognition failure of iPod
There is a problem with the USB adapter unit. Disconnect the device. Then, turn the audio system off, and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.
Appears when the iPod is empty. Store some files in the iPod. Appears when an unsupported iPod is connected. See page 265 for specification information on iPods. If it appears when a supported iPod is connected, update the iPod software to the newer version. Appears when the system does not acknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod.
iPod Error Messages (Models without navigation system) F
eatures
271
USB ERROR BAD USB DEVICE
PLEASE CHECK OWNERS MANUAL
iPod NO SONG
UNSUPPORTED VER.
CONNECT RETRY
12/07/20 11:04:16 31TK4640_276
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)
272
RETURN BUTTON
SKIP BAR
VOL/ (VOLUME/POWER) KNOB
SELECTOR KNOB
TITLE BUTTON
AUX BUTTON
USB INDICATOR
CATEGORY BAR
SETUP BUTTON
FILE TYPE INDICATOR
12/07/20 11:04:21 31TK4640_277
This audio system can select and play the audio files on a USB flash memory device with the same controls used for the disc player. To play a USB flash memory device, connect it to the USB adapter cable in the console compartment, then press the AUX button. The ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
The audio system reads and plays the audio files on the USB flash memory device in MP3, WMA or AAC formats. Depending on the format, the display shows MP3, WMA or AAC when a USB flash memory device is playing.
The recommended USB flash memory devices are 256 MB or higher, and formatted with the FAT file system. Some digital audio players may be compatible as well.
Some USB flash memory devices (such as devices with security lock- out features, etc.) will not work in this audio unit.
Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard drive as the device or your files may be damaged.
Do not connect your USB flash memory device using a hub.
Do not use an extension cable to the USB adapter cable equipped with your vehicle.
Do not keep a USB flash memory device in the vehicle. Direct sunlight and high heat will damage it.
We recommend backing up your data before playing a USB flash memory device.
Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this audio unit.
:
CONTINUED
To Play a USB Flash Memory Device
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system) F
eatures
273
NOTE:
12/07/20 11:04:30 31TK4640_278
Some devices cannot be powered or charged via the USB adapter. If this is the case, use the accessory adapter to supply power to your device.
Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC format may not be supported. If an unsupported file is found, the audio unit displays UNSUPPORTED, then skips to the next file.
In WMA or AAC format, DRM (digital rights management) files cannot be played. If the system finds a DRM file, the audio unit displays UNPLAYABLE FILE, and then skips to the next file.
Depending on the type and number of files, it may take some time before they begin to play.
Depending on the software the files were made with, it may not be possible to play some files, or display some text data.
Depending on the type of encoding and writing software used, there may be cases where character information does not display properly.
The order of files in USB playback may be different from the order of files displayed in PC or other devices etc. Files are played in the order stored in USB flash memory device.
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)
274
Combining a low sampling f requency with a low bitrate may result in extremely degraded sound quality.
12/07/20 11:04:37 31TK4640_279
Connect the USB flash memory device to the USB adapter cable correctly and securely.
When the USB flash memory device is connected, the USB indicator is shown in the display.
Each time you press the TITLE button, the display mode shows you in sequence, the folder name, the file name, the artist name, the album name, the song name, or name off (which turns off the text display).
Pull out the USB connector from the holder.
The display shows up to 16 characters (including spaces) of the selected data. If the text data has more than 16 characters, you will see the first 16 characters and the
indicator in the display. Press and hold the TITLE button until the next 16 characters are shown.1. 2.
CONTINUED
Connecting a USB Flash Memory Device
Text Data Display Function
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system) F
eatures
275
USB ADAPTER CABLE USB ADAPTER CABLE
USB CONNECTOR
12/07/20 11:04:45 31TK4640_280
Use the SKIP bar while a USB flash memory device is playing to select passages and change files.
Each time you press and release the side of the SKIP bar, the system skips forward to the beginning of the next file. Press and release the side of the bar to skip backward to the beginning of the current file. Press it again to skip to the beginning of the previous file.
To move rapidly within a file, press and hold either side ( or ) of the SKIP bar.
Turning the selector knob to the right or the left also changes the file.
You can also select a folder or file from the list by using the selector knob. Push the selector knob (ENTER) to switch the display to the folder list, then turn the selector knob to select a folder. Press ENTER to change the display to the file list, then turn the same knob to select a file. Press ENTER to set your selection.
To select a different folder, press and release either side of the CATEGORY bar. Press the side to skip to the next folder, and press the side to skip to the beginning of the previous folder.
To Change or Select Files To Select a File from Folder and File Lists
SKIP
Folder Selection
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)
276
Folder Selection
Track Selection Press ENTER.
12/07/20 11:04:53 31TK4640_281
Turn the selector knob to select an appropriate repeat, random or scan mode, then press the selector knob (ENTER) to set your selection.
Pressing the RETURN button goes back to the previous display and pressing the SETUP button cancels this setting mode.
You can select any type of repeat, random and scan modes by using the SETUP button and the selector knob. Push the SETUP button to display the menu items, then turn the selector knob to select PLAY MODE. Press the selector knob (ENTER) to set the selection.
To cancel the selected mode, press the SETUP button and turn the selector knob to show PLAY MODE, then press ENTER. When you see NORMAL PLAY, press ENTER again.
CONTINUED
To Select Repeat, Random or Scan Mode:
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system) F
eatures
277
MENU ITEMS
12/07/20 11:05:01 31TK4640_282
This
feature continuously plays a file. Select normal play to turn it off. Pressing either side of the SKIP bar also turns off this feature.
This function samples all files in the selected folder in the order they are stored. To activate the scan feature, press and release the SCAN button. You will see SCAN in the display. You will get a 10 second sampling of each file in the folder. Press and hold the SCAN button to get out of the scan mode and play the last file sampled.
You can also select the scan feature from the menu items with the selector knob (see page ).
This feature replays all the files on the selected folder in the order they are stored. Select normal play to turn it off. Pressing either side of the CATEGORY bar also turns off this feature.
This feature plays the files in the selected folder in random order. You will see F-RANDOM in the display. Select normal play to turn it off.
This feature plays all the files in random order. You will see RANDOM in the display. Select normal play to turn it off.
277REPEAT ONE TRK
SCAN TRKREPEAT ONE FLD
RANDOM IN FLD
RANDOM IN DISC
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)
278
PLAY MODE ITEMS
12/07/20 11:05:09 31TK4640_283
If you see an error message in the display, see page .
Select normal play to turn either scan feature off. Pressing either side of the CATEGORY or SKIP bar also turns off the feature.
This function samples the first file in each folder in the order they are stored. To activate the folder scan feature, press and release the SCAN button repeatedly. You will see F-SCAN in the display. You will get a 10 second sampling of the first file in each folder. Press and hold the SCAN button to get out of the folder scan mode and play the last file sampled.
You can also select the folder scan feature from the menu items with the selector knob (see page ).
To change modes, press the AM/ FM or button. Press the CD button to switch to the disc mode (if a disc is loaded). Press the AUX button to switch the audio mode between the USB or Audio.
You can disconnect the USB flash memory device at any time even if the USB mode is selected on the audio system. Make sure to follow the USB flash memory devices instructions when you remove it.
If you reconnect the same USB flash memory device, the system will begin playing where it left off.
You can also press the MODE button on the steering wheel to change modes.
277
280
Bluetooth
USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages
To Stop Playing a USB Flash Memory Device
SCAN FLD
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)
Disconnecting a USB Flash Memory Device
F eatures
279
12/07/20 11:05:18 31TK4640_284
If you see an error message on the audio display while playing a USB flash memory device, find the solution in the chart to the right. If you cannot clear the error message, take your vehicle to your dealer.
CauseError Message Solution
USB ROM Error
Appears when an incompatible device is connected.
Use of unsupported files
No files in USB flash memory device
Use of unsupported USB flash memory device
There is a problem with the USB adapter unit. Disconnect the device. Then, turn the audio system off, and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.
Appears when the files in the USB flash memory device are DRM or an unsupported format. This error message appears for about 3 seconds, then plays the next song. Appears when the USB flash memory device is empty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flash memory device. Save some MP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flash memory device. Appears when an unsupported device is connected. See page 273 for the specification information for the USB flash memory device. If it appears when the supported device is connected, reconnect the device.
USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages (Models without navigation system)
280
USB ERROR BAD USB DEVICE
PLEASE CHECK OWNERS MANUAL
UNPLAYABLE FILE
USB NO SONG
UNSUPPORTED
12/07/20 11:05:22 31TK4640_285
CONTINUED
Bluetooth Audio System (Models without navigation system) F
eatures
281
SKIP BAR
SELECTOR KNOB
TITLE BUTTON
AUX BUTTON
SETUP BUTTON
VOL/ (VOLUME/POWER) KNOB
12/07/20 11:05:27 31TK4640_286
Your vehicle is equipped with a Audio system, which
allows you to listen to streaming audio from your Audio compatible phone. This function is only available on phones that are paired and linked to the vehicles
HandsFreeLink (HFL) system (see page ).
Make sure that your phone is paired and linked to HFL. Press the AUX button with the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. The audio display shows the Audio message and mark. Until the phone is recognized, you will see NO CONNECT on the display. This message will go off when the phone is recognized, then the system begins to play.
If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system, there will be a delay before the system begins to play.
After a device is linked, press the TITLE button to confirm the device name. The name of the device will appear on the audio display.
In some states, provinces, and territories, it may be illegal to perform some data device functions while driving.
If an iPod, USB flash memory device, or audio unit connected to the auxiliary input jack was selected at the last mode, you will see iPod, USB, or AUX in the audio display. Push the AUX button again to play audio files from your Audio phone.
To begin to play the audio files, you may need to operate your phone. If so, follow the phone makers operating instructions.
Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming audio capabilities are compatible with the system. You can find an approved phone by visiting
, or by calling the HandsFreeLink consumer support at 1-888-528-7876. In Canada, visit , or call (888) 528-7876.
:
412
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
www.acura.com/handsfreelink
www.handsfreelink.ca
To Play Audio FilesBluetooth
Bluetooth Audio System (Models without navigation system)
282
NOTE:
12/07/20 11:05:36 31TK4640_287
In the following conditions, the display shows NO CONNECT message.
The phone is not linked to HFL. The phone is not turned on. The phone is not in the vehicle. Another HFL compatible phone, which is not compatible for
Audio, is already connected.
Press the side of the SKIP bar to skip forward to the next file, and press the side to skip backward to the beginning of the current file. Push the side again to skip to the previous file.
Turning the selector knob to the right or left also changes a file.
The resume/pause mode can stop playing a file temporarily. Press the SETUP button to display the audio settings.
Turn the selector to select RESUME/PAUSE mode, then press ENTER to set your selection. Repeat to resume play.
The pause function may not be available on some phone devices.
Press the SETUP button to display the audio settings. Turn the selector to select a desired sound mode, then press ENTER to set your selection. Turn the selector to your liking (see page for more sound setting information).
The skip function may not be available on some phone devices.
243
Bluetooth
CONTINUED
To skip a file
To pause or resume a file To change sound settings
Bluetooth Audio System (Models without navigation system) F
eatures
283
NOTE:NOTE:
12/07/20 11:05:50 31TK4640_288
If you receive a call when the Audio is playing, press the
HFL Talk button on the steering wheel. The display switches to the HFL mode (see page ).
After ending the call, press the HFL Back button to go back to the
Audio mode.
If you receive a call while the system is in the pause mode, the mode will be canceled and Audio will continue to play.
Select any other audio mode by pressing a button: AM/FM,
or CD (if a disc is loaded), on the audio control panel, or press the mode button on the steering wheel to select another audio mode. If an iPod or USB flash memory device is connected to the USB adapter cable, or audio unit is connected to AUX jack, pressing the AUX button also changes the mode.
Switching to another mode pauses the music playing from your phone.
This device complies with the appropriate requirements or the required standards. See page for more information.
628
407
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
Bluetooth Audio System (Models without navigation system)
To switch to HFL mode To turn off the Bluetooth Audio mode
284
12/08/03 20:58:31 31TK4640_289
Most audio system functions can still be controlled by standard buttons, dials, and knobs, but some functions can only be accessed using the interface dial. The interface dial has two parts, a dial and a selector.
The dial turns left and right. Use it to make selections or adjustments to a list or menu on the screen.
The selector can be pushed left, right, up, down, and in. Use the selector to scroll through lists, to select menus, and to highlight menu items. When you make a selection, press ENTER to go to that selection.
The audio system can also be operated by voice control. See the navigation system manual for complete details.
When you unlock the doors with your remote and turn the audio system on, the drivers ID (Driver 1 or Driver 2) is detected, and the radio presets and sound level settings (see page ) are turned to the respective memorized mode automatically.
296
Interface Dial Voice Control System
Personalization Setting
Audio System (Models with navigation system) F
eatures
285
SELECTOR ENTER
DIAL
12/07/20 11:06:05 31TK4640_290
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
286
INTERFACE DIAL
(SOUND) BUTTON
AM/FM BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
CATEGORY BAR
TUNE BAR
AUDIO BUTTON
NAVIGATION SCREEN
VOL/ (VOLUME/POWER) KNOB
SKIP BAR
CENTER DISPLAY
SCAN/A.SEL (SCAN/AUTO SELECT) BAR
TITLE BUTTON
12/07/20 11:06:11 31TK4640_291
The power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON. Press the AUDIO button to view the audio control display. Turn the system on by pressing the VOL/ knob or the AM/FM button. Adjust the volume by turning the VOL/ knob.
Your vehicle has the engine start/ stop button instead of an ignition switch. For more information on how to select the power mode, see page
.
You can use any of five methods to find radio stations on the selected band: tune, skip (seek), scan, the preset buttons, and auto select. On the FM band, you can also use the features provided by the radio data system (RDS). For more information on the RDS, see page
.
On the AM band, AM noise reduction turns on automatically.
The band and frequency that the radio was last tuned to are shown on the display. To change bands, press the AM/FM button. You can also change bands by pushing the interface selector up. Each time you push it up, the band will change to FM1, FM2 or AM. On the FM bands, STEREO will be shown on the navigation screen and ST on the center display, if the station is broadcasting in stereo. Stereo reproduction on AM is not available.
184
290
CONTINUED
To Play the AM/FM Radio To Select a Station
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system) F
eatures
287
BAND
STEREO INDICATOR
12/07/20 11:06:21 31TK4640_292
Use the TUNE bar to tune the radio to a desired frequency. Press the side of the bar to tune to a higher frequency, or the
side to tune to a lower frequency. To tune with the interface dial, push the interface selector down, and turn the interface dial to select Tune. Then press ENTER on the interface selector, and turn the interface dial to the desired frequency. To exit the TUNE mode, press ENTER on the
interface selector, then push the interface selector up to go back.
The skip (seek) function searches up and down from the current frequency to find a station with a strong signal. To activate it, press either side ( or
) of the SKIP bar, then release it.
The SCAN function samples all stations with strong signals on the selected band. To activate it, press the SCAN side of the SCAN A.SEL bar, then release it.
To scan with the interface dial, push the interface selector down, and turn the interface dial to select Scan, then press ENTER on the interface selector.
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
TUNE
SKIP (SEEK)
SCAN
288
TUNE
SCAN
12/07/20 11:06:28 31TK4640_293
When the system finds a strong signal, it will stop and play that station for about 10 seconds. If you do nothing, the system will then scan for the next strong station and play it for 10 seconds. When it plays a station that you want to listen to, press the SCAN side of the bar again.
Press the preset button, and hold it until you hear a beep. You can also store frequencies with the interface dial. Select the preset icon you want to store the frequency on, then press ENTER on the interface selector, and hold it until you hear a beep.
Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a total of six stations on AM and twelve stations on FM.
If you are traveling and can no longer receive your preset stations, you can use the auto select feature to find stations in the local area.
Each preset button or preset icon can store one frequency on AM and two frequencies on FM.
Select the desired band, AM or FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store six stations each.
Use the tune, skip (seek), scan, or RDS function to tune the radio to a desired station.
1.
2.
3.
4.
CONTINUED
To store a preset memory location:
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
AUTO SELECT
Preset
F eatures
289
A.SEL INDICATOR
A.SEL
12/07/20 11:06:37 31TK4640_294
Push the interface selector down to display the AUDIO MENU. Turn the interface dial to select A.SEL, then press ENTER on the interface selector. Turn the interface dial to select ON, then press ENTER on the interface selector. You will see A.SEL on the center display and the audio control display (if selected), and the system goes into auto select mode for several seconds.
You can also press the A.SEL side of the SCAN/A.SEL bar. You will see A.SEL on the center display or the screen, and the system goes into auto select mode for several seconds.
You will see 0 displayed if auto select cannot find a strong station for every preset button (icon).
The system stores the frequencies of six AM and twelve FM stations in the preset buttons (icons).
If you do not like the stations auto select has stored, you can store other frequencies on the preset buttons (icons) as previously described.
select A.Sel on the audio menu again and turn the interface dial to select A.SEL OFF, or press the A.SEL side of the bar again. This restores the presets you originally set.
For information on AM/FM radio frequencies and reception, see page
.
On the FM band, you can select a favorite station and display the program service name provided by the radio data system (RDS).
The RDS INFO display function shows the name of the station you are listening to. With the audio system on and the FM band selected, you can turn this function on or off.
385
To cancel auto select,
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
Radio Data System (RDS)
RDS INFO Display
290
12/07/20 11:06:45 31TK4640_295
If the station you are listening to is not an RDS station, the audio screen and the center display continue to show the frequency.
To switch the RDS INFO display function on and off, press and release the TITLE button. With the system on, you will see the RDS INFO ON message on the center display. If the station you are listening to is an RDS station, the displayed frequency switches to the station name.
When you turn off this function by pressing the TITLE button, the center display shows RDS INFO OFF.
On the FM band selected, you can select the program type provided by the RDS. Press the AUDIO button to display the radio information on the screen. Push down the interface selector, then turn the interface dial to select RDS search. Press ENTER to set your selection. The principal RDS categories are shown as follows:
If the station you are listening to is an RDS station, the audio screen will always display the RDS information.
CONTINUED
Radio Data System (RDS) Category
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system) F
eatures
291
NOTE:RDS INFO MESSAGE
RDS SEARCH
12/07/20 11:06:52 31TK4640_296
ALL: All RDS category stations
TOP 40: Top 40 hits ROCK: Rock, classic rock and soft rock music OLDIES: Nostalgia music and oldies JAZZ: Jazz SOFT: Adult hits and soft music R & B: Rhythm and blues, and soft rhythm and blues CLASSIC: Classical music RELIGION: Programs concerned with religion INFO: News, information, sports, talk shows, foreign language, personality, public, college, and weather
Turn the interface dial to select an RDS category. You can use the search or scan function to find radio stations on the selected RDS category by pressing the interface selector to the left or the right. Press ENTER to set your selection. If you do nothing while the RDS category is selected, the selected category is canceled.
You can also select an RDS category with the CATEGORY bar. Press either side ( or ) of the CATEGORY bar to display an RDS category in the center display. Select a category by pressing either side of the bar.
TRAFFIC: Traffic information
COUNTRY: Country music
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
292
RDS CATEGORY
RDS CATEGORY
12/07/20 11:07:04 31TK4640_297
This function searches up and down for strong signal frequencies that carry the selected RDS category information. This can help you to find a station in your favorite category. To activate it, press and release either side ( or ) of the SKIP bar. You will also see the selected RDS category name blinking in the center display while searching it.
To activate RDS category search with the interface dial, push the AUDIO button to display the FM radio information on the screen. Push the interface selector down, and turn the interface dial to select RDS search. Press ENTER on the interface selector. The screen shows you the RDS category list.
While the RDS category is selected, move the interface selector to the left or right to select SEEK up, SEEK down, or SCAN in the upper right corner of the screen. Press ENTER to activate the RDS category search (SEEK up/down).
Turn the interface dial to the desired RDS category.
If the system does not find a station, NOTHING blinks for about five seconds, then the system goes back to the last selected station.
CONTINUED
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
RDS Category Search
F eatures
293
SEEK is selected.
SEEK/SCAN ICON (RDS Search mode)
RDS CATEGORY LIST
12/07/20 11:07:12 31TK4640_298
To activate RDS category scan with the interface dial, push the AUDIO button to display the FM radio information on the screen. Push the interface selector down, and turn the interface dial to select RDS search on the audio menu. Press ENTER on the interface selector. The screen shows you the RDS category list.
If you do nothing, the system will scan for the next strong station and play it for 10 seconds. When it plays a station that you want to listen to, press the SCAN side of the SCAN/ A.SEL bar again.
The scan function samples all stations with strong signals on the selected RDS category one by one. To activate it, press and release the SCAN side of the SCAN/A.SEL bar. You will see SCAN in the center display. The system will scan for a station with a strong signal in the selected RDS category. You will also see the selected RDS category name blinking in the center display while scanning it. When the system finds one, it will stop and play that station for about 10 seconds.
If the system does not find a station, NOTHING blinks for about five seconds, then the system goes back to the last selected station.
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
RDS Category SCAN
294
RDS CATEGORY LIST
SEEK/SCAN ICON (RDS Search mode)
SCAN is selected.
12/07/20 11:07:18 31TK4640_299
While the RDS category is selected, move the interface selector to the left or the right to select SCAN. Then press ENTER to activate the RDS SCAN.
To activate radio text display, use the interface dial. Push the interface selector down, and turn the interface dial to select Read Radio Text. Press ENTER on the interface selector to enter the setting.
This function displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station.
If the selected RDS station has the radio text information, you will see the text indicator on the screen.
Turn the interface dial to the desired RDS category.
CONTINUED
Radio Text Display
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system) F
eatures
295
TEXT INDICATOR
READ RADIO TEXT
12/07/20 11:07:26 31TK4640_300
To adjust the sound, press the AUDIO button, push the interface selector down, and turn the interface dial to Sound Setup. Then press ENTER on the interface selector.
BASS, TREBLE, FADER, and BALANCE are each adjustable. You can also adjust the strength of the sound coming from the center and subwoofer speakers. In addition, you can set the Dolby PL (ProLogic) II and Speed-sensitive volume compensation (SVC).
These adjustments can be made with the (Sound) button or the interface dial.
The display shows up to 64 characters on the selected RDS station.
Adjusting the Sound
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
296
SOUND SETUP
12/07/20 11:07:33 31TK4640_301
These modes adjust the strength of the sound coming from each speaker. Fader adjusts the front-to-back strength, while balance adjusts the side-to-side strength. To adjust fader and balance, select FADER or BALANCE, then press ENTER on the interface selector. The current setting is shown on the screen. Turn the interface dial or VOL/ knob to the desired level, and enter your selection by pressing ENTER on the interface selector. To equalize the fader or balance, turn the interface dial or VOL/ knob until the marks on the sound grid come to the center of the adjustment bar.
If the fader adjustment is set to F9 (maximum front level), the subwoofer is turned off.
Turn the VOL/ knob or interface knob to adjust the setting to your liking. You can check the level on the navigation screen or on the center display. When the level reaches the center, you will see C in the center display.
The system will return to the audio playing mode in the center display about 10 seconds after you stop adjusting a mode.
If you do not make an adjustment within 10 seconds, you will need to select the mode again.
To adjust bass and treble, select BASS or TREBLE, and press ENTER on the interface selector. The current setting is shown on the display. Turn the interface dial or VOL/ knob to the desired level, and enter your selection by pressing ENTER on the interface selector.
You can also adjust the sound by pushing the (Sound) button repeatedly. Each mode is shown in the center display as you push the button.
Select the mode you want to adjust by turning the interface dial then press ENTER.
CONTINUED
FADER/BALANCE
BASS/TREBLE
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system) F
eatures
297
12/07/20 11:07:44 31TK4640_302
Adjusts the strength of sound from the center speaker.
To adjust the strength of the sound from the subwoofer speaker, select it and press ENTER on the interface selector. Turn the interface dial to the desired level, and enter your selection by pressing ENTER on the interface selector.
The SVC mode controls the volume based on vehicle speed. The faster you go, the louder the audio volume becomes. As you slow down, the audio volume decreases.
The SVC has four modes: OFF, LOW, MID, and HIGH. The default setting is MID. To change the SVC mode, select SVC, then press ENTER on the interface selector. The current setting is shown on the
screen. Turn the interface dial to the desired level, and enter your selection by pressing ENTER on the interface selector. If you feel the sound is too loud, choose low. If you feel the sound is too quiet, choose high.
Dolby PL (ProLogic) II signal processing creates multi-channel surround sound from 2 channel stereo audio sources. Dolby ProLogic II can only activate when listening to DISC (CD-DA, MP3, WMA, AAC), XM Radio, AUX (USB, iPod , AUX,
Audio), and HDD Audio. When ProLogic II is available, PL II is shown in the audio display.
When ProLogic II is not available in the selected audio source, DPL2 N/ A is shown on the center display.
To set this feature on or off, select Dolby PL II, and press ENTER on the interface selector. Rotate the interface dial to ON or OFF, and press ENTER.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic, MLP Lossless and the double- D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
In some audio playing modes (XM, AUX), when DPLII is on, the music coming from the rear speakers may sound distorted. This is due to compression of the music, and it does not indicate a problem with the setting.
Bluetooth
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
Dolby PL (ProLogic) II
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
Speed-sensitive Volume Compensation (SVC)
298
NOTE:
12/07/20 11:07:51 31TK4640_303
CONTINUED
Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system) F
eatures
299
INTERFACE DIAL
NAVIGATION SCREEN
VOL/ (VOLUME/POWER) KNOB
SKIP BAR
SCAN/A.SEL (SCAN/AUTO SELECT) BAR
PRESET BUTTONS
XM RADIO BUTTON
TITLE BUTTON
CATEGORY BAR
TUNE BAR
AUDIO BUTTON
(SOUND) BUTTON
CENTER DISPLAY
12/07/20 11:07:57 31TK4640_304
To listen to XM Radio, set the power mode to ACCESSORY or ON. Push the button to select the XM Radio. The last channel you listened to will show in the audio screen (if selected) and the center display. Adjust the volume by turning the VOL/ knob.
Your vehicle has the engine start/ stop button instead of an ignition switch. For more information on how to select the power mode, see page
.
Each time you push the interface selector up, the band will change to XM1 or XM2. Push the AUDIO button to display XM information on the screen. You can operate the XM radio system with the interface dial.
Your vehicle is capable of receiving XM Radio anywhere in the United States and Canada, except Hawaii, Alaska, and Puerto Rico. XM is a registered trademark of Sirius XM Radio , Inc. and XM CANADA is a registered business name of Canadian Satellite Radio Inc.
XM Radio receives signals from two satellites to produce clear, high- quality digital reception. It offers many channels in several categories. Along with a large selection of different types of music, XM Radio also allows you to view channel and category selections in the audio display.
184
Operating the XM Radio
Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)
300
12/07/20 11:08:04 31TK4640_305
Each time you press and release the TITLE button, the center display changes in the following sequence: NAME (artist name), TITLE (music title), and CHANNEL NAME (channel name).
On the screen, you will see the selected CHANNEL (number), CATEGORY, NAME (artist name), and TITLE (music title).
You may experience periods when XM Radio does not transmit the artists name and song title information. If this happens, there is nothing wrong with your system.
To switch between the category mode and channel mode, push the interface selector down to display AUDIO MENU, then turn the interface dial to select Mode, and press ENTER on the interface selector.
Turn the interface dial to select CH or CAT, then press ENTER on the interface selector. Move the interface selector up to go back.
You can also switch the mode by pressing the TITLE button for 3 seconds.
In the category mode, such as Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc., you can navigate through all of the channels within that category. In the channel mode, you can select all of the available channels.
Press either side of the TUNE bar to change channel selections. Press the side of the bar for higher numbered channels and the side for lower numbered channels. You can also change channels with the interface selector. Push down the interface
selector to select AUDIO MENU, then turn the interface dial to choose Tune and press ENTER on the interface selector. Turn the interface dial to the appropriate direction. In the category mode, you can only select channels within that category.
Push down the interface selector to select AUDIO MENU, then turn the interface dial to select Channel List and press ENTER on the selector. Turn the interface dial to select a channel, then press ENTER to set your selection.
Press either side of the bar to select another category.
CONTINUED
MODE
TUNE
CHANNEL LIST
CATEGORY ( or )
Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system) F
eatures
301
12/07/20 11:08:11 31TK4640_306
The scan function gives you a sampling of all channels while in the channel mode. In the category mode, only the channels within that category are scanned. To activate SCAN, press the SCAN side of the SCAN/A.SEL bar. You will see SCAN on the screen and center display.
The system plays each channel in numerical order for a few seconds, then selects the next channel. When you hear a channel you want to continue listening to, press the SCAN side of the bar to cancel.
This function samples all channels. Push down the interface selector to select AUDIO MENU, then turn the interface dial to select Channel Scan and press ENTER on the interface selector.
Press the button. Either XM1 or XM2 will be shown on the display.
To store a channel:
You can store up to 12 preset channels using the six preset buttons. Each button stores one channel from the XM1 band and one channel from the XM2 band.
This function samples the stations in the selected category. Push down the interface selector to select AUDIO MENU, then turn the interface dial to select Category Scan and press ENTER on the interface selector.
1.
SCAN
CHANNEL SCAN
PresetCATEGORY SCAN
Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)
302
XM BAND
12/07/20 11:08:19 31TK4640_307
The encryption code is being updated. Wait until the encryption code is fully updated. Channels 0 and 1 should still work normally.
XM is loading the audio or program information.
The channel currently selected is no longer broadcasting.
Once a channel is stored, press and release the proper preset button to tune to it.
Press the button or scroll up again. The other XM band will be shown. Store the next six channels using steps 2 and 3.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the first six channels.
Pick the preset button you want for that channel. Press and hold the preset button until you hear a beep. You can also pick the number with the interface dial. Select your desired number and press and hold ENTER on the interface selector.
In category mode, only channels within that category can be selected. In channel mode, all channels can be selected.
Use the tune, list, or scan function to tune to a desired channel.
The signal is currently too weak. Move the vehicle to an area away from tall buildings, and with an unobstructed view of the southern horizon.
The selected channel number does not exist, or is not part of your subscription, or this channel has no artist or title information at this time.
There is a problem with the XM antenna. Please consult your dealer.
The selected channel has no artist or title information at this time.
5.
3.
4.
2.
CONTINUED
UPDATING
LOADING
OFF AIR XM Radio Display Messages
NO SIGNAL
- - - -
CHECK ANTENNA
NO INFO
Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system) F
eatures
303
12/07/20 11:08:30 31TK4640_308
The XM satellites are in orbit over the equator; therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause satellite reception interruptions. To help compensate for this, ground-based repeaters are placed in major metropolitan areas. Satellite signals are more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and mountains the farther north you travel from the equator.
Depending on where you drive, you may experience reception problems. Interference can be caused by any of these conditions:
Driving on the north side of an east/west mountain road.
Driving on the north side of a large commercial truck on an east/west road.
Driving in tunnels. Driving on a single lane road alongside dense trees taller than 50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.
Driving on the lower level of a multi-tiered road.
Driving on a road beside a vertical wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south of you.
When DPLII is turned on (see page ), sound coming from the rear
speakers may be distorted due to the compression of the music being broadcast. Turn DPLII off if this happens.
298
Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)
304
GROUND REPEATER
Signal may be blocked by mountains or large obstacles to the south.
Signal weaker in these areas.
SATELLITE
12/07/20 11:08:38 31TK4640_309
CONTINUED
To replay and see the stored file, press the AUDIO button to select the audio display on the navigation screen.
Push down the interface selector to display the audio menu. Turn the interface dial to select Note, then press ENTER.
This function stores the sound content played on the selected XM Radio station with the channel, category, name, and title information.
To activate this function, press and hold the button for about 2 seconds while a song or passage which you want to store is playing. You can record for up to 10 seconds. To stop recording, press the AM/ FM button or button.
Once you store the recorded sound file, you can replay it and confirm the information. The system can store up to 30 sound files. If you continue to store more files, the oldest one will be deleted each time you add a new file.
There may be other geographic situations that could affect XM Radio reception.
This device complies with the appropriate requirements or the required standards. See page for more information.
628
U.S. models only
Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)
Note Function
F eatures
305
NOTE ICON
12/07/20 11:08:48 31TK4640_310
Turn the selector dial to select a sound file, then press ENTER. The display shows the category, name and title information of the selected file.
To delete all files, push the interface selector to the left to select DELETE ALL, then press ENTER. To delete one file, select the file you want to delete and push the interface selector to the right, then press ENTER.
If your XM Radio service has expired or you purchased your vehicle from a previous owner, you can listen to a sampling of the broadcasts available on XM Radio. With the power mode in ACCESSORY or ON, press the
button. A variety of music types and styles will play.
Your vehicle has the engine start/ stop button instead of an ignition switch. For more information on how to select the power mode, see page
.
After you have registered with XM Radio, keep your audio system in the XM Radio mode while you wait for activation. This should take about 30 minutes.
While waiting for activation, make sure your vehicle remains in an open area with good reception. Once your audio system is activated, CAT (category) or CH (channel) will appear in the center display, and youll be able to listen to XM Radio broadcasts. XM Radio will continue to send an activation signal to your vehicle for at least 12 hours from the activation request. If the service has not been activated after 36 hours, contact XM Radio. In Canada, contact XM CANADA .
If you decide to purchase XM radio service, contact XM Radio at
, or at 1-800-852-9696. In Canada, contact XM CANADA at , or at 1-877-209-0079. You will need to give them your radio I.D. number and your credit card number. To get your radio I.D. number, press the side of the CATEGORY bar until 0
appears in the display. Your I.D. will appear in the displays.
184
www.siriusxm.com
www.xmradio.ca
Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)
Receiving XM Radio Service
306
SOUND FILE RECORDED DATE
12/07/20 11:08:57 31TK4640_311
CONTINUED
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system) F
eatures
307
INTERFACE DIAL
SCAN/A.SEL (SCAN/AUTO SELECT) BAR
SKIP BAR
NAVIGATION SCREEN
DISC SLOT
EJECT BUTTON
TITLE BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
CATEGORY BAR
AUDIO BUTTON
VOL/ (VOLUME/POWER)KNOB
DISC BUTTON
CENTER DISPLAY
12/07/20 11:09:03 31TK4640_312
The disc packages or jackets should have one of these marks.
The disc player can also play MP3, WMA, or AAC format that saved on CD-R/RW or DVD-R/RW (see page
).
If a file on WMA or AAC disc is protected by digital rights management (DRM), the audio system skips to the next file.
DVD-A discs not meeting DVD verification standards may not be playable.
Video CDs and DVD-V format discs will not work in this unit.
Some CD-DA and CD-ROM mixed discs are not playable.
Your vehicles audio system has an in-dash disc player. To operate the disc player, the power mode must be in the ACCESSORY or ON.
Your vehicle has the engine start/ stop button instead of an ignition switch. For more information on how to select the power mode, see page
.
CD (CD-DA, CD-TEXT) CD-R/CD-RW (MP3, WMA, AAC) DVD-A DVD-R/DVD-RW (MP3, WMA, AAC)
The disc player can play these disc formats:
184
313
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
308
NOTE:
12/08/08 20:02:36 31TK4640_313
You cannot load and play 3-inch (8-cm) discs in this system.
It is possible to select up to 999 files for inclusion in CD-Rs and CD-RWs, and up to 3,500 files for inclusion in DVD-Rs and DVD-RWs.
Insert a disc about halfway into the disc slot. The drive will pull the disc in the rest of the way to play it. You operate the disc player with the same controls used for the radio. The number of the current track is shown in the display. When playing a disc in MP3, WMA or AAC, the numbers of the current folder and file are shown. The system will continuously play a disc until you change modes.
For information on how to handle and protect compact discs, see page
.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patents: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and DTS Digital Surround are registered trademarks and the DTS logos and Symbol are trademarks of DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
Depending on the software the files were made with, it may not be possible to play some files, or display some text data.
381
To Load a Disc
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system) F
eatures
309
Do not use discs with adhesive labels. The label can curl up and cause the disc to jam in the unit.
12/07/20 11:09:20 31TK4640_314
Select the disc player by pressing the DISC button. The system will begin playing the last selected track in the disc. You will see the current track position highlighted.
Title information will be displayed in a list when the information is found in the Gracenote Album Info (Gracenote Media Database) on the built-in hard disk drive. When you play a CD recorded with text data, you will see the genre, artist name, album and track name on the screen. When you play MP3/WMA/AAC discs, you will see the genre, artist name, album name and track name on the screen. If the disc was not recorded with this information, it will not be displayed.
Each time you press the TITLE button, the center display changes from artist name to album name, to track name and then to normal display that shows the track number and the elapsed time. When playing a disc in MP3/WMA/AAC, the display mode changes from folder name, to file name, to artist tag, to album tag, to track tag, and then to normal display.
Each time you press and release the side of the skip bar, the player
skips forward to the beginning of the next track. Press and release the
side of the skip bar to skip backward to the beginning of the current track. Press the side again to skip to the previous track. To move rapidly within a track, press and hold either side of the skip bar.
When you insert a CD for the first time, the system automatically starts recording to the hard disc. For information on recording from music CDs, see page .
When you insert a CD for the first time, a Gracenote notification appears. For more information, see page .
322
351
To Play a Disc To Change Tracks
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
310
12/07/20 11:09:27 31TK4640_315
You can also choose a track directly from a track list. If there are no track names, you will see No Title displayed. Turn the interface dial to select the desired track, then press ENTER on the interface selector.
To replay the current track continuously, push the interface selector down while playing a disc. Turn the interface dial to select Repeat on the AUDIO MENU, and press ENTER on the interface selector. Turn the interface dial to select Repeat icon, and press ENTER on the interface selector.
To turn this feature off, turn the interface dial to select the OFF icon, and press ENTER on the interface selector.
To Choose a Track Track Repeat
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system) F
eatures
311
REPEAT OFF ICON
TRACK REPEAT ICONTRACK LIST
TRACK REPEAT INDICATOR
12/07/20 11:09:35 31TK4640_316
This feature plays the tracks within a disc in random order. When playing MP3, WMA or AAC format discs, all the tracks within the disc are played in random order, regardless of the configuration of the folder.
Push the interface selector down while playing a disc. Turn the interface dial to select Random on the AUDIO MENU, and press ENTER on the interface selector.
The scan function samples all tracks on the disc in the order they are recorded on the disc.
To activate scan, press the SCAN side of the SCAN/A.SEL bar, or push the interface selector down while playing a disc. Turn the interface dial to select Scan on the AUDIO MENU, and press ENTER on the interface selector.
To turn this feature off, turn the interface dial to select the OFF icon, and press ENTER on the interface selector.
Turn the interface dial to select the track random icon, and press ENTER on the interface selector.
Random Play Track Scan
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
312
TRACK RANDOM INDICATOR
SCAN ICONTRACK RANDOM ICON
RANDOM OFF ICON
12/07/20 11:09:45 31TK4640_317
This audio system plays CD-ROM, CD-R/RW, DVD-ROM, and DVD-R/RW compressed in MP3, WMA, or AAC formats. You can select up to 255 folders or tracks.
To take the system out of disc mode, press the AM/FM button, the
button, or the HDD/AUX button. To return to disc mode, press the DISC button.
Turn the interface dial to select the Scan icon, and press ENTER on the interface selector. You will hear a 10- second sampling of each track on the disc. When you return to disc mode, the disc will begin playing from where it left off.
To turn this feature off, press the SCAN side of the SCAN/A.SEL bar again, or turn the interface dial to select the OFF icon, and press ENTER on the interface selector. The system begins to play the last track sampled.
Your vehicle has the engine start/ stop button instead of an ignition switch. For more information to turn the power mode off, see page .
If you turn the system off while a disc is playing, either with the VOL/
knob or the engine start/stop button, the disc will stay in the drive. When you turn the system back on, the disc will begin playing where it left off.
You can also press the MODE button on the steering wheel to change modes.
184
CONTINUED
Playing an MP3/WMA/AAC DiscTo Stop Playing a Disc
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system) F
eatures
313
12/07/20 11:09:53 31TK4640_318
Combining a low sampling frequency with a low bitrate may result in extremely degraded sound quality.
To play an MP3/WMA/AAC disc, use the disc controls previously described, along with the following information.
While playing an MP3/WMA/AAC disc, you can select a folder within the disc by pressing either side of the category bar. Each time you press either side of the bar, the folder title and its first files information appear on the center display and on the navigation screen in hierarchical order of the folders which contain files within the disc.
If the root folder has some additional folders in the lower layer, they will be listed on the screen.
Using the interface selector, you can see the list of all the folders within a disc. While playing an MP3/WMA/ AAC disc, push the interface selector up. The folder list in the currently playing disc will appear on the screen.
Changing and Selecting the Folders/ Files
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
Changing the Folders
314
NOTE:
FOLDER LIST
12/07/20 11:10:00 31TK4640_319
Select a desired folder by turning the interface dial, then press ENTER. The display returns to normal play, and the first track in the selected folder begins to play.
To change a file, turn the interface dial to select a desired file, then press ENTER.
This feature, when activated, replays all files on the selected folder in the order they are compressed. To activate folder repeat play, push the interface selector down while playing a disc. Turn the interface dial to select Repeat on the AUDIO MENU, and press ENTER on the interface selector. Turn the interface dial to select the folder repeat icon, and press ENTER on the interface selector.
To turn this feature off, turn the interface dial to select the OFF icon, and press ENTER on the interface selector.
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
Folder Repeat
F eatures
315
FOLDER REPEAT ICON
FOLDER REPEAT INDICATOR
REPEAT OFF ICON
FILE LIST
12/07/20 11:10:07 31TK4640_320
This feature, when activated, plays all files in the current folder in random order. To activate folder random play, push the interface selector down while playing a disc. Turn the interface dial to select Random on the AUDIO MENU, and press ENTER on the interface selector. Turn the interface dial to select the folder random icon, and press ENTER on the interface selector.
To turn this feature off, turn the interface dial to select OFF icon, and press ENTER on the interface selector.
This feature samples all files in the selected folder in the order they are stored. To activate this feature, press the SCAN side of the SCAN/A.SEL bar. You can also select the SCAN icon with the interface dial. Push the selector down, turn the dial to select
Scan on the AUDIO MENU, then press ENTER. Turn the dial to select the scan icon, then press ENTER. The system begins to play a file for about 10 seconds, and continues to sample the remaining files.
To turn this feature off, press the SCAN side of the bar again, or select OFF icon by turning the dial, then press ENTER.
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
Folder Random
File Scan
316
FOLDER RANDOM INDICATOR
FOLDER SCAN ICON
FILE SCAN ICON
SCAN OFF ICON
FOLDER RANDOM ICON
12/07/20 11:10:15 31TK4640_321
This feature, when activated, samples the first file of each folder for 10 seconds. To scan a folder, press the SCAN side of the SCAN/ A.SEL bar. Or, push the interface selector down while playing a disc. Turn the interface dial to select Scan on the AUDIO MENU, and press ENTER on the interface selector. Turn the interface dial to select the folder scan icon, and press ENTER on the interface selector.
When playing MP3, WMA or AAC format disc, each time you press the SCAN side of the SCAN/A.SEL bar, the system changes in the following sequence: Scan Scan first track in folder OFF Scan.
The system plays the first file in the first folder for about 10 seconds. If you do nothing, the system will then play the first files in the next folders for 10 seconds. After playing the first file in the last folder, the system plays normally.
To turn this feature off, turn the interface dial to select OFF icon, and press ENTER on the interface selector. The last track sampled begins to play.
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
Folder Scan
F eatures
317
NOTE:
12/07/20 11:10:21 31TK4640_322
To remove the disc, press the eject ( ) button.
If you do not remove the disc from the slot, the system will reload the disc after 10 seconds. The disc starts playing automatically.
Use the disc controls previously described.
For information on how to handle and protect discs, see page .381
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
Removing a Disc from the Player Playing a DVD-A Disc
Protecting Discs
318
12/07/20 11:10:26 31TK4640_323
The chart on the right explains the error messages you may see in the center display while playing a disc.
If you see an error message in the center display while playing a disc, press the eject button. After ejecting the disc, check it for damage or deformation. If there is no damage, insert the disc again. For additional information on damaged discs, see page .
The audio system will try to play the disc. If there is still a problem, the error message will reappear. Press the eject button, and pull out the disc. Insert a different disc. If the new disc plays, there is a problem with the first disc. If the error message cycle repeats and you cannot clear it, take your vehicle to a dealer.
CauseError Message Solution
382
Servo Error
Mechanical Error
FOCUS Error Disc violates copyright Disc not supported Load Error
Track/File format not supported High Temperature
Press the eject button and pull out the disc. Check the disc for serious damage, signs of deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt (see page 382 ). Insert the disc again. If the code does not disappear, or the disc cannot be removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to force the disc out of the player.
Current track will be skipped. The next supported track or file plays automatically. Will disappear when the temperature returns to normal.
Disc Player Error Messages (Models with navigation system) F
eatures
319
BAD DISC PLEASE CHECK
OWNERS MANUAL BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK OWNERS MANUAL
PUSH EJECT MECH ERROR
CHECK DISC
CHECK DISC LOAD
UNPLAYABLE FILE
HEAT ERROR
12/07/20 11:10:32 31TK4640_324
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
320
TITLE BUTTON
AUDIO BUTTON
NAVIGATION SCREEN
INTERFACE DIAL
HDD/AUX BUTTON
CENTER DISPLAY
SKIP BARCATEGORY BAR
VOL/ (VOLUME/POWER)KNOB
SCAN/A.SEL (SCAN/AUTO SELECT) BAR
12/07/20 11:10:37 31TK4640_325
Recording function from following media is not supported. CD-DA which prohibits the copying by SCMS CD-DA with copy control SACD (Super Audio CD) DTS-CD DVD-A CD-R/RW DVD-R/RW Copy controlled CDs (Playback cannot be guaranteed) DTS-CDs (Only enabled for playback)
The Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio function can record tracks from music CDs to the navigation systems hard disc. This function also allows for various playing methods, such as playing recorded tracks on an artist- by-artist or genre-by-genre basis. For example, you can play the tracks that you want to listen to in any order that you like for each playlist.
Music data recorded on HDD can only be used for personal enjoyment.
Data is recorded using ultra- efficient compression technology, therefore, sound quality may vary slightly from the original.
Title information will be displayed when the information is found in the Gracenote Album Info (Gracenote Media Database) on the built-in hard disk drive. See page .
If the HDD is ever replaced, all data will be lost and stored music will not be recovered.
Only recordings from a standard CD-DA (44.1 kHz, 16 bit stereo PCM digital sound data) to HDD are supported.
Digital music files, such as MP3, WMA, AAC etc., in CD-R, DVD-R and USB flash memory devices cannot be copied to HDD. Likewise, digital music files recorded to HDD cannot be copied to CD-R, DVD-R and USB devices.
351
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system) F
eatures
321
NOTE:
12/07/20 11:10:45 31TK4640_326
Playlists are track lists in a certain playback group.
This playlist is automatically generated when the music CD is recorded. The maximum number of original playlists that can be stored to the HDD is 999, with 99 songs on each playlist. Each album name on the music CD is counted as a playlist.
Songs that have been recorded on the HDD are categorized in groups for easy searching.
For more information of how to search a music, see page .
There are six categories: Album record date: Album titles are arranged by date of recording. Album: Album names are arranged in alphabetical order. Artist: Artist names are arranged in alphabetical order. Genre: Songs are arranged by genre. Playlist: Any of six playlists that are arranged by the user. Track: Track titles are arranged in alphabetical order.
If you play a music CD that has not yet been recorded on the HDD, the system will automatically begin recording to the HDD once the disc is loaded. To turn this feature off, see page .
The HDD has six playlist folders for user customizing. Each playlist can be edited by the user, and will store up to 999 songs. For more information on how to edit the user playlist, see page .
329
328
324
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Playlists
Original Playlist
User Playlist
Track Search Methods Recording a Music CD to HDD Audio
322
12/07/20 11:10:57 31TK4640_327
The icons show the recording conditions for each track: Rec icon: Now recording Rec ready icon: Next to be recorded Rec done icon: Recording finished
Please note that there will be no compensation offered in the case of unsuccessful recording of audio data or the loss of audio data due to any cause whatsoever.
During recording, operation of this product may be slower.
If you stop the engine or the power system is turned off while recording a CD, there may be pauses between songs when you play back from the HDD.
Tracks from music CDs are recorded at four times the playback speed. You can listen to tracks as they are being recorded.
Forward/rewind, repeat, random and scan functions are not available during recording.
You can listen to tracks from other playlists that have already been recorded while recording. Press the HDD/AUX button and switch over to HDD Audio.
With the factory settings, all of the songs on a music CD are automatically recorded.
Recording settings cannot be changed during recording.
If the number of songs in the playlist exceeds 999, the oldest song will be overwritten each time you add a new song.
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system) F
eatures
323
NOTE:REC DONE ICON
REC READY ICON
REC ICON
12/07/20 11:11:07 31TK4640_328
To change the setting to manual mode, push the interface selector down on the HDD screen. Turn the interface dial to select HDD Setup and press ENTER. Turn the interface dial to select
MANUAL and press ENTER on the interface selector.
Push down the interface selector to go back to the audio screen.
In order to suspend recording, push the interface selector down, select Cancel CD Recording, and press ENTER on the interface selector.
Turn the dial to select CD Recording and press ENTER on the interface selector.
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
To Cancel Recording a Music CD to HDD
Changing the Recording Settings Recording a Track on a Music CD Manually
324
HDD SETUP CD Recording ICON
12/07/20 11:11:16 31TK4640_329
To change the setting to automatically record all of the tracks on a music CD, move the interface selector down on the HDD Audio screen. Turn the interface dial to select HDD Setup, and press ENTER on the interface selector.
Turn the interface dial to select AUTO, and press ENTER on the interface selector.
To play tracks on HDD, push the HDD/AUX button until the HDD Audio screen appears. Playback will start automatically with the track previously selected.
Select a track to record from the music CD, push the HDD/AUX button, then push the interface selector down to display the audio menu. Turn the interface dial to select Record CD, and then press ENTER on the interface selector.
Turn the dial to select CD Recording and press ENTER on the interface selector.
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
To Record a Track Manually Recording All of the Tracks on a Music CD Automatically
Playing Tracks on HDD
F eatures
325
Record CD ICON
12/07/20 11:11:24 31TK4640_330
To change a track or tracklist , press on the Category bar or the Skip bar.
To replay the current track continuously, push the interface selector down during track playback.
Turn the interface dial to select Repeat on the HDD AUDIO MENU, and press ENTER on the interface selector. Turn the interface dial to select the repeat icon, then press ENTER on the interface selector.
To fast forward, press and hold the side of the SKIP bar. To
rewind, press and hold the side of the SKIP bar.The tracklist has six search
mode categories: albums, artists, tracks, playlists, genres, and record date. Within the selected category, the tracklist will be changed with the category bar.
:
The next tracklist is selected. If you press during the last tracklist, the first tracklist is selected. The previous tracklist is selected. If you press during the first tracklist, the last tracklist is selected.
Category Bar
Skip Bar Returns to the beginning of the song that is being played. Press twice to play, the previous track. If you press this bar during the first song, the last song is selected. The next song is selected. If you press this bar during the last song, the first song is selected.
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Changing a Track/Tracklist Repeat Playback
Fast Forwarding and Rewinding
326
REPEAT ICON
REPEAT OFF ICON
12/07/20 11:11:34 31TK4640_331
To turn this feature off, turn the interface dial to select the OFF icon, then press ENTER on the interface selector.
This function plays tracks in the current search mode in random order. To activate random play, push the interface selector down during track playback. Turn the interface dial to select Random on the HDD AUDIO MENU. Press ENTER on the interface selector.
Turn the interface dial to select the track random icon, and press ENTER on the interface selector.
To turn this feature off, turn the interface dial to select the OFF icon, then press ENTER on the interface selector.
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Random Playback
F eatures
327
RANDOM OFF ICON
RANDOM ICON
12/07/20 11:11:41 31TK4640_332
This function samples the tracks in the current search mode in the order that they were recorded.
To activate scan, push the interface selector down during track playback. Turn the interface dial to select Scan on the HDD AUDIO MENU, and press ENTER on the interface selector.
Turn the interface dial to select the scan icon. Press ENTER on the interface selector. You will hear a 10- second sampling of each track in the current search mode.
To turn this feature off, turn the interface dial to select the OFF icon. Press ENTER on the interface selector to play the last track sampled.
The HDD has two types of the playlists: original playlist and user playlist. On the original playlist, the music CD is recorded automatically when it is played. In addition, you can create up to six user playlists on the HDD. In each playlist, you can store a desired music data from the original playlists or music CDs.
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Scan Playback Making a User Playlist
328
SCAN OFF ICON SCAN ICON
12/07/20 11:11:48 31TK4640_333
While a track is playing on an Original Playlist or User Playlist Playback screen, turn the interface dial and select the track that you want to add to a User Playlist, then press ENTER on the interface selector.
The track options box is displayed. Select Add to Playlist, then press ENTER on the interface selector.
After storing music data, you can customize the original and user playlists (see page ).
On the Playlists screen, turn the interface dial and select the Playlist to which the song is to be added, then press ENTER on the interface selector. You will be returned to the Playback screen.
While playing music in the HDD playback screen, push the interface selector up to select MUSIC SEARCH. You can search a track by albums, artists, tracks, playlists, genres, or record date, or you can shuffle all tracks.
1.
2.
3.
337
CONTINUED
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Adding a Track to a User Playlist Searching the Music
F eatures
329
12/07/20 11:11:57 31TK4640_334
Shuffles the playback of all tracks that have been recorded on HDD.
To shuffle all tracks, push the interface selector up to display the Search music by screen, and then push the interface selector down. Shuffled playback begins.
Push the interface selector up to display the Search music by screen, and turn the interface dial to select Albums. Press ENTER on the selector, and the album list will be displayed in alphabetical order.
If you push the interface selector right or left, you can change the alphabet tag.
Turn the interface dial to select the album you want to listen to, then press ENTER on the selector.
The first track on the selected album begins to play.
If you push the interface selector down to select PLAY SELECTED, all available files on the selected item are played. Press the AUDIO button to go back to the Playback screen.
SHUFFLE ALL TRACKS
Searching Music by Album
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
330
Push the selector down.
ALPHABET TAG
12/07/20 11:12:06 31TK4640_335
CONTINUED
Push the interface selector up to display the Search music by screen, and turn the interface dial to select Artists. Press ENTER on the interface selector, and the artist list will be displayed in alphabetical order.
Turn the interface dial to select the artist you want to listen to, and press ENTER on the interface selector.
If you push the interface selector right or left, you can change the alphabet tag.
The first track on the selected artist begins to play.
Push the interface selector up to display the Search music by screen, and turn the interface dial to select Tracks. Press ENTER on the interface selector, and the track list will be displayed in alphabetical order.
If you push the interface selector down to select PLAY SELECTED, all available files on the selected item are played. Press the AUDIO button to go back to the Playback screen.
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Searching Music by Artist Searching Music by Track
F eatures
331
12/07/20 11:12:15 31TK4640_336
Turn the interface dial to select a track you want to listen to, then press ENTER on the interface selector.
If you push the interface selector right or left, you can change the alphabet tag.
The selected track begins to play.
Push the interface selector up to display the Search music by screen, and turn the interface dial to select Playlists. Press ENTER on the interface selector then the playlist will be displayed.
The first track on the selected playlist begins to play.
Turn the interface dial to select the playlist you want to listen to, then press ENTER on the interface selector.
If you push the interface selector down to select PLAY SELECTED, all available files on the selected item are played. Press the AUDIO button to go back to the Playback screen.
Searching Music by Playlists
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
332
12/07/20 11:12:22 31TK4640_337
CONTINUED
Push the interface selector up to display the Search music by screen, and turn the interface dial to select Genres. Press ENTER on the interface selector, and the genre list will be displayed.
Turn the interface dial to select the genre you want to listen to, and then press ENTER on the interface selector.
The first track on the selected genre begins to play.
If you push the interface selector down to select PLAY SELECTED, all available files on the selected item are played. Press the AUDIO button to go back to the Playback screen.
Push the interface selector up to display the Search music by screen, and turn the interface dial to select Record Date. Press ENTER on the interface selector. The album list will be displayed.
Turn the interface dial to select the album you want to listen to, then press ENTER on the selector.
Searching Music by Genre Searching Music by Record Date
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system) F
eatures
333
RECORDED DATE
12/07/20 11:12:31 31TK4640_338
The first track on the selected album begins to play. The audio system, including the
music search feature Song By Voice , can be operated by voice control. See the navigation system manual for complete details.
You can set the Song By Voice feature on or off. To change the setting:
Push the interface selector down to select AUDIO MENU. Turn the interface dial to select HDD Setup and press ENTER.
Turn the dial to select Music Search Setup and press ENTER.
1.
2.
Searching Music by Voice
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
334
TM
12/07/20 11:12:38 31TK4640_339
Turn the interface dial to select Song By Voice, then press ENTER.
Turn the interface dial to select ON or OFF, then press ENTER. Push down the interface selector to go back to the audio screen.
Turn the interface dial to select Phonetic Modification, then press ENTER.
Follow the steps 1 and 2 on page to display Music Search Setup.
The phonetics can be modified on all artists, songs and albums on the HDD and iPod connected to the USB connector cable.
To set a new phonetic, turn the dial to select New Modification , then press ENTER.
Turn the dial to select HDD or iPod, then press ENTER.
To edit a phonetic, turn the dial to select an item on the list, then press ENTER.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.
4.
5.
334
CONTINUED
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Modifying the Phonetics
F eatures
335
12/07/20 11:12:47 31TK4640_340
Turn the dial to select an item on the selected list.
Turn the dial to select an item to modify: Artist, Album or Song, then press ENTER.
Play to listen to the phonetic to be set Edit to modify the phonetic Cancel
Select a letter by turning the dial, then press ENTER.
On the Enter a phonetic screen, enter a new phonetic.
Turn the dial to select a mode:
7.
6. 8. 9.
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
336
12/07/20 11:12:55 31TK4640_341
After storing the data, you can change some items: order of tracks on the user playlist, name of the playlist, track title, artist name, and music genre. You can also add a track to the playlist, and delete the track or the album from the playlist.
While playing back an Original Playlist or User Playlist that you want to add to a different User Playlist, push the interface selector down to display AUDIO MENU.
Turn the interface dial and select Edit Album (or Edit Playlist if you want to edit an User Playlist), and then press ENTER on the interface selector.
After entering the phonetic, push the interface selector down to select OK.
You will see the Phonetic Modification List. Push the interface selector down to select OK to set your setting.
1. 2.
11.
10.
CONTINUED
Customizing Original/User Playlist
Adding an Original Playlist or User Playlist to a Different User Playlist
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system) F
eatures
337
EDIT ALBUM
12/07/20 11:13:03 31TK4640_342
Turn the interface dial to select the playlist, then press ENTER.
Push the interface selector down to display the AUDIO MENU for the playlist.
On the HDD audio screen, push up the interface selector to select MUSIC SEARCH. Select Playlist by turning the interface dial, then press ENTER.
On the Edit Album (or Edit Playlist) screen, turn the interface dial and select Add to Playlist, and then press ENTER on the interface selector.
On the Playlist screen, turn the interface dial and select a desired User Playlist, then press ENTER on the interface selector. You will be returned to the Playback screen for the Original Playlist or User Playlist.
1. 2.
3.
3.
4.
Changing the Order of Tracks within the User Playlist
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
338
12/07/20 11:13:11 31TK4640_343
Select a desired playlist to change the user playlist name, or a desired album to change the original playlist name (album name). Refer to the Music Search function on page for how to select a playlist or an album. Push the interface selector down to display the AUDIO MENU for a selected playlist or album.
Push the interface selector down to return to the Playback screen of the User Playlist.
Turn the interface dial to select where the track is to be moved, then press ENTER on the interface selector.
Turn the interface dial and select Edit Playlist, then press ENTER on the interface selector.
Turn the interface dial to select Edit Order, then press ENTER on the interface selector.
Turn the interface dial to select the track to be moved, then press ENTER on the interface selector.
1.7.
8.
4.
5.
6.
329
CONTINUED
Changing the Name of the Original Playlist or User Playlist
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system) F
eatures
339
To change user playlist name
To change original playlist name
12/07/20 11:13:21 31TK4640_344
After inputting the name, push the interface selector down to select OK.
The confirmation screen is displayed. Confirm that the new name is correct, and then push the interface selector down to select OK. You will be returned to the Edit Album or Edit Playlist screen for the Original Playlist or User Playlist.
Push the selector down to select OK. The screen returns to the playlist.
Select a letter by turning the interface dial, then press ENTER.
On the Enter an album name screen, input the new Original Playlist name or User Playlist name.
Turn the interface dial and select Edit Playlist (or Edit Album to edit Original Playlist), then press ENTER on the interface selector.
Turn the interface dial to select Edit Playlist Name (or Edit Album Name to edit Original Playlist), then press ENTER on the interface selector.
On the Edit Album Name screen, turn the interface dial to select Edit Album, then press ENTER on the interface selector.
5.
6.
7.
8.
2.
3.
4.
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
340
12/07/20 11:13:29 31TK4640_345
CONTINUED
The track options box is displayed. Select Edit Track Info, then press ENTER on the interface selector.
On the Edit Track screen, turn the interface dial and select Edit Track Name, then press ENTER on the interface selector.
Select a desired playlist, then turn the interface dial to select the track of which you want to change the name, then press ENTER on the interface selector. Refer to the Music Search function on page
for how to select a playlist.
The OPTIONS icon will appear in the selected track. Press ENTER on the interface selector.
1.
2. 3.
4.
329
Changing the Track Titles
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system) F
eatures
341
OPTIONS ICON
12/07/20 11:13:37 31TK4640_346
Select a desired playlist to change the user playlist artist name or a desired album to change the original playlist artist name. Refer to the Music Search function on page for how to select a playlist or an album. Push the interface selector down to display AUDIO MENU for a selected playlist or album.
Turn the interface dial and select Edit Album (or Edit Playlist if you want to edit User Playlist), then press ENTER on the interface selector.
Turn the interface dial to select Edit Album Name (or Edit Playlist Name), then press ENTER on the interface selector in Edit Album (or Edit Playlist) screen.
After selecting the track for which you want to change the track title, you can also push the interface selector down to display the AUDIO MENU, and then select Edit Track. The subsequent procedure is the same as step 4.
On the Edit Track Name screen, turn the interface dial and select Edit Track, then press ENTER on the interface selector.
Input the new track name on the Enter a track name screen.
After inputting the name, push the selector down to select OK.
The confirmation screen is displayed. Confirm that the new track name is correct, and then push the interface selector down to select OK. You will be returned to the Edit screen of the Original Playlist or User Playlist.
Push the selector down to select OK. The screen returns to the playlist.
1.
2.
3.
329
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Changing the Artist Name of the Original Playlist or User Playlist
342
NOTE:
12/07/20 11:13:45 31TK4640_347
CONTINUED
Push the selector down to select OK. The screen returns to the playlist.
Confirm that the new name is correct, and then push the interface selector down to select OK. You will be returned to the Edit Album Name screen.
The confirmation screen is displayed. Choose if you would like to apply the new name to both the album artist and/or the track artist. Select Yes or No by turning the dial, then press ENTER.
On the Edit Album Name screen, turn the interface dial to select Edit Artist, then press ENTER on the interface selector.
On the Enter an artist name screen, input the new artist name.
After inputting the name, push the interface selector down to select OK.
8.
9.
7.4.
5.
6.
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system) F
eatures
343
12/07/20 11:13:53 31TK4640_348
The OPTIONS icon will appear in the selected track. Press ENTER on the interface selector.
Select a desired playlist to change the artist name. Refer to the Music Search function on page
for how to select a playlist. Rotate the interface dial to select a track and press ENTER on the interface selector.
The track options box is displayed. Select Edit Track Info, then press ENTER on the interface selector.
On the Edit Track screen, turn the interface dial and select Edit Track Name, then press ENTER on the interface selector.
On the Edit Track Name screen, turn the interface dial and select Edit Artist, then press ENTER on the interface selector.
Input the new track name on the Enter an artist name screen.
After inputting the name, push the selector down to select OK. You will be returned to the Edit Track Name screen.
2.
1.
329
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Changing the Artist Name of the Track
344
OPTIONS ICON
12/07/20 11:14:02 31TK4640_349
CONTINUED
After selecting the track for which you want to change the artists name, you can also push the interface selector down to display the AUDIO MENU, and then select Edit Track. The subsequent procedure is the same as step 4.
Select a desired playlist to change the user playlist music genre, or a desired album to change the original playlist music genre. Refer to the Music Search function on page for how to select a playlist or an album. Push the interface selector down to display AUDIO MENU for a selected playlist or album.
Push the selector down to select OK. The screen returns to the playlist.
Turn the interface dial and select Edit Album (or Edit Playlist if you want to edit User Playlist), then press ENTER on the interface selector.
8. 1.
329
2.
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Changing the Musical Genre
F eatures
345
NOTE:
12/07/20 11:14:09 31TK4640_350
Turn the interface dial to select Edit Album Name (or Edit Playlist Name), then press ENTER on the interface selector in Edit Album (or Edit Playlist) screen.
On the Edit Album Name screen, turn the interface dial and select Edit Genre, and then press ENTER on the interface selector.
Turn the interface dial to select a genre, and then press ENTER. You will be returned to the Edit Album Name screen.
Push the selector down to select OK. The screen returns to the playlist.
Select the track with the interface dial from the playback screen while it is playing. Press ENTER on the interface selector.
The OPTIONS icon will appear in the selected track. Press ENTER on the interface selector.
The track options box is displayed. Select Delete and press ENTER on the interface selector.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.
1.
3.
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Deleting a Track
346
12/07/20 11:14:18 31TK4640_351
Even if all the tracks are deleted from the User Playlist, the data folder for that playlist cannot be deleted, and their names (playlist and artist) are left. You can store tracks again on that playlist.
When you delete a track from the Original Playlist, the track is also deleted from the User Playlist in which the deleted track was stored.
On the HDD playback screen of the album in which you want to delete, push the interface selector down to display the AUDIO MENU.
Turn the interface dial and select Edit Album (or Edit Playlist if you want to edit User Playlist), then press ENTER on the interface selector.
On the Edit Album (or Edit Playlist) screen, turn the interface dial and select Delete Album (or Delete Playlist), then press ENTER on the interface selector.
Select OK to confirm you want to delete the track. You will be returned to the Playback screen for the Original Playlist or User Playlist.
4.
3.
1.
2.
CONTINUED
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Deleting an Album or Playlist
F eatures
347
NOTE:
12/07/20 11:14:25 31TK4640_352
Push the interface selector down to display the AUDIO MENU.
Turn the interface dial and select Get Album Info, then press ENTER on the interface selector.
On the Select an Album screen, turn the interface dial and select the title information for the Original Playlist, then press ENTER. You will be returned to the Audio Menu screen.
When you delete the Original Playlist, any tracks stored in a User Playlist are also deleted.
Even if all the tracks are deleted from the User Playlist, the data folder for that playlist cannot be deleted, and their names (playlist and artist) are left. You can store tracks again on that playlist.
The Confirmation is displayed. Select OK and then press ENTER. You will be returned to the playback screen for the Original Playlist or User Playlist.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Acquiring Title Information
348
NOTE:
12/07/20 11:14:32 31TK4640_353
You can update the Gracenote Album Info (Gracenote Media Database) that is included with the navigation system.
Consult your dealer, or visit (in U.S.), or
(in Canada), to acquire updated files.
Insert the update disc into the disc slot, or connect the USB flash memory device that includes the update.
You can check the HDD Audio capacity and remaining space as well as the Gracenote Music Recognition Service (CDDB) version included with the navigation system on the HDD Setup screen.
To check the HDD audio capacity, push the interface selector down to display the AUDIO MENU. Turn the interface dial to select HDD Setup, then press ENTER.
1.
www.acura.com www.acura.ca
CONTINUED
Updating Gracenote Album Info (Gracenote Media Database)
Checking HDD Audio Capacity
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system) F
eatures
349
NOTE:
MAXIMUM CAPACITY
VERSION
REMAINING CAPACITY
12/07/20 11:14:40 31TK4640_354
Turn the interface dial and select Update Gracenote Info, then press ENTER on the interface selector.
Turn the dial to select USB or DISC on the Update Gracenote Album info screen, then press ENTER on the selector.
Turn the dial to select Yes on the confirmation screen, and the update will start.
Turn the interface dial to select OK on the confirmation screen.
Push the interface selector down to select AUDIO MENU in the HDD playback screen or CD playback screen.
Turn the interface dial to select HDD Setup, then press ENTER on the interface selector.
After updating is complete, press ENTER on the confirmation screen.
Once you perform an update, any information you edited before will be overwritten.
Any music, data, calendar entries, etc. that have been stored on the HDD can be deleted.
Press the INFO button, rotate the interface dial to select Set up, and press ENTER.
Move the interface selector to the right to navigate to the Set up (Other) screen.
On the Set up (Other) screen, rotate the interface dial to select Clear Personal Data, and press ENTER.
Select the item you wish to delete, then press ENTER.
A trash icon appears next to the selected item. Select OK to continue by pressing the interface selector down.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Clearing the HDD
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
350
NOTE:
12/07/20 11:14:53 31TK4640_355
Gracenote is an internet-based music recognition service that allows artist, album, and track information from CDs to display on the HDD. More information about Gracenote, its features, and downloads are available at (in U.S.) or (in Canada).
Music recognition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote . Gracenote is the industry standard in music recognition technology and related content delivery. For more information visit www.gracenote. com.
When music is recorded to the HDD from a CD, information such as the recording artist and track name are retrieved from the Gracenote Database and displayed (when available). Gracenote may not contain information for all albums.
A confirmation screen verifying whether the deletion is to be continued or not will be displayed. Select Yes to delete, or No to cancel.
A second confirmation will appear. Select Yes to delete, or No to cancel.
When you are finished deleting the data, press ENTER to show the navigation screen.
If you select Music on HDD, the system will automatically restart after deletion.
6.
7.
8.
www.acura.com www.acura.ca
CONTINUED
Gracenote Music Recognition Service (CDDB)
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system) F
eatures
351
NOTE:
12/08/08 20:02:44 31TK4640_356
You agree not to assign, copy, transfer, or transmit the Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to any third party.
YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive license to use the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions. If your license terminates, you agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers.
CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright 2000 to present Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright 2000 to present Gracenote. One or more patents owned by Gracenote apply to this product and service. See the Gracenote website for a non- exhaustive list of applicable Gracenote patents. Gracenote, CDDB, MusicID, MediaVOCS, the Gracenote logo and logotype, and the Powered by Gracenote logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Gracenote in the United States and/or other countries.
This application or device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California (Gracenote). The software from Gracenote (the Gracenote Software) enables this application to perform disc and/or file identification and obtain music- related information, including name, artist, track, and title information (Gracenote Data) from online servers or embedded databases (collectively, Gracenote Servers) and to perform other functions. You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End-User functions of this application or device.
You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for your own personal non-commercial use only.
Gracenote End User License Agreement
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
352
12/08/08 20:02:50 31TK4640_357
Gracenote makes no representations or warranties, express or implied, regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from the Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for any cause that Gracenote deems sufficient. No warranty is made that the Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are error-free or that functioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted.
Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new enhanced or additional data types or categories that Gracenote may provide in the future and is free to discontinue its services at any time.
Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote Servers, including all ownership rights. Under no circumstances will Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information that you provide. You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights under this Agreement against you directly in its own name.
The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow the Gracenote service to count queries without knowing anything about who you are. For more information, see the web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote service.
The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are licensed to you AS IS.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON- INFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES.
Gracenote 2011
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system) F
eatures
353
12/07/20 11:15:12 31TK4640_358
Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
354
INTERFACE DIAL
AUDIO BUTTON
CANCEL BUTTON
SKIP BAR
HDD/AUX BUTTON
CENTER DISPLAY
VOL/ (VOLUME/POWER) KNOB
NAVIGATION SCREEN
ALBUM ART
12/07/20 11:15:17 31TK4640_359
The audio system reads and plays playable sound files on the iPod. The system cannot operate an iPod as a mass storage device. The system will only play songs stored on the iPod with iTunes.
iPod and iTunes are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc.
This audio system can select and play the audio files on the iPod with the same controls used for the in- dash disc player. To play an iPod, connect it to the USB adapter cable in the console compartment by using your dock connector, then press the HDD/AUX button. The power mode must be ACCESSORY or ON. The iPod will also be charged with the power mode in these settings.
Your vehicle has the engine start/ stop button instead of an ignition switch. For more information on how to select the power mode, see page
.
You can select the AUX mode by using the voice control buttons.
iPod models confirmed to be compatible with your audio system using the USB adapter cable are:
The audio system, including the music search feature Song By Voice , can be operated by voice control. See the navigation system manual for complete details.
This system may not work with all software versions of these devices.
184
CONTINUED
Model iPod (5th generation) iPod classic 80 GB/160 GB iPod classic 120 GB iPod classic 160 GB (launch in 2009) iPod nano (1st to 6th generation) iPod touch (1st to 4th generation)
To Play an iPod
Voice Control System
Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system) F
eatures
355
TM
12/07/20 11:15:25 31TK4640_360
Do not connect your iPod using a hub.
Do not keep the iPod and dock connector cable in the vehicle. Direct sunlight and high heat will damage it.
Do not use an extension cable between the USB adapter cable equipped with your vehicle and your dock connector.
We recommend backing up your data before playing it.
Some devices cannot be powered or charged via the USB adapter. If this is the case, use the accessory adapter to supply power to your device.
Unclip the USB connector by pulling it up, and pull out the USB adapter cable in the console compartment.
Connect your dock connector to the iPod correctly and securely.
Install the dock connector to the USB adapter cable securely.
1. 2.
3.
Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
Connecting an iPod
356
NOTE:
USB ADAPTER CABLE
USB CONNECTOR
USB ADAPTER CABLE
DOCK CONNECTOR
12/07/20 11:15:34 31TK4640_361
CONTINUED
If the iPod indicator does not appear in the audio display, check the connections, and try to reconnect the iPod a few times.
If the audio system still does not recognize the iPod, the iPod may need to be reset. Follow the instructions that came with your iPod, or you can find reset instructions online at
Use the SKIP bar while an iPod is playing to select passages and change files.
Each time you press and release the side of the SKIP bar, the system skips forward to the beginning of the next track. Press and release the side of the bar to skip backward to the beginning of the current track. Press it again to skip to the beginning of the previous track.
To move rapidly within playing track, press and hold either side ( or
) of the SKIP bar.
You can also select a track from any category on the list: Playlists, Artists, Albums, Songs, Genres, Composers and Podcasts by using the interface dial.
Push the interface selector up to display the Music Search screen. Turn the interface dial to select a desired search method.
The current file number and total of the selected playable files are displayed in the center display. Pressing the AUDIO button displays the artist, album and track (file) names on the navigation screen.
If a music file on your iPod has album art, it will be shown in the display.
You can set this album art display function on and off (see page ).361
www.apple.com/
Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
To Change or Select Files
SKIP
F eatures
357
12/07/20 11:15:43 31TK4640_362
Press ENTER on the interface selector to display the items on that list, then turn the interface dial to make a selection. Press ENTER to set your selection.
If you select ALL on the artists list, the albums list is displayed.
If you push the interface selector right or left, you can change the alphabet tag.
Push the interface selector down to select PLAY SELECTED on any list. All available files on the selected list are played.
If you select ALL on the albums list, all the tracks become available for selection.
The track order that appears at this time varies depending on the iPod model and software.
Press the AUDIO button to go back to the normal audio playing display. Pressing the CANCEL button goes back to the previous screen, and pressing the MAP button cancels the audio control display on the screen.
Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
358
12/07/20 11:15:51 31TK4640_363
CONTINUED
This feature continuously plays a file.
Turn the interface dial, select Repeat, and press ENTER.
Turn the interface dial, select the Repeat icon and press ENTER. Playback of the track that is currently being played will be repeated.
To cancel this function, turn the interface dial and select the Repeat OFF icon, and then press ENTER.
This feature shuffles playback of tracks contained within the iPod. This function can be established at the same time that Repeat Playback is set up.
Press the AUDIO button to display the audio control screen, then push the interface selector down to display the AUDIO MENU. On the iPod screen, push the
interface selector down to display the AUDIO MENU.
3.
1.
2.
1.
Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
REPEAT SHUFFLE
F eatures
359
REPEAT
SHUFFLE ICON
12/07/20 11:16:00 31TK4640_364
Turn the interface dial, select the Shuffle icon and press ENTER on the interface selector.
Shuffle playback will begin. To cancel this function, turn the interface dial and select the Shuffle OFF icon, and then press ENTER on the interface selector.
On the iPod screen, push the interface selector down to display the AUDIO MENU.
Turn the interface dial, select Shuffle and press ENTER on the interface selector.
Turn the interface dial, select Shuffle and press ENTER on the interface selector.
Turn the interface dial, select the Album Shuffle icon and press ENTER on the interface selector. Shuffle playback of the album will begin.
Shuffles playback of all available albums, which are selected by the desired list: playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres, composers or podcasts. This function can be selected at the same time that Repeat Playback is setup.
To cancel this function, turn the interface dial and select the Shuffle OFF icon, and then press ENTER on the interface selector.
Available operating functions vary on models or versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicles audio system.
1.
2.
3.
2.
3.
Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
ALBUM SHUFFLE
360
NOTE:
ALBUM SHUFFLE ICON
12/07/20 11:16:09 31TK4640_365
CONTINUED
Turn the interface dial to select Song By Voice, then press ENTER.
Turn the interface dial to select ON or OFF, then press ENTER. Push down the interface selector to go back to the audio screen.
To change this feature on or off:
Push the interface selector down to select AUDIO MENU.
You can search a song by the Song By Voice feature. See the navigation system manual for complete details.
To change this feature on or off:
Turn the dial to select Music Search Setup and press ENTER.
Push the interface selector down to select AUDIO MENU.
Turn the dial to select Album Art, then press ENTER.
Turn the interface dial to select ON or OFF, then press ENTER.
3.
1.
2.
4.1.
2.
3.
Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
Searching Music by VoiceSelecting Album Art
F eatures
361
ALBUM ART
12/07/20 11:16:20 31TK4640_366
If you see an error message in the center display, see page .
The displayed message may vary on models or versions. On some models, there is no message to disconnect.
When you disconnect the iPod while it is playing, the center display and the audio screen (if selected) show USB NO DATA.
If you reconnect the same iPod, the system may begin playing where it left off, depending on what mode the iPod is in when it is reconnected.
To play the radio, press the AM/FM, or button. Press the DISC button to switch to the disc mode. Press the HDD/AUX button to switch the audio mode between HDD Audio, USB and Audio.
You can also press the MODE button on the steering wheel to change modes.
To modify the phonetics: Select the Music Search Setup screen as described previously.
Turn the interface dial to select Phonetic Modification, then press ENTER.
Follow the steps 2 to 11 on pages through .
You can disconnect the iPod at any time when you see the OK to disconnect message in the iPod display. Always make sure you see the OK to disconnect message in the iPod display before you disconnect it. Make sure to follow the iPods instructions on how to disconnect the dock connector from the USB adapter cable.
:
2.
3.
1.
363
335 337
Bluetooth
iPod Error Messages
To Stop Playing Your iPod
Disconnecting an iPod
Modifying the Phonetics
Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
362
When you connect your iPod to the navigation system, the most recent settings (Shuf f le, Repeat, etc.) will be carried over.
12/07/20 11:16:31 31TK4640_367
If you see an error message in the center display while playing an iPod, find the solution in the chart to the right. If you cannot clear the error message, take your vehicle to your dealer.
SolutionError Message
Appears when an unsupported iPod is inserted. Appears when the iPod cannot be authenticated. Appears when there are no files in the iPod.
iPod Error Messages (Models with navigation system) F
eatures
363
UNSUPPORTED Ver. CONNECT RETRY
NO SONG
12/07/20 11:16:35 31TK4640_368
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
364
SKIP BAR
CENTER DISPLAY
NAVIGATION SCREEN
HDD/ AUX BUTTON
CATEGORY BAR
AUDIO BUTTON
INTERFACE DIAL
SCAN/A.SEL (SCAN/AUTO SELECT) BAR
VOL/ (VOLUME/POWER) KNOB
12/07/20 11:16:40 31TK4640_369
This audio system can select and play the audio files on a USB flash memory device with the same controls used for the disc player. To play a USB flash memory device, connect it to the USB adapter cable in the console compartment, then press the HDD/AUX button until you see USB in the display. The power mode must be ACCESSORY or ON.
Your vehicle has the engine start/ stop button instead of an ignition switch. For more information on how to select the power mode, see page
.
Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard drive as it or your files may be damaged.
Do not connect your USB flash memory device using a hub.
Do not use an extension cable to the USB adapter cable equipped with your vehicle.
Do not keep a USB flash memory device in the vehicle. Direct sunlight and high heat will damage it.
We recommend backing up your data before playing a USB flash memory device.
The audio system reads and plays the audio files on the USB flash memory device in MP3, WMA or AAC formats.
Depending on the type and number of files, it may take some time before they begin to play.
Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this audio unit.
The recommended USB flash memory devices are 256 MB or higher, and formatted with the FAT file system. Some digital audio players may be compatible as well.
Some USB flash memory devices (such as devices with security lock- out features, etc.) will not work in this audio unit.
:
184
CONTINUED
To Play a USB Flash Memory Device
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system) F
eatures
365
NOTE:
12/07/20 11:16:50 31TK4640_370
Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC format may not be supported. If an unsupported file is found, the audio unit displays UNSUPPORTED, then skips to the next file.
In WMA or AAC format, DRM (digital rights management) files cannot be played. If the system finds a DRM file, the audio unit displays UNPLAYABLE FILE, and then skips to the next file.
Depending on the software the files were made with, it may not be possible to play some files, or display some text data.
Depending on the type of encoding and writing software used, there may be cases where character information does not display properly.
Some devices cannot be powered or charged via the USB adapter. If this is the case, use the accessory adapter to supply power to your device.
The order of files in USB playback may be different from the order of files displayed in PC or other devices etc. Files are played in the order stored in USB flash memory device.
You can select the AUX mode by using the voice control buttons, but cannot operate the play mode functions.
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
Voice Control System
366
Combining a low sampling f requency with a low bitrate may result in extremely degraded sound quality.
12/07/20 11:16:56 31TK4640_371
Unclip the USB connector by pulling it up, and pull out the USB adapter cable in the console compartment.
Connect the USB flash memory device to the USB adapter cable correctly and securely.
When the USB device is connected and the USB mode is selected on the audio system, the USB indicator is shown in the center display. It also shows the folder and file numbers. Pressing the AUDIO button displays the USB indicator, the folder and file names, and the elapsed time in the navigation screen.
1. 2.
CONTINUED
Connecting a USB Flash Memory Device
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system) F
eatures
367
USB ADAPTER CABLE
USB CONNECTOR
USB ADAPTER CABLE
12/07/20 11:17:02 31TK4640_372
You can also select a folder or file from the list by using the interface dial. Press the AUDIO button to show the audio display on the navigation screen. Use the interface dial to highlight the file, then press ENTER to set your selection.
Use the SKIP bar while a USB flash memory device is playing to select passages and change files.
Each time you press and release the side of the SKIP bar, the system skips forward to the beginning of the next file. Press and release the side of the bar, to skip backward to the beginning of the current file. Press it twice to skip to the beginning of the previous file.
To move rapidly within a file, press and hold either side ( or ) of the SKIP bar.
To select a different folder, press and release either side of the CATEGORY bar. Press the side to skip to the next folder, and press the side to skip to the beginning of the previous folder.
To Select a File from Folder and File Lists
To Change or Select Files
SKIP
Folder Selection
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
368
12/07/20 11:17:09 31TK4640_373
Push the selector up to display the Select a folder screen. Then turn the interface dial to select a folder, and press ENTER.
If you have more than one layer of folders (folders within folders), you can also see each folder on the screen.
Push the interface selector down to display the AUDIO MENU.
You can select any type of repeat, random or scan mode on the audio menu screen.
Move the interface selector up to select BACK to show the USB screen, or press the CANCEL button to return to the previous screen.
To go back to the normal playing display, press the AUDIO button. Pressing the CANCEL button goes back to the previous screen and pressing the MAP button cancels the audio mode display.
CONTINUED
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
To Select Repeat, Random or Scan Mode:
F eatures
369
12/07/20 11:17:15 31TK4640_374
This function replays all the tracks in a folder in the order that they were stored.
On the USB main screen, push the interface selector down to display the AUDIO MENU.
Turn the interface dial to select Repeat and press ENTER.
Turn the interface knob, select the Track Repeat icon and press ENTER on the interface selector. Playback of the track that is currently being played will be repeated.
To cancel this function, turn the interface dial and select the Repeat OFF icon, and then press ENTER.
Pressing either side of the SKIP bar also cancels this function.
This function repeats playback of the track.
On the USB main screen, push the interface selector down to display the AUDIO MENU.
Turn the interface dial to select Repeat and press ENTER.
3.
1.
2.
1.
2.
FOLDER REPEATTRACK REPEAT
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
370
FOLDER REPEAT ICON
REPEAT OFF ICON
TRACK REPEAT ICON
12/07/20 11:17:26 31TK4640_375
Turn the interface dial, select the Track Random icon and press ENTER on the interface selector. The tracks are played in random order.
To cancel this function, turn the interface dial and select the Random OFF icon, and then press ENTER on the interface selector.
This function plays all the tracks on the USB flash memory device in random order.
On the USB main screen, push the interface selector down to display the AUDIO MENU.
Turn the interface dial, select Random and press ENTER on the interface selector.
Turn the interface dial, select the Folder Repeat icon and press ENTER on the interface selector. Playback of the folder that is currently being played will be repeated.
To cancel this function, turn the interface dial and select the Repeat OFF icon, and then press ENTER on the interface selector.
1.
2.
3.3.
CONTINUED
TRACK RANDOM
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system) F
eatures
371
TRACK RANDOM ICON
RANDOM OFF ICON
12/07/20 11:17:35 31TK4640_376
This function samples all the tracks in the current folder in the order that they were recorded.
On the USB main screen, push the interface selector down to display the AUDIO MENU.
Turn the interface dial, select the Scan icon and press ENTER on the interface selector.
Turn the interface dial, select the Folder Random icon and press ENTER on the interface selector. The files are played in random order.
To cancel this function, turn the interface dial and select the Random OFF icon, and then press ENTER on the interface selector.
This function plays all of the tracks in the current folder in random order.
On the USB main screen, push the interface selector down to display the AUDIO MENU.
Turn the interface dial, select Random and press ENTER on the interface selector.
3.
1.
2.
1.
2.
TRACK SCANFOLDER RANDOM
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
372
TRACK SCAN ICON
SCAN OFF ICON
FOLDER RANDOM ICON
12/07/20 11:17:46 31TK4640_377
Turn the interface dial, select Folder Scan icon and press ENTER on the interface selector.
The first file of the first folder is sampled for 10 seconds. If no other operations are carried out, the first files of the remaining folders are played for 10 seconds. After the first file of the last folder is played back, regular playback is resumed.
To cancel this function, turn the interface dial and select the Scan OFF icon, and then press ENTER on the interface selector.
This function samples the first file in each folder within the USB flash memory device.
On the USB main screen, push the interface selector down to display the AUDIO MENU.
Turn the interface dial, select the Scan icon and press ENTER on the interface selector.
You can also select the scan feature with the SCAN side of the SCAN/ A.SEL bar on the control panel. Press and release the SCAN side of the bar. Press and hold the SCAN side of the bar to get out of the scan mode and play the last file sampled.
Turn the interface dial, select Track Scan icon and press ENTER on the interface selector. Each track or file is sampled for 10 seconds. When all the tracks in the folder have been scanned, regular playback is resumed.
To cancel this function, turn the interface dial and select the Scan OFF icon, and then press ENTER on the interface selector to play the last track sampled.
1.
2.
3.3. FOLDER SCAN
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system) F
eatures
373
FOLDER SCAN ICON
12/07/20 11:17:56 31TK4640_378
If you see an error message in the center display, see page .
You can disconnect the USB flash memory device at any time even if the USB mode is selected on the audio system. Always follow the USB flash memory devices instructions when you remove it.
When you disconnect the USB flash memory device while it is playing, the center display and the audio screen (if selected) show NO DATA.
To play the radio, press the AM/FM, or button. Press the DISC button to switch to the disc mode. Press the HDD/AUX button to switch the audio mode between HDD Audio, USB and Audio.
You can also press the MODE button on the steering wheel to change modes.
If you reconnect the same USB flash memory device, the system will begin playing where it left off.
375
Bluetooth
USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages
To Stop Playing a USB Flash Memory Device
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
Disconnecting a USB Flash Memory Device
374
12/07/20 11:18:04 31TK4640_379
If you see an error message in the center display while playing a USB flash memory device, find the solution in the chart to the right. If you cannot clear the error message, take your vehicle to your dealer.
Error Message Solution
The system cannot read the file(s). Check the files in the USB flash memory device. There is a possibility that the files have been damaged. Appears when an unsupported USB flash memory device is inserted. Appears when the file is copyright protected, such as DRM. Appears when there are no playable files in the USB flash memory device.
USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages (Models with navigation system) F
eatures
375
FILE ERROR
UNSUPPORTED UNPLAYABLE FILE
NO SONG
12/07/20 11:18:07 31TK4640_380
Bluetooth Audio System (Models with navigation system)
376
INTERFACE DIAL
AUDIO BUTTON
TITLE BUTTON
SKIP BAR
HDD/AUX BUTTON
CENTER DISPLAY
NAVIGATION SCREEN
12/07/20 11:18:12 31TK4640_381
Make sure that your phone is paired and linked to HFL.
Your vehicle is equipped with a Audio system, which
allows you to listen to streaming audio from your Audio compatible phone. This function is only available on phones that are paired and linked to the vehicles
HandsFreeLink (HFL) system (see page ).
Your vehicle has the engine start/ stop button instead of an ignition switch. For more information on how to select the power mode, see page
.
To begin to play the audio files, you may need to operate your phone. If so, follow the phone makers operating instructions.
Press the HDD/AUX button with the power mode ACCESSORY or ON. When the phone is recognized, you will see the Audio
message and icon on the center display and the audio control display on the navigation screen (if selected), and the system begins to play.
If an iPod or USB flash memory device or audio unit connected to the auxiliary input jack was selected at the last mode, you will see iPod, USB or AUX in the center display and the audio control display on the navigation screen (if selected). Push the HDD/AUX button again to play audio files from your Audio phone.
In some states, provinces, and territories, it may be illegal to perform some data device functions while driving.
Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming audio capabilities are compatible with the system. You can find an approved phone by visiting
, or by calling the HandsFreeLink consumer support at 1-888-528-7876. In Canada, visit , or call (888) 528-7876.
:
432 184
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
www.acura.com/handsfreelink
www.handsfreelink.ca
CONTINUED
To Play Audio FilesBluetooth
Bluetooth Audio System (Models with navigation system) F
eatures
377
NOTE:
12/07/20 11:18:21 31TK4640_382
Once a device is linked, the name of the device will appear on the screen. Pressing the TITLE button switches the center display between the
Audio and the device name.
If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system, there will be a delay before the system begins to play.
In the following conditions, the display shows NO CONNECT message after pressing the TITLE button.
The phone is not linked to HFL.
The phone is not turned on.
The phone is not in the vehicle.
Another HFL compatible phone, which is not compatible for
Audio, is already connected.
You can select the AUX mode by using the voice control buttons, but cannot operate the play mode functions.
Press the side of the SKIP bar to skip forward to the next file, and press the side to skip backward to the beginning of the current file. Push the side again to skip to the previous file.
If your Audio compatible phone does not operate as described, make sure it is an Acura approved phone. To find out if your phone is approved, go to
(in Canada, ), or call the
HandsFreeLink consumer support at 1-888-528-7876.
The skip function may not be available on some phone devices.
A device name may not be displayed on some phone devices.
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
www.acura.com/ handsfreelink www. handsfreelink.ca
Voice Control System
To skip a file
Bluetooth Audio System (Models with navigation system)
378
NOTE:
NOTE:
12/07/20 11:18:29 31TK4640_383
The resume/pause mode can stop playing a file temporarily.
Turn the interface dial to switch the setting between the resume/pause mode and the sound setup mode. Select Resume/Pause, then press ENTER to set your selection. Each time you press ENTER, the system switches between the resume mode and pause mode.
The pause function may not be available on some phone devices.
Press the AUDIO button to display the audio control display. Turn the dial to switch the setting between the resume/pause mode and the sound setup mode. Select Sound Setup, then press ENTER to set your selection.
CONTINUED
To pause or resume a file To change sound settings
Bluetooth Audio System (Models with navigation system) F
eatures
379
NOTE:
12/07/20 11:18:36 31TK4640_384
Turn the dial to select a sound setup mode, then press ENTER to set your selection. See page for more sound setting information.
Switching to another mode pauses the music playing from your phone.
If you receive a call when the Audio is playing, press the
PICK-UP button on the steering wheel. The screen and the center display switch to the HFL mode (see page ).
After ending the call, press the HANG-UP button to go back to the
Audio mode.
Select any other audio mode by pressing a button; AM/FM, , DISC, or HDD/AUX on the audio control panel, or press the MODE button on the steering wheel to select another audio mode.
This device complies with the appropriate requirements or the required standards. See page for more information.
427
296 628
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
To turn off the Bluetooth Audio mode
To switch to HFL mode
Bluetooth Audio System (Models with navigation system)
380
12/07/20 11:18:43 31TK4640_385
Play only standard, round, 5-inch (12 cm) discs. Smaller or odd- shaped discs may jam in the drive or cause other problems.
Handle your discs properly to prevent damage and skipping.
When recording a CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R or DVD-RW the recording must be closed for it to be used by the disc player.
When using DVD-R/RW discs, they should meet DVD verification standards.
When using CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R or DVD-RW discs, use only high quality discs labeled for audio use.
When using CD-R or CD-RW discs, use only high quality discs labeled for audio use.
When recording a CD-R or CD-RW, the recording must be closed for it to be used by the disc changer.
On models with navigation system On models without navigation system
All modelsGeneral Information
Protecting Your Discs F
eatures
381
Do not use discs with adhesive labels. The label can curl up and cause the disc to jam in the unit.
12/07/20 11:18:50 31TK4640_386
When a disc is not being played, store it in its case to protect it from dust and other contamination. To prevent warpage, keep discs out of direct sunlight and extreme heat.
To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth. Wipe across the disc from the center to the outside edge.
A new disc may be rough on the inner and outer edges. The small plastic pieces causing this roughness can flake off and fall on the recording surface of the disc, causing skipping or other problems. Remove these pieces by rubbing the inner and outer edges with the side of a pencil or pen.
Never try to insert foreign objects in the disc changer.
Handle a disc by its edges; never touch either surface. Do not place stabilizer rings or labels on the disc. These, along with contamination from finger prints, liquids, and felt- tip pens, can cause the disc to not play properly, or possibly jam in the drive.
The in-dash disc player has a sophisticated and delicate mechanism. If you insert a damaged disc as indicated in this section, it may become stuck inside and damage the audio unit.
Examples of these discs are shown as follows.
Protecting Discs Additional Information on Recommended Discs
Protecting Your Discs
382
12/07/20 11:18:58 31TK4640_387
Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and excessively thick discs
Damaged discs Poor quality discs
Small, irregular shaped discs1.
2. 3.
4.
CONTINUED
Protecting Your Discs F
eatures
383
Sealed
Warped BurrsChipped/ Cracked
Bubbled/ Wrinkled
With Label/ Sticker
Using Printer Label Kit
With Plastic Ring
3-inch (8-cm) CD Triangle Shape
Can Shape Arrow Shape
12/07/20 11:19:10 31TK4640_388
Discs with scratches, dirty discs
CD-R or CD-RW may not play due to the recording conditions.
Scratches and fingerprints on the discs may cause the sound to skip.
CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R or DVD-RW may not play due to the recording conditions.
Recommended discs are printed with the following logo.
Audio unit may not play the following formats.
This audio unit cannot play a Dual- disc .
5.
On models without navigation system
On models with navigation system
Protecting Your Discs
384
Fingerprints, scratches, etc.
12/07/20 11:19:20 31TK4640_389
Those bands cover these frequen- cies:
AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHz FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz
A radio stations signal gets weaker as you get farther away from its transmitter. If you are listening to an AM station, you will notice the sound volume becoming weaker, and the station drifting in and out. If you are listening to an FM station, you will see the stereo indicator flickering off and on as the signal weakens. Eventually, the stereo indicator will go off and the sound will fade completely as you get out of range of the stations signal.
Driving very near the transmitter of a station that is broadcasting on a frequency close to the frequency of the station you are listening to can also affect your radios reception. You may temporarily hear both stations, or hear only the station you are close to.
Your vehicles radio can receive the complete AM and FM bands.
How well your vehicles radio receives stations is dependent on many factors, such as the distance from the stations transmitter, nearby large objects, and atmospheric conditions.
Radio stations on the AM band are assigned frequencies at least 10 kHz apart (530, 540, 550). Stations on the FM band are assigned frequencies at least 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).
Stations must use these exact frequencies. It is fairly common for stations to round-off the frequency in their advertising, so your radio could display a frequency of 100.9 even though the announcer may identify the station as FM101.
CONTINUED
Radio Frequencies Radio Reception
AM/FM Radio Reception F
eatures
385
12/07/20 11:19:29 31TK4640_390
Radio signals, especially on the FM band, are deflected by large objects such as buildings and hills. Your radio then receives both the direct signal from the stations transmitter, and the deflected signal. This causes the sound to distort or flutter. This is a main cause of poor radio reception in city driving.
Radio reception can be affected by atmospheric conditions such as thunderstorms, high humidity, and even sunspots. You may be able to receive a distant radio station one day and not receive it the next day because of a change in conditions.
Electrical interference from passing vehicles and stationary sources (such as garages or parking structures) can cause temporary reception problems.
This device complies with the appropriate requirements or the required standards. See page for more information.
628
AM/FM Radio Reception
386
12/07/20 11:19:35 31TK4640_391
Three controls for the audio system are mounted in the steering wheel hub. These let you control basic functions without removing your hand from the wheel.
The VOL button adjusts the volume up ( ) or down ( ). Press the top or bottom of the button, hold it until the desired volume is reached, then release it.
The MODE button changes the mode. Pressing the button repeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM, XM1, XM2, disc (if a disc is loaded), HDD (on models with navigation system), Audio (if paired), AUX (if an appropriate audio unit is connected).
If an iPod or a USB flash memory device is plugged into the system, you can also select AUX.
If you are listening to the radio, use the CH button to change stations. Each time you press the top ( ) of the button, the system goes to the next preset station on the band you are listening to. Press the bottom ( ) to go back to the previous preset station. If you press and hold the CH button ( ) or ( ), the system goes into the skip (seek) mode. It stops when it finds a station with a strong signal.
If you are playing a disc, the system skips to the beginning of the next track/file (file in MP3, WMA, or AAC format) each time you press the top ( ) of the CH button. Press the bottom ( ) to return to the beginning of the current track/file. Press it twice to return to the previous track/file.
In MP3, WMA or AAC mode, you can use the seek function to select folders. Press and hold the top ( ) of the CH button until you hear a beep to skip forward to the first file of the next folder. Press the bottom ( ) to skip backward to the previous folder.
Bluetooth
CONTINUED
Remote Audio Controls F
eatures
387
MODE BUTTON
VOL BUTTON CH BUTTON
12/07/20 11:19:43 31TK4640_392
When playing a USB flash memory device, you can also use the seek function to skip the folder. To activate this, press and hold either side of the CH button until you hear a beep.
If you are playing a conventional CD (without the text data and not compressed in MP3 or WMA), you can use the skip function to select discs. Press and hold the top ( ) of the CH button until you hear a beep, to skip forward to the next disc. Press and hold the bottom ( ) to skip backward to the previous disc.
If you are playing a USB flash memory device or iPod with the USB adapter cable, press and release the top ( ) of the CH button to skip forward to the beginning of the next file. Press the bottom ( ) to skip backward to the beginning of the current file. Press it twice to return to the previous file.
On models without navigation system
Remote Audio Controls
388
12/07/20 11:19:47 31TK4640_393
The auxiliary input jack is inside the console compartment. The system will accept auxiliary input from standard audio accessories using a 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) stereo miniplug.
When you plug in a mini-jack cable between a compatible audio unit and the jack, you will see AUX in the display and the system automatically switches to AUX mode.
When a compatible audio unit is connected to the jack, press the HDD/AUX button (AUX button on models without navigation system) to select it.
Auxiliary Input Jack F
eatures
389
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK
12/07/20 11:19:52 31TK4640_394
If your vehicles battery is disconnected or goes dead, the audio system disables itself. If this happens, you will see ENTER CODE in the frequency display next time you turn on the system. Use the preset buttons to enter the five-digit code. The code is on the Anti-theft Identification Card included in your owners manual kit. When it is entered correctly, the radio will start playing.
The Anti-theft Identification Card also lists your audio serial number. It is best to store the card in a safe place at home. In addition, you should write the audio systems serial number in this owners manual.
If you make a mistake entering the code, do not start over; complete the five-digit sequence, then enter the correct code. You have ten tries to enter the correct code. If you are unsuccessful in ten attempts, you
must then leave the system on for one hour before trying again.
The system will retain your AM and FM presets even if power is disconnected.
If you have an Acura Owners account, it is easy to retrieve the anti- theft code online without having to access the serial number.
We recommend that you register the security code at Acura Owners (myacura.com). If you lose the Anti- theft Identification Card before registering the code at Acura Owners, you must obtain the code from your dealer or
. To do this, you will need the audio systems serial number. If you do not have the serial number with you, ask your dealer or go to
for information on how to retrieve it.
If you lose the Anti-theft Identification Card, you must obtain the code from your dealer. To do this, you will need the audio systems serial number. If you do not have the serial number with you, ask your dealer how to retrieve it.
You need to enter a separate code for the navigation system to reactivate. The Anti-theft Card also lists the navigation systems security code and serial number. Follow the same procedure to retrieve the serial number and obtain the code, and read the navigation system manual for details.https://radio-
navicode.acura.com/
https://radio-navicode.acura.com/
Canadian owners
Models with navigation system
U.S. owners
Radio Theft Protection
390
NOTE:
13/04/02 19:11:38 31TK4640_395
To set the time, press the CLOCK button until you hear a beep. The displayed time begins to blink.
Change the hours by pressing the H (hour) button until the numbers advance to the desired time. Change the minutes by pressing the M (minute) button until the numbers advance to the desired time.
Press the CLOCK button again to enter the set time.
CONTINUED
On models without navigation system
Setting the Clock F
eatures
391
On models without navigation system
MINUTE BUTTON (PRESET 5)
RESET BUTTON (PRESET 6)
CLOCK BUTTON
HOUR BUTTON (PRESET 4)
12/07/20 11:20:06 31TK4640_396
Turn the selector knob to select CLOCK ADJUST.
Press the selector knob (ENTER) to enter your selection. The display changes to the clock adjusting display.
You can also adjust the clock and switch the clock display between 24-hours and 12-hours in the menu mode.
To adjust the clock setting:
Press and release the SETUP button. The display shows you the menu items.
You can adjust the clock setting with the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
You can quickly set the time to the nearest hour. If the displayed time is before the half hour, press and hold the CLOCK button, then press the R (reset) button to set the time back to the previous hour. If the displayed time is after the half hour, the same procedure sets the time forward to the beginning of the next hour.
For example:
The navigation system receives signals from the global positioning system (GPS), and the displayed time is updated automatically by the GPS. Refer to the navigation system manual for how to adjust the time.
1:06 would RESET to 1:00. 1:52 would RESET to 2:00.
1.
2.
3.
On models with navigation system
On models without navigation system
Setting the Clock
Adjusting the Clock with SETUP Button
392
12/07/20 11:20:16 31TK4640_397
CONTINUED
Turn the selector knob to select the item which you want to adjust. Turning the selector knob will change the selected item between the clock display setting, hours, minutes, and SET. The selected item is indicated with in the display.
Press the selector knob (ENTER) to enter your selection. The display will return to the clock adjusting display.
Turn the selector knob to change the setting between 12H and 24H.
Turn the selector knob to count the numbers up or down.
To set the time, turn the selector knob and select the hours or the minutes, then press the knob to enter your selection. The display changes to the setting display.
5.
6.
7.
8.
4.
Setting the Clock F
eatures
393
MINUTE SETTING
12/07/20 11:20:26 31TK4640_398
Press either the RETURN or SETUP button to go back to the normal display.
To enter the clock setting, turn the selector knob to select SET, then press the knob. The display will return to the menu item display.
Press the selector knob (ENTER) to enter your selection. The display will return to the clock adjusting display.
While setting the clock, pressing the RETURN button will go back to the previous display. Pressing the SETUP button again will cancel this setting mode.
11.
10.
9.
Setting the Clock
394
12/07/20 11:20:31 31TK4640_399
CONTINUED
The security system helps to protect your vehicle and valuables from theft. The horn sounds and a combination of headlights, parking lights, side marker lights and taillights flashes if someone attempts to break into your vehicle or remove the audio unit. This alarm continues for two minutes, then the system resets. To deactivate the system before the two minutes have elapsed, unlock the drivers door with the key or use the remote transmitter/keyless access remote.
You can also deactivate the system by grabbing either front door handle while carrying the keyless access remote to unlock the door.
The security system automatically sets 15 seconds after you lock the doors, hood, and trunk. For the system to activate, you must lock the doors from the outside with the key,
or use drivers lock tab, master door lock switch, or remote transmitter (keyless access remote on models with keyless access system). The security system indicator on the instrument panel starts blinking immediately to show you the system is setting itself.
Once the security system sets, opening any door, the trunk, or hood without using the key or the remote transmitter/keyless access remote, will cause the alarm to activate. It also activates if the ignition switch is turned to the ON (II) position, the audio unit is removed from the dashboard, or the wiring is cut.
You can also set the security system by pressing the lock button on either front door handle while carrying the keyless access remote.
On models with keyless access system
On models with keyless access system
Security System F
eatures
395
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
A/T model is shown.
12/07/20 11:20:37 31TK4640_400
With the system set, you can still open the trunk with the remote transmitter/keyless access remote without triggering the alarm. The alarm will sound if the trunk is opened with the trunk release button on the drivers door, the trunk release handle behind the trunk pass-through cover, or the emergency trunk opener.
The security system does not set if any door, the trunk, or hood is not fully closed. Before you leave the vehicle, make sure the doors, trunk and hood are securely closed.
To see if the system sets after you exit the vehicle, press the LOCK button on the remote transmitter/ keyless access remote within five seconds. If the system is set, the horn will beep once.
Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages
and .
Do not attempt to alter this system or add other devices to it.
:
184 187
Security System
396
12/07/20 11:20:42 31TK4640_401
Compass operation can be affected by driving near power lines or stations, across bridges, through tunnels, over railroad crossings, past large vehicles, or driving near large objects that can cause a magnetic disturbance. It can also be affected by accessories such as antennas and roof racks that are mounted by magnets.
When you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, the compass is self-calibrating, then the compass display is shown in the display.
The compass may need to be manually calibrated after exposure to a strong magnetic field. If the compass seems to be continually showing the wrong direction and is not self-calibrating, or the compass display is blinking with the CAL indicator on, do the following procedure.
Do this procedure in an open area, away from buildings, power lines, and other vehicles.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.
Press and hold the SETUP button for about 5 seconds. The display shows you the compass setting menu items.
1.
2.
On models without navigation system
CONTINUED
Compass Operation Compass Calibration
Compass F
eatures
397
NOTE:
U.S. model is shown.
COMPASS COMPASS SETTING MENU ITEMS
12/07/20 11:20:52 31TK4640_402
Turn the selector knob to select CALIBRATION.
Press the selector knob (ENTER) to enter your selection. The display shows you PUSH CAL START.
While setting the compass, press the RETURN button to go back to the previous display. Pressing the SETUP button will cancel the compass setting mode.
When the calibration is successfully completed, the CAL indicator goes off and the compass display will stop blinking and show an actual heading.
The audio system is not related to the compass system. Even if the compass system is calibrating, the display returns to the normal display which you last selected.
Press the selector knob (ENTER). The compass display is blinking and the CAL indicator is shown.
Drive the vehicle slowly in two complete circles.
3. 4.
5.
6.
Compass
398
12/07/20 11:21:00 31TK4640_403
Once the correct zone is displayed, press the selector knob. The display then returns to normal.
Find the zone for your area on the map (see page ). If the correct zone is not shown, turn the selector knob to cycle the zone lists up or down.
In most areas, there is a variation between magnetic north and true north. Zone selection is required so the compass can compensate for this variation. To check and select the zone, do this:
Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.
If necessary, press the RETURN button to return to the previous display. Pressing the SETUP button will cancel the compass setting mode.
Press and hold the SETUP button for about 5 seconds. The display shows you the compass setting menu items.
Turn the selector knob to select ZONE. Press the selector knob (ENTER) to enter your selection. The display shows you the currently selected zone number.
4. 5.
2.
3.
1.
400
CONTINUED
Compass Zone Selection
Compass F
eatures
399
ZONE NUMBER
12/07/20 11:21:09 31TK4640_404
The audio system is not related to the compass system. Even if the compass system is in the zone setting mode, the display returns to the normal display which you last selected.
Compass
400
Zone Map
13/04/02 19:13:46 31TK4640_405
Cruise control allows you to maintain a set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. It should be used for cruising on straight, open highways. It is not recommended for city driving, winding roads, slippery roads, heavy rain, or bad weather.
Push in the CRUISE button on the steering wheel. The CRUISE MAIN indicator on the instrument panel will come on.
Press and release the SET/ DECEL button on the steering wheel. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator on the instrument panel comes on to show the system is now activated.
Cruise control may not hold the set speed when you are going up and down hills. If your vehicle speed increases going down a hill, use the brakes to slow down. This will cancel the cruise control. To resume the set speed, press the RES/ACCEL button. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator on the instrument panel will come back on.
The cruise control system can be left on, even when it is not in use.
Accelerate to the desired cruising speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).
1.
2.
3.
CONTINUED
Using the Cruise Control
Cruise Control F
eatures
401
RES/ACCEL BUTTON
SET/DECEL BUTTON
CRUISE BUTTON
CANCEL BUTTON
Improper use of the cruise control can lead to a crash.
Use the cruise control only when traveling on open highways in good weather.
12/07/20 11:21:21 31TK4640_406
You can increase the set cruising speed in any of these ways:
Press and hold the RES/ACCEL button. When you reach the desired cruising speed, release the button.
You can decrease the set cruising speed in any of these ways:
To increase the speed in very small amounts, tap the RES/ ACCEL button. Each time you do this, your vehicle speeds up about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Push on the accelerator pedal. Accelerate to the desired cruising speed, then press the SET/ DECEL button.
Even with cruise control turned on, you can still use the accelerator pedal to speed up for passing. After completing the pass, take your foot off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle will return to the set cruising speed.
To slow down in very small amounts, tap the SET/DECEL button. Each time you do this, your vehicle will slow down about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Press and hold the SET/DECEL button. Release the button when you reach the desired speed.
If you need to decrease your speed quickly, use the brakes as you normally would.
Tap the brake or clutch pedal lightly with your foot. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator on the instrument panel will go out. When the vehicle slows to the desired speed, press the SET/ DECEL button.
Resting your foot on the brake or clutch pedal causes the cruise control to cancel.
Changing the Set Speed
Cruise Control
402
NOTE:
12/07/20 11:21:29 31TK4640_407
Push the CANCEL button on the steering wheel.
You can cancel cruise control in any of these ways:
Push the CRUISE button on the steering wheel.
Pressing the CRUISE button turns the system completely off and erases the previous cruising speed.
Tap the brake or clutch pedal.
When you push the CANCEL button, or tap the brake or clutch pedal, the system will remember the previously set cruising speed. To return to that speed, accelerate to above 25 mph (40 km/h), and then press and release the RES/ACCEL button. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on. The vehicle will accelerate to the same cruising speed as before.
Resuming the Set SpeedCanceling Cruise Control
Cruise Control F
eatures
403
CANCEL BUTTON
CRUISE BUTTON
12/07/20 11:21:35 31TK4640_408
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver built into your vehicle can be programmed to operate up to three remote controlled devices around your home, such as garage doors, lighting, or home security systems.
Before programming your HomeLink to operate a garage door opener, confirm that the opener has an external entrapment protection system, such as an electronic eye, or other safety and reverse stop features.
If your garage door was manufactured before April 1, 1982, you may not be able to program HomeLink to operate it. These units do not have safety features that cause the motor to stop and reverse it if an obstacle is detected during closing, increasing the risk of injury. Do not use HomeLink with any
garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features.
Units manufactured between April 1, 1982 and January 1, 1993 may be equipped with safety stop and reverse features. If your unit does not have an external entrapment protection system, an easy test to confirm the function and performance of the safety stop and reverse feature is to lay a 2 4 under the closing door. The door should stop and reverse upon contacting the piece of wood. As an additional safety feature, garage door openers manufactured after January 1, 1993 are required to have external entrapment protection systems, such as an electronic eye, which detect an object obstructing the door.
Refer to the safety information that came with your garage door opener
to test that the safety features are functioning properly. If you do not have this information, contact the manufacturer of the equipment. Before programming HomeLink to a garage door or gate opener, make sure that people and objects are out of the way of the device to prevent potential injury or damage. When programming a garage door opener, park just outside the garage.
If you just received your vehicle and have not trained any of the buttons in HomeLink before, you should erase any previously learned codes before training the first button. To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons on the HomeLink transceiver for about 10 20 seconds, until the red indicator flashes. Release the buttons, then proceed to step 1.
General Safety Information
Important Safety Precautions
Training HomeLink
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Before you begin
404
12/07/20 11:21:44 31TK4640_409
If you are training the second or third buttons, go directly to step 1.
CONTINUED
HomeLink Universal Transceiver F
eatures
405
12/07/20 11:21:57 31TK4640_410
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.
This device complies with the appropriate requirements or the required standards. See page for more information.
628
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
406
12/07/20 11:22:01 31TK4640_411
Bluetooth
www.acura.com/ handsfreelink
www.handsfreelink.ca,
HandsFreeLink (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using voice commands, without handling your cell phone.
To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth- compatible cell phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing procedures, and special feature capabilities:
Press and release to give a command or answer a call.
Press and release to end a call, go back to the previous command, or cancel the command.
In the U.S., visit , or call (888) 528-7876.
Air or wind noise from the dashboard and side vents, windows and moonroof may interfere with the microphone. Adjust or close them as necessary.
In Canada, visit or call (888) 528-7876.
Press and release the HFL Talk button each time you want to make a command. After the beep, speak in a clear, natural tone.
CONTINUED
Using HFL
HFL Talk button
HFL Back button
HFL Buttons Voice Control Tips
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system) F
eatures
407
MICROPHONE
HFL BACK BUTTON
HFL TALK BUTTON
12/07/20 11:22:11 31TK4640_412
Try to reduce all background noise. If the microphone picks up voices other than yours, commands may be misinterpreted.
Many commands can be spoken together. For example, you can say Call 123-456- or Dial Peter.
To change the volume level of HFL, use the audio system volume knob or the steering wheel volume controls.
To hear general HFL information, including help on pairing a phone or setting up the system, say Tutorial.
For help at any time, including a list of available commands, say Hands free help.
As an incoming call notification, you will see the following display:
Some phones may send battery, signal strength, and roaming status information to HFL.
When there is an incoming call, or HFL is in use, HANDSFREELINK will appear on the display.
indicator will be displayed on the audio display when a phone is linked.
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
Help Features
Information Display
408
SIGNAL STRENGTH
HFL MODE
BATTERY LEVEL STATUS
ROAM STATUS PHONE NUMBER
ROAM STATUS
SIGNAL STRENGTH
BLUETOOTH INDICATOR
12/07/20 11:22:21 31TK4640_413
CONTINUED
How to Use HFL
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system) F
eatures
409
Phone Setup
Call or Dial
Pair
Edit
Delete
Jim Smith
Set Pairing Code
The ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
List
Status
Next Phone
Press HFL Talk button
Press and release the HFL Talk button each time you give a command.
123-456-
Pair a phone to the system
Edit the name of a paired phone
Delete a paired phone from the system
Hear a list of all phones paired to the system
Hear which paired phone is currently linked to the system
Search for another previously paired phone to link to
Set the pairing code to a Fixed or Random number
Enter desired phone number
Once a phonebook entry is stored, you can say a name here.
(See page 412)
(See page 413)
(See page 413)
(See page 413)
(See page 414)
(See page 414)
(See page 414)
(See page 415)
(See page 415)
12/07/20 11:22:29 31TK4640_414
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
410
Redial
Transfer
Mute
Send
Phonebook
Store
Edit
Delete
Receive Contact
List
Press HFL Talk button
Press and release the HFL Talk button each time you give a command.
Redial the last number called
Transfer a call from HFL to your phone, or from your phone to HFL
Mute your voice to the person at the other end of the call
Store a phonebook entry
Edit the number of an existing phonebook entry
Hear a list of all stored phonebook entries
(See page 415)
(See page 416)
(See page 417)
Send numbers or names during a call (See page 417)
(See page 418)
(See page 418)
Delete a phonebook entry (See page 419)
If your phone supports this function, use this to transfer contacts from your phone to HFL (See page 419)
(See page 419)
12/07/20 11:22:34 31TK4640_415
CONTINUED
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system) F
eatures
411
Change Language
Hands Free Help
System Set up
Tutorial
Clear
Auto Transfer
Call Notification
Security
Change Passcode
Press HFL Talk button
Press and release the HFL Talk button each time you give a command.
: Canadian models
Apply a security passcode to the system that must be input at each key cycle to access the system
Set how you would like to be notified of an incoming call
Hear a list of available commands and additional information describing each command
(See page 420)
Change your security passcode(See page 421)
(See page 421)
Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle(See page 421)
Clear the system of all paired phones, phonebook entries and security passcode(See page 422)
Change language from English to French (See page 422)
Hear a tutorial for general rules on using the system(See page 408)
(See page 408)
12/07/20 11:22:41 31TK4640_416
To use HFL, you need to pair your Bluetooth-compatible cell phone to the system.
Press and release the HFL Talk button. If you are pairing a phone for the first time, HFL will give you information about the pairing process. If it is not the first phone you are pairing, say
and say .
Follow the HFL prompts and put your phone in discovery or search mode. HFL will give you a 4-digit pairing code and begin searching for your phone.
When your phone finds a Bluetooth device, select HFL from the options and enter the 4-digit code from the previous step.
Follow the HFL prompts and name the newly paired phone.
This command group is available for paired cell phones.
You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is moving.
Your phone must be in discovery or search mode to pair. Refer to your phones manual.
Up to six phones can be paired.
Your phones battery may drain faster when it is paired to HFL.
If after three minutes your phone is not ready to pair or a phone is not found, the system will time out and return to idle.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
To pair a cell phone:
Phone pairing tips
Phone setup Pair
Phone Setup
412
12/07/20 11:22:54 31TK4640_417
Say .
Say after the prompts.
If there is more than one phone paired to the system, HFL will ask you which phones name you want to change. Follow the HFL prompts and rename the phone.
Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command.
Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command.
Say .
Say after the prompts.
HFL will ask you which phone you want to delete. Follow the HFL prompts to continue with the deletion.
Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command.
HFL will read out all the paired phones names.
Say after the prompts.
Say . 1.
2.
3. 3.
1.
2. 1.
2.
3.
CONTINUED
Phone setup
Edit
Phone setup
Delete List
Phone setup
To hear the names of all paired phones:
To rename a paired phone: To delete a paired phone:
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system) F
eatures
413
12/07/20 11:23:05 31TK4640_418
Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command.
Say .
Say after the prompts.
HFL will tell you which phone is linked to the system.
Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command.
Say . Say .
Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command.
Say after the prompts.
HFL disconnects the linked phone and searches for another paired phone.
Once another phone is found, it is linked to the system. HFL will inform you which phone is now linked.
If no other phones are found or paired, HFL will inform you that the original phone is linked again.
Say after the prompts.
If you want HFL to create a random code each time you pair a phone, say . If you want to choose your own 4-digit code to be used each time, say and follow the HFL prompts.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
4.
To hear which paired phone is currently linked:
To change from the currently linked phone to another paired phone:
To change the pairing code setting:
Phone setup
Status
Phone setup Phone setup
Next phone Set pairing code
Random
Fixed
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
414
12/07/20 11:23:16 31TK4640_419
You can make calls using any phone number or a name in the HFL phonebook. You can also redial the last number called.
Bluetooth is the wireless technology that links your phone to HFL. HFL uses a Class 2 Bluetooth, which means the maximum range between your phone and vehicle is 30 feet (10 meters).
During a call, HFL allows you to talk up to 30 minutes after you remove the key from the ignition switch. However, this may weaken the vehicles battery.
Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command.
Say or .
Follow the HFL prompts and say the name stored in the HFL phonebook that you want to call.
Follow the HFL prompts to confirm the name and make the call.
Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command.
Say or .
Follow the HFL prompts and say the phone number you want to dial.
Follow the HFL prompts to confirm the number and say or .
Once connected, you will hear the person you called through the audio speakers.
Press and release the HFL Talk button and say .
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
Making a Call
Call Dial Call Dial
Call Dial
Redial
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
To make a call using a name in the HFL phonebook:
To make a call using a phone number:
To redial the last number called by HFL:
F eatures
415
12/07/20 11:23:27 31TK4640_420
When you receive a call, an incoming call notification (if activated) will play and interrupt the audio system if it is on.
Press the HFL Talk button to answer the call, or the HFL Back button to hang up.
If your phone has Call Waiting, press and release the HFL Talk button to put the original call on hold and answer the incoming call.
To return to the original call, press the HFL Talk button again. If you dont want to answer the incoming call, disregard it and continue with your original call. If you want to hang up the original call and answer the new call, press the HFL Back button.
You can transfer a call from HFL to your phone, or from your phone to HFL.
Press and release the HFL Talk button and say .
Receiving a Call Transferring a Call
Transfer
Call Waiting
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
416
12/07/20 11:23:33 31TK4640_421
CONTINUED
You can mute your voice to the person you are talking to during a call.
To mute your voice during a call, press and release the HFL Talk button and say .
To unmute your voice, press and release the HFL Talk button and say again.
HFL allows you to send numbers or names during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-driven phone system.
Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command.
Say .
Follow the HFL prompts and say the name or number you want to send.
Follow the HFL prompts to send the tones and continue the call.
To send a pound ( ), say pound. To send a star (*), say star.
You can store up to 50 names with their associated numbers in HFL. The numbers you store can be not only phone numbers but other types, such as account numbers or passwords, which can be sent during a menu-driven call.
1.
2.
3.
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
Muting a Call
Mute
Mute
Send Numbers or Names During a Call
Send
Phonebook
To send a name or number during a call:
F eatures
417
NOTE:
12/07/20 11:23:43 31TK4640_422
Avoid using duplicate name entries.
Avoid using home as a name entry.
It is easier for HFL to recognize a multisyllabic or longer name. For example, use Peter instead of Pete, or John Smith instead of John.
Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command.
Say .
Say after the prompts.
Follow the HFL prompts and say the name entry you want to edit.
When asked, say the new number for that name.
Follow the HFL prompts to complete the edit.
Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command.
Say .
Say after the prompts.
Say a name you want to list as your phonebook entry.
Say the number you want to store for the name entry.
Follow the HFL prompts and say to store the entry.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Phonebook
Edit
Phonebook
Store
Enter
To edit the number stored in a name:To store a phonebook entry:
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
418
NOTE:
12/07/20 11:23:55 31TK4640_423
Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command.
Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command.
Say .
Say after the prompts.
Say the name you want to delete and follow the HFL prompts to complete the deletion.
Say .
Say after the prompts.
HFL begins reading the names in the order they were stored.
If you hear a name you want to call, immediately press the HFL Talk button and say .
Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command.
Follow the HFL prompts, select a number from your cell phone, and send it to HFL.
Say after the prompts.
Say .
Follow the HFL prompts and name the number, or say if it is not the number you want to store.
Follow the HFL prompts if you want to store another number.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
5.
Phonebook
Delete
Phonebook
List
Call
Receive contact
Phonebook
Discard
To delete a name: To list all names in the phonebook: To store a specific phone number from your cell phone directly to the HFL phonebook (available on some phones):
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system) F
eatures
419
12/07/20 11:24:09 31TK4640_424
This command group allows you to change or customize HFL basic settings.
Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command.
Say .
Once a passcode is set, you will need to enter it to use HFL each time you start the vehicle. If you forget the code, your dealer will have to reset it for you, or you will have to clear the entire system (see page
).
Follow the HFL prompts to confirm the number.
Follow the HFL prompts and say the 4-digit passcode you want to set.
Say after the prompts.
1.
2.
3.
4.
422
System Setup
System setup
Security
To set a 4-digit passcode to lock the HFL system for security purposes:
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
420
NOTE:
12/07/20 11:24:17 31TK4640_425
If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically transferred to HFL with the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command.
Say .
Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command.
Say . Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command.
Say .
Follow the HFL prompts to confirm the number.
Follow the HFL prompts and say the new 4-digit passcode.
Say after the prompts.
The default setting is a ring tone.
Follow the HFL prompts and say or . You can also say for no audible incoming call notification.
Say after the prompts.
HFL will let you know if auto transfer is on or off, depending on the previous setting. Follow the HFL prompts to change the setting.
Say after the prompts.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3. 1.
:
CONTINUED
System setup
System setup
System setupChange passcode
Ring tone Prompt Off
Call notif ication
Auto transfer
To change your security passcode: To select either a ring tone or a prompt as the incoming call notif ication :
To activate or deactivate the auto transfer function:
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system) F
eatures
421
12/07/20 11:24:29 31TK4640_426
Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command.
Follow the HFL prompts.
Say the language you want to change to in that language.
Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command.
Say .
Follow the HFL prompts to change the language to English or French.
When French is your currently selected language, you can give voice commands in French.
If you have not named your paired phone in the language you just selected, HFL will ask you to name it in the current language.
This operation clears the passcodes, paired phones, and all names in the HFL phonebook.
Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command.
Say .
Say after the prompts.
Follow the HFL prompts to continue to complete the clearing procedure.
You can also clear the system when you have forgotten the passcode and cannot access HFL. When HFL asks you for the passcode, say
. Paired phones, and all names in the HFL phonebook will be lost.
1.
2.
3.
2.
1. 1.
2.
Canadian models only Canadian models only To clear the system:
To quickly change the language: To change the system language between English and French:
Quick Language Selection Change Language
Change language System setup
Clear
System clear
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
422
12/07/20 11:24:43 31TK4640_427
An incoming call on HFL will interrupt Audio when it is playing. Audio will resume when the call is ended.
The word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd. is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
This device complies with the appropriate requirements or the required standards. See page for more information.
628Bluetooth Bluetooth
Bluetooth Wireless Technology HFL Limitations
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system) F
eatures
423
12/07/20 11:24:49 31TK4640_428
Bluetooth
www.acura.com/ handsfreelink
www.handsfreelink.ca, When a phone has never been paired to the system:
HandsFreeLink (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using either the navigation system controls or voice commands without the distraction of handling your cell phone.
In the U.S., visit , or call (888) 528-7876.
To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth- compatible cell phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing procedures, and special feature capabilities:
Use the Interface Dial to make menu or list selections.
To select an item on the screen, turn the interface dial left or right to highlight it, and then press ENTER.
To select an item that comes with , , , or icons,
push the interface selector up, down, left, or right.
In Canada, visit or call (888) 528-7876. Press the PHONE button or PICK-
UP button to enter the phone pairing procedure (see page ).432
Using HFL
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
Interface Dial
424
INFO BUTTON
SELECTOR
DIAL
ENTER
CANCEL BUTTON
PHONE BUTTON
12/07/20 11:24:59 31TK4640_429
CONTINUED
Press and release to answer a call, or press to go directly to the Cellular Phone screen.
Press and release to end or decline a call.
Press the INFO button to go to the main information screen to select the Cellular Phone menu.Press the PHONE button or PICK-
UP button to go to the Cellular Phone screen.
Press the CANCEL button to go back to the previous screen.
When there is a paired phone is in your vehicle:
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
HFL Buttons
PICK-UP Button
HANG-UP Button
F eatures
425
PICK-UP BUTTON HANG-UP BUTTON
BACK BUTTON
U.S. model is shown.
TALK BUTTON
12/07/20 11:25:09 31TK4640_430
To change the volume level of HFL, use the audio system volume knob or the steering wheel volume controls.
Try to reduce all background noise. If the microphone picks up voices other than yours, commands may be misinterpreted.
For help at any time, including a list of available options, say Help.
Refer to the navigation system manual for how to change the systems language between English, French, and Spanish.
Press and release the Talk button each time you want to make a command. After the beep, speak in a clear, natural tone.
Air or wind noise from the dashboard and side vents, windows and moonroof may interfere with the microphone. Adjust or close them as necessary.
Press and release to give a command.
When the Cellular Phone screen is displayed, pressing the TALK button guides you through all available functions.
Press and release to go back to the previous command, or cancel the command. Help Feature
Language Selection
Voice Control Tips
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
TALK Button
BACK Button
426
MICROPHONE
12/07/20 11:25:18 31TK4640_431
As an incoming call notification, you will see the following display:
Some phones may send battery, signal strength, and roaming status information to HFL.
To answer the call and show the HFL information, press the PICK-UP button on the steering wheel.
HFL Display
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system) F
eatures
427
CALLER NAME PHONE DIALING
BATTERY LEVEL STATUS
SIGNAL STRENGTH
LENGTH OF CALL TIME
ROAM STATUS
BLUETOOTH INDICATOR
When the audio is in use.
U.S. model is shown.
12/07/20 11:25:26 31TK4640_432
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system) How to Use HFL
428
Voice commands can be used for all above options. Voice commands for the HFL system can only be used from the
Cellular Phone screen. To quickly access the Cellular Phone screen, press the Pick-Up button on the steering wheel.
Press and release the Talk button each time you give a command.
All
Dial
Receive
Missed
Call History
More Speed Dial
The power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON (see page ).
Dial
Phone Book
Redial
Cellular Phone (see page 444).
(see page 446).
Display the paired phones previously imported phonebook (or import a new one)
Displays a list of all 20 speed dial entries. The first 4 speed dial numbers are shown on the Cellular Phone screen (see page 446).
Push and hold the interface selector (ENTER) to redial the last number called by HFL
184
Display the last 20 incoming, outgoing, or missed calls(see page 445). (Appears only when a phone is connected to the system via HFL.)
(see page 445).Display the last 20 outgoing calls (Appears only when a phone is connected to the system via HFL.)
(see page 445).Display the last 20 incoming calls (Appears only when a phone is connected to the system via HFL.)
(see page 445).Display the last 20 missed calls (Appears only when a phone is connected to the system via HFL.)
Enter a phone number to dial (see page 445).
12/08/03 20:58:38 31TK4640_433
CONTINUED
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system) F
eatures
429
Voice commands can be used for all above options. Voice commands for the HFL system can only be used from the
Cellular Phone screen. To quickly access the Cellular Phone screen, press the Pick-Up button on the steering wheel.
Press and release the Talk button each time you give a command.
Add New Phone
Connect
Disconnect
Delete
Store Voice Tag
Delete Speed Dial
Store Speed Dial
Delete Voice Tag
Pass-key
Connection
Phone Setup
Edit Speed Dial
Cellular Phone
Connect a paired phone to the system
Disconnect a paired phone from the system
Pair a phone to the system
Delete a previously paired phone
Delete a previously stored speed dial number
(see page 436).
(see page 435).
(see page 432).
(see page 436).
Create a Pass-key number for a paired phone (see page 435).
(see page 444).
(see page 443).
(see page 443).
Select a number from the Call History, Phone Book, or manual entry to store as a speed dial number (see page 442).
Delete a voice tag for a speed dial number
Create a voice tag for a speed dial number
12/08/03 20:58:45 31TK4640_434
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
430
Voice commands can be used for all above options. Voice commands for the HFL system can only be used from the
Cellular Phone screen. To quickly access the Cellular Phone screen, press the Pick-Up button on the steering wheel.
Press and release the Talk button each time you give a command.
Auto Answer
Auto Transfer
Phone Setup
Edit Phone Name/PIN
Cellular Phone
Clear Cellular Phone
Information
(see page 439).
(see page 439).
Create a phone name/PIN number for a paired phone
Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle
Set incoming calls to be automatically answered
Clear the system of all paired phones, phonebook entries, speed dials, and pass-keys
(see page 437).
(see page 439).
12/08/03 20:58:49 31TK4640_435
To use HFL, you need to pair your Bluetooth-compatible cell phone to the system.
HFL uses a Class 2 Bluetooth, which means, the maximum range between your phone and vehicle is 30 feet (10 meters).
Press the PHONE button or PICK- UP button to go to the Cellular Phone screen.
Select PHONE SETUP from the Cellular Phone screen.
You can set up your phone and other system options with this menu.
CONTINUED
Phone SetupCellular Phone
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system) F
eatures
431
Push the selector down for PHONE SETUP.
12/07/20 11:25:48 31TK4640_436
To pair a cell phone (when there is no phone paired to the system): Press the PHONE button or PICK- UP button. The system starts pairing when there is no phone paired to the system.
Press the PHONE button or PICK- UP button. The system prompts you to pair a phone. Select Yes on the confirmation screen.
Make sure your phone is set to discoverable or visibility is ON, and select OK. HFL begins to search for your phone.
1. 2.
Setup Bluetooth Phone
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
432
12/07/20 11:25:55 31TK4640_437
HFL gives you a 4-digit pass-key that you will need to input on your phone.
When your phone prompts you, input the 4-digit pass-key.
You will receive a notification on the screen and your phone if pairing is successful.
If your phone doesnt appear on the list, select Phone not found? and search for Bluetooth devices using your phone. From your phone, select HandsFreeLink.
If your phone is found, it is displayed on the screen. Select it and press ENTER.
You will receive a notification to set up an AcuraLink connection. If you want to do this, please see page , or select Setup Later.
5.3.
4. 6.
7.
449
On U.S. models
CONTINUED
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system) F
eatures
433
U.S. model is shown.
12/07/20 11:26:04 31TK4640_438
You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is moving.
Up to six phones can be paired.
Your phones battery may drain faster when it is paired to HFL.
Select PHONE SETUP from the Cellular Phone screen.
Select Connection from the Phone Setup screen.
Select Add New Phone.
Follow steps 2 through 7 from the previous page.
1.
2.
4.
3.
To pair a cell phone (when there are one or more phones paired to the system):
Phone pairing tips
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
434
12/08/08 20:02:58 31TK4640_439
To delete a paired phone:To change the pass-key setting:
Select Connection from the Phone Setup screen.
Select Delete.
Select the phone you want to delete. The Bluetooth icon shows you the currently linked phone.
To create your own pass-key, select Fixed and follow steps 3 and 4.
Delete the current pass-key.
Enter a new pass-key, and select OK.
The default pass-key 0000 is used until you change the setting.
For a randomly generated pass-key each time you pair a phone, select Random.
Select Pass-key.
Select Connection from the Phone Setup screen.
1.
2.
3.
3.
4.
1.
2.
CONTINUED
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system) F
eatures
435
NOTE:
TRASH ICON
BLUETOOTH ICON
Example
Push the selector to left to delete.
12/07/20 11:26:26 31TK4640_440
To disconnect a paired phone:To connect another paired phone:
Select Connection from the Phone Setup screen.
Select Disconnect.
Select the phone you want to disconnect. The Bluetooth icon shows you the currently linked phone.
A trash icon appears next to the selected phone. Select OK to continue.
Select Yes from the confirmation screen.
Select Connection from the Phone Setup screen.
Select the phone you want to connect. The Bluetooth icon shows you the currently linked phone.
Select Connect.
Select OK to continue.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
4.
4.
5.
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
436
BLUETOOTH ICON
12/07/20 11:26:38 31TK4640_441
CONTINUED
You can name up to six HFL phone names. Each can be PIN protected, and have its own phonebook, speed dial, and call history.
Select OK to continue.
Select Yes from the confirmation screen.
Push the interface selector left or right to select the phone name you want to edit on the Edit Phone Name/PIN screen.
Select Edit Phone Name/PIN from the Phone Setup screen.
1.
2.
4.
5.
To edit a phone name:
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
Edit Phone Name/PIN
F eatures
437
Select a phone name.
12/07/20 11:26:45 31TK4640_442
Enter a 4-digit PIN, re-enter it, and select OK.
If you select DO NOT USE PIN, before entering any number, the phone will not have a PIN.
If the phone is already PIN-protected, you need to enter the current PIN before creating a new one.
When you set a PIN for a phone, you will be asked to enter the PIN every time you select the phone.
Select Edit Phone Name/PIN from the Phone Setup screen.
Select PIN.
Select a phone to set a PIN (see page ).
Select Edit Phone Name/PIN from the Phone Setup screen.
Select Phone Name.
Enter a phone name, and select OK when complete. 2.
1.
3.
4.
437
1.
2.
3.
To create a PIN for each phone:To name a phone:
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
438
12/07/20 11:26:56 31TK4640_443
CONTINUED
You can choose when the HFL system automatically answers incoming calls.
Select Auto Answer from the Phone Setup screen.
Select Off, 2sec, 5sec, or 10sec.
If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically transferred to HFL with the power mode in ACCESSORY or ON (see page ).
Select Auto Transfer from the Phone Setup screen.
Select OFF or ON. Select the phone you want to clear.
Select Clear Cellular Phone Information from the Phone Setup screen.
Clearing a phone name will clear all settings, such as call history and phonebook.
2.
1.
2.
1.
2.
1.
185
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
Automatic AnsweringAutomatic Transferring To clear the cellular phone information (one phone)
F eatures
439
12/07/20 11:27:08 31TK4640_444
A trash icon appears next to the selected phone. Select OK to continue.
Select Yes from the confirmation screen.
A trash icon appears next to the selected item. Select OK to confirm.
Select Yes from the confirmation screen.Select Cellular Phone
Information.
Push the interface selector to the right to select the Other tab on the SET UP screen. Select Clear Personal Data.
Select Set up from the Main Info screen.
Press the INFO button on the control panel.
This operation clears all stored settings for the cell phones paired to the vehicle.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.
4.
5.
6.
On the navigation SET UP screen
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
To clear the cellular phone information (all phones)
440
12/07/20 11:27:17 31TK4640_445
Up to three category icons appear next to the phonebook entries .
These indicate how many numbers are stored for the name. If a name has more than three category icons, is displayed.
Available on some phones
Select a No Entry field to store a speed dial entry, or use the following procedure.
When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are automatically imported to HFL.
Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone name, and the first four numbers are displayed on the Cellular Phone screen.
:
(available on some phones)
CONTINUED
Edit Speed DialAutomatic Import Cellular Phonebook and Call History
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system) F
eatures
441
Preference
Home
Mobile
Work
Pager
Voice
Car
Fax
Other
The first four speed dial entries.
12/07/20 11:27:28 31TK4640_446
To store a speed dial number: Select Edit Speed Dial from the Phone Setup screen.
Select a number on the speed dial list where you want to store the number.
Choose a number from:
Phonebook the linked cell phones imported phonebook
When the speed dial number is successfully stored, you are asked to store a voice tag for the number. Follow the prompts.
Dial manual number input
Select Store Speed Dial.
Call History the last 20 numbers
When a voice tag is stored for the entry, you can dial the number by saying Dial by voice tag, followed by the voice tag and Dial from any screen.
2.
4.
1.
3.
5.
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
442
12/07/20 11:27:36 31TK4640_447
CONTINUED
To add a voice tag to a stored speed dial number:
To delete a voice tag:
Select Edit Speed Dial from the Phone Setup screen.
Select Store Voice Tag.
Select the number you want to store a voice tag for.
Follow the prompts to complete the voice tag.
Avoid using duplicate voice tags.
Avoid using home as a voice tag.
It is easier for HFL to recognize a longer name. For example, use John Smith instead of John.
Select Edit Speed Dial from the Phone Setup screen.
Select Delete Voice Tag.
Select the number you want to delete the voice tag for.
A trash icon appears next to the selected numbers. Select OK to continue.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system) F
eatures
443
NOTE:
12/07/20 11:27:48 31TK4640_448
To delete a speed dial number: To make a call using a name in the Phone Book:Select Edit Speed Dial from the
Phone Setup screen.
Select Delete Speed Dial.
Select the number you want to delete, and push ENTER.
A trash icon appears next to the selected numbers. Select OK to continue.
You can make calls by inputting any phone number, using the imported phonebook, using the call history, or with speed dial entries.
When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are automatically imported to HFL.
Select Phone Book from the Cellular Phone screen.
Select a name from the list.
2.
1.
3.
4.
2.
1.
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
Making a Call
444
12/07/20 11:27:59 31TK4640_449
CONTINUED
To make a call using a phone number: To make a call using Call History:
Select Dial from the Cellular Phone screen.
Enter the phone number, and select Dial.
Push ENTER to list the number or numbers stored for the selected name.
Select a number and push ENTER to begin automatic dialing.
Select Call History from the Cellular Phone screen.
Call History is sorted by All, Dial, Receive, and Missed. Selecting a number begins automatic dialing.
Some phones do not support All in the Call History.
To enter the phone number by voice, press the TALK button and say it in a continuous string.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system) F
eatures
445
NOTE:
Push down the selector to dial.
HISTORY LIST
12/07/20 11:28:09 31TK4640_450
To make a call using Speed Dial: To make a call using More Speed Dial: To make a call using Redial:
Select one of the four entries on the Cellular Phone screen, and push ENTER to begin automatic dialing.
Select More Speed Dial on the Cellular Phone screen.
A list of up to 20 stored speed dial entries is shown. Select the entry you want to call, and push ENTER to begin automatic dialing.
Press and hold the PICK-UP button to redial the last number dialed in your phones history. On the Cellular Phone screen, you can also redial by pressing and holding ENTER.
: Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by voice from any screen. Press the Talk button and say Dial by voice tag, followed by the voice tag name and Dial.
2.
1.
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
446
NOTE
SPEED DIAL PHONE ICON
VOICE TAG ICON
12/07/20 11:28:18 31TK4640_451
CONTINUED
The following options are available during a call:
When you receive a call, a notification appears on the screen (see page ).
To answer the call, press the PICK-UP button on the steering wheel.
To end or decline the call, press the HANG-UP button.
Allows you to transfer a call from HFL to your phone, or from your phone to HFL.
Allows you to mute your voice.
Available on some phones
Allows you to send numbers or names during a call. This is useful when you call a menu- driven phone system.
:
427
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
During a CallReceiving a Call Transfer
Mute
Dial Tones
F eatures
447
Example
12/07/20 11:28:28 31TK4640_452
An incoming call on HFL will interrupt Audio when it is playing. Audio will resume when the call is ended.
In addition, you cannot use HFL while using AcuraLink.
If your phone has Call Waiting, press and release the PICK-UP button to put the original call on hold and answer the incoming call.
To return to the original call, press the PICK-UP button again. If you dont want to answer the incoming call, disregard it and continue with your original call. If you want to hang up the original call and answer the new call, press the HANG-UP button.
The word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd. is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
This device complies with the appropriate requirements or the required standards. See page for more information.
628Bluetooth
Bluetooth
U.S. models only
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
HFL Limitations
Wireless TechnologyBluetooth
Call Waiting
448
12/07/20 11:28:35 31TK4640_453
The selector can be pushed left, right, up, down, and in. Use the selector to scroll through lists, to select menus, and to highlight menu items. When you make a selection, push the center of the selector (ENTER) to go to that selection.
AcuraLink enhances your ownership experience by providing a direct communication link between your vehicle and the Acura Server. Working through the XM Radio, AcuraLink works in conjunction with the navigation system, HandsFreeLink (HFL), and audio system in your vehicle. It displays and receives several kinds of messages, including:
Operating tips and information on your vehicles features.
Important recall and safety information.
Maintenance information to keep your vehicle in top condition.
Diagnostic information to provide information about any problems with your vehicle.
Most AcuraLink functions are controlled by the interface dial. The interface dial has two parts, a dial and a selector.
The dial turns left and right. Use it to make selections or adjustments to a list or menu on the screen.
Bluetooth
Interface Dial
AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
On models with navigation system
F eatures
449
CANCEL BUTTON
ENTER SELECTORDIAL
INFO BUTTON
12/07/20 11:28:43 31TK4640_454
A list of all messages will be shown. New messages will be at the top. Select the message you want to read by pressing ENTER.
To view previously read messages:
Press the INFO button. The information screen will be shown.
A red exclamation will be marked on an envelope icon with an important message.
If you have new messages, an envelope icon appears in the lower left hand part of the navigation screen.
To open a message: Press ENTER on the interface selector, then select New Messages from the navigation system map menu.
Reading Messages
AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
450
12/07/20 11:28:53 31TK4640_455
Unread messages have a closed envelope icon next to them. The icon disappears when it has already been read.
Only Diagnostic Info messages appear on the navigation screen while driving. They indicate if your vehicle has a problem that may need immediate attention (see page
).
After purchasing your vehicle, messages may not appear immediately. Your dealer has to register the vehicle identification before you can receive messages. This can take several days to process.
Select Messages, then select a message category. Select the message you want to read and press ENTER.
When you open a message, you can read a summary of it, and then choose one of several options. If an option is not available for a message, that option will not be highlighted.
460
CONTINUED
Message Options
AcuraLink (U.S. models only) F
eatures
451
NOTE:
12/07/20 11:29:02 31TK4640_456
Select this option to delete the current message.
Select this option to hear a voice read the entire message. This gives you more information than the screen can display at one time. When you select the Voice option, it changes to a Stop Reading option. Select the option again to stop the voice.
To set your AcuraLink preferences (the types of messages you want to receive, if any), visit the Acura Owners website at
, and choose what you would like to receive. If you do not have internet access, call Acura Client Relations at (800) 382-2238; they can set your message preferences for you.
To make a call, your compatible phone must be paired to the vehicles HandsFreeLink system, powered on, and located within the vehicle (see page ).
Select this option to call the Acura dealer you purchased your vehicle from. AcuraLink also directs you to this dealer so you can schedule a maintenance appointment or receive information about a message. If your assigned servicing dealer changes, AcuraLink will reset to call that dealer.
Select this option to call a phone number embedded in the message. When you select ,
HandsFreeLink (HFL) dials the number for you.
Select this option to get more information about the current diagnostic message. To use this option, your cell phone must be paired with HFL. In addition, the paired phone must have a compatible data service and be set up with the AcuraLink system to make a data connection. Go to
to find out which data services are currently compatible with AcuraLink.
Select this option to find the nearest Acura dealer using the navigation system.
432
www.owners.acura.comBluetooth
Bluetooth
www.acura.com/ handsfreelink
Delete
Voice
Message Preferences
Call Your Dealer
Call
Call
Diagnostic InfoFind Acura Dlr.
AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
452
13/04/02 19:13:53 31TK4640_457
Diagnostic info and recall/ campaign messages can only be deleted by your dealer. To delete a single message:
Scroll to the Messages option, then select it by pressing ENTER on the interface selector.
Select the message category that contains the message you want to delete.
To delete all messages:
The Delete All Messages command does not apply to Diagnostic Info and Recall messages. They can only be deleted by your dealer.
Scroll to the Delete Messages option, and select it by pressing ENTER on the interface selector.
Scroll to the category with the messages you want to delete, and select the category by pressing ENTER on the interface selector.
Use the interface dial to scroll up or down to the message title you want to delete, and select it by pressing ENTER on the interface selector.
Scroll to Delete with the interface dial, and select it by pressing ENTER on the interface selector.
Use the interface dial to scroll to the AcuraLink/Messages option, and select it by pressing ENTER on the interface selector.
Press the INFO button to bring up the INFO screen.
Press the INFO button to view the INFO screen. Select Set up with the interface dial, then press ENTER to view the SET UP screen.
Select Other by pushing the interface selector to the right.
Deleting Messages
AcuraLink (U.S. models only) F
eatures
453
NOTE: NOTE:
12/07/20 11:29:19 31TK4640_458
Message categories can be added, revised, or deleted through broadcast messages from Acura.
These messages, based on updated vehicle information and comments from other TL owners, supplement your Owners Manual. They provide you with relevant information for a safe and enjoyable ownership experience. For additional information, call Acura Client Services directly through HFL.
During the first 90 days of ownership, a number of messages appears each day. These messages help you to use and understand the features of your vehicle.
There are six message categories in AcuraLink: Feature Guide, Quick Tips, Scheduled Dealer Appointments, Recalls/Campaigns, Diagnostic Info, and Maintenance Minder . The system can store up to 255 messages.
Feature GuideQuick TipsMessage Categories
AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
454
TM
12/07/20 11:29:26 31TK4640_459
These messages provide detailed information about the service needed for your vehicle. When a maintenance message appears on the multi-information display, a list of needed maintenance items is provided through an AcuraLink message. These messages tell you the exact maintenance needed, helping you to avoid unnecessary maintenance costs.
You can use the following message options:
Reschedule the appointment with the dealer.
Call your dealer for an appointment.
Find the nearest dealer.
You can make an appointment with your dealer through AcuraLink when you receive a Maintenance Minder message.
To use the automated appointment function, you should visit the Acura Owners website at
, register some required settings, and complete the Phone-Data Connection set-up (see page ). Your compatible phone should also be paired and linked to your vehicle (see page ).
Make an appointment from the schedule at the dealer.
432
463
www.owners.acura.com
Bluetooth
CONTINUED
Maintenance Minder Automated Appointment
AcuraLink (U.S. models only) F
eatures
455
TM
13/04/02 19:14:02 31TK4640_460
The system will automatically connect to the Acura server, then show you an appropriate appointment date and time on the navigation screen. If you accept this appointment, select Confirm Appointment, then press ENTER.
When you see the Maintenance Minder message on the multi- information display, you will also receive a message in the navigation screen. To open the message, press ENTER. Select New Messages, then press ENTER. You will see the list of all messages. The most recent message is listed at the top.
Select the received message, then press ENTER. You will see the message as shown. To make an appointment, select Schedule Dealer Appt. then press ENTER.
AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
456
12/07/20 11:29:42 31TK4640_461
CONTINUED
You will see the screen to reschedule as shown. To make an appointment, select Reschedule Appointment, then press ENTER.
The system will automatically connect to the Acura server, then show you a new appointment date and time on the navigation screen. If you accept this appointment, select Confirm Appointment, then press ENTER.
The confirmation message will be displayed on the screen. Make sure to confirm the appointment date, time and dealer. If it is OK, press ENTER.
If you want to change or reschedule the appointment date, select Cancel, then press ENTER.
Press the INFO button to go to the INFO screen. Select Messages, then select Scheduled Dealer Appointments from the message category list. Then press ENTER.
AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
To reschedule the appointment: Scheduled Dealer Appointments
F eatures
457
12/07/20 11:29:52 31TK4640_462
The system will request you to confirm the cancellation on the navigation screen. To cancel the appointment, select YES, then press ENTER. If you select NO, the screen goes back to the previous message display.
The system will automatically connect to the Acura server, then show you the confirmation on the navigation screen. If you accept the cancellation, press ENTER.
Select Messages on the INFO screen, then press ENTER. Select Scheduled Dealer Appointments from the message category list. Then press ENTER. To cancel the appointment, select Cancel Appointment, then press ENTER. If you cancel the appointment, you
cannot reschedule it. If you want to change or reschedule the appointment date, call your dealer directly with HFL.
To cancel the appointment:
AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
458
12/07/20 11:29:59 31TK4640_463
Using automated appointments, your registered dealer through Acura Owners is automatically selected. If you want to select another dealer, such as in case of an emergency, find the nearest dealer and call the dealer directly with HFL.
When a maintenance appointment is due soon, you will also receive an appointment reminder message.
If your vehicle is affected by a recall or other important safety information, a letter will be mailed to you about the issue and how to fix it. You will also receive a reminder message through AcuraLink. You can then use the message options to call your dealer for an appointment or to find the nearest dealer.
For this reason, it is important that we retain your current phone number. Please update your information using Acura Owners at www.owners.acura.com.
AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
Recall/Campaigns
F eatures
459
13/04/02 19:14:07 31TK4640_464
When an indicator comes on or a message is displayed on the Multi- Information Display (MID), AcuraLink can provide information about the cause of the indicator or message and the recommended action to address it. This helps you handle the problem as it occurs, preventing or limiting costly repairs.
The AcuraLink system cannot determine mechanical problems (such as squeaks or rattles) that are not triggered by the diagnostic indicator monitors.
For more information on the instrument panel indicators, see page
.
When any indicator comes on or a message is displayed on the MID, AcuraLink immediately notifies you with the message, An indicator is on. AcuraLink can help you decide what to do.
If you do not want the information right away, select the Check Later option.
Depending on the severity of the problem, the message will let you know if you should see your dealer immediately or if you can wait until a later date.
If you want the information now, select the Check Now option. (If the navigation screen is not active, you must select OK from the navigation disclaimer screen before you can check the information.)
64
AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
Diagnostic Info
460
12/07/20 11:30:13 31TK4640_465
You can then use the message options to call your dealer for an appointment or to find the nearest dealer.
When you make an appointment through Acura Owners online Schedule Service Appointment, you can be reminded in advance about that appointment through AcuraLink.
If you need to reschedule or cancel the appointment, see page .
When viewing a diagnostic info message through the INFO menu, you can select the Diagnostic Info option to connect to the Acura server and retrieve the latest information regarding the problem.
There may not be any additional information, depending on the time elapsed since the previous time you retrieved the information from the Acura server.
457
CONTINUED
AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
Reminder Message
F eatures
461
NOTE:
13/04/02 19:14:15 31TK4640_466
Turning the Automated Appointment preference off will disable appointment notifications in the vehicle based on appointments created or changed at Acura Owners online scheduling website.
Appointments can still be created, rescheduled, and canceled from the vehicle; however the appointment information stored in the vehicle will not be updated. Any changes to those appointments should be made from the Acura Owners website.
To access the following functions, press the INFO button. Select Set up to view the SET UP screen. Push the interface selector to the right to select Other, then rotate the interface dial to select AcuraLink/ Messages.
Select this option to delete all stored messages within a category, except for diagnostic info and recall campaign messages. These messages can only be deleted by a certified technician after the recall is done or the problem is corrected, or through a broadcast message from Acura.
AcuraLink/Message Screen
Delete Messages
AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
462
13/04/02 19:14:21 31TK4640_467
For the Phone-Data Connection option to be active, you need a compatible and enabled cell phone paired to
HandsFreeLink (HFL). To complete the data connection setup, the paired phone must have a compatible data service.
Select this option to begin the process required to connect to Acura. This is used to access the most recent diagnostic information when a problem occurs.
Select ON if you want to be notified of new messages (envelope icon appears on the navigation screen). Select OFF if you do not want to be notified of new messages (envelope icon does not appear on the screen). Messages can still be accessed using the INFO menu. If you would like to stop receiving messages, visit the Acura Owners website at
to change your messaging preferences.
Select ON to have the system automatically read each message to you. Select OFF to manually select the Voice option when you want a message read to you.
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
www. owners.acura.com
CONTINUED
Phone-Data ConnectionNew Message Notification
Auto Reading
AcuraLink (U.S. models only) F
eatures
463
NOTE:
13/04/02 19:14:28 31TK4640_468
The default setting is prompt. When a diagnostic info message appears, and you select the Check Now option, the system will prompt you before connecting to the Acura server. If you do not wish to connect at that time, select No at the prompt, and you will see the information from the onboard database. The Auto setting will remove the prompt when you select the Check Now option and will automatically connect to the Acura server. This setting only applies when you have a enabled phone that is paired with HFL and you have completed the Phone-Data Connection setup.
To find more information on compatible and enabled
cell phones, visit or call
the HandsFreeLink consumer support at 1-888-528-7876.
This device complies with the appropriate requirements or the required standards. See page for more information.
628
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
www.acura.com/handsfreelink
Connect to the Acura Server
AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
464
12/07/20 11:30:39 31TK4640_469
Refer to the navigation system manual for operation of the rearview camera.
On models with navigation system
Rearview Camera and Monitor F
eatures
465
12/07/20 11:30:42 31TK4640_470
466
12/07/20 11:30:44 31TK4640_471
Before you begin driving your vehicle, you should know what gasoline to use and how to check the levels of important fluids. You also need to know how to properly store luggage or packages. The information in this section will help you. If you plan to add any accessories to your vehicle, please read the information in this section first.
.............................Break-in Period . 468 .................Fuel Recommendation . 468
.........Service Station Procedures . 470 ....................................Refueling . 470
.....Tighten Fuel Cap Message . 471 Opening and Closing the
.......................................Hood . 472 ...................................Oil Check . 474
.............Engine Coolant Check . 475 ...............................Fuel Economy . 476
...Accessories and Modifications . 479 .............................Carrying Cargo . 481
Before Driving B
efore D
riving
467
12/07/20 11:30:47 31TK4640_472
Help assure your vehicles future reliability and performance by paying extra attention to how you drive during the first 600 miles (1,000 km). During this period:
You should also follow these recommendations with an overhauled or exchanged engine, or when the brakes are replaced.
Do not change the oil until the multi-information display indicates it is needed.
Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km).
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid acceleration.
Your vehicle is designed to operate on premium unleaded gasoline with a pump octane of 91 or higher. If this octane grade is unavailable, regular unleaded gasoline with a pump octane of 87 or higher may be used temporarily. The use of regular unleaded gasoline can cause metallic knocking noises in the engine and will result in decreased engine performance. The long-term use of regular-grade gasoline can lead to engine damage.
You may hear a knocking noise from the engine if you drive the vehicle at low engine speed (below about 1,000 rpm) in a higher gear. To stop this, raise the engine speed by shifting to a lower gear.
On vehicles with manual transmissionBreak-in Period Fuel Recommendation
Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation
468
12/07/20 11:30:55 31TK4640_473
For further important fuel-related information for your vehicle, or on information on gasoline that does not contain MMT, visit Acura Owners at
. In Canada, visit for additional
information on gasoline. For more information on top tier gasoline, visit
.
Because the level of detergency and additives in gasoline vary in the market, Honda endorses the use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline where available to help maintain the performance and reliability of your vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline meets a new gasoline standard jointly established by leading automotive manufacturers to meet the needs of todays advanced engines. Qualifying gasoline retailers will, in most cases, identify their gasoline as having met TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards at the retail location. This fuel is guaranteed to contain the proper level of detergent additives and be free of metallic additives. The proper level of detergent additives, and absence of harmful metallic additives in gasoline, help avoid build-up of deposits in your engine and emission control system.
owners.acura.com www.acura.ca
www.toptiergas.com
Fuel Recommendation B
efore D
riving
469
We recommend quality gasoline containing detergent additives that help prevent f uel system and engine deposits. In addition, in order to maintain good perf ormance, f uel economy, and emissions control, we strongly recommend the use of gasoline that does NOT contain harmf ul manganese- based f uel additives such as MMT, if such gasoline is available. Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely af f ect perf ormance, and cause the malf unction indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on. If this happens, contact your dealer f or service. Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such as ethanol. Your vehicle is designed to operate on oxygenated gasoline containing up to 10% ethanol by volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol. If you notice any undesirable operating symptoms, try another service station or switch to another brand of gasoline.
13/04/02 19:14:33 31TK4640_474
Remove the fuel fill cap slowly. You may hear a hissing sound as pressure inside the tank equalizes. Place the cap in the holder on the fuel fill door.
The fuel fill cap is attached to the fuel fill door with a tether to avoid losing the cap.
Park with the drivers side closest to the service station pump.
Open the fuel fill door by pressing the button in the drivers door (to open the fuel fill door manually, see page ).
3.
1.
2.
599
Service Station Procedures
Refueling
470
TETHER
FUEL FILL CAP
HOLDER
Push Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive. You can be burned or seriously injured when handling fuel.
Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks, and flame away. Handle fuel only outdoors. Wipe up spills immediately.
12/07/20 11:31:08 31TK4640_475
Stop filling the tank after the fuel nozzle automatically clicks off. Do not try to top off the tank. This leaves some room in the fuel tank for the fuel to expand with temperature changes.
If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off even though the tank is not full, there may be a problem with your vehicles fuel vapor recovery system. The system helps keep fuel vapor from going into the atmosphere. Try filling at another pump. If this does not fix the problem, consult your dealer.
Screw the fuel fill cap back on until it clicks at least once. If you do not properly tighten the cap, you will see a TIGHTEN FUEL CAP message on the multi- information display. If the system still detects an evaporative system leak after retightening the cap, the malfunction indicator lamp may come on (see page ).
Push the fuel fill door closed until it latches.
Your vehicles on board diagnostic system will detect a loose or missing fuel fill cap as an evaporative system leak. The first time a leak is detected a TIGHTEN FUEL CAP message appears on the multi-information display.
4. 5.
6.
597
CONTINUED
Tighten Fuel Cap Message
Service Station Procedures B
efore D
riving
471
12/07/20 11:31:15 31TK4640_476
Park the vehicle, and set the parking brake. Pull the hood release handle located under the lower left corner of the dashboard. The hood will pop up slightly.
Turn the engine off, and confirm the fuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosen it, then retighten it until it clicks at least once. The message should go off after several days of normal driving once you tighten or replace the fuel fill cap. To scroll to another message, press the INFO button.
The TIGHTEN FUEL CAP message will appear each time you restart the engine until the system turns the message off.
If the system still detects a leak in your vehicles evaporative emissions system, the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fill cap was not already tightened, turn the engine off, and check or retighten the fuel fill cap until it clicks at least once. The MIL should go off after several days of normal driving once the cap is tightened or replaced. If the MIL does not go off, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer. For more information, see page .
1. 597
Opening and Closing the Hood
Service Station Procedures
472
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
12/07/20 11:31:20 31TK4640_477
Lift the hood up most of the way. The hydraulic supports will lift it up the rest of the way and hold it up.
If the hood latch handle moves stiffly, or if you can open the hood without lifting the handle, the mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated.
Put your fingers between the front edge of the hood and the front grille to locate the hood latch handle. Push this handle up until it releases the hood. Lift the hood.
To close the hood, lower it to about a foot (30 cm) above the fender, then press down firmly with your hands. Make sure the hood is securely latched.
3.2.
Service Station Procedures B
efore D
riving
473
LATCH
12/07/20 11:31:26 31TK4640_478
Park the vehicle on a level surface.
Wait a few minutes after turning the engine off before you check the oil.
Remove the dipstick (orange loop).
Wipe off the dipstick with a clean cloth or paper towel.
Insert the dipstick all the way back into its hole.
Remove the dipstick again, and check the level. It should be between the upper and lower marks.
If it is near or below the lower mark, see on page .
1.
3.
2.
4.
543
Service Station Procedures
Oil Check
Adding Engine Oil
474
DIPSTICK
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
12/07/20 11:31:33 31TK4640_479
Look at the coolant level in the radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is between the MAX and MIN lines. If it is below the MIN line, see
on page for information on adding the proper coolant.
To access the radiator reserve tank, remove the right-side engine compartment cover (see page ).
See page for the engine coolant location.
Refer to on page for information
about checking other items on your vehicle.
546
542
539
541
Service Station Procedures
Engine Coolant Check
Adding Engine Coolant
Owners Maintenance Checks
B efore
D riving
475
MAX RESERVE TANK
MIN
12/07/20 11:31:40 31TK4640_480
Fuel economy is not a fixed number. It varies based on driving conditions, driving habits, and vehicle condition. Therefore, it is not possible for one set of estimates to predict fuel economy precisely for all drivers in all environments.
Represents urban driving in light traffic. A range of miles per gallon achieved is also provided.
The EPA fuel economy estimates shown in the example to the right are a useful tool for comparison when buying a vehicle. EPA estimates include:
Represents a combination of city and highway driving. The scale represents the range of combined fuel economy for other vehicles in the class.
Represents a mixture of rural and interstate driving, in a warmed-up vehicle, typical of longer trips in free-flowing traffic. A range of miles per gallon
achieved is also provided.
Provides an estimated annual fuel cost, based on 15,000 miles (20,000 km) per year multiplied by the cost
per gallon (based on EPA fuel cost data) divided by the combined fuel economy.
For more information on fuel economy ratings and factors that affect fuel economy, visit
(Canada: Visit )
www. fueleconomy.gov www. vehicles.gc.ca
Actual Mileage and EPA Fuel Economy Estimates Comparison.
City MPG Combined Fuel Economy
Highway MPG Estimated Annual Fuel Cost
Fuel Economy
476
Combined Fuel Economy
(Sample U.S. EPA label shown)
Estimated Annual Fuel Cost
City MPG Highway MPG
12/07/20 11:31:48 31TK4640_481
Aggressive driving (hard acceleration and braking) Excessive idling, accelerating and braking in stop-and-go traffic Cold engine operation (engines are more efficient when warmed up) Driving with a heavy load or the air conditioner running Improperly inflated tires
The following factors can lower your vehicles fuel economy:
Rapid acceleration, abrupt cornering, and hard braking increase fuel consumption.
Aerodynamic drag has a big effect on fuel economy at speeds above 45 mph (75 km/h). Reduce your speed and you reduce the drag. Trailers, car top carriers, roof racks and bike racks are also big contributors to increased drag.
If your vehicle has a manual transmission, you can boost your fuel economy by up shifting as early as possible.
Idling results in 0 miles per gallon (0 kms per liter).
It puts a heavier load on the engine, increasing fuel consumption.
In particular, a build-up of snow or mud on your vehicles underside adds weight and rolling resistance. Frequent cleaning helps your fuel economy.
An underinflated tire increases rolling resistance, which reduces fuel economy.
A properly maintained vehicle maximizes fuel economy. Poor maintenance can significantly reduce fuel economy. Always maintain your vehicle according to the maintenance messages displayed on the multi- information display (see
on page ). For example:
539 CONTINUED
Fuel Economy Factors Use the recommended viscosity motor oil, displaying the API Certif ication Seal (see page
).
Improving Fuel Economy
Drive moderately
Observe the speed limit
Always drive in the highest gear possible
Avoid excessive idling
Avoid carrying excess weight in your vehicle
Keep your vehicle clean
Maintain proper tire inflation
Owners Maintenance Checks
543
Vehicle Maintenance
Drive Efficiently
Fuel Economy B
efore D
riving
477
12/07/20 11:32:01 31TK4640_482
Fill the fuel tank until the nozzle automatically clicks off. Reset trip counter to zero. Record the total gallons (liters) needed to refill. Follow one of the simple calculations above.
The A/C puts an extra load on the engine which makes it use more fuel. Use the fresh-air ventilation when possible.
Combine several short trips into one. A warmed-up engine is more fuel efficient than a cold one.
Direct calculation is the recommended source of information about your actual fuel economy. Using frequency of fill-ups or taking fuel gauge readings are NOT accurate measures of fuel economy. Fuel economy may improve over the first several thousand miles (kilometers).
1) 2) 3) 4)
Checking Your Fuel Economy
Measuring Techniques
Minimize the use of the air conditioning system
Plan and combine trips
Calculating Fuel Economy
Fuel Economy
478
Miles per Gallon
100 Kilometers
Gallons of fuel
Miles driven
Liter L per 100 km
12/07/20 11:32:10 31TK4640_483
Your dealer has Acura accessories that allow you to personalize your vehicle. These accessories have been designed and approved for your vehicle, and are covered by warranty.
Before installing any accessory: Make sure the accessory does not obscure any lights, or interfere with proper vehicle operation or performance.
Although non-Acura accessories may fit on your vehicle, they may not meet factory specifications, and could adversely affect your vehicles handling, stability, and reliability.
Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact your dealer for assistance. If possible, have your dealer inspect the final installation.
Do not install accessories on the side pillars or across the rear windows. Accessories installed in these areas may interfere with proper operation of the side curtain airbags.
Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits (see page ) or interfere with proper operation of your vehicle.
When properly installed, cellular phones, alarms, two-way radios, and low-powered audio systems should not interfere with your vehicles computer controlled systems, such as your airbags, anti-lock brakes, and tire pressure monitoring system.
Modifying your vehicle, or installing non-Acura accessories, may make your vehicle unsafe. Before you make any modifications or add any accessories, be sure to read the following information.
600 Accessories
Accessories and Modifications B
efore D
riving
479
Improper accessories or modifications can affect your vehicles handling, stability, and performance, and cause a crash in which you can be hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owners manual regarding accessories and modifications.
12/07/20 11:32:18 31TK4640_484
Some examples are:
Removing parts from your vehicle, or replacing components with non- Acura components could seriously affect your vehicles handling, stability, and reliability.
Raising your vehicle with a non- Acura suspension kit can affect the handling, stability, and reliability.
Lowering the vehicle with a non- Acura suspension kit that significantly reduces ground clearance can allow the undercarriage to hit speed bumps or other raised objects, which could cause the airbags to deploy.
Non-Acura wheels, because they are a universal design, can cause excessive stress on suspension components and will not be compatible with the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS).
Larger or smaller wheels and tires can interfere with the operation of your vehicles anti-lock brakes and other systems.
Modifying your steering wheel or any other part of your vehicles safety features can make the systems ineffective.
If you plan to modify your vehicle, consult your dealer.
Modifying Your Vehicle
Accessories and Modifications
480
12/07/20 11:32:26 31TK4640_485
Your vehicle has several convenient storage areas:
Glove box Door and seat-back pockets
Trunk Console compartment Center and side pockets
In addition, the trunk pass-through allows you to carry longer items.
However, carrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicles handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe. Before carrying any type of cargo, be sure to read the following pages.
Carrying Cargo B
efore D
riving
481
TRUNK
CENTER POCKET
GLOVE BOX
DOOR POCKETS
SEAT-BACK POCKETS CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
SIDE POCKET
12/07/20 11:32:33 31TK4640_486
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs. on your vehicles placard.
Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the XXX amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400 750 (5 150) = 650 lbs.)
Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
The maximum load for your vehicle is 850 lbs (385 kg).
See Tire And Loading Information label attached to the drivers doorjamb.
Label Example
This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and accessories, and the tongue load if you are towing a trailer.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Load Limits
Carrying Cargo
482
Overloading or improper loading can affect handling and stability and cause a crash in which you can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other loading guidelines in this manual.
12/07/20 11:32:44 31TK4640_487
In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, accessories, cargo, and trailer tongue load must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the drivers doorjamb.
Store or secure all items that could be thrown around and hurt someone during a crash.
Do not put any items on top of the trunk panel. They can block your view and be thrown around the vehicle during a crash.
Example 1
Example 2
Example 3
CONTINUED
Carrying Cargo in the Passenger Compartment
Carrying Cargo B
efore D
riving
483
Passenger Weight 150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs (68 kg x 2 = 136 kg)
Passenger Weight 150 lbs x 4 = 600 lbs (68 kg x 4 = 272 kg)
Passenger Weight 150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs (68 kg x 5 = 340 kg)
Max Load 850 lbs (385 kg)
Max Load 850 lbs (385 kg)
Max Load 850 lbs (385 kg)
Cargo Weight 550 lbs (249 kg)
Cargo Weight 250 lbs (113 kg)
Cargo Weight 100 lbs (45 kg)
12/07/20 11:32:57 31TK4640_488
Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll underneath and interfere with the proper operation of the seats, the sensors under the seats, or the drivers ability to operate the pedals.
Keep all cargo below the bottom of the windows. If it is higher, it could interfere with the proper operation of the side curtain airbags.
Keep the glove box closed while driving. If it is open, a passenger could injure their knees during a crash or sudden stop.
Cargo hook buttons in the trunk can be used to install a net for securing items.
The cargo net can be used to help hold down items stored in the trunk.
Distribute cargo evenly on the floor of the trunk, placing the heaviest items on the bottom and as far forward as possible.
If you carry large items that prevent you from closing the trunk lid, exhaust gas can enter the passenger area. To avoid the possibility of
, follow the instructions on page .57
If equipped Cargo Nets
Carrying Cargo in the Trunk Cargo Hook Buttons
carbon monoxide poisoning
Carrying Cargo
484
CARGO HOOK BUTTON
12/07/20 11:33:06 31TK4640_489
This section gives you tips on starting the engine under various conditions, and how to operate the manual and automatic transmissions. It also includes important information on parking your vehicle, the braking system, the Super Handling-All Wheel Drive (SH-AWD ) system, the vehicle stability assist (VSA ), aka electronic stability control (ESC), system, the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS), and the blind spot information system (BSI).
........................Preparing to Drive . 486 Starting the Engine
(Models without Keyless .....................Access System) . 487
Starting the Engine (Models with Keyless
.....................Access System) . 489 ...................Manual Transmission . 491
..............Automatic Transmission . 494 Driving with the Paddle
.......................................Shifters . 499 Super Handling-All Wheel
...Drive (SH-AWD ) System . 504 ...........................................Parking . 506
.............................Braking System . 507 ...............Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 508
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability
........Control (ESC), System . 510 .........................Hill Start Assist . 512
Tire Pressure Monitoring ........................System (TPMS) . 514
Blind Spot Information System ...........................................(BSI) . 519
...........................Towing a Trailer . 528 ...................Towing Your Vehicle . 528
Driving D
riving
485
TM
TM
12/07/20 11:33:10 31TK4640_490
Make sure all windows, mirrors, and outside lights are clean and unobstructed. Remove frost, snow, or ice.
Check the seat adjustment (see page ).
Check the adjustment of the inside and outside mirrors (see page ).
Check the steering wheel adjustment (see page ).
Make sure the doors are securely closed and locked.
Fasten your seat belt. Check that your passengers have fastened their seat belts (see page ).
When you start the engine, check the gauges and indicators in the instrument panel, and the messages on the multi-information display (see pages , and
).
You should do these checks and adjustments before you drive your vehicle:
Check that the hood is fully closed.
Check that the trunk is fully closed.
Visually check the tires. If a tire looks low, use a gauge to check its pressure.
Check that any items you may be carrying are stored properly or fastened down securely.
3.
2.
1. 7.
8.
9.
4.
5.
6.
63
16
10.
11.
78 76
167
146
161
Preparing to Drive
486
12/07/20 11:33:19 31TK4640_491
Your vehicles starting system has an auto control mode. When you turn the ignition switch to the START (III) position, this feature keeps the engines starter motor running until the engine starts. Follow these instructions to start the engine:
Make sure the shift lever is in Park. Press on the brake pedal.
In cold weather, turn off all electrical accessories to reduce the drain on the battery.
Apply the parking brake.
Without touching the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition switch to the START (III) position, then release the ignition switch. You do not need to hold the ignition switch in the START (III) position to start the engine. The starter motor runs until the engine starts or a maximum of 10 25 seconds depending on engine coolant temperature.
If the engine does not start, wait at least 10 seconds before trying again.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Starting the Engine (Models without Keyless Access System) D
riving
487
The engine is harder to start in cold weather. Also, the thinner air f ound at altitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400 meters) adds to this problem.
The immobilizer system protects your vehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly coded key (or other device) is used, the engines f uel system is disabled. For more inf ormation, see page .149
12/07/20 11:33:26 31TK4640_492
If there is a problem with the starting system, you will see a CHECK STARTING SYSTEM message on the multi-information display when the ignition switch is turned to the ON (II) position. You will also see this message when the auto control mode of the starting system has a problem.
If this message is on, the ignition switch has to be held in the START (III) position manually until the engine starts. The ignition switch can be held in that position up to 15 seconds.
Even though you may be able to start the engine manually without the auto control mode of the starting system, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
Check Starting System Message
Starting the Engine (Models without Keyless Access System)
488
12/07/20 11:33:31 31TK4640_493
The keyless access remote battery becomes weak or dead.
The keyless access remote system main switch is off.
In either of the following cases, you should insert the keyless access remote into the keyless remote slot. For more information, see pages
and .
Your vehicles starting system has an auto control mode. When you have your keyless access remote and push the engine start/stop button while depressing the brake pedal (A/T) or clutch pedal (M/T), this feature keeps the engines starter motor running until the engine starts. Follow these instructions to start the engine:
Make sure the shift lever is in Park. Press on the brake pedal.
Press the clutch pedal down all the way. The power mode from ON to START does not function unless the clutch pedal is pressed.
In cold weather, turn off all electrical accessories to reduce the drain on the battery.
Apply the parking brake.
Without touching the accelerator pedal, push and release the engine start/stop button. You do not need to hold the engine start/stop button to start the engine. The starter motor runs until the engine starts or a maximum of 10 25 seconds depending on engine coolant temperature.
If the engine does not start, wait at least 10 seconds before trying again.
1.
2.
3.
4.
194 195
Automatic transmission:
Manual transmission:
Starting the Engine (Models with Keyless Access System) D
riving
489
The immobilizer system protects your vehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly coded keyless access remote (or other device) is used, the engines f uel system is disabled. For more inf ormation, see page .
The engine is harder to start in cold weather. Also, the thinner air f ound at altitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400 meters) adds to this problem.
149
12/07/20 11:33:41 31TK4640_494
If you cannot start the engine using the normal engine start procedure, do the following:
Set the parking brake.
If there is a problem with the starting system, you will see a CHECK STARTING SYSTEM message on the multi-information display with the power mode ON. You will also see this message when the auto control mode of the starting system has a problem.
Do not follow this procedure unless it is a case of emergency. Even if you can start the engine using this method, the system may have a malfunction. Contact your dealer as soon as possible.
Press and hold the engine start/ stop button for about 15 seconds while pressing the brake pedal (automatic) or the clutch pedal (manual).
Press the engine start/stop button to turn on the ACCESSORY mode.
Put the shift lever into Park.
If this message is on, you should press and hold the engine start/stop button until the engine starts. The engine start/stop button may need to be held several seconds before the starter motor runs. The starter motor can be run up to 15 seconds.
Your vehicle has the engine start/ stop button instead of an ignition switch to select the power mode. For more information, see page .
Even though you may be able to start the engine manually without the auto control mode of the starting system, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
1.
2.
3.
4.
184
Automatic transmission:
Starting the Engine (Models with Keyless Access System)
Emergency Engine StartCheck Starting System Message
490
12/07/20 11:33:51 31TK4640_495
When shifting up or down, make sure you push the clutch pedal down all the way, shift to the next gear, and let the pedal up gradually. When you are not shifting, do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal. This can cause your clutch to wear out faster.
Come to a full stop before you shift into reverse. You can damage the transmission by trying to shift into reverse with the vehicle moving. Push down the clutch pedal, and pause for a few seconds before shifting into reverse, or shift into one of the forward gears for a moment. This stops the gears so they wont grind.
When slowing down, you can get extra braking from the engine by shifting to a lower gear. This extra braking can help you maintain a safe speed and prevent your brakes from overheating while going down a steep hill. Before downshifting, make sure the engine speed will not go into the tachometers red zone in the lower gear.
The manual transmission is synchronized in all forward gears for smooth operation. It has a lockout so you cannot accidentally shift from any forward gear to reverse while the vehicle is moving at a certain speed (see page ).493
Manual Transmission D
riving
491
13/04/02 19:21:50 31TK4640_496
Drive in the highest gear that lets the engine run and accelerate smoothly. This will give you good fuel economy and effective emissions control. The following shift points are recommended:
Shift up
1st to 2nd 2nd to 3rd 3rd to 4th 4th to 5th 5th to 6th
Normal acceleration
17 mph (28 km/h) 27 mph (44 km/h) 36 mph (58 km/h) 41 mph (66 km/h) 44 mph (71 km/h)
If you exceed the maximum speed for the gear you are in, the engine speed will enter into the tachometers red zone. If this occurs, you may feel the engine cut in and out. This is caused by a limiter in the engines computer controls. The engine will run normally when you reduce the rpm below the red zone.
Before downshifting, make sure the engine will not go into the tachometers red zone.
Manual Transmission
Recommended Shift Points Engine Speed Limiter
492
12/07/20 11:34:03 31TK4640_497
Press the clutch pedal, and shift to reverse.
The manual transmission has a lockout so you cannot accidentally shift from any forward gear to reverse while the vehicle is moving at a certain speed. If you cannot shift to reverse when the vehicle is stopped, do the following:
With the clutch pedal pressed, move the shift lever to the first/ second gear side of the neutral gate, then shift to reverse.
If you are still unable to shift to reverse, apply the parking brake, and select the ACCESSORY or VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) mode (see page ).
With the clutch pedal still pressed fully, press the engine start/stop button to start the engine.
If you need to use this procedure to shift to reverse, your vehicle may be developing a problem. Have it checked by your dealer.
1.
2.
3.
4.
185
Reverse Lockout
Manual Transmission D
riving
493
Move the shift lever in sequence.
12/07/20 11:34:11 31TK4640_498
These indicators between the tachometer and speedometer show which position the shift lever is in.
Using a paddle shift mode, the gear position indicator shows you the selected gear number (see page
).
The D indicator comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. If it flashes while driving (in any shift position), it indicates a possible problem in the transmission.
Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages
and .
If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on along with the D indicator, there is a problem with the automatic transmission control system. Avoid rapid acceleration and have the transmission checked by your dealer as soon as possible.
When the D indicator warns of a possible problem with the transmission, you will see a CHECK TRANSMISSION message on the multi-information display.
:
499
184 187
Shift Lever Position Indicators
Automatic Transmission
494
GEAR POSITION INDICATOR on PADDLE SHIFT MODE
12/07/20 11:34:19 31TK4640_499
This position mechani- cally locks the transmission. Use Park whenever you are turning off or starting the engine. To shift out of Park, you must press on the brake pedal and have your foot off the accelerator pedal. Press the release button on the front of the shift lever to move it.
To shift from Park to any position, press firmly on the brake pedal, and press the release button on the front of the shift lever, then move the lever. You cannot shift out of Park when the ignition switch is in the LOCK (0) or ACCESSORY (I) position.
Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) Mode is the equivalent of LOCK (0) and ACCESSORY Mode is the equivalent of ACCESSORY (I). For more information, see pages
and .
:
184 187
Do this: Press the brake pedal and press the shift lever release button. Press the shift lever release button.
Move the shift lever.
To shift from:
P to R
R to P N to R D to S S to D D to N N to D R to N
CONTINUED
Shifting
Park (P)
Automatic Transmission D
riving
495
RELEASE BUTTON
12/07/20 11:34:26 31TK4640_500
If you have done all of the above and still cannot move the lever out of Park, see on page .
Press the brake pedal and the release button on the front of the shift lever to shift from Park to reverse. To shift from reverse to neutral, come to a complete stop, and then shift. Press the release button before shifting into reverse from neutral.
Use neutral if you need to restart a stalled engine, or if it is necessary to stop briefly with the engine idling. Shift to the Park position if you need to leave your vehicle for any reason. Press on the brake pedal when you are moving the shift lever from neutral to another gear.
You must also press the release button to shift into Park. To avoid transmission damage, come to a complete stop before shifting into Park.
The shift lever must be in Park before you can remove the key from the ignition switch.
The shift lever must be in Park before you change the power mode from ON to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
Use this position for your normal driving. The transmission automatically selects a suitable gear (1 through 6 gear) to keep the engine at the best speed for the driving conditions.
497
On models with keyless access system
On models without keyless access system
Shift Lock Release
Reverse (R)
Neutral (N)
Drive (D)
Automatic Transmission
496
12/07/20 11:34:33 31TK4640_501
If you exceed the maximum speed for the gear you are in, the engine speed will enter into the tachometers red zone. If this occurs, you may feel the engine cut in and out. This is caused by a limiter in the engines computer controls. The engine will run normally when you reduce the rpm below the red zone.
This allows you to move the shift lever out of Park if the normal method of pushing on the brake pedal and pressing the release button does not work.
Set the parking brake.
Remove the key from the ignition switch.
Remove the built-in key from the keyless access remote (see page
).
With the shift lever in D or S, you can also use the paddle shifters to shift the transmission up or down. With the paddle shifters, you can operate the transmission much like a manual transmission without a clutch pedal. For more information on driving with the paddle shifters, see page .
The engine may cut in and out in R position or depending on the road condition, even when the engine speed is lower than the tachometers red zone. This is the engines computer working to protect the transmission.
To shift into the S position, press the release button on the front of the shift lever, and move the lever to S. This position is similar to D, except only gears from first to fifth are selected. (When shifting up automatically, the vehicle speed is higher than when in the D position.) The S position keeps the transmission from cycling between fourth, fifth and sixth gears in stop- and-go driving.
1.
2.
501
201
CONTINUED
On models without keyless access system
On models with keyless access system
Shift Lock ReleaseEngine Speed LimiterS Position (S)
Automatic Transmission D
riving
497
12/07/20 11:34:42 31TK4640_502
Put a cloth on the edge of the shift lock release slot cover to prevent scratches. Use a small flat-tip screwdriver or metal fingernail file to carefully pry up the edge of the cover and remove it from the slot.
Insert a key or built-in key in the shift lock release slot.
Push down on the key or built-in key while you press the release button on the shift lever and move the shift lever out of Park to neutral.
Remove the key or built-in key from the shift lock release slot, then reinstall the cover. Make sure the notch on the cover is on the rear side. Press the brake pedal, and restart the engine.
If you need to use the shift lock release, it means your vehicle is developing a problem. Have it checked by your dealer.
3.
6.
5.
4.
Automatic Transmission
498
SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT
Vehicle without keyless access system is shown.
COVER
12/07/20 11:34:49 31TK4640_503
When you are driving in the D position, you can shift the transmission up or down manually with the paddle shifters.
Each time you pull (right), the transmission shifts to a higher gear. Pull (left) to downshift. You will see the selected gear number on the instrument panel.
To shift up or down, use the (right) or (left) paddle shifter on either side of the steering wheel.
Downshifting with the paddle shifter allows you to increase the engine braking when going down steep or long hills, and provides more power when climbing uphills. You can upshift the transmission manually to reduce the rpm.
When you pull either paddle shifter, the gear position indicator shows you the selected gear number.
CONTINUED
Using the Paddle Shifters in the D position (D-Paddle Shift Mode)
Driving with the Paddle Shifters (Automatic Transmission Only) D
riving
499
GEAR POSITION INDICATOR
12/07/20 11:34:56 31TK4640_504
The transmission control system monitors the accelerator pedal use and your driving conditions. When you press the accelerator pedal as in normal driving, the system judges that you are driving at a constant cruising speed without using the paddle shifters. Under these conditions, D-paddle shift mode is canceled, and the transmission automatically returns to drive mode (D).
Each time you pull either paddle shifter, the transmission shifts one gear up or down. If you want to shift up or down more than two gears, pull the paddle shifter twice, pause, and then pull it again.
The automatic transmission will not allow you to shift up or down if:
You downshift before the engine speed reaches the highest threshold of the lower gear.
If you try to do this, the gear position indicator will flash the number of the lower gear several times, then return to a higher gear.
Hold the paddle shifter for 2 seconds to return to drive mode (D).
When the transmission returns to drive mode (D), the displayed gear number disappears.
The transmission remains in the selected gear if you do not accelerate.
You upshift before the engine speed reaches the lowest threshold of the higher gear.
You pull both paddle shifters at the same time.
When you depress the accelerator pedal to the floor, the transmission will downshift from second to first.
If there is a problem in the transmission while you are driving with the paddle shifters, the D indicator flashes, the D-paddle shift mode is canceled, and the transmission returns to drive mode (D).
The transmission downshifts to first gear and returns to drive mode (D) when the vehicle comes to a complete stop or the vehicle speed is about 6 mph (10 km/h).
You are trying to downshift from second to first with the accelerator pedal off.
Driving with the Paddle Shifters (Automatic Transmission Only)
500
12/07/20 11:35:05 31TK4640_505
CONTINUED
With the shift lever in the S position, you can select the sequential shift mode to shift gears; much like a manual transmission using the paddle shifters, but without a clutch pedal.
Shifting between first and second gears may occur automatically. Downshifting from second to first with the accelerator pedal off is not allowed. When you move the shift lever from
D to S and pull either paddle shifter, the gear position indicator displays M along with the selected gear number.
To upshift, pull the (right) paddle shifter. To downshift, pull the (left) paddle shifter.
To enter the sequential shift mode, press the release button on the front of the shift lever, move the lever to the S position, then pull either paddle shifter. To cancel the sequential shift mode and return to the ordinary automatic transmission, move the shift lever from the S position. When moving the shift lever, be careful not to operate incorrectly. While you are driving in the sequential shift mode, the transmission will not automatically return to ordinary automatic transmission.
Using the Paddle Shifters in the S position (Sequential Shift Mode)
Driving with the Paddle Shifters (Automatic Transmission Only) D
riving
501
GEAR POSITION INDICATOR
M INDICATOR
12/07/20 11:35:12 31TK4640_506
The automatic transmission will not allow you to shift up or down if:
If the vehicle speed decreases below the redline of the selected lower gear while the indicator is flashing, the transmission downshifts, and the indicator displays the selected gear.
You upshift before the engine speed reaches the lowest threshold of the higher gear.
You pull both paddle shifters at the same time.
You downshift before the engine speed reaches the highest threshold of the lower gear.
If you try to do this, the gear position indicator will flash the number of the lower gear several times, then return to a higher gear.
Downshifting with the paddle shifter allows you to increase the engine braking when going down steep or long hills, and provides more power when climbing uphills. You can upshift the transmission manually to reduce the rpm.
When you accelerate from a stop, the transmission starts in first gear, and shifts from first to second automatically. You must manually upshift between second and sixth gears. Make sure you upshift before the engine speed reaches the tachometers red zone.
The transmission remains in the selected gear (6, 5, 4, 3, or 2). There is no automatic downshift when you push the accelerator pedal to the floor.
When you are driving, the transmission downshifts to the lower gear under the following conditions:
The vehicle slows down to a certain speed.
You press the brake pedal.
The vehicle detects that you are driving uphill or downhill.
The transmission also shifts automatically as the vehicle comes to a complete stop. It downshifts to first gear when the vehicle speed reaches 6 mph (10 km/h) or less.
Driving with the Paddle Shifters (Automatic Transmission Only)
502
12/07/20 11:35:21 31TK4640_507
When you are in sequential shift mode, and the vehicle is stopped, pull the (right) paddle shifter to shift to second gear. You will see M2 in the display. Starting in second gear helps to reduce wheelspin in deep snow or on a slippery surface.
Drive in the highest gear that lets the engine run and accelerate smoothly. This will give you good fuel economy and effective emissions control. The following shift points are recommended:
Normal acceleration
15 mph (24 km/h) 25 mph (40 km/h) 40 mph (64 km/h) 45 mph (72 km/h) 50 mph (81 km/h)
Shift up
1st to 2nd 2nd to 3rd 3rd to 4th 4th to 5th 5th to 6th
Driving with the Paddle Shifters (Automatic Transmission Only)
Starting in Second Gear Recommended Shift Points
D riving
503
12/07/20 11:35:26 31TK4640_508
The SH-AWD torque distribution monitor on the multi-information display shows you the amount of torque being sent to the wheels. Each wheel right front (RF), left front (LF), right rear (RR), and left rear (LR) has its own torque indicator.
Each torque indicator is displayed as a bar graph divided into 5 segments. The number of segments represents the amount of torque distributed to each wheel.
When there is only a slight change in torque distribution while driving, such as cruising on level roads at the same speed, the torque distribution monitor may stop displaying the amount of torque. This is not a system problem. The monitor will show the amount if the system senses any change in torque distribution.
While the SH-AWD system helps to enhance the vehicles driving stability in all situations, it is still your responsibility to drive and corner at reasonable speeds and to leave a sufficient margin of safety.
The super handling-all wheel drive (SH-AWD) system is a full time all- wheel-drive system that automatically controls and transfers varying amounts of engine torque to all wheels independently, according to the driving conditions.
If equipped SH-AWD Torque Distribution Monitor
Super Handling-All Wheel Drive (SH-AWD ) System
504
TORQUE INDICATOR
TORQUE INDICATOR
U.S. model is shown.
TM
12/07/20 11:35:31 31TK4640_509
Your vehicle still has normal front- wheel drive with vehicle stability assist (VSA), but does not have the advantages of SH-AWD. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
If the SH-AWD indicator begins to blink while driving, it indicates the differential temperature is too high.
You will also see an SH-AWD DIFF TEMP. HIGH message on the multi-information display.
If this happens, pull to the side of the road when it is safe, park the vehicle and shift to Park (automatic), and let
the engine idle until the indicator goes out. If the indicator does not go out, take your vehicle to a dealer to have it checked.
If the SH-AWD indicator on the instrument panel stays on, and the CHECK SH-AWD SYSTEM message also appears on the multi- information display, there is a problem with the SH-AWD system.
Super Handling-All Wheel Drive (SH-AWD ) System D
riving
505
TM
12/07/20 11:35:37 31TK4640_510
Always use the parking brake when you park your vehicle. Make sure the parking brake is set firmly, or your vehicle may roll if it is parked on an incline.
If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, set the parking brake before you put the transmission in Park. This keeps the vehicle from moving and putting pressure on the parking mechanism in the transmission.
Make sure the moonroof and the windows are closed.
Turn off the lights.
Place any packages, valuables, etc., in the trunk or take them with you.
Lock the doors.
Never park over dry leaves, tall grass, or other flammable materials. The hot three way catalytic converter could cause these materials to catch on fire.
Check the indicator on the instrument panel to verify that the security system is set.
If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn the front wheels away from the curb. If your vehicle has a manual transmission, put it in first gear.
If the vehicle is facing downhill, turn the front wheels toward the curb. If your vehicle has a manual transmission, put it in reverse gear.
Make sure the parking brake is fully released before driving away. Driving with the parking brake partially set can overheat or damage the rear brakes.
If you are unable to stop the engine normally when the vehicle is parked (in the Park position on the automatic transmission models), see
on page .192
On models with keyless access system
Parking Tips
Emergency Engine Stop
Parking
506
NOTE:
12/07/20 11:35:46 31TK4640_511
Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes at all four wheels. A power assist helps reduce the effort needed on the brake pedal. The emergency brake assist system increases the stopping force when you depress the brake pedal hard in an emergency situation. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps you retain steering control when braking very hard.
Resting your foot on the pedal keeps the brakes applied lightly, builds up heat, reduces their effectiveness and reduces brake pad life. In addition, fuel economy can be reduced. It also keeps your brake lights on all the time, confusing drivers behind you.
Constant application of the brakes when going down a long hill builds up heat and reduces their effective- ness. Use the engine to assist the brakes by taking your foot off the accelerator and downshifting to a lower gear.
Check your brakes after driving through deep water. Apply the brakes moderately to see if they feel normal. If not, apply them gently and frequently until they do. Be extra cautious and alert in your driving.
The hydraulic system that operates the brakes has two separate circuits. Each circuit works diagonally across the vehicle (the left-front brake is connected with the right-rear brake, etc.). If one circuit should develop a problem, you will still have braking at two wheels.
If the brake pads need replacing, you will hear a distinctive, metallic screeching sound when you apply the brake pedal. If you do not have the brake pads replaced, they will screech all the time. It is normal for the brakes to occasionally squeal or squeak when you apply them.
All four brakes have audible brake wear indicators.
Braking System Design
Brake Pad Wear Indicators
Braking System D
riving
507
12/07/20 11:35:52 31TK4640_512
The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps prevent the wheels from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than a person can do it.
The electronic brake distribution (EBD) system, which is part of the ABS, also balances the front-to-rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading.
Let the ABS work for you by always keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as stomp and steer.
If this indicator comes on, the anti- lock function of the braking system has shut down. The brakes still work like a conventional system, but without anti-lock. You should have your dealer inspect your vehicle as soon as possible.
You will feel a pulsation in the brake pedal when the ABS activates, and you may hear some noise. This is normal: it is the ABS rapidly pumping the brakes. On dry pavement, you will need to press on the brake pedal very hard before the ABS activates. However, you may feel the ABS activate immediately if you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
If the ABS indicator comes on while driving, test the brakes as shown on page .
When the ABS indicator comes on, you will also see a CHECK ABS SYSTEM message on the multi- information display.
598
You should never pump the brake pedal.
ABS Indicator
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
508
12/07/20 11:35:59 31TK4640_513
If the ABS indicator and the brake system indicator come on together, and the parking brake is fully released, the EBD system may also be shut down.
Test your brakes as instructed on page . If the brakes feel normal, drive slowly and have your vehicle repaired by your dealer as soon as possible. Avoid sudden hard braking which could cause the rear wheels to lock up and possibly lead to a loss of control.
such as trying to take a corner too fast or making a sudden lane change. Always drive at a safe speed for the road and weather conditions.
Always steer moderately when you are braking hard. Severe or sharp steering wheel movement can still cause your vehicle to veer into oncoming traffic or off the road.
on loose or uneven surfaces, such as gravel or snow, than a vehicle without anti- lock.
It only helps with the steering control during braking.
598
Important Safety Reminders
ABS will not prevent a skid that results from changing direction abruptly,
ABS cannot prevent a loss of stability.
A vehicle with ABS may require a longer distance to stopABS does not reduce the time or
distance it takes to stop the vehicle.
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) D
riving
509
12/07/20 11:36:05 31TK4640_514
The vehicle stability assist (VSA) system helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less than desired. It also assists you in maintaining traction while accelerating on loose or slippery road surfaces. It does this by regulating the engines output, and by selectively applying the brakes.
The VSA system cannot enhance the vehicles driving stability in all situations and does not control your vehicles entire braking system. It is still your responsibility to drive and corner at reasonable speeds and to leave a sufficient margin of safety.
When VSA is off, the VSA OFF indicator comes on as a reminder.
When VSA activates, you will see the VSA system indicator blink.
When VSA activates, you may notice that the engine does not respond to the accelerator in the same way it does at other times. There may also be some noise from the VSA hydraulic system. You will also see the VSA system indicator blink.
The main function of the VSA system is generally known as Electronic Stability Control (ESC). The system also includes a traction control function.
If this indicator comes on while driving, you will also see a CHECK VSA SYSTEM and/or CHECK HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM message on the multi-information display. Drive cautiously as the VSA may not be functioning. Without VSA, your vehicle will have normal braking and cornering ability, but it will not have VSA traction and stability enhancement. Also, the VSA OFF switch will not operate. Pull to the side of the road when it is safe, and turn off the engine. Reset the system by restarting the engine. If the VSA system indicator stays on,
have the VSA system inspected by your dealer.
If there is a problem with the hill start assist system, the VSA system indicator comes on and stays on. The multi-information display shows a CHECK HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM message.
With the VSA system indicator on, you may not be able to stop the engine even if you park the vehicle safely. To stop the engine, see
on page .192
On models with SH-AWD
On models with keyless access system
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System Indicator
VSA OFF Indicator
Emergency Engine Stop
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
510
NOTE:
12/07/20 11:36:14 31TK4640_515
CONTINUED
If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on (see page ), or the multi-information display shows a CHECK TPMS SYSTEM message with the indicator flashing (see page ), the VSA system automatically turns on even if the VSA system is turned off with the VSA OFF switch. In this case, you cannot turn the VSA system off by pressing the VSA OFF switch again.
Without VSA, your vehicle will have normal braking and cornering ability, but it will not have VSA traction and stability enhancement.
This switch is under the drivers side vent. To turn the VSA system on and off, press and hold it until you hear a beep.
When VSA is off, the VSA OFF indicator comes on as a reminder. Press and hold the switch again. It turns the system back on.
The VSA switch location varies on models.
514
517
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
VSA OFF Switch
D riving
511
VSA OFF SWITCH
U.S. Advance Package model is shown.
12/07/20 11:36:21 31TK4640_516
VSA is turned on every time you start the engine, even if you turned it off the last time you drove the vehicle.
In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow, it may be easier to free it with the VSA temporarily switched off. When the VSA system is off, the traction control system is also off. You should only attempt to free your vehicle with the VSA off if you are not able to free it when the VSA is on.
Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to switch the VSA on again. We do not recommend driving your vehicle with the VSA and traction control systems switched off.
Driving with varying tire or wheel sizes may cause the VSA to malfunction. When replacing tires, make sure they are of the same size and type as your original tires (see page ).
If you install winter tires, make sure they are the same size as those that were originally supplied with your vehicle. Exercise the same caution during winter driving as you would if your vehicle was not equipped with VSA.
Your vehicle is equipped with a hill start assist feature to help prevent the vehicle from rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.
To activate hill start assist, you must come to a complete stop and make sure the shift lever is either in D or S when facing uphill, or reverse when facing downhill. This feature begins working a few seconds after you are in the correct gear position. Release the brake pedal. The brakes remain engaged briefly to keep the vehicle from rolling forward or backward. Gently apply the accelerator pedal as in normal driving. Hill start assist will release brake pressure gradually as you accelerate.
574
On models with SH-AWD
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
VSA and Tire Sizes Hill Start Assist
512
12/07/20 11:36:28 31TK4640_517
Hill start assist may not prevent your vehicle from rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and will not operate on small inclines.
Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking brake. If parking your vehicle, ensure that the transmission is in park, and/or the parking brake is fully applied before exiting the vehicle. For vehicles with manual transmission, it is recommended that you turn off the engine before exiting the vehicle.
If the VSA system indicator comes on with a CHECK HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM message on the multi-information display, there may be a problem with the hill start assist. The VSA also may not function. Have your vehicle inspected by your dealer.
Hill start assist will still operate even when VSA is switched off.
On manual transmission models: You must come to a complete stop, press the clutch pedal, and shift to first gear when facing uphill, or reverse when facing downhill. Release the brake pedal. The brakes remain engaged briefly to keep the vehicle from rolling forward or backward while you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Gently apply the accelerator pedal while simultaneously releasing the clutch pedal, as in normal driving. Hill start assist will release brake pressure gradually as you accelerate.
Hill start assist will also hold braking briefly if you select the neutral gear position with the clutch pedal depressed when facing uphill.
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System D
riving
513
12/07/20 11:36:34 31TK4640_518
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that turns on every time you start the engine and monitors the pressure in your tires while driving.
If you think you can safely drive a short distance to a service station, proceed slowly to the station, then inflate the tire to the recommended pressure shown on the drivers doorjamb.
If the tire is flat, or if the tire pressure is too low to continue driving, replace the tire with the compact spare tire (see page ).
Driving on a significantly under- inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicles handling and stopping ability.
Because tire pressure varies by temperature and other conditions, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on unexpectedly.
When the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator is on, one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated. You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicles tire information placard.
Each tire has its own pressure sensor (not including the spare tire). If the air pressure of a tire becomes significantly low, the sensor in that tire immediately sends a signal that causes the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator in the instrument panel to come on. If this happens, you will see which tire is losing pressure on the multi-information display along with a CHECK TIRE PRESSURE message.
It is possible that the pressures shown on the multi-information display and the pressures you manually measure are slightly different.
If the difference is significant or you cannot make the low tire pressure/ TPMS indicator and message on the multi-information display go out after inflating the tires to the specified values, have your dealer check the system as soon as possible.
583
Low Tire Pressure/ TPMS Indicator
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
514
12/07/20 11:36:41 31TK4640_519
Although your tire pressure is monitored, you must manually check the tire pressures monthly.
Each tire, including the spare, should be checked monthly when the vehicle is cold, and set to the recommended inflation pressure as specified on the vehicle placard and in the owners manual (see page
).
For example, if you check and fill your tires in a warm area, then drive in extremely cold weather, the tire pressure will be lower than measured and could be underinflated and cause the low tire pressure/ TPMS indicator to come on. Or, if you check and adjust your tire pressure in cooler conditions, and drive into extremely hot conditions, the tire may become overinflated. However, the low tire pressure/ TPMS indicator will not come on if the tires are overinflated.
Refer to page for tire inflation guidelines.
If there is a problem with the TPMS, this indicator begins to flash. It stops flashing after approximately 1 minute, then stays on. You will also see a CHECK TPMS SYSTEM message on the multi-information display (see page ).
To select the tire pressure monitor, press the INFO button several times with the ignition switch in the ON (II) position or with the power mode ON.
You will see the above display on the multi-information display when each tire pressure is normal.
517
570
568
CONTINUED
Tire Pressure Monitor
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) D
riving
515
U.S.
Example: Technology Package is shown.
12/07/20 11:36:50 31TK4640_520
Each tire pressure is shown in PSI (U.S. models) or in kPa (Canadian models).
If any of the tires has low pressure, the tire pressure monitor also shows the above message and each tire pressure to warn you about the low tire pressure when you select the display by pressing the INFO button several times.
Each tire has its own pressure sensor (not including the spare tire). If the air pressure of a tire becomes significantly low, the sensor in that tire immediately sends a signal that causes the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator in the instrument panel to come on. If this happens, you will see which tire is losing pressure on the multi-information display along with a CHECK TIRE PRESSURE message.
Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages
and .
:
184 187
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
516
Canadian model
Canada
This shows that the front left tire is losing pressure. U.S. model
Example: Technology Package is shown.
12/07/20 11:36:57 31TK4640_521
If there is a problem with the TPMS, the tire pressure monitor shows a TPMS ERROR message and the tire pressure readings are not displayed. If this happens, you will first see a system warning message CHECK TPMS SYSTEM on the multi-information display.
If there is a problem with the TPMS, you will see the above message on the multi-information display.
If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on, or the multi- information display shows a CHECK TPMS SYSTEM message, the VSA system automatically turns on even when the VSA system is turned off by pressing the VSA OFF switch (see page ). If this happens, you cannot turn the VSA system off by pressing the VSA OFF switch again.
When you restart the vehicle with the compact spare tire, the TPMS system message will also be displayed on the multi-information display after several miles (kilometers) driving.
If you see this message, the system is off and is not monitoring the tire pressures. Have the system checked by your dealer as soon as possible.
Also, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator begins to flash, then stays on (see page ).
511
515
TPMS System Failure
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) D
riving
517
U.S. model Canadian model
12/07/20 11:37:05 31TK4640_522
If you have a flat tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator and tire monitor indicator will come on. Replace the indicated flat tire with the compact spare tire (see page
).
After the flat tire is replaced with the spare tire, the low tire pressure/ TPMS indicator stays on while driving. After several miles (kilometers) driving, this indicator begins to flash, then stays on again. You will also see a CHECK TPMS SYSTEM message on the multi- information display. This is normal; the system cannot monitor the spare tire pressure. Manually check the spare tire pressure to be sure it is correct.
This indicator and the warning message on the multi-information display will go off, after several miles (kilometers) driving, when the spare
tire is replaced with the specified regular tire equipped with the tire pressure monitor sensor.
Never use a puncture-repairing agent in a flat tire. If used, you will have to replace the tire pressure sensor. Have the flat tire repaired by your dealer as soon as possible.
If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator and the low tire position on the low tire pressure monitor do not go out after inflating the tires to the specified values, have your dealer check the system as soon as possible.
Each wheel (except the compact spare tire wheel) is equipped with a tire pressure sensor. You must use TPMS specific wheels. It is recommended that you always have your tires serviced by your dealer or qualified technician.
This device complies with the appropriate requirements or the required standards. See page for more information.
583
628
Changing a Tire with TPMS
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
518
12/07/20 11:37:12 31TK4640_523
If the system detects vehicles in adjacent lanes, it automatically illuminates the appropriate indicator to provide assistance when you change lanes. It is not a substitute for visual confirmation that it is safe to change lanes.
The blind spot information system (BSI) is designed to assist you when you are changing lanes.
If equipped
Blind Spot Information System (BSI) D
riving
519
Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to change lanes before doing so may result in a crash and serious injury or death. Do not rely only on the blind spot information system when changing lanes.
Always look in your mirrors, to either side of your vehicle, and behind you for other vehicles before changing lanes.
12/07/20 11:37:17 31TK4640_524
A: Approximately 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) B: Approximately 10 ft. (3 m) C: Approximately 10 ft. (3 m)
BSI system is designed to detect vehicles in specified alert zones adjacent to your vehicle, particularly in harder to see areas commonly known as blind spots.
When BSI detects a vehicle in an alert zone, a BSI alert indicator comes on near the corresponding outside rearview mirror.
While your vehicle is moving forward at a speed between 6 mph (10 km/h) and 100 mph (160 km/h), the BSI alert indicator comes on under either of the following conditions:
The system will not alert you to all vehicles in blind spot zones (such as vehicles you have just passed which you should already be aware of) unless it remains in the alert zone for approximately 2 or more seconds.
Another vehicle overtakes you, entering the alert zone from behind, at a speed that differs from your vehicles speed by no more than 31 mph (50 km/h).
You pass a vehicle at a speed that differs from that vehicles speed by no more than 12 mph (20 km/h). The indicator comes on approximately 2 seconds after the vehicle enters the alert zone.
While the system is on, BSI is active whenever the shift lever is in the D or S position.
Blind Spot Information System (BSI)
BSI System Operation
520
A
B
C
ALERT ZONE
12/07/20 11:37:25 31TK4640_525
CONTINUED
Blind Spot Information System (BSI) D
riving
521
BSI INDICATOR
BSI OFF BUTTON
MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY
BSI ALERT INDICATOR
LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE
U.S. model is shown.
12/07/20 11:37:30 31TK4640_526
The BSI alert indicator starts to blink as a reminder if you move the turn signal lever in the direction of the detected vehicle.
Radar sensors, located underneath each corner of the rear bumper, detect objects. Do not cover this area with labels or stickers of any kind. Always keep this area free of any kind of dirt every time you get in the vehicle.
Impacts to the radar sensors or the area around them can affect system performance. If an impact occurs, have the system checked by your dealer.
Blind Spot Information System (BSI)
522
ALERT INDICATORLEVER
ILLUMINATE
BLINK
12/07/20 11:37:35 31TK4640_527
Like all assistance systems, BSI has limitations. Over-reliance on BSI may result in a collision. Always look in your mirrors, to either side of your vehicle, and behind you for other vehicles before changing lanes.
The BSI alert indicators may not illuminate under the following circumstances:
The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle approaching from behind is greater than 31 mph (50 km/h).
A vehicle is parked in a side lane.
The speed difference between your vehicle and the vehicle you are passing is greater than 6 mph (10 km/h).
An object not detected by the radar sensors approaches or passes your vehicle.
BSI may be adversely affected under the following circumstances:
When objects such as guard rails, poles, trees, etc., are detected.
When an object that doesnt reflect radio waves well, such as a motorcycle, is in the alert zone.
A vehicle is behind or approaching your vehicle while on a curved road.
A vehicle is moving from a far lane to the adjacent lane.
CONTINUED
Blind Spot Information System (BSI)
Important Precautions Limitations
D riving
523
12/07/20 11:37:45 31TK4640_528
The orientation of the sensors has been changed.
Bad weather conditions, such as heavy rain, snow and fog.
The system picks up external electrical interference.
The rear bumper has been deformed, or improperly repaired.
The system is for your convenience. Even if an object is within the alert zone, the system may not detect it, depending on its shape. Always look in your mirrors, to either side of your vehicle, and behind you for other vehicles before changing lanes.
Blind Spot Information System (BSI)
524
POLE OR TREE EXAMPLES
: BSI Alert indicator is on
: BSI Alert indicator is off
MOTORCYCLE
GUARD RAIL
12/07/20 11:37:52 31TK4640_529
To turn the system off, press and hold the BSI OFF button when the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position. The BSI indicator on the instrument panel glows amber, indicating that the system is turned off. The multi-information display indicates that the system is off.
To turn the system on again, press and hold the same button. The BSI indicator on the instrument panel turns off. The multi-information display indicates that the system is on.
When the ignition switch is turned to the ON (II) position, the system will be in the previously selected ON or OFF setting.
Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages
and .
:
184 187
Blind Spot Information System (BSI)
BSI OFF Button
D riving
525
U.S. model is shown. Canadian model is shown.
12/07/20 11:37:59 31TK4640_530
Multi-Information Display Message
BSI IndicatorSystem Status
ON
OFF
ON/OFF
OFF
Description
2
When you press and hold the BSI OFF button with the ignition switch in the ON (II) position, a BSI ON or OFF message is displayed on the multi-information display for about 5 seconds. The BSI indicator will remain on while the system is off. The BSI alert indicator illuminates or flashes according to the system status. A chime sounds to indicate that the system has been turned ON or OFF.
1: ON mode on models with keyless access system (see pages 184 and 187). If while driving, mud, snow, or ice accumulates in the vicinity of sensor:
The system may shut down The BSI indicator illuminates, a message is displayed on the multi-information display, and a chime sounds.
The BSI indicator will turn off and the system will return to normal once the obstacle is removed, and you begin to drive. Always keep the area around the radar sensors clean. BSI may not operate properly if the sensors are obstructed. The BSI alert indicator:
May come on when a vehicle enters one of the alert zones, even if this message is displayed. May not come on due to obstruction (splashes, etc.) even if this message is not displayed.
2: System status may remain on even when the BLIND SPOT NOT AVAILABLE message is displayed.
If the system is faulty, the BSI indicator illuminates and a message is displayed on the multi- information display. Have your vehicle inspected by your Acura dealer.
1
Blind Spot Information System (BSI)
BSI Status Displays
526
12/07/20 11:38:08 31TK4640_531
This device complies with the appropriate requirements or the required standards. See page for more information.
628
Blind Spot Information System (BSI) D
riving
527
12/07/20 11:38:11 31TK4640_532
Your vehicle is not designed to tow a trailer. Attempting to do so can void your warranties.
Your vehicle is not designed to be towed behind a motor home. If your vehicle needs to be towed in an emergency, see page .607
Towing a Trailer, Towing Your Vehicle
Towing a Trailer Towing Your Vehicle
528
12/07/20 11:38:16 31TK4640_533
This section explains why it is important to keep your vehicle well maintained and how to follow basic maintenance safety precautions.
This section also includes instructions on how to read the Maintenance Minder messages on the multi-information display, and instructions for simple maintenance tasks you may want to take care of yourself.
If you have the skills and tools to perform more complex maintenance tasks on your vehicle, you may want to purchase the service manual. See page for information on how to obtain a copy, or see your dealer.
U.S. Vehicles: ......................Maintenance Safety . 530 .................Maintenance Minder . 531
..............................Fluid Locations . 541 ......Engine Compartment Covers . 542
........................Adding Engine Oil . 543 Changing the Engine Oil and
...........................................Filter . 544 ..............................Engine Coolant . 546
....................Windshield Washers . 548 .......................Transmission Fluid . 549
..........Automatic Transmission . 549 ..............Manual Transmission . 551
................Brake and Clutch Fluid . 553 ....................................Timing Belt . 554
.............................................Lights . 555 ................Cleaning the Seat Belts . 564
.....................................Floor Mats . 565 ..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 566
.................................Exterior Care . 566
.................................Wiper Blades . 566 ...............................................Tires . 568
...................Checking the Battery . 577 .............................Vehicle Storage . 578
..................................Interior Care . 579
633
Maintenance
Maintenance, replacement, or repair of emissions control devices and systems may be done by any automotive repair establishment or individual using parts that are certif ied to EPA standards.
M aintenance
529
TM
12/07/20 11:38:22 31TK4640_534
To eliminate potential hazards, read the instructions before you begin, and make sure you have the tools and skills required.
All service items not detailed in this section should be performed by a certified technician or other qualified mechanic.
Make sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and the engine is off.
To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not gasoline.
To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames away from the battery and all fuel-related parts.
Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the battery or compressed air.
Do not run the engine unless instructed to do so.
Some of the most important safety precautions are given here. However, we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in performing maintenance. Only you can decide whether or not you should perform a given task.
Let the engine and exhaust system cool down before touching any parts.
Be sure there is adequate ventilation whenever you operate the engine.
Maintenance Safety
Important Safety Precautions
Injury from moving parts.
Burns from hot parts.
Carbon Monoxide poison from engine exhaust.
Potential Vehicle Hazards
530
Failure to properly follow maintenance instructions and precautions can cause you to be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures and precautions in this owners manual.
Improperly maintaining this vehicle, or failing to correct a problem before driving can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection and maintenance recommendations and schedules in this owners manual.
12/07/20 11:38:32 31TK4640_535
CONTINUED
Your vehicle displays engine oil life and maintenance service items on the multi-information display to show you when you should have your dealer perform engine oil replacement and indicated maintenance service.
To see the current engine oil life displayed on the multi-information display, turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, and press the SEL/RESET button on the steering wheel repeatedly until the engine oil life is displayed.
Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages
and .
Based on the engine operating conditions, the onboard computer in your vehicle calculates the remaining engine oil life and displays it as a percentage.
:
184 187
Maintenance Minder
Engine Oil Life Display
M aintenance
531
REMAINING ENGINE OIL LIFE
U.S. model is shown.
TM
12/07/20 11:38:38 31TK4640_536
Pressing either INFO button ( / ) switches the display from the message to another display. Once you switch the display, this message will go off.
Along with the message, the system message indicator comes on (see page ).
When the remaining engine oil life is 15 to 6 percent, the multi-information display shows a SERVICE DUE SOON message along with the maintenance item code(s) indicating the main and sub items required at the time of the oil change. Refer to page for a complete list of the maintenance main items and sub items.
The remaining engine oil life is shown on the multi-information display according to this table:
The message appears on the multi- information display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.
Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages
and .
72
:
540 184 187
Calculated Engine Oil Life (%) 100% 91% 90% 81% 80% 71% 70% 61% 60% 51% 50% 41% 40% 31% 30% 21% 20% 16% 15% 11% 10% 6% 5% 1%
0%
Displayed Engine Oil Life (%)
100% 90% 80% 70% 60% 50% 40% 30% 20% 15% 10% 5% 0%
Maintenance Minder
532
MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM CODE
MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM CODE(S)
TM
12/07/20 11:38:45 31TK4640_537
CONTINUED
When the remaining oil life is 5 to 1 percent, the multi-information display shows a SERVICE DUE NOW message with the same maintenance items SERVICE DUE SOON was displayed with. When you see this message, have the indicated maintenance performed as soon as possible.
Press the SEL/RESET button on the steering wheel repeatedly to select the engine oil life information. Along with the OIL LIFE message, you will see the percentage of the remaining engine oil life and the maintenance item codes on the multi-information display.
This message reminds you that your vehicle will soon be due for scheduled maintenance.
Maintenance Minder M
aintenance
533
REMAINING ENGINE OIL LIFE
MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM CODEMAIN ITEM(S) SUB ITEM(S)
MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM CODE(S)
TM
12/07/20 11:38:51 31TK4640_538
Pressing either INFO button ( / ) switches the display from the message to another display. Once you switch the display, this message will go off.
Press the SEL/RESET button on the steering wheel repeatedly to select the engine oil life. The message SERVICE, along with 5%, and the maintenance item code are displayed on the multi-information display when the calculated engine oil life is 1 to 5 percent (see page ).
If the indicated maintenance service is not done and the remaining engine oil life reaches 0%, the multi- information display will show the message SERVICE PAST DUE and the maintenance item code(s). This message is displayed when the total distance traveled is less than 10 miles (for U.S. models) or 10 km (for Canadian models) after the engine oil life became 0%.
532
Maintenance Minder
534
TM
12/07/20 11:38:57 31TK4640_539
CONTINUED
Press the SEL/RESET button on the steering wheel repeatedly to select the engine oil life. The message SERVICE, along with 0%, and the maintenance item code are displayed on the multi-information display when the calculated engine oil life is 0 to 1 percent.
These messages will come on every time you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.
If the indicated required service is not done and the remaining engine oil life becomes 0%, the multi- information display will show a SERVICE PAST DUE message, the total distance traveled after the remaining oil life became 0%, and the maintenance item code(s).
Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages
and .
Pressing either INFO button ( / ) switches the display from the message to another display. To see the message again, press either INFO button repeatedly.
Immediately have the service performed, and make sure to reset the display as described on page .
:
184 187
537
Maintenance Minder M
aintenance
535
U.S.
TOTAL PAST DUE DISTANCE TRAVELED
MAINTENANCE CODES
Canada
TM
12/07/20 11:39:05 31TK4640_540
This message is displayed again when you drive over 10 miles (for U.S. models) or 10 km (for Canadian models) after seeing the 0% message.
Immediately have the service performed, and make sure to reset the display as described on page .
Pressing either INFO button ( / ) switches the display from the message to another display. To see the message again, press either INFO button repeatedly.
All maintenance items shown on the multi-information display are in code. For an explanation of these maintenance codes, see page .
When you press the SEL/RESET button to select the engine oil life, the message SERVICE, along with the maintenance item code(s) and the total negative distance traveled after the oil life became 0%, will be displayed on the multi-information display.
540
537
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance Main Items and Sub Items
536
U.S.
MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM
MAINTENANCE SUB ITEMS
MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM
MAINTENANCE SUB ITEMS
TOTAL PAST DUE DISTANCE TRAVELED
Canada
TM
12/07/20 11:39:13 31TK4640_541
Your dealer will reset the display after completing the required maintenance service. You will see OIL LIFE 100% on the display the next time you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.
Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages
and .
If maintenance service is done by someone other than your dealer, reset the Maintenance Minder as follows:
If the engine oil life is not displayed, press the SEL/RESET button on the steering wheel repeatedly.
Press and hold the SEL/RESET button on the steering wheel for more than 10 seconds. The remaining engine oil life reset mode will be shown on the multi- information display. Select RESET by pressing the
INFO ( ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button to reset the engine oil life display. The maintenance item code(s) will disappear, and the engine oil life will reset to 100. If you want to cancel the oil life reset mode, select CANCEL.
3.
1.
2.
4.
:
184 187
Maintenance Minder
Resetting the Engine Oil Life Display
M aintenance
537
TM
12/07/20 11:39:21 31TK4640_542
Your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best and can provide competent, efficient service. However, service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in effect. Maintenance may be done by any qualified service facility or person who is skilled in this type of automotive service. Keep all receipts as proof of completion, and have the person who does the work fill out your Maintenance Journal or Canadian Maintenance Log. Check your warranty booklet for more information.
If you have the required service done but do not reset the display, or reset the display without doing the service, the system will not show the correct maintenance intervals. This can lead to serious mechanical problems because you will no longer have an accurate record of when maintenance is needed.
We recommend using Acura parts and fluids whenever you have maintenance done. These are manufactured to the same high- quality standards as the original components, so you can be confident of their performance and durability.
According to state and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on the items marked with will not void your emissions warranties. However, all maintenance services should be performed in accordance with the intervals indicated by the multi- information display.
U.S. Vehicles:
Maintenance Minder
Important Maintenance Precautions
538
TM
12/07/20 11:39:27 31TK4640_543
You should check the following items at the specified intervals. If you are unsure of how to perform any check, turn to the appropriate page listed.
Lights Check the operation of all the lights monthly. See page
.
Engine oil level Check every time you fill the fuel tank. See page .
Engine coolant level Check the radiator reserve tank every time you fill the fuel tank. See page .
Automatic transmission Check the fluid level monthly. See page
.
Brakes Check the fluid level monthly. See page .
Tires Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects. See page
.
474
475
549
553
568
555
CONTINUED
Maintenance Minder
Owners Maintenance Checks
M aintenance
539
TM
12/07/20 11:39:35 31TK4640_544
Maintenance Minder
540
:
TM
If the message SERVICE DUE NOW does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty on page .
Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).
Independent of the Maintenance Minder information, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy.
NOTE:
2 :
1 :
SH-AWD only
538
Maintenance Main Items Replace engine oil Replace engine oil and oil filter Inspect front and rear brakes Check parking brake adjustment Inspect these items:
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots Suspension components Driveshaft boots Brake hoses and line (including ABS/VSA) All fluid levels and condition of fluids Exhaust system Fuel lines and connections
Maintenance Sub Items Rotate tires Replace air cleaner element
If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
Replace dust and pollen filter If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and from diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
Inspect drive belt Replace transmission fluid Replace transmission and transfer fluid Replace spark plugs Replace timing belt and inspect water pump
If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over 110F, 43C), or in very low temperatures (under
20F, 29C), replace every 60,000 miles (U.S.)/ 100,000 km (Canada).
Inspect valve clearance Replace engine coolant Replace rear differential fluid
Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds results in higher level of mechanical (shear) stress to fluid. This requires differential fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the differential fluid changed at 7,500 miles (12,000 km), then every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
A B
Symbol Symbol
3
4
5
1 2
6
1
1
2
2
M a in
te n a n ce
M in
d e r
12/07/20 11:39:42 31TK4640_545
Fluid Locations M
aintenance
541
WASHER FLUID (Black cap)
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID DIPSTICK (Yellow loop)
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK (Orange loop)
RADIATOR CAP
BRAKE FLUID (Black cap)
ENGINE COOLANT RESERVOIR
CLUTCH FLUID (Manual Transmission only) (Light gray cap)
: Located under the cover
12/07/20 11:39:45 31TK4640_546
The component parts in the engine compartment are protected by several covers. You may need to remove the covers when you perform some simple maintenance work.
When reinstalling the covers, make sure the pins and tabs are in their proper positions.
To remove the covers:
Remove the right and left engine compartment covers by sliding them apart.
Pull the bulkhead cover straight up to remove. When removing the cover, make sure to move the bulkhead cover slightly to the left so that the hood latch handle does not get in the way.
After replacing the right engine compartment cover, make sure the washer fluid cap is firmly in place.
1.
2.
Engine Compartment Covers
542
RIGHT ENGINE COMPARTMENT COVER
BULKHEAD COVER
LEFT ENGINE COMPARTMENT COVER
12/07/20 11:39:52 31TK4640_547
Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap on top of the valve cover. Pour in the oil slowly and carefully so you do not spill. Clean up any spills immediately. Spilled oil could damage components in the engine compartment. Install the engine oil fill cap, and tighten it securely. Wait a few minutes, and recheck the oil level (see page ). Do not fill above the upper mark; you could damage the engine.
Oil is a major contributor to your engines performance and longevity. Always use a premium-grade detergent oil displaying the API Certification Seal. This seal indicates the oil is energy conserving, and that it meets the American Petroleum Institutes latest requirements. It is highly recommended that you use Acura Motor Oil in your vehicle for optimum engine protection.
Make sure the API Certification Seal says For Gasoline Engines. The oil viscosity or weight is provided on the containers label.
Acura Motor Oil is the preferred 0W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. 0W-20 oil is formulated for year- round protection of your vehicle to improve cold weather starting and fuel economy.
474
CONTINUED
Recommended Engine Oil
2WD models:
Adding Engine Oil M
aintenance
543
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
Ambient TemperatureAPI CERTIFICATION SEAL
12/07/20 11:40:00 31TK4640_548
You may use a synthetic motor oil if it meets the same requirements given for a conventional motor oil: it displays the API Certification Seal and it is the proper weight. You must follow the oil and filter change intervals shown on the multi- information display.
Your vehicle does not require any oil additives. Additives may adversely affect the engine or transmission performance and durability.
Always change the oil and filter according to the maintenance messages shown on the multi- information display. The oil and filter collect contaminants that can damage your engine if they are not removed regularly.
Changing the oil and filter requires special tools and access from underneath the vehicle. The vehicle should be raised on a service station- type hydraulic lift for this service. Unless you have the knowledge and proper equipment, you should have this maintenance done by a skilled technician.
Acura Motor Oil is the preferred 5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. 5W- 20 oil is formulated for year-round protection of your vehicle to improve cold weather starting and fuel economy.
Synthetic Oil
Engine Oil Additives
Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
SH-AWD models:
Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
544
Ambient Temperature
12/07/20 11:40:08 31TK4640_549
Install a new oil filter according to the instructions that come with it. Make sure to clean off any dirt and dust on the contacting surface of a new oil filter.
Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then reinstall the drain bolt. Tighten the drain bolt to:
Refill the engine with the recommended oil.
Engine oil change capacity (including filter):
Remove the oil filter, and let the remaining oil drain. A special wrench (available from your dealer) is required.
Make sure the oil filter gasket is not stuck to the contacting surface of the engine. If it is, remove it before installing a new oil filter.
Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature, then shut it off.
Open the hood, and remove the engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil drain bolt and washer from the bottom of the engine. Drain the oil into an appropriate container.
3.
5.
6.
4.
1.
2.
CONTINUED
Changing the Engine Oil and Filter M
aintenance
545
OIL FILTER
DRAIN BOLT WASHER
29 lbfft (39 Nm , 4.0 kgfm)
4.5 US qt (4.3 )
12/07/20 11:40:18 31TK4640_550
Always use Honda Long-life Anti- freeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolant is pre-mixed with 50 percent antifreeze and 50 percent distilled water. Never add straight antifreeze or plain water.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may use another major-brand non-silicate coolant as a temporary replacement. Make sure it is a high-quality coolant recommended for aluminum engines. Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result in corrosion, causing the cooling system to malfunction or fail. Have the cooling system flushed and refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as possible.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. The oil pressure indicator should go out within 5 seconds. If it does not, turn off the engine and check your work.
Let the engine run for several minutes, then check the drain bolt and oil filter for leaks.
Turn off the engine, let it sit for several minutes, then check the oil level on the dipstick. If necessary, add more oil.
If the coolant level in the reserve tank is at or below the MIN line, add coolant to bring it up to the MAX line. Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
To access the radiator reserve tank, remove the right-side engine compartment cover (see page ).
7.
8.
9.
542
Adding Engine Coolant
Changing the Engine Oil and Filter, Engine Coolant
546
RESERVE TANK
MINMAX
Improper disposal of engine oil can be harmf ul to the environment. If you change your own oil, please dispose of the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed container, and take it to a recycling center. Do not discard it in a trash bin or dump it on the ground.
12/07/20 11:40:27 31TK4640_551
The coolant level should be up to the base of the filler neck. Add coolant if it is low.
Remove all engine compartment covers (see page ).
When the radiator and engine are cool, relieve any pressure in the cooling system by turning the radiator cap counterclockwise, without pressing down.
Remove the radiator cap by pushing down and turning counterclockwise.
If the reserve tank is completely empty, you should also check the coolant level in the radiator.
Pour the coolant slowly and carefully so you do not spill any. Clean up any spill immediately; it could damage components in the engine compartment.
Put the radiator cap back on and tighten it.
Pour coolant into the reserve tank. Fill it to halfway between the MAX and MIN marks. Put the cap back on the reserve tank.
Reinstall the engine compartment covers.
Do not add any rust inhibitors or other additives to your vehicles cooling system. They may not be compatible with the coolant or engine components.
1.
2.
4.
5.
3.
6.
7.
542
Engine Coolant M
aintenance
547
RADIATOR CAP
Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap.
12/07/20 11:40:37 31TK4640_552
Check the fluid level in the windshield washer reservoir at least monthly during normal use.
If the washer fluid is low, a LOW WASHER FLUID message appears on the multi-information display.
Fill the reservoir with a good-quality windshield washer fluid. This increases the cleaning capability and prevents freezing in cold weather.
When you refill the reservoir, clean the edges of the windshield wiper blades with windshield washer fluid on a clean cloth. This will help to condition the blade edges.
Check the reservoirs fluid level by removing the cap and looking inside.
On U.S. models
On Canadian models
Windshield Washers
548
Do not use engine antif reeze or a vinegar/water solution in the windshield washer reservoir. Antif reeze can damage your vehicles paint, while a vinegar/water solution can damage the windshield washer pump. Use only commercially-available windshield washer f luid.
12/08/10 10:34:45 31TK4640_553
CONTINUED
Insert the dipstick all the way into the transmission securely as shown in the illustration.
Remove the dipstick and check the fluid level. It should be between the upper and lower marks.
Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) from the transmission, and wipe it with a clean cloth.
Check the fluid level with the engine at normal operating temperature.
Park the vehicle on level ground. Start the engine, let it run until the radiator fan comes on, then shut off the engine. For accurate results, wait about 60 seconds (but no longer than 90 seconds) before doing step 2.
1.
2. 3.
4.
Automatic Transmission
Transmission Fluid M
aintenance
549
DIPSTICK
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
GUIDE
12/07/20 11:40:52 31TK4640_554
Insert the dipstick all the way back into the transmission securely as shown in the illustration.
If the level is below the lower mark, add fluid into the dipstick hole to bring it to the level between the upper and lower marks.
Always use Acura ATF DW-1 (automatic transmission fluid).
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill any. Clean up any spill immediately; it could damage components in the engine compartment.
The transmission should be drained and refilled with new fluid according to the Maintenance Minder (see page ).
If you are not sure how to check and add fluid, contact your dealer.
Make sure the rubber cap on the dipstick fits in the dipstick guide and that you push the dipstick in all the way.
5. 6.
531
Transmission Fluid
550
TM
Use only Acura ATF DW-1 (automatic transmission f luid). Do not mix with other transmission f luids. Using transmission f luid other than Acura ATF DW-1 may cause deterioration in transmission operation and durability, and could result in damage to the transmission. Damage resulting f rom the use of transmission f luid other than Acura ATF DW-1 is not covered by the Acura new vehicle warranty.
12/07/20 11:40:59 31TK4640_555
Remove the check bolt and look for transmission fluid coming out of the bolt hole. If a small amount of fluid drips out of the bolt hole, reinstall the check bolt.
Check the fluid level with the transmission at normal operating temperature and the vehicle sitting on level ground.
If no fluid comes out, remove the filler bolt and washer. Slowly add Acura Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) until it starts to run out of the check bolt hole.
To check the transmission fluid level, remove the mounting bolts and the under cover holding clips, then pull out the drivers side under cover carefully.
CONTINUED
Transmission Fluid
Manual Transmission
M aintenance
551
WASHER
CHECK BOLT FILLER BOLT
12/07/20 11:41:06 31TK4640_556
The transmission should be drained and refilled with new fluid according to the Maintenance Minder (see page ).
If you are not sure how to check and add fluid, contact your dealer.
Reinstall the under cover, tighten the mounting bolts securely, then put the holding clips back in place. Make sure the under cover is installed under the edge of the front bumper.
Pour the fluid into the filler hole slowly and carefully so you do not spill any. Clean up any spills immediately; it could damage components in the engine compartment.
Let the fluid run out until it stops, then reinstall the check bolt and the filler bolt.
Make sure to put a new washer on each bolt when reinstalling it.
If Acura MTF is not available, you may use an SAE 0W-20 or 5W-20 viscosity motor oil with the API Certification Seal that says FOR GASOLINE ENGINES as a temporary replacement. However, motor oil does not contain the proper additives, and continued use can cause stiffer shifting. Replace as soon as it is convenient.
531
Transmission Fluid
552
TM
12/07/20 11:41:12 31TK4640_557
The fluid level should be between the MIN and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir. If the level is at or below the MIN mark, your brake system needs attention. Have the brake system inspected for leaks or worn brake pads.
You need to remove the left engine compartment cover to check the fluid level (see page ).
Check the fluid level in the reservoirs monthly. There are up to two reservoirs, depending on the model. They are:
Brake fluid reservoir (all models) Clutch fluid reservoir (manual transmission models only)
To access the reservoirs, remove the left engine compartment cover (see page ).
You will also see a LOW BRAKE FLUID message on the multi- information display.
Always use Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not available, you should use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed container, as a temporary replacement.
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your vehicles braking system and can cause extensive damage.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of the system. Have the brake system flushed and refilled with Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible.
Independent of the Maintenance Minder information, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.
542
542
Brake and Clutch Fluid
Brake Fluid
M aintenance
553
MAX
MIN
12/07/20 11:41:20 31TK4640_558
Manual Transmission only
The fluid level should be between the MIN and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir. If it is not, add brake fluid to bring it up to that level. Use the same fluid specified for the brake system.
A low fluid level can indicate a leak in the clutch system. Have this system inspected as soon as possible.
The timing belt should be replaced according to the Maintenance Minder (see page ).
Replace the timing belt every 60,000 miles (U.S.) or every 100,000 km (Canada) if you regularly drive your vehicle in any of the following conditions:
In very high temperatures (over 110F, 43C). In very low temperatures (under 20F, 29C).
531
Brake and Clutch Fluid, Timing Belt
Clutch Fluid Timing Belt
554
MAX
MIN
TM
12/07/20 11:41:27 31TK4640_559
The headlights were properly aimed when your vehicle was new. If you regularly carry heavy items in the trunk, readjustment may be required. Adjustments should be done by your dealer or another qualified technician.
Your vehicle has halogen high beam headlight bulbs which are also used for the daytime running light. Handle it by its base and protect the glass from contact with your skin or hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.
Open the hood.
Remove all engine compartment covers (see page ).
The low beam headlight bulbs are a type of high voltage discharge tube. High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the light switch off and the key removed (or the vehicle is in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) mode on models with keyless access system). Because of this, you should not attempt to examine or change a low beam headlight bulb yourself. If a low beam headlight bulb fails, take the vehicle to your dealer to have it replaced.
If you are replacing the bulb on the drivers side, remove the holding clips with a flat-tip screwdriver. Then remove the upper part of the air intake duct by pulling it straight up.
1.
2. 542
CONTINUED
Headlight Aiming
Low Beam Headlight Bulb Replacement
Replacing a High Beam Headlight/Daytime Running Light Bulb
Lights M
aintenance
555
HOLDING CLIP
Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to overheat and shatter.
12/07/20 11:41:36 31TK4640_560
Push the electrical connector back onto the bulb. Make sure it is on all the way.
Remove the electrical connector from the bulb by pushing on the tab and pulling the connector down.
Remove the bulb by turning it one- quarter turn counterclockwise.
Insert the new bulb into the hole, and turn it one-quarter turn clockwise to lock it in place.
To change a bulb on the passengers side, remove the engine coolant reserve tank by pulling it out of its stay.
Turn on the headlights to test the new bulb.
Install the upper part of the air intake duct securely. Reinstall the holding clips.
(Drivers side)
Install all engine compartment covers.
Install the engine coolant reserve tank.
(Passengers side)
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
3. 9.
10.
Lights
556
RESERVE TANK BULB
CONNECTORSTAY
12/07/20 11:41:46 31TK4640_561
Start the engine. If you are replacing a drivers side bulb, turn the steering wheel all the way to the right. If you are replacing a passengers side bulb, turn the steering wheel to the left. Turn off the engine.
Use a wrench to remove the mounting bolts, and remove the holding clip with a flat-tip screwdriver.
Use a flat-tip screwdriver to remove the holding clips from the edge of the inner fender cover, and pull the inner fender cover back.
Pull down the under cover from the bumper carefully.
3.2.
1.
4.
CONTINUED
Replacing the Front Side Marker Light Bulb
Lights M
aintenance
557
HOLDING CLIP
UNDER COVER
BOLT
HOLDING CLIP
BOLT
12/07/20 11:41:54 31TK4640_562
Remove the socket from the headlight assembly by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Start the engine. If you are replacing a drivers side bulb, turn the steering wheel all the way to the right. If you are replacing a passengers side bulb, turn the steering wheel to the left. Turn off the engine.
Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out of its socket.
Install the new bulb in the socket by pushing it straight in the socket until it bottoms.
Insert the socket into the headlight assembly. Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.
Turn on the lights to make sure the new bulb is working.
Push the under cover in place and set the inner fender cover in the original position. Install the bolts and tighten them securely. Insert each holding clip, and lock it by pushing on its center.
5.
6.
7.
8. 1.
9.
10.
Replacing a Front Turn Signal/ Parking Light Bulb
Lights
558
SOCKETBULB
12/07/20 11:42:01 31TK4640_563
Remove the socket from the light assembly by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Use a wrench to remove the mounting bolts, and remove the holding clip with a flat-tip screwdriver.
Pull down the under cover from the bumper carefully.
Use a flat-tip screwdriver to remove the holding clips from the edge of the inner fender cover, and pull the inner fender cover back. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out of its socket.
3.2. 4.
5.
CONTINUED
Lights M
aintenance
559
HOLDING CLIP COVER
HOLDING CLIP UNDER COVER SOCKET
BOLT
BOLT
BULB
12/07/20 11:42:08 31TK4640_564
Your vehicle uses halogen light bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle it by its plastic case, and protect the glass from contact with your skin or hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.
Start the engine. If you are replacing a drivers side bulb, turn the steering wheel all the way to the right. If you are replacing a passengers side bulb, turn the steering wheel to the left. Turn off the engine.
The fog lights were properly aimed when your vehicle was new. If you regularly carry heavy items in the trunk, readjustment may be required. Adjustment should be done by your dealer or another qualified technician.
Install the new bulb in the socket by pushing it straight in the socket until it bottoms.
Push the under cover in place and set the inner fender cover in the original position. Install the bolts and tighten them securely. Insert each holding clip, and lock it by pushing on its center.
Turn on the lights to make sure the new bulb is working.
Insert the socket into the light assembly. Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1.Replacing a Front Fog Light Bulb
Lights
560
Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to overheat and shatter.
12/07/20 11:42:16 31TK4640_565
Remove the electrical connector from the bulb by pushing on the tab and pulling the connector down.
Remove the bulb by turning it about one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Use a wrench to remove the mounting bolts, and remove the holding clip with a flat-tip screwdriver.
Pull down the under cover from the bumper carefully.
Use a flat-tip screwdriver to remove the holding clips from the edge of the inner fender cover, and pull the inner fender cover back.
4.
5.
3.2.
CONTINUED
Lights M
aintenance
561
HOLDING CLIP
UNDER COVER
COVER BOLT
HOLDING CLIP
BOLT
CONNECTOR
BULB
12/07/20 11:42:24 31TK4640_566
Remove the nuts from the stud bolts with a socket or wrench.
Open the trunk. Remove the screw in the center of the holding clip on the side of the trunk lining. Pull the lining back.
Insert the new bulb into the hole, and turn it one-quarter turn clockwise to lock it in place.
Push the electrical connector back onto the bulb. Make sure it is on all the way.
Turn on the fog lights to test the new bulb.
Push the under cover in place and set the inner fender cover in the original position. Install the bolts and tighten them securely. Insert each holding clip, and lock it by pushing on its center.
1. 2.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Lights
Replacing Rear Bulbs
562
SCREW
NUTS
12/07/20 11:42:33 31TK4640_567
Push a new bulb straight into the socket until it bottoms, and reinstall the socket into the light assembly by turning it clockwise until it locks.
Turn on the lights to make sure the new bulb is working.
Reinstall the trunk lining. Make sure it is installed under the edge of the trunk seal.
Put the holding clip into the hole on the side of the trunk lining. Reinstall the screw.
Determine which of the three bulbs is burned out: back-up light, turn signal, or side marker.
Remove the socket by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise, and pull the bulb straight out of its socket.
Pull the taillight assembly straight back out of the body.
6.
7.
8.
9.
5.
4.3.
Lights M
aintenance
563
BULB SOCKET
12/07/20 11:42:41 31TK4640_568
Each outside mirror has side turn signal lights. The lights should be replaced by your dealer.
This light should be replaced by your dealer.
The license plate has two lights above it. The bulbs should be replaced by your dealer.
If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean them. Do not use bleach, dye, or cleaning solvents. Let the belts air-dry before you use the vehicle.
Dirt build-up around the openings of the seat belt anchors can cause the belts to retract slowly. Wipe the openings with a clean cloth dampened in mild soap and warm water or isopropyl alcohol.
Lights, Cleaning the Seat Belts
Side Turn Signal Lights
High-mount Brake Light
Rear License Plate Light Bulbs
Cleaning the Seat Belts
564
OPENING
12/07/20 11:42:49 31TK4640_569
The floor mats that came with your vehicle hook over the floor mat anchors. This keeps the floor mats from sliding forward (possibly interfering with the pedals), or backwards (making the front passengers weight sensors ineffective).
If you remove a floor mat, make sure to re-anchor it when you put it back in your vehicle.
If you use non-Acura floor mats, make sure they fit properly and that they can be used with the floor mat anchors. Do not put additional floor mats on top of the anchored mats.
To lock or unlock each anchor, turn the knob.
Make sure the rear floor mats are also properly hooked. If not, the floor mat will interfere with the seat operation and make the front passengers weight sensors ineffective.
Floor Mats M
aintenance
565
FLOOR MAT ANCHORS
DRIVERS SIDE FLOOR MAT REAR PASSENGERS FLOOR MAT
Unlock
Lock
Unlock
Lock
FLOOR MAT ANCHOR
12/07/20 11:42:56 31TK4640_570
This filter removes the dust and pollen that is brought in from the outside through the climate control system.
Have your dealer replace the filter when this service is indicated by a maintenance message on the multi- information display. It should be replaced every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) if you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air, or if the flow from the climate control system becomes less than usual.
Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every 6 months. Replace them if you find signs of cracking in the rubber, areas that are getting hard, or if they leave streaks and unwiped areas when used.
To replace a wiper blade:
Raise each wiper arm off the windshield, lifting the drivers side first, then the passengers side.
1.
Dust and Pollen Filter Wiper BladesExterior Care
Dust and Pollen Filter, Exterior Care, Wiper Blades
566
Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are raised, or you will damage the hood and wiper arms.
Chemical solvents and strong cleaners can damage the paint, metal, and plastic on your vehicle.
12/07/20 11:43:04 31TK4640_571
Slide the new wiper blade into the holder until the tabs lock.
Slide the wiper blade assembly onto the wiper arm. Make sure it locks in place.
Lower the wiper arm down against the windshield, the passengers side first, then the drivers side.
Remove the blade from its holder by grabbing the tabbed end of the blade. Pull up firmly until the tabs come out of the holder.
Examine the new wiper blades. If they have no plastic or metal reinforcement along the back edge, remove the metal reinforcement strips from the old wiper blade, and install them in the slots along the edge of the new blade.
Disconnect the blade assembly from the wiper arm by pushing in the lock tab. Hold the lock tab in while you push the blade assembly toward the base of the arm.
When replacing a wiper blade, make sure not to drop the wiper blade or wiper arm down on the windshield.
3. 5.
4.
6.
7.
2.
Wiper Blades M
aintenance
567
BLADE
BLADE REINFORCEMENT STRIP LOCK TAB
12/07/20 11:43:12 31TK4640_572
To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be the proper type and size, in good condition with adequate tread, and correctly inflated.
The following pages give more detailed information on how to take care of your tires and what to do when they need to be replaced.
Keeping the tires properly inflated provides the best combination of handling, tread life, and riding comfort.
The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) warns you when a tire pressure is low. See page for more information on the TPMS.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated.
Overinflated tires can make your vehicle ride more harshly, are more prone to damage from road hazards, and wear unevenly.
514
Tires
Inflation Guidelines
568
Using tires that are excessively worn or improperly inflated can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owners manual regarding tire inflation and maintenance.
12/07/20 11:43:19 31TK4640_573
Even though your vehicle is equipped with TPMS, we recommend that you visually check your tires every day. If you think a tire might be low, check it immediately with a tire gauge.
Use a gauge to measure the air pressure in each tire at least once a month. Even tires that are in good condition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per month. Remember to check the spare tire at the same time.
Check the air pressures when the tires are cold. This means the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). Add or release air, if needed, to match the recommended cold tire pressures on the next page.
If you check air pressure when the tires are hot [driven for several miles (kilometers)], you will see readings 4 to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4 kgf/cm ) higher than the cold readings. This is normal. Do not let air out to match the recommended cold air pressure. The tire will be underinflated.
While tubeless tires have some ability to self-seal if they are punctured, you should look closely for punctures if a tire starts losing pressure.
You should get your own tire pressure gauge and use it whenever you check your tire pressures. This will make it easier for you to tell if a pressure loss is due to a tire problem and not due to a variation between gauges.
Tires M
aintenance
569
12/07/20 11:43:24 31TK4640_574
The following chart shows the recommended cold tire pressures for most normal driving conditions.
The compact spare tire pressure is:
For convenience, the recommended tire sizes and cold tire pressures are on a label on the drivers doorjamb.
For additional technical information, see page .619
Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure for Normal Driving
Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure for Normal Driving
Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure for Normal Driving
Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure for Normal Driving
SH-AWD and SH-AWD with Technology Package models
TL and TL with Technology Package models
TL Special Edition (2WD), TL with Advance Package and Canadian Elite Package models
SH-AWD with Advance Package, SH-AWD Special Edition, and Canadian SH-AWD Elite Package models
Recommended Tire Pressures
Tires
570
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
P245/50R17 98V 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
34 psi (235 kPa , 2.4 kgf/cm )P245/40R19 94V 34 psi (235 kPa , 2.4 kgf/cm )
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )P245/45R18 96V
P245/45R18 96V 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
Rear:
Front:
Rear:
Front:
Rear:
Front:
Rear:
Front:
13/08/08 17:00:03 31TK4650_575
Every time you check inflation, you should also examine the tires for damage, foreign objects, and wear.
You should look for:
Bumps or bulges in the tread or side of the tire. Replace the tire if you find either of these conditions.
Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace the tire if you can see fabric or cord.
Excessive tread wear.
We strongly recommend that you do not drive faster than the posted speed limits and conditions allow. If you ever drive in a sanctioned competitive event at sustained high speeds, be sure to adjust the cold tire pressures as shown below. If you do not, excessive heat can build up and cause sudden tire failure.
Tire pressure for high speed driving is the same as for normal driving.For speeds over 112 mph or 180
km/h:
For speeds over 99 mph or 160 km/h:
CONTINUED
Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure for High Speed Driving
Cold Tire Pressure for High Speed Driving
Tire Size
TL and TL with Technology Package models
TL Special Edition (2WD), TL with Advance Package, Canadian Elite Package, SH-AWD, and SH-AWD with Technology Package models
SH-AWD with Advance Package, SH-AWD Special Edition, and Canadian SH-AWD Elite Package models
Tires
High Speed Driving Tire Inspection
M aintenance
571
39 psi (270 kPa , 2.7 kgf/cm )
39 psi (270 kPa , 2.7 kgf/cm )P245/40R19 94V
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
35 psi (240 kPa , 2.4 kgf/cm )P245/45R18 96V
Front:
Rear:
Front:
Rear:
13/08/08 17:00:15 31TK4650_576
Your tires have wear indicators molded into the tread. When the tread wears down, you will see a 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide band across the tread. This shows there is less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left on the tire.
A tire this worn gives very little traction on wet roads. You should replace the tire if you can see three or more tread wear indicators.
The service life of your tires is dependent on many factors, including, but not limited to, driving habits, road conditions, vehicle loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and environmental conditions (even when the tires are not in use).
In addition to your regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five years old. It is also recommended that all tires, including the spare, be removed from service after 10 years from the date of manufacture, regardless of their condition or state of wear.
The last four digits of the TIN (tire identification number) are found on the sidewall of the tire and indicate the date of manufacture (See
on page ).619
Tires
Tire Labeling
Tire Service Life
572
INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS
TREAD WEAR INDICATOR
12/07/20 11:43:59 31TK4640_577
CONTINUED
Replace your tires with radial tires of the same size, load range, speed rating, and maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tires sidewall).
Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on your vehicle can reduce braking ability, traction, and steering accuracy. Using tires of a different size or construction can cause the ABS and vehicle stability assist system (VSA) to work inconsistently.
The ABS and VSA system work by comparing the speed of each wheel. When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle. Tire size and construction can affect wheel speed and may cause the system to activate.
To help increase tire life and distribute wear more evenly, rotate the tires according to the maintenance messages displayed on the multi-information display. Move the tires to the positions shown in the illustration each time they are rotated. If you purchase directional tires, rotate only front-to-back.
When the tires are rotated, make sure the air pressures are checked.
In addition to proper inflation, correct wheel alignment helps to decrease tire wear. If you find a tire is worn unevenly, have your dealer check the wheel alignment.
Have your dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent vibration while driving. A tire should always be rebalanced if it is removed from the wheel. When you have new tires installed, make sure they are balanced. This increases riding comfort and tire life. For best results, have the installer perform a dynamic balance.
Tires
Replacing Tires and WheelsTire RotationTire Maintenance
M aintenance
573
Front Front
(For Non-directional Tires and Wheels)
(For Directional Tires and Wheels)
Improper wheel weights can damage your vehicles aluminum wheels. Use only Acura wheel weights f or balancing.
12/07/20 11:44:08 31TK4640_578
It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that is not possible or necessary, replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicles handling.
If you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the wheels specifications match those of the original wheels.
Also be sure you use only TPMS specific wheels. If you do not, the tire pressure monitoring system will not work.
Replacement wheels are available at your dealer.
See page for DOT tire quality grading information, and page
for tire size information.
Wheels:
Tires:
:
619
617
Special Edition, Advance Package and Canadian Elite Package
On 2WD Models
On SH-AWD Models
On 2WD Models
On SH-AWD Models
Wheel and Tire Specifications
Tires
574
17 x 8.0J 18 x 8.0J
18 x 8.0J 19 x 8.0J
P245/50R17 98V P245/45R18 96V
P245/45R18 96V P245/40R19 94V
(TPMS)
(TPMS)
(TPMS)
(TPMS)
Installing improper tires on your vehicle can affect handling and stability. This can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Always use the size and type of tires recommended in this owners manual.
13/04/02 19:22:25 31TK4640_579
CONTINUED
This tire chain is available at many auto supply stores. To find a local store that carries the chain, call Quality Chain Corp at 1-800-843-8824. To order the tire chain online, go to
, and enter your vehicle information. When you install the chains, follow the manufacturers instructions, and mount them as tightly as you can. Drive slowly with the chains installed.
Rubber chain adjusters, or tensioners, must be used to prevent the chains from contacting the body or the chassis.
If you mount snow tires on your vehicle, make sure they are radial tires of the same size and load range as original tires. Mount snow tires on all four wheels. The traction provided by snow tires on dry roads may be lower than your original tires. Check with the tire dealer for maximum speed recommendations.
Mount tire chains on your tires when required by driving conditions or local laws. Install them only on the front tires. Do not use chains on the rear tires.
Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, we strongly recommend using this Quality Chain Corp. tire chain:
Tires marked M S or All Season on the sidewall have an all- weather tread design suitable for most winter driving conditions.
For the best performance in snowy or icy conditions, you should install snow tires or tire chains. They may be required by local laws under certain conditions.
:
www.qualitychaincorp.com
Tires
Premium Cobra Cable Chain 1042P with accessory
adjusters
Winter Driving Snow Tires
Tire Chains
M aintenance
575
12/07/20 11:44:26 31TK4640_580
Clean the wheels as you would the rest of the exterior. Wash them with the same solution, and rinse them thoroughly.
If you ever hear the chains contacting the body or chassis, stop and investigate. If the chains have loosened, retighten them. Make sure they do not contact the brake lines or suspension.
Remove the chains as soon as you begin driving on cleared roads.
Alloy wheels have a protective clear- coat that keeps the wheel from corroding and tarnishing. Cleaning the wheels with harsh chemicals (including some commercial wheel cleaners) or a stiff brush can damage the clear-coat. To clean the wheels, use a mild detergent and a soft brush or sponge.
Do not use chrome cleaners or harsh chemicals that can damage the surface finish.
Wheels
Tires
576
Using the wrong chains, or not properly installing chains, can damage the brake lines and cause a crash in which you can be seriously injured or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owners manual regarding the selection and use of tire chains.
Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly installed can damage your vehicles brake lines, suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are hitting any part of the vehicle.
13/04/02 19:22:32 31TK4640_581
If you need to connect the battery to a charger, disconnect both cables to prevent damaging your vehicles electrical system. Always disconnect the negative ( ) cable first, and reconnect it last.
Check the terminals for corrosion (a white or yellowish powder) after removing all engine compartment covers (see page ). To remove corrosion, cover the terminals with a solution of baking soda and water. It will bubble up and turn brown. When this stops, wash it off with plain water. Dry off the battery with a cloth or paper towel. Coat the terminals with grease to help prevent further corrosion.
If additional battery maintenance is needed, see your Acura dealer or a qualified technician.
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds.
The sensor on the negative terminal monitors your vehicles battery condition.
If there is a problem with the sensor, you will see a CHECK BATTERY SENSOR message on the multi- information display. Have the vehicle checked by your dealer.
To see the battery label, remove the left side engine compartment cover (see page ).
When replacing the battery, the replacement must be of the same specifications. Please consult a dealer for more information.
542
542
CONTINUED
Checking the Battery
WARNING:
Wash your hands after handling.
M aintenance
577
The battery gives off explosive hydrogen gas during normal operation.
A spark or flame can cause the battery to explode with enough force to kill or seriously hurt you.
Wear protective clothing and a face shield, or have a skilled technician do the battery maintenance.
13/08/08 17:00:23 31TK4650_582
Block the rear wheels.
If the vehicle is to be stored for a longer period, it should be supported on jackstands so the tires are off the ground.
Leave one window open slightly (if the vehicle is being stored indoors).
Disconnect the battery.
Support the front wiper blade arms with a folded towel or rag so they do not touch the windshield.
To minimize sticking, apply a silicone spray lubricant to all door and trunk seals. Also, apply a vehicle body wax to the painted surfaces that mate with the door and trunk seals.
If you need to park your vehicle for an extended period (more than 1 month), there are several things you should do to prepare it for storage. Proper preparation helps prevent deterioration and makes it easier to get your vehicle back on the road. If possible, store your vehicle indoors.
Leave the parking brake off. Put the transmission in reverse (manual) or Park (automatic).
Clean the interior. Make sure the carpeting, floor mats, etc., are completely dry.
Wash and dry the exterior completely.
Fill the fuel tank.
If your vehicles battery is disconnected or goes dead, the audio system may disable itself. The next time you turn on the radio, you will see ENTER CODE in the frequency display. Use the preset buttons to enter the code (see page
).
If your vehicles battery is disconnected, or goes dead, the time setting may be lost. To reset the time, see page .
The navigation system will also disable itself. The next time you set to the ON mode, the system will require you to enter a PIN before it can be used. Refer to the navigation system manual.
391
390
On models without navigation system
On models with navigation system
Checking the Battery, Vehicle Storage
Vehicle Storage
578
12/07/20 11:44:50 31TK4640_583
Cover the vehicle with a breathable cover, one made from a porous material such as cotton. Non-porous materials, such as plastic sheeting, trap moisture, which can damage the paint.
If possible, periodically run the engine until it reaches full operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle on and off twice). Preferably, do this once a month.
Vacuum dirt and dust from the leather frequently. Pay close attention to the pleats and seams. Clean the leather with a soft cloth dampened with a 90% water and 10% neutral wool detergent solution. Then buff it with a clean, dry cloth. Remove any dust or dirt on leather surfaces immediately.
Leather
Vehicle Storage, Interior Care M
aintenance
579
12/07/20 11:44:54 31TK4640_584
580
12/07/20 11:44:56 31TK4640_585
This section covers the more common problems that motorists experience with their vehicles. It gives you information about how to safely evaluate the problem and what to do to correct it. If the problem has stranded you on the side of the road, you may be able to get going again. If not, you will also find instructions on getting your vehicle towed.
......................Compact Spare Tire . 582 ....................Changing a Flat Tire . 583
.............If the Engine Wont Start . 588 ................................Jump Starting . 591
..............If the Engine Overheats . 593 .........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 595 ..........Charging System Indicator . 596
.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 597 ...............Brake System Indicator . 598
Opening the Fuel Fill Door ....................................Manually . 599
..............................................Fuses . 600 ..............................Fuse Locations . 604
......................Emergency Towing . 607 ..........If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck . 609
Taking Care of the Unexpected T aking
C are
of the
U nexpected
581
12/07/20 11:44:59 31TK4640_586
Use the compact spare tire as a temporary replacement only. Get your regular tire repaired or replaced, and put it back on your vehicle as soon as you can.
Check the air pressure of the compact spare tire every time you check the other tires. It should be inflated to:
Replace the tire when you can see the tread wear indicator bars. The replacement tire should be the same size and design, mounted on the same wheel. The spare tire is not designed to be mounted on a regular wheel, and the spare wheel is not designed for mounting a regular tire.
Follow these precautions:
Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
This tire gives a harsher ride and less traction on some road surfaces. Use greater caution while driving.
Do not mount snow chains on the compact spare tire.
Do not use your compact spare tire on another vehicle unless it is the same make and model.
After the flat tire is replaced with the spare tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator stays on. After several miles (kilometers) driving with the spare, this indicator begins to flash, then stays on again. You will also see a CHECK TPMS SYSTEM message on the multi-information display (see page ).517
Compact Spare Tire
582
INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
12/07/20 11:45:07 31TK4640_587
CONTINUED
If you have a flat tire while driving, pull over safely. Drive slowly along the shoulder until you get to an area far away from traffic lanes.
Park the vehicle on firm, level, and non-slippery ground. Put the transmission in Park (automatic) or reverse (manual). Apply the parking brake.
Turn on the hazard warning lights, and turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle while you change the tire.
Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) Mode is the equivalent of LOCK (0). For more information, see pages
and .
Open the trunk. Raise the trunk floor lid by lifting up on the back edge.
3.
2.
1.
:
184 187
Changing a Flat Tire T aking
C are
of the
U nexpected
583
The vehicle can easily roll off the jack, seriously injuring anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for changing a tire exactly, and never get under the vehicle when it is supported only by the jack.
12/07/20 11:45:15 31TK4640_588
Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn with the wheel nut wrench.
Take the tool case out of the spare tire.
Unscrew the wing bolt and take the spare tire out of its well.
Take the jack out of the tool kit case.
Place the jack under the jacking point nearest the tire you need to change. Turn the end bracket clockwise until the top of the jack contacts the jacking point. Make sure the jacking point tab is resting in the jack notch.
Place blocks in front and back of the wheel diagonally opposite the tire you are changing.
7.
8.
6.
4.
5.
9.
Changing a Flat Tire
584
WHEEL NUT WRENCHEXTENSION
JACK WHEEL NUT WRENCH
JACKING POINTS
12/07/20 11:45:23 31TK4640_589
CONTINUED
Before mounting the spare tire, wipe any dirt off the mounting surface of the wheel and hub with a clean cloth. Wipe the hub carefully; it may be hot from driving.
Remove the wheel nuts, then remove the flat tire. Handle the wheel nuts carefully; they may be hot from driving. Place the flat tire on the ground with the outside surface facing up.
Use the extension and the wheel nut wrench as shown to raise the vehicle until the flat tire is off the ground.
10. 11. 12.
Changing a Flat Tire T aking
C are
of the
U nexpected
585
BRAKE HUBWHEEL NUT WRENCH
EXTENSION
12/07/20 11:45:30 31TK4640_590
Tighten the wheel nuts securely in the same crisscross pattern. Have the wheel nut torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility. Tighten the wheel nuts to:
Remove the center cap before storing the flat tire in the trunk well.
Lower the vehicle to the ground, and remove the jack.
Put on the spare tire. Put the wheel nuts back on finger-tight, then tighten them in a crisscross pattern with the wheel nut wrench until the wheel is firmly against the hub. Do not try to tighten the wheel nuts fully.
13. 14. 15.
16.
Changing a Flat Tire
586
94 lbfft (127 Nm , 13 kgfm)
12/07/20 11:45:36 31TK4640_591
Store the center cap in the trunk. Make sure it does not get scratched or damaged.
Store the jack and tools in the tool kit case. Place the tool kit case in the flat tire.
To remove the spacer cone, squeeze the tabs on the wing bolt to disengage it from the center of the spacer cone, then pull the bolt downward.
To install the wing bolt to the spacer cone, reverse this procedure.
Secure the flat tire by screwing the wing bolt back into its hole.
Place the flat tire face down in the spare tire well.
Remove the spacer cone from the wing bolt, turn it over, and put it back on the bolt.
Lower the trunk floor, then close the trunk lid.
Your vehicles original tire has a tire pressure monitoring system sensor. To replace a tire, refer to
(see page ).
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
518
Changing a Flat Tire
Changing a Tire with TPMS
T aking
C are
of the
U nexpected
587
SPACER CONE
TAB SPACER CONE
For compact spare tire
For normal tire
WING BOLT
Loose items can fly around the interior in a crash and could seriously injure the occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely before driving.
12/07/20 11:45:47 31TK4640_592
When you turn the ignition switch to the START (III) position or on models with keyless access system, press the engine start/stop button to set START Mode (see page ), you do not hear the normal noise of the engine trying to start. You may hear a clicking sound, a series of clicks, or nothing at all.
Diagnosing why the engine wont start falls into two areas, depending on what you hear when you turn the ignition switch to the START (III) position or on models with keyless access system, press the engine start/stop button to set START Mode (see page ):
You can hear the starter motor operating normally, or the starter motor sounds like it is spinning faster than normal, but the engine does not start up and run.
You hear nothing, or almost nothing. The engines starter motor does not operate at all, or operates very slowly. Check these things:
Check the transmission interlock. If you have a manual transmission, the clutch pedal must be pushed all the way to the floor or the starter will not operate. With an automatic transmission, it must be in Park or neutral.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position or on models with keyless access system, press the engine start/stop button to set ON Mode (see page ). Turn on the headlights, and check their brightness. If the headlights are very dim or do not come on at all, the battery is discharged. See
on page .
184 184
591
184
If the Engine Wont Start
Nothing Happens or the Starter Motor Operates Very Slowly
Jump Starting
588
12/07/20 11:45:54 31TK4640_593
In this case, the starter motors speed sounds normal, or even faster than normal, when you turn the ignition switch to the START (III) position or on models with keyless access system, press the engine start/stop button to set START Mode (see page ), but the engine does not run.
Turn the ignition switch to the START (III) position or on models with keyless access system, press the engine start/stop button to set START Mode (see page ). If the headlights do not dim, check the condition of the fuses. If the fuses are OK, there is probably something wrong with the electrical circuit for the ignition switch or starter motor. You will need a qualified technician to determine the problem. See
on page .
If the headlights dim noticeably or go out when you try to start the engine, either the battery is discharged or the connections are corroded. Check the condition of the battery and terminal connec- tions (see page ). You can then try jump starting the vehicle from a booster battery (see page
).
Are you using a properly coded key or keyless access remote (on models with keyless access system)? An improperly coded key or keyless access remote will cause the immobilizer system indicator in the instrument panel to blink rapidly (see page ).65
184
184
607
591
577
CONTINUED
The Starter Operates Normally
Emergency Towing
If the Engine Wont Start T aking
C are
of the
U nexpected
589
12/07/20 11:45:59 31TK4640_594
Do you have your keyless access system remote with you? The vehicle will not start without the remote within operating range and with the keyless access main switch in the glove box turned on.
Are you using the proper starting procedure? Refer to
on pages and .
If you are unable to stop the engine normally while in the Park position, see
on page .
You may need to hold the start/ stop button down or hold the key in the START (III) position until the engine starts. It can be held for up to 15 seconds.
There may be an electrical problem, such as no power to the fuel pump. Check all the fuses (see page ).
Do you have fuel? Check the fuel gauge; the warning indicator may not be working.
If you find nothing wrong, you will need a qualified technician to find the problem. See
on page . 487 489
600
192
607
On models with keyless access system
If the Engine Wont Start
Starting the Engine
Emergency Engine Stop
Emergency Towing
590
NOTE:
12/07/20 11:46:07 31TK4640_595
Although this seems like a simple procedure, you should take several precautions.
You cannot start a vehicle with an automatic transmission by pushing or pulling it.
Open the hood, and check the physical condition of the battery. In very cold weather, check the condition of the electrolyte. If it seems slushy or like ice, do not try jump starting until it thaws.
To jump start your vehicle:
Turn off all the electrical accessories: climate control, audio system, lights, etc. Put the transmission in neutral (manual) or Park (automatic), and set the parking brake.
Pull up the battery terminal cover to remove. The battery terminal cover can be removed without removing the left side engine compartment cover.
1.
2.
3.
CONTINUED
Jump Starting T aking
C are
of the
U nexpected
591
BATTERY TERMINAL COVER
A battery can explode if you do not follow the correct procedure, seriously injuring anyone nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking materials away from the battery.
If a battery sits in extreme cold, the electrolyte inside can f reeze. Attempting to jump start with a f rozen battery can cause it to rupture.
12/07/20 11:46:15 31TK4640_596
Start the vehicle. If the starter motor still operates slowly, check that the jumper cables have good metal-to-metal contact.
If the booster battery is in another vehicle, have an assistant start that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.
The numbers in the illustration show you the order to connect the jumper cables.
Connect one jumper cable to the positive ( ) terminal on your battery. Connect the other end to the positive ( ) terminal on the booster battery.
Once the vehicle is running, disconnect the negative cable from your vehicle, then from the booster battery. Disconnect the positive cable from your vehicle, and then from the booster battery.
Install the battery terminal cover.
Keep the ends of the jumper cables away from each other and any metal on the vehicle until everything is disconnected. Otherwise, you may cause an electrical short.
Connect the second jumper cable to the negative ( ) terminal on the booster battery. Connect the other end to the engine hanger as shown. Do not connect this jumper cable to any other part of the engine.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Jump Starting
592
BOOSTER BATTERY
12/07/20 11:46:24 31TK4640_597
If you do not see steam or spray, leave the engine running and watch the temperature gauge. If the high heat is due to overloading, the engine should start to cool down almost immediately. If it does, wait until the temperature gauge comes down to the midpoint, then continue driving.
The pointer of the vehicles temperature gauge should stay in the midrange. If it climbs to the red mark, you should determine the reason (hot day, driving up a steep hill, etc.).
If the temperature gauge stays at the red mark, turn off the engine.
Look for any obvious coolant leaks, such as a split radiator hose. Everything is still extremely hot, so use caution. If you find a leak, it must be repaired before you continue driving (see
on page ).
Safely pull to the side of the road. Put the transmission in neutral (manual) or Park (automatic), and set the parking brake. Turn off all accessories, and turn on the hazard warning lights.
If you see steam and/or spray coming from under the hood, turn off the engine. Wait until you see no more signs of steam or spray, then open the hood.
If the vehicle overheats, you should take immediate action. The only indication may be the temperature gauge climbing to or above the red mark. Or you may see steam or spray coming from under the hood.
You will also see a WATER TEMP HOT message on the multi- information display (see page ).
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
607
77
CONTINUED
Emergency Towing
If the Engine Overheats T aking
C are
of the
U nexpected
593
Steam and spray from an overheated engine can seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam is coming out.
Driving with the temperature gauge pointer at the red mark can cause serious damage to the engine.
12/07/20 11:46:33 31TK4640_598
If you dont find an obvious leak, check the coolant level in the radiator reserve tank. Add coolant if the level is below the MIN mark (see on page ).
If there was no coolant in the reserve tank, you may need to add coolant to the radiator. Let the engine cool down until the pointer reaches the middle of the tempera- ture gauge, or lower, before check- ing the radiator.
If the temperature stays normal, check the coolant level in the radiator reserve tank. If it has gone down, add coolant to the MAX mark. Put the cap back on tightly.
Put the radiator cap back on tightly. Run the engine, and check the temperature gauge. If it goes back to the red mark, the engine needs repair (see
on page ).
Start the engine, and set the interior temperature to maximum heat (each temperature control sets to ). Add coolant to the radiator up to the base of the filler neck. If you do not have the
proper coolant mixture available, you can add plain water. Remember to have the cooling system drained and refilled with the proper mixture as soon as you can.
Using gloves or a large heavy cloth, turn the radiator cap counterclockwise, without pushing down, to the first stop. After the pressure releases, push down on the cap, and turn it until it comes off.
8.
9.
7.
6.
10.
11.
546
607
Adding Engine Coolant
Emergency Towing
If the Engine Overheats
594
Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap.
12/07/20 11:46:40 31TK4640_599
Start the engine, and watch the oil pressure indicator. If it does not go out within 10 seconds, turn off the engine. There is a mechanical problem that needs to be repaired before you can continue driving (see on page
).
If necessary, add oil to bring the level back to the full mark on the dipstick (see page ).
Let the vehicle sit for a minute. Open the hood, and check the oil level (see page ). An engine very low on oil can lose pressure during cornering and other driving maneuvers.
Safely pull off the road and shut off the engine. Turn on the hazard warning lights.
This indicator should never come on when the engine is
running. If it starts flashing or stays on, the oil pressure has dropped very low or lost pressure. Serious engine damage is possible, and you should take immediate action.
You will also see a CHECK ENGINE OIL LEVEL message on the multi-information display when this indicator comes on.
The indicator notifies you of low oil pressure and does not measure the oil level. Check your vehicles oil level at each refueling.
2.
3.
4.
1.
474
543
607
Low Oil Pressure Indicator
Emergency Towing
T aking
C are
of the
U nexpected
595
Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause serious mechanical damage almost immediately. Turn of f the engine as soon as you can saf ely get the vehicle stopped.
12/07/20 11:46:48 31TK4640_600
Immediately turn off all electrical accessories. Try not to use other electrically operated controls such as the power windows. Keep the engine running; starting the engine will discharge the battery rapidly.
Go to a service station or garage where you can get technical assistance.
If the charging system indicator comes on brightly
when the engine is running, the battery is not being charged.
You will also see a CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM message on the multi-information display.
Charging System Indicator
596
12/08/03 21:01:37 31TK4640_601
If the indicator comes on repeatedly, even though it may go off as you continue driving, have the vehicle checked by your dealer as soon as possible.
If this indicator comes on while driving, it means one
of the engines emissions control systems may have a problem. Even though you may feel no difference in your vehicles performance, it can reduce your fuel economy and cause increased emissions. Continued operation may cause serious damage.
Your vehicle has certain readiness codes that are part of the on-board diagnostics for the emissions systems. In some states, part of the emissions testing is to make sure these codes are set. If they are not set, the test cannot be completed.
If the battery in your vehicle has been disconnected or gone dead, these codes may be erased. It takes several days of driving under various conditions to set the codes again.
If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, the malfunction indicator lamp may also come on with the D indicator.
If you have recently refueled your vehicle, the indicator coming on could be due to a loose or missing fuel fill cap. Tighten the cap until it clicks at least once. Tightening the cap will not turn the indicator off immediately; it can take several days of normal driving.
You will also see a CHECK EMISSION SYSTEM message on the multi-information display.
CONTINUED
Readiness Code
Malfunction Indicator Lamp T aking
C are
of the
U nexpected
597
If you keep driving with the malf unction indicator lamp on, you can damage your vehicles emissions controls and engine. Those repairs may not be covered by your vehicles warranties.
12/07/20 11:47:00 31TK4640_602
If the fluid level is low, take your vehicle to a dealer, and have the brake system inspected for leaks or worn brake pads.
However, if the brake pedal does not feel normal, you should take immediate action. A problem in one part of the systems dual circuit design will still give you braking at two wheels. You will feel the brake pedal go down much farther before the vehicle begins to slow down, and you will have to press harder on the pedal.
You will also see a LOW BRAKE FLUID message on the multi- information display.
You will also see a CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM message on the multi- information display when this indicator comes on.
To check if they are set, turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position (set the power mode to ON, on models with keyless access system), without starting the engine. The malfunction indicator lamp will come on for 20 seconds. If it then goes off, the readiness codes are set. If it blinks five times, the readiness codes are not set. If possible, do not take your vehicle for an emissions test until the readiness codes are set. Refer to for more information (see page ).
Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages
and .
If the brake system indicator comes on while driving, the brake fluid level is probably low. Press lightly on the brake pedal to see if it feels normal. If it does, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop at a service station (see page ).
The brake system indicator normally comes on when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, and as a reminder to check the parking brake. It will stay on if you do not fully release the parking brake.
:
626
184 187
553
Brake System Indicator
Emissions Testing
Malfunction Indicator Lamp, Brake System Indicator
598
CanadaU.S.
12/07/20 11:47:08 31TK4640_603
If the fuel fill door release button does not work, use the release lever inside the left maintenance lid in the trunk.
To open the fuel fill door, pull the release lever rearward.
Slow down by shifting to a lower gear, and pull to the side of the road when it is safe. Because of the long distance needed to stop, it is hazardous to drive the vehicle. You should have it towed and repaired by your dealer as soon as possible (see
on page ).
If you must drive the vehicle a short distance in this condition, drive slowly and carefully.
If the ABS indicator and the VSA system indicator come on with the brake system indicator, have your vehicle inspected by your dealer immediately.
If you also cannot unlock the trunk due to the power door lock system malfunction, see page and open the trunk manually.
607
155
Opening the Fuel Fill Door Manually
Emergency Towing
Brake System Indicator, Opening the Fuel Fill Door Manually T aking
C are
of the
U nexpected
599
RELEASE LEVERMAINTENANCE LID
12/07/20 11:47:16 31TK4640_604
The vehicles fuses are contained in three fuse boxes.
The interior fuse box is located under the dashboard on the drivers side. The fuse label is attached under the steering column.
The passengers side interior fuse box is on the lower passengers side panel. To remove the fuse box lid, put your finger in the notch on the lid, and pull it upward slightly, then pull it toward you and take it out of its hinges.
The under-hood fuse box is on the drivers side next to the air cleaner housing.
To access the under-hood fuse box, remove the left-side engine compartment cover (see page ).
To access the fuse box, turn the knob on the under cover one-quarter turn and pull the front of the cover straight down to remove it from the dashboard.
542
Fuses
600
FUSE LABEL NOTCH
DRIVERS SIDE PASSENGERS SIDE UNDER-HOOD
AIR CLEANER HOUSING
TAB
12/07/20 11:47:24 31TK4640_605
If something electrical in your vehicle stops working, the first thing you should check for is a blown fuse. Determine from the chart on pages
, and , or the diagram on the fuse box lid or the fuse label, which fuse or fuses control that component. Check those fuses first, but check all the fuses before deciding that a blown fuse is not the cause. Replace any blown fuses and check if the device works.
Remove the cover from the fuse box.
Check each of the large fuses in the under-hood fuse box by looking at the wire inside. Removing these fuses requires a Phillips-head screwdriver.
Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) Mode is the equivalent of LOCK (0). For more information, see pages
and .
Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position. Make sure the headlights and all other accessories are off.
3.
1.
2.
:604 605 606
184 187
CONTINUED
Checking and Replacing Fuses
Fuses T aking
C are
of the
U nexpected
601
FUSE BLOWN
12/07/20 11:47:32 31TK4640_606
Look for a blown wire inside the fuse. If it is blown, replace it with one of the spare fuses of the same rating or lower.
Check the smaller fuses in the under-hood fuse box and all the fuses in the interior fuse boxes by pulling out each one with the fuse puller provided on the back of the under-hood fuse box cover.
Also check the combined fuse box in the under-hood fuse box.
5.4.
Fuses
602
BLOWNFUSE PULLERBLOWN
12/07/20 11:47:37 31TK4640_607
If the replacement fuse of the same rating blows in a short time, there is probably a serious electrical problem with your vehicle. Leave the blown fuse in that circuit, and have your vehicle checked by a qualified technician.
If you cannot drive the vehicle without fixing the problem, and you do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse of the same rating or a lower rating from one of the other circuits. Make sure you can do without that circuit temporarily (such as the accessory power socket).
If you replace the blown fuse with a spare fuse that has a lower rating, it might blow out again. This does not indicate that anything is wrong. Replace the fuse with one of the correct rating as soon as you can.
Your vehicle has spare fuses on the back of the under-hood fuse box cover.
6.
Fuses T aking
C are
of the
U nexpected
603
FUSE PULLER SPARE FUSES
Replacing a f use with one that has a higher rating greatly increases the chances of damaging the electrical system. If you do not have a replacement f use with the proper rating f or the circuit, install one with a lower rating.
12/07/20 11:47:43 31TK4640_608
No. Circuits ProtectedNo.Amps. Amps.Circuits Protected
Circuits ProtectedNo. Amps.
1 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4
2 5 2 6
IG Main Sub Fan Motor Sub Fan Motor Drivers Side Fuse Box Main Fan Motor
Drivers Side Light Main Wiper Motor Passengers Side Light Main
3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5
3 6 3 7 3 8
120 A 40 A 70 A 40 A 30 A 40 A
30 A 30 A
50 A 40 A 30 A 60 A 40 A 30 A 30 A 30 A 30 A
Battery Passengers Side Fuse Box EPS ABS/VSA MTR ABS/VSA Passengers Side Fuse Box Option Headlight Washer SH-AWD
Rear Defroster Not Used Not Used Not Used Heater Motor Hazard Horn and Stop Keyless Access System Battery Sensor IG Coil FI Sub Back Up Interior Lights FI Main DBW Back Up FI ECU MG Clutch Radiator Fan Timer
4 5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
40 A
40 A 15 A 20 A
7.5 A 7.5 A 15 A 15 A 10 A
7.5 A 15 A 15 A
7.5 A 7.5 A 7.5 A
If equipped
Used on SH-AWD models1 : 2 : 3 :
Used on 2WD models
1
2
1
2
3
1
1
Fuse Locations
604
UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
12/08/08 20:03:07 31TK4640_609
No. Amps.
Circuits ProtectedAmps.No.
Circuits Protected
CONTINUED
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32
10 A 10 A
7.5 A 15 A
7.5 A 7.5 A 7.5 A 7.5 A 20 A 20 A 20 A 20 A 15 A 20 A 15 A 10 A 10 A
10 A 7.5 A 15 A
7.5 A
Blind Spot Information System SH-AWD Washer Wiper ODS ABS/VSA Not Used Starter Relay Fuel Pump
7.5 A
7.5 A 20 A 7.5 A 7.5 A 7.5 A
7.5 A 20 A
1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
VB SOL SRS Meter ACG Not Used Daytime Running Lights A/C Accessory, Key, Lock Accessory Drivers Power Seat Sliding Moonroof Drivers Power Seat Reclining Rear Left Power Window Front ACC Socket Drivers Power Window Drivers Side Door Lock Front Left Fog Light Left Side Small Lights (Exterior) Left Headlight High Beam TPMS Left Headlight Low Beam Not Used STS
: If equipped
Fuse Locations T aking
C are
of the
U nexpected
605
INTERIOR FUSE BOX
Drivers side
12/07/20 11:47:59 31TK4640_610
No. Amps. Circuits Protected
Amps.No. Circuits Protected
1 2
3 4 5 6
10 A 10 A
10 A 15 A
7.5 A
Right Headlight High Beam Right Side Small Lights (Exterior) Right Front Fog Light Right Headlight Low Beam Not Used Interior Lights
20 A
20 A
10 A 20 A
10 A 20 A
20 A 15 A
7.5 A 20 A
7 8
9
10 11
12 13
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
Not Used Passengers Power Seat Reclining Passengers Power Seat Sliding Right Side Door Lock Rear Passengers Side Power Window Keyless Access System Front Passengers Power Window Not Used Premium amplifier Console ACC Socket Not Used Lumbar Support Seat Heaters Not Used Not Used Not Used
: If equipped
Fuse Locations
606
INTERIOR FUSE BOX
Passengers side
12/07/20 11:48:05 31TK4640_611
If your vehicle needs to be towed, call a professional towing service or organization. Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain. It is very dangerous.
There are two ways to tow your vehicle:
The operator loads your vehicle on the back of a truck.
The operator will load your vehicle on the back of a truck. Any other method of towing will damage the drive system. When you contact the towing agency, inform them a flat-bed is required.
If, due to damage, your vehicle must be towed with the front wheels on the ground, do this:
The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the front tires and lift them off the ground. The rear tires remain on the ground.
Start the engine. Shift to the D position and hold for 5 seconds, then to N. Turn off the engine.
Release the parking brake.
Leave the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I) position so the steering wheel does not lock.
Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ACCESSORY Mode is the equivalent of ACCESSORY (I). For more information, see pages
and .
:
184 187
CONTINUED
On SH-AWD models
Except SH-AWD models
Flat-bed Equipment
Wheel-lif t Equipment
This is the best way to transport your vehicle.The only way you can safely tow
your vehicle is with flat-bed equipment.
This is an acceptable way to tow your vehicle.
Emergency Towing T aking
C are
of the
U nexpected
607
Towing with only two tires on the ground will damage parts of the all-wheel-drive system. Your vehicle should be transported on a f lat-bed truck or trailer.
12/07/20 11:48:16 31TK4640_612
With the front wheels on the ground, it is best to tow the vehicle no farther than 50 miles (80 km), and keep the speed below 35 mph (55 km/h).
If your vehicle is equipped with a front spoiler, remove it before towing so it is not damaged.
Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ACCESSORY Mode is the equivalent of ACCESSORY (I). For more information, see pages
and .
:
184 187
Emergency Towing
608
Trying to lif t or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed to support the vehicles weight.
Improper towing preparation will damage the transmission. Follow the above procedure exactly. If you cannot shif t the transmission or start the engine (automatic transmission), your vehicle must be transported with the f ront wheels of f the ground.
The steering system can be damaged if the steering wheel is locked. Leave the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I) position, and make sure the steering wheel turns f reely bef ore you begin towing.
On models with the Keyless Access system, the ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON indicator will conf irm that the power mode is in the ACCESSORY mode and that the steering lock is released. If the steering wheel does not turn f reely, rotate the wheel right and lef t while pressing the ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON. This inf ormation also appears on the multi- inf ormation display (see page ).189
12/07/20 11:48:22 31TK4640_613
To use the towing hook:
Remove the cover from the front bumper using your fingers, or pry it off using a cloth and a flat-tip screwdriver to prevent scratches.
If your vehicle gets stuck in sand, mud, or snow, call a towing service to pull it out (see page ).
When you need to release the steering lock while your vehicles battery is dead, do this:
Follow the proper jump starting procedures, Step 1 through Step 5, to apply the power to your vehicle (see pages and ).
Follow the jump starting procedures, Step 8 and Step 9, and the instructions to disconnect the jumper cable (see page ). The steering will remain unlocked even if the battery is dead.
Failure to comply means the steering lock may be damaged.
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button to set the power mode to ACCESSORY (see page ) and verify the steering lock is released.
Remove the towing hook and wheel nut wrench from the tool case in the spare tire (see page
).
For very short distances, such as freeing the vehicle, you can use the detachable towing hook that mounts on the anchor in the front bumper.
If you slip the clutch for a long time while trying to get unstuck, you may overheat and damage the transmission. Use a tow service to prevent transmission damage.
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
591 592
184
592
607
584
CONTINUED
On models with keyless access system If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
Emergency Towing, If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck T aking
C are
of the
U nexpected
609
12/07/20 11:48:32 31TK4640_614
Screw the towing hook into the hole, and tighten it with the wheel nut wrench.
3.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
610
WHEEL NUT WRENCH
To avoid damage to your vehicle, use the towing hook f or straight, f lat ground towing only. Do not tow at an angle. The tow hook should not be used to tow the vehicle onto a f lat bed. Do not use it as a tie down.
12/07/20 11:48:36 31TK4640_615
The diagrams in this section give you the dimensions and capacities of your vehicle and the locations of the identification numbers. It also includes information you should know about your vehicles tires and emissions control systems.
................Identification Numbers . 612 ................................Specifications . 614
DOT Tire Quality Grading ..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 617
.................................Tire Labeling . 619 Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) Required Federal ............................Explanation . 621
.......................Emissions Controls . 623 Three Way Catalytic
.................................Converters . 625 ........................Emissions Testing . 626
..Devices that Emit Radio Waves . 628
Technical Information T echnicalInform
ation
611
12/07/20 11:48:39 31TK4640_616
Your vehicle has several identifying numbers located in various places.
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the 17-digit number your dealer uses to register your vehicle for warranty purposes. It is also necessary for licensing and insuring your vehicle. The easiest place to find the VIN is on a plate fastened to the top of the dashboard. You can see it by looking through the windshield on the drivers side. It is also on the certification label attached to the drivers doorjamb, and is stamped on the engine compartment bulkhead. The VIN is also provided in bar code on the certification label.
Identif ication Numbers
612
CERTIFICATION LABEL
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
12/07/20 11:48:43 31TK4640_617
The engine number is stamped into the engine block.
The transmission number is on a label on the side of the transmission.
Identif ication Numbers T echnicalInform
ation
613
MANUAL TRANSMISSION NUMBER
ENGINE NUMBER AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER
12/07/20 11:48:47 31TK4640_618
Specifications
614
CapacitiesDimensions
Weights
Seating Capacities
Air Conditioning
194.0 in (4,928 mm) 18.5 US gal (70 )
Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the engine Reserve tank capacity: 0.182 US gal (0.69 ) Excluding the oil remaining in the engine
6.1 US qt (5.8 ) 2.6 US qt (2.5 )
0.48 US qt (0.45 ) 0.45 US qt (0.43 )
2.93 US qt (2.77 ) 2.67 US qt (2.53 )
1.66 US gal (6.3 ) 2.19 US gal (8.3 )
4.5 US qt (4.3 ) 4.2 US qt (4.0 ) 5.3 US qt (5.0 )
3.3 US qt (3.1 ) 3.3 US qt (3.1 )
7.5 US qt (7.1 ) 8.2 US qt (7.8 ) 2.2 US qt (2.1 ) 2.6 US qt (2.5 )
Fuel tank
Engine coolant Engine oil
Automatic transmission fluid
Manual transmission fluid Rear differential fluid (SH-AWD) Transfer assembly fluid (SH-AWD) Windshield washer reservoir
Length Width Height Wheelbase Track
74.0 in (1,880 mm) 57.2 in (1,452 mm) 109.3 in (2,775 mm) 63.2 in (1,605.5 mm) 63.8 in (1,620 mm)
Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attached to the drivers doorjamb.
Total Front Rear
5 2 3
Refrigerant type Charge quantity Lubricant type
HFC-134a (R-134a) 17.8 19.6 oz (505 555 g)
ND-OIL8
Approx.
Front Rear
Change Total
Change Total
Change Total Change
Including filter Without filter
Total Change
Total
U.S. Vehicle Canada Vehicle
2WD SH-AWD
2WD SH-AWD
1 :
2 :
Change Total
1
2
12/07/20 11:49:04 31TK4640_619
CONTINUED
Specifications T echnicalInform
ation
615
Engine (2WD)Lights
Fuses
Engine (SH-AWD)
3.50 x 3.66 in (89.0 x 93.0 mm)
Water cooled 4-stroke SOHC VTEC 6-cylinder (V6),
gasoline engine
212 cu-in (3,471 cm ) 11.2 : 1
Type
Bore x Stroke Displacement Compression ratio Spark plugs
On vehicles with high voltage discharge type low beam headlights, replacement of a bulb should be performed by your dealer.
Headlight (Low beam ) Headlight (High beam/DRL) Front turn signal/parking lights Front side marker lights Front fog lights Rear turn signal lights Back-up lights Rear side marker lights Stop/taillights Side turn signal lights High-mount brake light License plate lights Trunk light Door courtesy lights Vanity mirror lights Console compartment light Glove box Light Foot light
35 W (D2S) 60 W (HB3) 28/8 W
3 CP 55 W (H11) 21 W 16 W 3 CP
3 CP 5 W 3.4 W 1.4 W 1.4 W 1.4 W
Interior
Under-hood
See pages 606 or the fuse label attached to the inside of the fuse box door. See page 604 or the fuse box cover.
DILZKR7A11G
Type
Bore x Stroke Displacement Compression ratio Spark plugs
3.54 x 3.78 in (90.0 x 96.0 mm) 223.5 cu-in (3,664 cm )
11.2 : 1 ILZKR7B-11S SXU22HCR11S
Water cooled 4-stroke SOHC VTEC 6-cylinder (V6),
gasoline engine
See pages 605 or the fuse label attached on the under panel.
NGK:
NGK:
DENSO:
1 :
2 : Replacement of a light bulb should be done by your dealer.
LED Drivers side
Passengers side
LED LED LED
(Amber)
(Amber)
1
2
2
2
2
13/08/08 17:00:40 31TK4650_620
Specifications
616
Tires
Alignment
P245/50R17 98V P245/45R18 96V P245/40R19 94V
T135/80D17 103M 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
34 psi (235 kPa , 2.4 kgf/cm ) 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
34 psi (235 kPa , 2.4 kgf/cm ) 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
Size
Pressure
Toe-in
Camber
Caster 3.8 1
0.5 0.08 in (2.0 mm) 0.00 in (0.0 mm)
TL
SH-AWD
Front Rear Front Rear Front
Front/Rear
Spare Front
Rear
Spare
TL with Technology Package TL with Advance Package and Canadian Elite Package
SH-AWD with Technology Package SH-AWD with Advance Package and Canadian SH-AWD Elite Package
1 : 2 : 3 : 4 : 5 : 6 :
7 : 8 :
TL Special Edition (2WD) SH-AWD Special Edition
1, 2
3, 4, 5, 7
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7
6, 8
6, 8
6, 8
13/08/08 17:00:50 31TK4650_621
The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety Requirements. All tires are also graded for treadwear, traction, and temperature performance according to Department of Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains these gradings.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.
The treadwear grade is a compara- tive rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one- half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual condi- tions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tires ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
Treadwear Traction
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles) T echnicalInform
ation
617
12/07/20 11:49:41 31TK4640_622
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tires resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Temperature
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
618
12/07/20 11:49:45 31TK4640_623
The tires that came on your vehicle have a number of markings. Those you should be aware of are described below.
Vehicle type (P indicates passenger vehicle).
Tire width in millimeters.
Aspect ratio (the tires section height as a percentage of its width).
Tire construction code (R indicates radial).
Rim diameter in inches.
Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the maximum speed rating).
Load index (a numerical code associated with the maximum load the tire can carry).
Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size. Following is an example of tire size with an explanation of what each component means.
P
R
17
245
50
V
98
CONTINUED
Tire Size
Tire Labeling T echnicalInform
ation
619
Tire Size
(1)
(1)
Tire Identification Number (TIN) (3) Maximum Tire Pressure (4) Maximum Tire Load
(2)(3)
(4)
(2) (1)
TIRE LABELING EXAMPLE
P245/50R17 98V
12/07/20 11:49:57 31TK4640_624
The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like the following example. TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire.
Manufacturers identification mark.
Tire type code.
Date of manufacture.
This indicates that the tire meets all requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation.
Cold Tire Pressure The tire air pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Load Rating Means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure.
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum tire air pressure that the tire can hold.
Maximum Load Rating Means the load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Recommended Inflation Pressure The cold tire inflation pressure recommended by the manufacturer.
Treadwear Indicators (TWI) Means the projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread.
DOT
B97R
FW6X
2202 Year Week
Tire Identif ication Number (TIN) Glossary of Tire Terminology
Tire Labeling
620
DOT B97R FW6X 2202
12/07/20 11:50:07 31TK4640_625
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under- inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicles handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the drivers responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
CONTINUED
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation T echnicalInform
ation
621
12/07/20 11:50:14 31TK4640_626
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation
622
12/07/20 11:50:19 31TK4640_627
The United States Clean Air Act sets standards for automobile emissions. It also requires that automobile manufacturers explain to owners how their emissions controls work and what to do to maintain them. This section summarizes how the emissions controls work.
The burning of gasoline in your vehicles engine produces several by- products. Some of these are carbon monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen (NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC). Gasoline evaporating from the tank also produces hydrocarbons. Con- trolling the production of NOx, CO, and HC is important to the environ- ment. Under certain conditions of sunlight and climate, NOx and HC react to form photochemical smog. Carbon monoxide does not contri- bute to smog creation, but it is a poisonous gas.
In Canada, Acura vehicles comply with the Canadian emission requirements, as specified in an agreement with Environment Canada, at the time they are manufactured.
The onboard refueling vapor recovery (ORVR) system captures the fuel vapors during refueling. The vapors are adsorbed in a canister filled with activated carbon. While driving, the fuel vapors are drawn into the engine and burned off.
As gasoline evaporates in the fuel tank, an evaporative emissions control canister filled with charcoal adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this canister while the engine is off. After the engine is started and warmed up, the vapor is drawn into the engine and burned during driving.
Your vehicle has a positive crankcase ventilation system. This keeps gasses that build up in the engines crankcase from going into the atmosphere. The positive crankcase ventilation valve routes them from the crankcase back to the
intake manifold. They are then drawn into the engine and burned.
The Clean Air Act
Onboard Refueling Vapor Recovery
Evaporative Emissions Control System
Crankcase Emissions Control System
Emissions Controls T echnicalInform
ation
623
12/07/20 11:50:26 31TK4640_628
The exhaust emissions controls include four systems: PGM-FI, ignition timing control, exhaust gas recirculation, and three way catalytic converter. These four systems work together to control the engines combustion and minimize the amount of HC, CO, and NOx that come out the tailpipe. The exhaust emissions control systems are separate from the crankcase and evaporative emissions control systems.
The emissions control systems are designed and certified to work together in reducing emissions to levels that comply with the Clean Air Act. To make sure the emissions remain low, you should use only new Acura replacement parts or their equivalent for repairs. Using lower quality parts may increase the emissions from your vehicle.
The emissions control systems are covered by warranties separate from the rest of your vehicle. Read your warranty manual for more informa- tion.The PGM-FI system uses sequential
multiport fuel injection. It has three subsystems: air intake, engine control, and fuel control. The powertrain control module (PCM) in automatic transmission vehicles or the engine control module (ECM) in manual transmission vehicles uses various sensors to determine how much air is going into the engine. It
then controls how much fuel to inject under all operating conditions.
The three way catalytic converter is in the exhaust system. Through chemical reactions, it converts HC, CO, and NOx in the engines exhaust to carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen (N ), and water vapor.
The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system takes some of the exhaust gas and routes it back into the intake manifold. Adding exhaust gas to the air/fuel mixture reduces the amount of NOx produced when the fuel is burned.
This system constantly adjusts the ignition timing, reducing the amount of HC, CO, and NOx produced.
2
2
Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts
PGM-FI System
Three Way Catalytic Converter
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System
Ignition Timing Control System
Emissions Controls
624
12/07/20 11:50:35 31TK4640_629
The three way catalytic converters contain precious metals that serve as catalysts, promoting chemical reactions to convert the exhaust gasses without affecting the metals. The catalytic converters are referred to as three-way catalysts, since they act on HC, CO, and NOx. Replacement units must be original Acura parts or their equivalent.
The three way catalytic converters must operate at a high temperature for the chemical reactions to take place. They can set on fire any combustible materials that come near them. Park your vehicle away from high grass, dry leaves, or other flammables.
Defective three way catalytic converters contribute to air pollution, and can impair your engines performance. Follow these guidelines to protect your vehicles three way catalytic converters.
Always use unleaded gasoline. Even a small amount of leaded gasoline can contaminate the catalyst metals, making the three way catalytic converters ineffective.
Keep the engine well maintained.
Have your vehicle diagnosed and repaired if it is misfiring, back- firing, stalling, or otherwise not running properly.
Three Way Catalytic Converters T echnicalInform
ation
625
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERS
12/07/20 11:50:42 31TK4640_630
Make sure the gas tank is nearly, but not completely, full (around 3/4).
Without touching the accelerator pedal, start the engine, and let it idle for 20 seconds.
If you take your vehicle for an emissions test shortly after the battery has been disconnected or gone dead, it may not pass the test. This is because of certain readiness codes that must be set in the on- board diagnostics for the emissions systems. These codes are erased when the battery is disconnected, and set again only after several days of driving under a variety of conditions.
If the testing facility determines that the readiness codes are not set, you will be requested to return at a later date to complete the test. If you must get the vehicle retested within the next two or three days, you can condition the vehicle for retesting by doing the following.
Make sure the vehicle has been parked with the engine off for 6 hours or more.
Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40 and 95F (4 and 35C).
Keep the vehicle in Park (automatic) or neutral (manual). Increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it there until the temperature gauge rises to at least 1/4 of the scale (about 3 minutes).
Without touching the accelerator pedal, let the engine idle for 20 seconds.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Testing of Readiness Codes
Emissions Testing
626
12/07/20 11:50:50 31TK4640_631
Then drive in city/suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal.
If the testing facility determines the readiness codes are still not set, see your dealer.
Make sure the vehicle has been parked with the engine off for 30 minutes.
Select a nearby lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in D (automatic) or 5th (manual). Do not use the cruise control. When traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds without moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot do this for a continuous 90 seconds because of traffic conditions, drive for at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two more times (for a total of 90 seconds).
7. 8.
9.
Emissions Testing T echnicalInform
ation
627
12/07/20 11:50:54 31TK4640_632
Audio System Audio
HandsFreeLink HomeLink Universal Transceiver AcuraLink Immobilizer System Remote Transmitter Keyless Access System Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Blind Spot Information (BSI)
The following products and systems on your vehicle emit radio waves when in operation.
Each of the above complies with the appropriate requirements or the required standards of FCC (Federal Communications Commission) and Industry Canada Standard, described as follows:
Bluetooth Bluetooth
As required by the FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-Gen/210/310. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Devices that Emit Radio Waves
628
12/07/20 11:51:05 31TK4640_633
..........Client Service Information . 630 ....................Warranty Coverages . 631
.............Reporting Safety Defects . 632 .....................Authorized Manuals . 633
Warranty and Client Relations W
arranty and
C lientR
elations
629
12/07/20 11:51:08 31TK4640_634
U.S. Owners:
Canadian Owners: When you call or write, please give us this information:
If you are dissatisfied with the decision made by the dealerships management, contact Acura Client Relations
Acura dealership personnel are trained professionals. They should be able to answer all your questions. If you encounter a problem that your dealership does not solve to your satisfaction, please discuss it with the dealerships management. The service manager or general manager can help. Almost all problems are solved in this way.
Vehicle Identification Number (see page )
Name and address of the dealer who services your vehicle
Date of purchase
Odometer reading of your vehicle
Your name, address, and tele- phone number
A detailed description of the problem
Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin Islands:
612
Client Service Information
630
American Honda Motor Co., Inc. Acura Client Relations Mail Stop 500-2N-7E 1919 Torrance Blvd. Torrance, CA 90501-2746
Tel: (800) 382-2238
Honda Canada Inc. Acura Client Services 180 Honda Boulevard Markham, ON L6C 0H9
Tel: 1-888-9-ACURA-9 Fax: 1-877-939-0909 E-Mail: [email protected]
Vortex Motor Corp. Bella International P.O. Box 190816 San Juan, PR 00919-0816
Tel: (787) 620-7546
12/07/20 11:51:16 31TK4640_635
Your new Acura is covered by these warranties:
provides coverage for as long as the pur- chaser of the muffler owns the vehicle.
provides prorated coverage for a replacement battery purchased from your dealer.
a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered by a limited warranty. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
covers all Acura replacement parts against defects in materials and workmanship.
Acura accessories are covered under this warranty. Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other factors. Please read your warranty manual for details.
all exterior body panels are covered for rust-through from the inside for the specified time period with no mileage limit.
covers your new vehicle, except for the emissions control systems and accessories, against defects in materials and workmanship.
these two warranties cover your vehicles emissions control systems. Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for exact information.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the 2014 Acura Warranty Information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on warranty coverages. Your vehicles original tires are covered by their manufacturer. Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet.
Please refer to the 2014 warranty manual that came with your vehicle.
Warranty Coverages
U.S. Owners
Canadian Owners
Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty
Replacement Battery Limited Warranty
Seat Belt Limited Warranty
Replacement Parts Limited Warranty
Accessory Limited Warranty
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance Warranty
W arranty
and C
lientR elations
631
13/08/08 17:01:00 31TK4650_636
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from .
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may also inform Transport Canada.
To contact Transport Canadas Defect Investigations and Recalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For more information on reporting safety defects or about motor vehicle safety, go to .
If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may lead to a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc.
Reporting Safety Defects
In the US In Canada
632
http://www.saf ercar.gov
http://www.saf ercar.gov
http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsaf ety
12/07/20 11:51:30 31TK4640_637
Covers maintenance and recommended procedures for repair to engine and chassis components. It is written for the journeyman mechanic, but it is simple enough for most mechanically inclined owners to understand.
Complements the Service Manual by providing in-depth troubleshooting information for each electrical circuit in your vehicle.
Describes the procedures involved in the replacement of damaged body parts.
For electronic copies of service publications, you can purchase a subscription to Service Express. Visit
for pricing and options.www.techinfo.honda.com
Manuals can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can order a manual by phone at (800) 782-4356 (credit card orders only), or online at www.helminc.com.
Authorized Manuals
Service Manual:
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
Body Repair Manual:
Service Express
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)
A uthorized
M anuals
633
13/04/02 19:22:49 31TK4640_638
634
12/07/20 11:51:41 31TK4640_639
CONTINUED
Battery Charging System
...........................Indicator . 65, 596 ............................Jump Starting . 591
..............................Maintenance . 577 ............................Specifications . 615
..............................Before Driving . 467 ....................................Belts, Seat . 8, 20
.........................Beverage Holders . 214 Blind Spot Information System
...........................................(BSI) . 519
...................Audio . 281, 376
...............HandsFreeLink . 407, 424 ..................................Booster Seats . 54
Brakes ...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 508
.............Break-in, New Linings . 468 ...........................................Fluid . 553
.......................................Parking . 212 .................System Indicator . 65, 598 ........................Wear Indicators . 507
.............................Braking System . 507 .................Break-in, New Vehicle . 468
Brightness Control, ...............................Instruments . 143
....................................Built-In Key . 201 Bulb Replacement
..........................Back-up Lights . 562 .........Daytime Running Lights . 555
.................................Fog Lights . 560
.................................Headlights . 555 ............................Specifications . 615
............Turn Signal Lights . 558, 562 ......................Bulbs, Halogen . 555, 560
................................AAC . 273, 313, 365 ....................................Accessories . 479
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key .....................................Position) . 150
ACCESSORY Mode ...................(Power Mode) . 184, 185
............Accessory Power Sockets . 215 ................Active Head Restraints . 165
....................................AcuraLink . 449 ....................Additives, Engine Oil . 544
...........................Advanced Airbags . 28 ...............................Airbag (SRS) . 9, 24
..........Airbag System Components . 24 ......Air Conditioning System . 226, 227
.........................................Usage . 228 ...............Air Pressure, Tires . 568, 570
......................................Antifreeze . 546 Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
...............................Indicator . 66, 508 ...................................Operation . 508
..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 390 Anti-theft Steering Column
....................................Lock . 150, 189 ................................Audio System . 235
.Automatic Lighting Off Feature . 141
...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 22 .............Automatic Speed Control . 401 ..............Automatic Transmission . 494
..........................Capacity, Fluid . 614 ...............Checking Fluid Level . 549
..........................Paddle Shifters . 499 .......................................Shifting . 495
Shift Lever Position ...............................Indicators . 494
....................Shift Lock Release . 497 ......................Auxiliary Input Jack . 389
Bluetooth Bluetooth
Index
A
B
IN D
E X
I
13/08/08 17:01:05 31TK4650_640
............................Capacities Chart . 614 .............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 57
............................Carrying, Cargo . 481 .............CAUTION, Explanation of . iv
.........................................CD Care . 381 ...................................CD Changer . 253
.......................................CD Player . 307 ........................Certification Label . 612
............................................Chains . 575 ....................Changing a Flat Tire . 583
Changing Oil ........................................How to . 544 ......................................When to . 531
...Charging System Indicator . 65, 596 ............Checklist, Before Driving . 486
.....................................Child Safety . 37 ..............................Booster Seats . 54
...................................Child Seats . 45 ..........................................Infants . 42
............................Large Children . 53 .........................................LATCH . 47
......................Risks with Airbags . 38 .............................Small Children . 43
.........................................Tethers . 51
.....................Warning Labels . 39, 59 .........Where Should a Child Sit? . 38
.......................................Child Seats . 45 .........................................LATCH . 47
..........Tether Anchorage Points . 51 ................Childproof Door Locks . 153 ................Cleaning the Seat Belts . 564
..........Client Service Information . 630 .......Climate Control System . 226, 227
..........................On/Off Button . 229 ..............................................Clock . 391
...................................Clutch Fluid . 554 ..................CO in the Exhaust . 57, 623
....Cold Weather, Starting in . 487, 489 ......................Compact Spare Tire . 582
.........................................Compass . 397 .................Console Compartment . 216 .................Consumer Information . 630
.............Controls, Instruments and . 61 Coolant
........................................Adding . 546 ....................................Checking . 475
.........................Proper Solution . 546 ...................Temperature Gauge . 77
........Water Temp Hot Message . 77
Crankcase Emissions Control ........................................System . 623
................Cruise Control Indicator . 72 ............Cruise Control Operation . 401
...................................Cup Holders . 214 .............Customer Service Office . 630
........................Customized Settings .94
...............DANGER, Explanation of . iv ...................................Dashboard . 3, 62
..............Daytime Running Lights . 142 .................................Dead Battery . 591
............Defects, Reporting Safety . 632 ..............Defogger, Rear Window . 145 ..............Defrosting the Windows . 231
..Devices that Emit Radio Waves . 628 ....................................Dimensions . 614
.............Dimming the Headlights . 139 Dipstick
..........Automatic Transmission . 549 ..................................Engine Oil . 474
........................Directional Signals . 139 ........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 507
.................................Disc Changer . 253
Index
D
C
II
12/08/03 21:01:56 31TK4640_641
CONTINUED
..............................Economy, Fuel . 476 Electronic Stability Control
............................(ESC) System . 510
..................................Emergencies . 581 .............Battery, Jump Starting . 591 ...........Brake System Indicator . 598
................Changing a Flat Tire . 583 .....Charging System Indicator . 596
..................Checking the Fuses . 600 .......Hazard Warning Flashers . 145
.........If the Engine Wont Start . 588 ......If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck . 609
............................Jump Starting . 591 .....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 595 ...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 597
Manually Opening Fuel Fill .......................................Door . 599
..................Overheated Engine . 593 .......................................Towing . 607
.........................Emergency Brake . 212 ..............Emergency Engine Start . 490
....................Emergency Flashers . 145 ......................Emergency Towing . 607
..........Emergency Trunk Opener . 156 .......................Emissions Controls . 623 ........................Emissions Testing . 626
Engine ............Adding Engine Coolant . 546
....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 77
.........................If It Wont Start . 588 Malfunction Indicator
................................Lamp . 64, 597 .................................Oil Life . 86, 531
........Oil Pressure Indicator . 64, 595
..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 543 ...............................Overheating . 593
............................Specifications . 615
....................Speed Limiter . 492, 497 .............Start/Stop Button . 183, 188
..............................Starting . 487, 489 Starting System
.........................Message . 488, 490 ......Engine Compartment Covers . 542
..............................Engine Coolant . 546 ....Engine Start/Stop Button . 183, 188
......................Ethanol in Gasoline . 469 .Evaporative Emissions Controls . 623
...............................Exhaust Fumes . 57 Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat
........................................Belts by . 18
...Disc Changer Error Messages . 263 .....................Disposal of Used Oil . 546
Doors .....Lock Button, Outer Handle . 176
..........Lockout Prevention . 153, 177 .................Monitor Indicator . 12, 71 ....................Power Door Locks . 151
.Unlock Sensor, Outer Handle . 175 ........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 617
Downshifting, ..............Manual Transmission . 491
....................D-Paddle Shift Mode . 499 ...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5
...........................................Driving . 485 ....................................Economy . 476
Driving Position Memory ........................................System . 170
Dual Temperature and Mode .......................................Control . 232
..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 566
Index IN
D E
X
E
III
13/08/08 17:01:09 31TK4650_642
...................................Fan, Interior . 230 .........................................Features . 225
....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 470 Filters
.........................Dust and Pollen . 566 ...............................................Oil . 544
...........Flashers, Hazard Warning . 145 ...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 583
.....................................Floor Mats . 565 Fluids
..........Automatic Transmission . 549 ..........................................Brake . 553 .........................................Clutch . 554
..............Manual Transmission . 551 ................Windshield Washers . 548
FM Stereo Radio ...................................Reception . 385
.....................................Fog Lights . 143 ........................Four-way Flashers . 145
..............................Front Airbags . 9, 26 ....................................Front Seats . 161 ....................................Adjusting . 161
.....................................Airbags . 9, 26 ..............................Heaters . 202, 204
.................................Ventilation . 204 .................................................Fuel . 468
......................Fill Door and Cap . 470 ...........................................Gauge . 76
.....................Low Fuel Indicator . 73 ................Octane Requirement . 468
...............................Oxygenated . 469 ........................Tank, Filling the . 470
...............................Fuel Economy . 476 .....................Fuses, Checking the . 601
...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 476 .........................................Gasoline . 468 ...........................................Gauge . 76
.....................Low Fuel Indicator . 73 ................Octane Requirement . 468
........................Tank, Refueling . 470 ................Gas Station Procedures . 470
Gauges ...Engine Coolant Temperature . 77
...............................................Fuel . 76 Gearshift Lever Positions
..........Automatic Transmission . 494 ..............Manual Transmission . 491
......................................Glove Box . 216 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
.............................(GVWR) . 483, 614
.......................Halogen Bulbs . 555, 560 ......HandsFreeLink (HFL) . 407, 424
............Hazard Warning Flashers . 145 Hard Disc Drive (HDD),
........................................Playing . 320 .....................................Headlights . 139
........................................Aiming . 555 ............Automatic Lighting Off . 141 ............Automatic Lighting On . 140
.........Daytime Running Lights . 142 ..................High Beam Indicator . 71
.......................Reminder Beeps . 139 ........................Replacing Bulbs . 555
.................................Turning on . 139 .....................................Washers . 138
............................Head Restraints . 162 .............................Heated Mirrors . 169
...........................Heater, Seat . 202, 204 ...............High-Low Beam Switch . 140
.............................Hill Start Assist . 512
Index
H
G
F
IV
12/08/03 21:02:05 31TK4640_643
CONTINUED
HomeLink Universal ................................Transceiver . 404
........Hood, Opening and Closing . 472 ...........................................Horn . 4, 136
...........................Hydraulic Clutch . 554
.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 584 .......................................Jack, Tire . 584
................................Jump Starting . 591
.......Keyless Access Remote . 174, 179 Keyless Access Remote System
...............................Main Switch . 195 ................Keyless Access System . 173
................................................Keys . 147 ........................................Built-In . 201
...Identification Number, Vehicle . 612 Ignition
............................................Keys . 147 .........................................Switch . 150
............Timing Control System . 624 ......................Immobilizer System . 149
.........Important Safety Precautions . 6 ...............Indicators/Messages . 64, 90
......ABS (Anti-Lock Brake) . 66, 508 Blind Spot Information
...................System (BSI) . 75, 521 Brake (Parking and Brake
............................System) . 65, 598 ................Charging System . 65, 596
.............................Cruise Control . 72 .............................Door Open . 12, 71 ...................................Fog Lights . 71 ...................................High Beam . 71
.................................Hot Coolant . 77 ........Key (Immobilizer System) . 65
..............Keyless Access System . 74 .....................................Lights On . 71 ......................................Low Fuel . 73
................Low Oil Pressure . 64, 595 .........Low Tire Pressure/TPMS . 69
...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 597 .................................Seat Belt . 20, 64
.....................Side Airbag Off . 33, 67 .........................................SRS . 32, 67
.................Starting System . 488, 490 ...........................Trunk Open . 12, 71
Turn Signal and Hazard ...................................Warning . 70
........................................VSA Off . 68 .................................VSA System . 68
..................Individual Map Lights . 221 .........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 64
...............................Infant Restraint . 42 ......................................Infant Seats . 42
.........................................LATCH . 47 ..........Tether Anchorage Points . 51
...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 568 .................................Inside Mirror . 167
.............................Inspection, Tire . 571
....................Installing a Child Seat . 46 ..........Tether Anchorage Points . 51
.............................Using LATCH . 47 ............................Instrument Panel . 63
......Instrument Panel Brightness . 143 ...............................Interior Lights . 220
........................................Introduction . i
Index IN
D E
X
I
J
K
V
13/08/08 17:02:58 31TK4650_644
..................................Maintenance . 529 Main Items and Sub
..............................Items . 536, 540 ........................................Minder . 531
Owners Maintenance ...................................Checks . 539
..........................................Safety . 530 Malfunction Indicator
....................................Lamp . 64, 597 ...................Manual Transmission . 491
........Manual Transmission Fluid . 551 ....................................Map Lights . 221
...........Memory, Driving Position . 170 .........................Meters, Gauges . 63, 76
........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 167 ...............Modifying Your Vehicle . 480
.......................................Moonroof . 210
.............Multi-Information Display . 78 ..............................Music by Voice . 334
...................Neutral Gear Position . 496 ..................New Vehicle Break-in . 468
............Normal Shift Speeds . 492, 503 ...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i
...............Numbers, Identification . 612
...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 468 .........................................Odometer . 82
Oil ........................Change, How to . 544 ......................Change, When to . 531 ......................Checking Engine . 474 ..............Pressure Indicator . 64, 595
Selecting Proper Viscosity ..............................Chart . 543, 544
.........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 150 ....ON Mode (Power Mode) . 184, 185
Onboard Refueling Vapor ....................................Recovery . 623
.......................Label, Certification . 612 ...............Lane Change, Signaling . 139
..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 16, 21 ...............................LATCH System . 47
................Lights Control Buttons . 220 Lights
....................Bulb Replacement . 555 .......................................Indicator . 63
.......................................Parking . 139 ..........................Turn Signal . 70, 139
....................................Load Limits . 482 ....LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 150
LOCK VEHICLE OFF ...................(Power Mode) . 184, 185
..............Lockout Prevention . 153, 177 Locks
Anti-theft Steering ...........................Column . 150, 189
........................Childproof Door . 153 ............................Fuel Fill Door . 470
..................................Glove Box . 216 ...............................Power Door . 151
.........................................Trunk . 154 ......Trunk Pass-through Cover . 166
........................Low Coolant Level . 475 .........................Low Fuel Indicator . 73
...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 64, 595 ................................Lower Anchors . 47
...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 614 ...........Luggage, Storing (Cargo) . 481
Index
M
N
L
O
VI
13/08/08 17:03:03 31TK4650_645
CONTINUED
..............................Paddle Shifters . 499 ............Panel Brightness Control . 143
........................Park Gear Position . 495 ...........................................Parking . 506
...............................Parking Brake . 212 Parking Brake and Brake
.................System Indicator . 65, 598 ...............................Parking Lights . 139
..Parking Over Things that Burn . 506
....Passenger Airbag Off Indicator . 34 .............................PGM-FI System . 624
..................Phonetic Modification . 335 ...................................Pollen Filter . 566 ..................................Power Mode . 184
.................ACCESSORY Mode . 185 ...................................ON Mode . 185
....................START Mode . 187, 188
..............VEHICLE OFF Mode . 185 ...............Power Socket Locations . 213
............................Power Windows . 206 .........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 18 .........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11
...Additional Safety Precautions . 19 .....Advice for Pregnant Women . 18
........................Protecting Children . 37 .....................General Guidelines . 37
.......................Protecting Infants . 42 .......Protecting Larger Children . 53
.........Protecting Small Children . 43 Using Child Seats with
.....................................Tethers . 51 .............................Using LATCH . 47
..................Protecting Your Discs . 381
...........................Operating Range . 174 ............................Outside Mirrors . 168
.....................Outside Temperature . 86 ....................Overheating, Engine . 593
....Owners Maintenance Checks . 539 .........................Oxygenated Fuels . 469
...................Radiator Overheating . 593 ...Radio/Disc Sound System . 236, 285
.................Radio Theft Protection . 390 ............................Radio, XM . 246, 299
...................Readiness Codes . 597, 626 ..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 562
........................Rear Seat Armrest . 166
...Rearview Camera and Monitor . 465 ...........................Rearview Mirror . 167
...............Rear Window Defogger . 145 .............Reclining the Seat Backs . 161
Recommended Shift ................................Speeds . 492, 503 ........................................Refueling . 470
.......................Reminder Indicators . 64 Remote, Keyless Access
................................System . 174, 179 ................Remote Audio Controls . 387
.....................Remote Transmitter . 157 Replacement Information
..............Dust and Pollen Filter . 566 ................Engine Oil and Filter . 544
..........................................Fuses . 600 ................................Light Bulbs . 555
........................................Minder . 531 ................................Timing Belt . 554
...........................................Tires . 573 .............................Wiper Blades . 566
Replacing Seat Belts After a ............................................Crash . 23
.............Reporting Safety Defects . 632
Index IN
D E
X
P
R
VII
12/08/03 21:02:21 31TK4640_646
Reserve Tank, Engine ...............................Coolant . 475, 546
......................Reverse Tilt Mirror . 168 ...............................Restraint, Child . 37
..................Reverse Gear Position . 496 ................................Rotation, Tire . 573
..................................Safety Belts . 8, 20 ............Safety Defects, Reporting . 632
.................................Safety Features . 7 ...........................................Airbags . 9
.......................................Seat Belts . 8 .............Safety Labels, Location of . 58
..............................Safety Messages . iii .....................................Seat Belts . 8, 20
...............Additional Information . 20 Automatic Seat Belt
...............................Tensioners . 22 .....................................Cleaning . 564
......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 21 ................................Maintenance . 23
Reminder Indicator and ................................Beeper . 20, 64
...................System Components . 20
...............Use During Pregnancy . 18 ..........................Seat Heaters . 202, 204
......................Seats, Adjusting the . 161 .............................Seat Ventilation . 204 ............................Security System . 395
.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 45 ...Selector Knob (Disc Changer) . 236
..................Sequential Shift Mode . 501 ...............................Serial Number . 612 ..............................Service Minder . 531
...........................Service Manual . 633 .........Service Station Procedures . 470
..........................Setting the Clock . 391 ........................SH-AWD Indicator . 73
...Shift Lever Position Indicators . 494 ........................Shift Lock Release . 497
................................Side Airbags . 9, 30 ........Side Airbag Off Indicator . 33, 67
......................Side Curtain Airbags . 32 .............................Signaling Turns . 139
.....................................Snow Tires . 575 ................................Sound System . 235
Spare Tire ......................................Inflating . 582
....................Specifications . 582, 616 ....................................Spark Plugs . 615
................................Specifications . 614
................................Speed Control . 401 ...................................Speedometer . 76
..........SRS, Additional Information . 24 ...Additional Safety Precautions . 36
.............................Airbag Service . 35 ......Airbag System Components . 24
How the Passenger Airbag Off ......................Indicator Works . 34
How the Side Airbag Off ......................Indicator Works . 33
How the SRS Indicator .......................................Works . 32
How Your Front Airbags .........................................Work . 26
...How Your Side Airbags Work . 30 How Your Side Curtain Airbags
.........................................Work . 32 .............................SRS Indicator . 32, 67
..START (Ignition Key Position) . 150 START Mode
...................(Power Mode) . 184, 185 ...Start/Stop Button, Engine . 183, 188
Index
S
VIII
13/08/08 17:03:08 31TK4650_647
CONTINUED.....................................Tachometer . 76
.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 581 Technical Descriptions
....DOT Tire Quality Grading . 617 .....Emissions Control Systems . 623
Three Way Catalytic .......................Converter . 624, 625
.......................Temperature Gauge . 77 ....................Temperature, Outside . 86
........Temperature, Inside Sensor . 234 ..............Tether Anchorage Points . 51
................Theft Protection, Radio . 390 ..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 625
.........Tighten Fuel Cap Message . 471 ................Tilt the Steering Wheel . 146
..........................Time, Setting the . 391 ....................................Tire Chains . 575
.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 583 ...........................Tire Information . 617
.................................Tire Labeling . 619 Tire Pressure Monitoring
....................System (TPMS) . 514 Low Tire Pressure/TPMS
...........................Indicator . 69, 514 ......................Pressure Monitor . 515
Required Federal ............................Explanation . 621
..............TPMS System Failure . 517 ...............................................Tires . 568
......................Air Pressure . 568, 570 ........................................Chains . 575
.........................Checking Wear . 571 ..........................Compact Spare . 582
......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 617 .Glossary of Tire Terminology . 620
......................................Inflation . 568 ..................................Inspection . 571 ...................................Replacing . 573
......................................Rotating . 573 ................................Service Life . 572
...........................................Snow . 575 ....................Specifications . 574, 616
.......................Traction Devices . 575 ..........................Winter Driving . 575
...................Tools, Tire Changing . 584 Torque Distribution Monitor
...............................(SH-AWD ) . 504 Towing
.....................................A Trailer . 528 ................Emergency Wrecker . 607
...........................................Hook . 609
..............Starting the Engine . 487, 489 ....Check Starting System . 488, 490
In Cold Weather at High ..........................Altitude . 487, 489
................With a Dead Battery . 591 ........Steam Coming from Engine . 593
Steering Wheel ..............................Adjustments . 146
...Anti-theft Column Lock . 150, 189 Steering Wheel
..............Buttons . 387, 401, 407, 425 ...................Stereo Sound System . 235 ....................Storing Your Vehicle . 578
......................................Sun Visors . 217 ........................Sunglasses Holder . 218
Super Handling All-Wheel ...Drive (TM) (SH-AWD ) . 73, 504
....Supplemental Restraint System . 24 ......................................Servicing . 35
...............................SRS Indicator . 32 ...................System Components . 24
..................................Synthetic Oil . 544
Index IN
D E
XT
IX
13/08/08 17:03:13 31TK4650_648
................................Vanity Mirror . 217 .................Vehicle Capacity Load . 482
......................Vehicle Dimensions . 614 VEHICLE OFF Mode
...................(Power Mode) . 184, 185 ....Vehicle Identification Number . 612
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability
....Control (ESC), System . 510 ...............VSA Off Indicator . 68, 510
.......................VSA OFF Switch . 511 ........VSA System Indicator . 68, 510
.............................Vehicle Storage . 578 .................................................VIN . 612
.........................Viscosity, Oil . 543, 544 ...........Voice Control System . 228, 285
............WARNING, Explanation of . iv
.........Warning Labels, Location of . 58 ....................Warranty Coverages . 631
Washer, Windshield ................Fluid Level Message . 548
...................................Operation . 137 ............................Reserve Tank . 548
Wheels .............Adjusting the Steering . 146 ............Alignment and Balance . 573
..........................Compact Spare . 582 ..............................Wrench, Nut . 584
Windows .............................Auto Reverse . 207
................Operating the Power . 206 .........................Rear, Defogger . 145
Windshield .....................................Cleaning . 137 ...................................Defroster . 231
.....................................Washers . 137 Wipers, Windshield
.......................Changing Blades . 566 ...................................Operation . 137 ....................................Worn Tires . 571
.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 607
...........................Traction Devices . 575 Transmission
Checking Fluid Level, ..............................Automatic . 549
Checking Fluid Level, ...................................Manual . 551
..................Fluid Selection . 550, 551 ..............Identification Number . 613 .............Shifting the Automatic . 495
..................Shifting the Manual . 491 .....................................Treadwear . 617
................................Trip Computer . 84 .......................................Trip Meter . 83
..............................................Trunk . 154 ..................Emergency Opener . 156
...............................Opening the . 154 ............................Open Indicator . 71
.............Open Monitor Indicator . 12 ..................................Turn Signals . 139
Unexpected, Taking Care ..........................................of the . 581
....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 617 ........................Unleaded Gasoline . 468
USB Adapter ..................Cable . 266, 275, 356, 367
.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 546
Index
U
V
W
X
12/08/03 21:02:36 31TK4640_649
.............................XM Radio . 246, 299
U.S.:
Index IN
D E
X
X
XI
12/08/03 21:02:39 31TK4640_650
12/07/20 11:52:36 31TK4640_652
Service Information Summary
Gasoline:
Transfer Assembly Fluid:
Rear Differential Fluid:
Fuel Tank Capacity:
Recommended Engine Oil:
Tire Pressure (measured cold):
Brake Fluid:
Manual Transmission Fluid:
Automatic Transmission Fluid:
Spare Tire Pressure:
Capacity:
Premium unleaded gasoline, pump octane number of 91 or higher required (see Fuel Recommendations on page ).
18.5 US gal (70 )
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary replacement (see page ).
Use Acura All-Wheel Drive Fluid (DPSF) only.
SH-AWD differential case 2.67 US qt (2.53 )
SAE 90 or SAE 80W-90 viscosity hypoid gear oil, API service classified GL4 or GL5 only.
Capacity: 2.2 US qt (2.1 )
Acura ATF DW-1 (automatic transmission fluid) (see page ).
4.5 US qt (4.3 )
Oil change capacity (including filter):
API Premium grade 0W-20 detergent oil (see page ).
API Premium grade 5W-20 detergent oil (see page ).
Acura Manual Transmission Fluid preferred, or an SAE 0W-20 or 5W-20 motor oil as a temporary replacement (see page ).
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
34 psi (235 kPa , 2.
Related manuals for Acura TL 2014 Sedan Owner's Manual
Manualsnet FAQs
If you want to find out how the TL Acura works, you can view and download the Acura TL 2014 Sedan Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.
Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Acura TL as well as other Acura manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.
The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Acura TL. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.
The best way to navigate the Acura TL 2014 Sedan Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.
This Acura TL 2014 Sedan Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.
You can download Acura TL 2014 Sedan Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.
To be able to print Acura TL 2014 Sedan Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Acura TL 2014 Sedan Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.